Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles

Grade 11
Active Healthy Lifestyles

Manitoba Physical Education/Health
Education Curriculum Framework
of Outcomes and A Foundation for
Implementation
GRADE 11
ACTIVE HEALTHY LIFESTYLES
Manitoba Physical Education/Health Education

Curriculum Framework of Outcomes and A
Foundation for Implementation
2008
Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth
Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth Cataloguing in Publication Data
613.071 Grade 11 active healthy lifestyles : Manitoba

physical education/health education curriculum
framework of outcomes and a foundation for
implementation
Includes bibliographical references.

ISBN-13: 978-0-7711-4016-7
࿿࿿࿿࿿Àꫨɫ࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Á‫Ⰲﺌ‬࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Â兾ĩ࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿
࿿Ä贲䳻࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Å햼报࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Æ꯸熏࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿
࿿È‫ﮌ‬ᘦ࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿É番㥗࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Êꇆ㹭࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Ë⍚
ඤ凋࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿180Ñì⻚࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Ò遲猠࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Ó頖徲
㋬㳧࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Õ㷲⋱࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Ö萀礫࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿×彌
Ø釰滎࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Ù혀俄࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Ú䈐寽࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿Û侊癗
筦ត࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿࿿ Ý Physical education and training—Manitoba— Curricula. 2.
Health education—Manitoba—Curricula. 3. Physical
education and training—Study and teaching (Secondary)—
Manitoba. 4. Health education (Secondary)— Manitoba. I.
Manitoba. Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth.
Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth

School Programs Division
Winnipeg, Manitoba, Canada
Every effort has been made to acknowledge original sources and to comply with
copyright law. If cases are identified where this has not been done, please
notify Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth. Errors or omissions will be
corrected in a future edition. Sincere thanks to the authors and publishers who
allowed their original material to be used.
All images found in this document are copyright protected and should not be
extracted, accessed, or reproduced for any purpose other than for their
intended educational use in this document.
Any websites referenced in this document are subject to change without notice.
Educators are advised to preview and evaluate websites and online resources
before recommending them for student use.
Print copies of this resource can be purchased from the Manitoba Text
Book Bureau (stock number 80594). The print version of this resource is
accompanied by a CD-ROM that includes a copy of this curriculum
document, along with other policy and support documents. The CD-
ROM can also be purchased separately (stock number 80599). Order
online at <www.mtbb.mb.ca>.
This resource is also available on the Manitoba Education, Citizenship and
Youth website at <www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/cur/physhlth/curriculum.html>.
Ce document est disponible en français.

CONTENTS
Acknowledgements vii
Introduction 1
Purpose 1
Background 1
Document Content and Organization 3
Overview of Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles 7

Framework Overview 9
Key Characteristics from the Framework Reinforced in Grade 11 9
Policy for Implementing Grades 11 and 12 Physical Education/
Health Education 12
Planning for Implementation 21
Guiding Principles 21
Guidelines for Implementation 22
Specific Learning Outcomes 32
Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles—Specific Learning Outcomes 32
Physical Activity Practicum 33
Core Component 34
Implementation Overview 37
Grades 11 and 12 Philosophy for Effective Programming 37
Connections between the General Learning Outcomes and the
Modules 38
Planning for Instruction 43
Planning Guidelines and Tools 43
Active Learning Strategies 43
Assessment and Reporting 45
Purposes of Assessment 46
Determining Course Completion 49
Contents iii
Modules for Physical Activity Practicum and Component 59
Introduction 61
Guide to Reading the Modules and Lessons 61
Module A: Physical Activity Practicum 67
Introduction 69
Lesson 1: Personal Physical Activity Inventory 71
Lesson 2: Managing Risks Related to Physical Activity 79
Lesson 3: Implementing the Safety and Physical Activity Plan 91
Module B: Fitness Management 103
Introduction 105
Lesson 1: Physical Activity for Optimal Health and Fitness 107
Lesson 2: Changing Physical Activity Behaviour 113
Lesson 3: Understanding Your Personal Motivation for
Physical Activity 123
Lesson 4: Addressing Barriers to Physical Activity 137
Lesson 5: Making Physical Activity a Habit 145
Lesson 6: Planning for Physical Fitness 161
Module C: Mental-Emotional Health 185
Introduction 187
Lesson 1: Mental Health, Health Habits, and Exercise 189
Lesson 2: Stress and Body Image 205
Lesson 3: Anxiety and Depression 225
Module D: Social Impact of Sport 237
Introduction 239
Lesson 1: The Roles of Sport 241
Lesson 2: Sport as an Agent for Social Change 251
Lesson 3: Sporting Behaviour 265
Module E: Substance Use and Abuse Prevention 275
Introduction 277
Lesson 1: Legal and Illegal Substances 279
Lesson 2: Stages of Substance Use and Addiction 293
Lesson 3: Risks and Consequences of Substance Use 303
Lesson 4: Advocacy against Substance Use and Abuse 333
iv Grade11ActiveHealthyLifestyles
Appendices 351
Appendix A: Curriculum Map for Grades 11 and 12 Active Healthy
Lifestyles 353
Appendix B: Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles Curriculum Matrix 355
Appendix C: Specific Learning Outcomes for Grade 11 Active Healthy
Lifestyles 359
Appendix D: Planning Guidelines for Physical Education/
Health Education 363
Appendix E: Active Learning Strategies 379
Appendix F: Sample Assessment Tools and Checklists 387
Appendix G: Common Planning Tools and Forms 395
Bibliography 407
Contents v
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth gratefully acknowledges the contributions of the
following individuals in the development of Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles: Manitoba
Physical Education/Health Education Curriculum Framework of Outcomes and A Foundation for
Implementation.
Writer Nick Dyck Physical Education and Health Consultant

Pembina Trails School Division
Content Reviewers Dr. Catherine Casey Faculty of Education
Assistant Professor University of Manitoba

Dr. Shannon Gander Mental Health and Addictions Branch
Policy Analyst Manitoba Health and Healthy Living

Dr. Dean Kreillars
School of Medical Rehabilitation
Professor University of Manitoba
Nicole Laping Youth Community-Based Services
Prevention and Addictions Foundation of Manitoba

Education Consultant
Faralee Wilson Manitoba Physical Education Teachers Association
Schools Physical Activity (MPETA)

Coordinator
Members of the David Bard Consultant
Manitoba Grades Winnipeg School Division

11 and 12 Daniel Bélisle École Saint-Joachim
Physical Education/
Health Education (until June 2007) Division scolaire franco-manitobaine
Development Team Shawna Cochrane- Portage Collegiate Institute
Thomson Portage la Prairie School Division

Demetro Danyluk St. Mary’s Academy
Independent School
Joanne Goodwin Vincent Massey Collegiate

Jason Mateychuk Roseau Valley School
Borderland School Division

John Potter Minnedosa Collegiate
Rolling River School Division

Robert Stanners Collège Louis-Riel
Division scolaire franco-manitobaine

Lynne Syrenne-Habeck Collège Jeanne-Sauvé
Louis Riel School Division
Acknowledgements vii
Members of the Treva Tilston-Jones Murdoch MacKay Collegiate
Manitoba Grades River East Transcona School Division
11 and 12 Physical
Education/ Health Jody Williams Swan Valley Regional Secondary School
Education Swan Valley School Division
Development Team
(Continued) Jamie Wilson Joe A. Ross School
Individual Band Operated School
Opaskwayak Education Authority
Steering Committee Terry Bobychuk Senior Years Representative

(Members as of Seven Oaks School Division
2006/2007 and
Catherine Casey Faculty of Education
2007/2008)
(from September 2007) University of Manitoba
Wendy Cull Middle Years Representative

Kelsey School Division
Nick Dyck Manitoba Physical Education Supervisors’

Association (MPESA)
Ron Hildebrand Manitoba Association of School Superintendents

(until June 2007) (MASS)
Dwight Kearns Early Years Representative

Brandon School Division
Peter Kotyk Manitoba Association of School Trustees (MAST)
Khalid Mahmood Manitoba Association of Parent Councils (MAPC)
Pat McCarthy-Briggs Agencies for School Health (ASH)
Ross Metcalfe Manitoba Association of School Superintendents

(from September 2007) (MASS)
Francine Morin Faculty of Education
(until June 2007) University of Manitoba
Laura Morrison Manitoba Healthy Schools

Healthy Living
Irene Nordheim Council of School Leaders (COSL)
Jacki Nylen Manitoba Physical Education Teachers Association

(from September 2007) (MPETA)
viii Grade11ActiveHealthyLifestyles
Manitoba Education, Jean-Vianney Auclair Bureau de l’éducation française Division
Citizenship and Assistant Deputy Minister Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth
Youth School Lee-Ila Bothe Document Production Services
Programs Division
and Bureau de Coordinator Educational Resources Branch
l’éducation française Jacques Dorge Curriculum Development and Implementation Branch
Division Staff
Acting Director Bureau de l’éducation française Division
Cécile Dufresne Curriculum Development and Implementation Branch
Consultant Bureau de l’éducation française Division

(until February 2007)
Darryl Gervais Development Unit
Coordinator Instruction, Curriculum and Assessment Branch
Surujdai Gorcharan Development Unit
Administrative Assistant Instruction, Curriculum and Assessment Branch

Susan Letkemann Document Production Services
Publications Editor Educational Resources Branch

Janet Long Document Production Services
Desktop Publisher Educational Resources Branch

Anne Longston School Programs Division
Assistant Deputy Minister Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth

Grant McManes Development Unit
Project Co-leader/ Instruction, Curriculum and Assessment Branch

Consultant
(after September 2007)
Aileen Najduch
Instruction, Curriculum and Assessment Branch
Director School Programs Division
Paul Paquin Curriculum Development and Implementation Branch
Consultant Bureau de l’éducation française Division

(after February 2007)
Cyril Parent Document Production Services

Lindsay Walker Document Production Services

Heather Willoughby Development Unit
Project Co-leader/ Instruction, Curriculum and Assessment Branch

Consultant
Acknowledgements ix
INTRODUCTION
Purpose
Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles: Manitoba Physical Education/Health Education Curriculum
Framework of Outcomes and A Foundation for Implementation is a combined Framework
and Implementation document. The purpose of this document is to provide Manitoba
school administrators and teachers with the basis for curriculum planning, teaching,
learning, and assessment.
The print version of Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles is accompanied by a CD-ROM,

which contains a copy of this curriculum document, as well as other policy and
support documents. The curriculum document is also available on the Manitoba
Education, Citizenship and Youth website at
<www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/cur/physhlth/curriculum.html>.
Background
The resources that influenced the direction and content of the Grade 11 Active Healthy
Lifestyles curriculum include the documents cited below. Other resources are cited in the
Bibliography.
Resources Used in Curriculum Document

Reports
Healthy Kids, Healthy Futures All-Party Task Force. Healthy Kids, Healthy Futures: Task Force Report. Winnipeg,
MB: Manitoba Healthy Living, June 2005. Available online at <www.gov.mb.ca/healthykids/>.
Proactive Information Services Inc., and Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth. Helping Clients Make
a Difference: S3 and S4* Physical Education/Health Education Consultation, Final Report. Winnipeg,
MB: Proactive Information Services Inc., June 2006. Available online at
<www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/docs/reports/s3_s4_ph/>.
Departmental Resources
Manitoba Education and Training. Kindergarten to Senior 4* Physical Education/ Health Education: Manitoba
Curriculum Framework of Outcomes for Active Healthy Lifestyles. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education and
Training, 2000. Referred to as the Framework.
0 Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth. Guidelines for Fitness Assessment in Manitoba Schools: A
Resource for Physical Education/Health Education. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education, Citizenship and
Youth, 2004.
1 ---. Implementation of Grades 11 and 12 Physical Education/Health Education: A Policy Document. Winnipeg, MB:
Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth, 2007. Referred to as the Policy Document.
---. OUT-of-Class Safety Handbook: A Resource for Grades 9 to 12 Physical Education/Health Education.
Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth, 2008.
0 ---. Senior 1 and Senior 2* Physical Education/Health Education: A Foundation for Implementation. Winnipeg, MB:
Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth, 2004.
These departmental resources are available online at <www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/cur/physhlth/curriculum.html>.
Safety-Related Resources
Hanna, Glenda, Quest Research and Consulting Inc., and YouthSafe Outdoors (Association). YouthSafe Manitoba:
School Field Trip Resource. Edmonton, AB: Quest Research and Consulting, 2004.
0 Manitoba Physical Education Teachers Association (MPETA), et al. Safety Guidelines for Physical Activity
in Manitoba Schools. Winnipeg, MB: MPETA, 2000. Available online at
<www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/docs/support/pehe_safety/>.
1 In June 2006 the terms Grade 9, 10, 11, 12 were reinstated to replace Senior 1, 2, 3, 4 high school designations.
5888 These resources are available on the CD-ROM that accompanies this document.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Introduction 1
Research and Consultations
Healthy Kids, Healthy Futures: Task Force Report identifies 47 recommendations to improve
the health and well-being of Manitoba’s children and youth, which have been accepted by
government. Three of these recommendations address high school physical education/
health education (PE/HE). The report recommends that
the provincial government not just recommend, but mandate the current amount
of time that [Grades 9 and 10] students spend in [PE/HE] classes. Schools can
choose to meet the mandated times within the timetable, or use an out-of-
classroom model for up to 20 hours of the mandated 110 hours. This should be
implemented before the fall of 2007.
. . . develop a [PE/HE] curriculum for [Grades 11 and 12] students. This should
be implemented before the fall of 2008.
. . . require all [Grades 11 and 12] students to complete two [PE/HE] credits for
graduation, in addition to the two credits required in [Grades 9 and 10].
Schools may choose to include the [PE/HE] credits in the timetable or use an
out-of-classroom model. (24–25)
Furthermore, the Healthy Kids, Healthy Futures: Task Force Report encourages parents,*
students, and schools to “work together to determine what will work best in their
community to help youth take greater ownership of their own physical fitness,
promote the discovery of activities suited to their own individual interests, and
encourage active lifestyles that persist into their futures” (25).
The choice of using an OUT-of-class model was provided to help minimize the time
students spend away from academic studies and to give families, students, and schools
more options in their efforts to increase physical activity among young people. As well,
local recreation and sports-related organizations are encouraged to explore how
nearby schools and community facilities could be jointly used.
The development of the Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles curriculum was also guided
by research and consultations. As reported in Helping Clients Make a Difference: S3 and S4
Physical Education/Health Education Consultation, Final Report (4) , the delivery model most
favoured by students and educators was a flexible delivery model that would allow
schools and/or students to choose different combinations of IN-class and OUT-of-class
time to achieve credits. This flexibility was considered important since resources such as
facilities, equipment, staffing, and timetabling challenges vary from school to school.
__________
23 In this document the term parents refers to both parents and guardians and is used with the recognition that in some
cases only one parent may be involved in a child’s education.
_____________________________________________________________________________
2 Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles
Policy for Grades 11 and 12 PE/HE
In April 2007 Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth released Implementation of

Grades 11 and 12 Physical Education/Health Education: A Policy Document. This Policy
Document serves as the basis for the development of, and provides direction for the
implementation of, the Grades 11 and 12 PE/HE curricula. A development team
composed of Manitoba educators was formed to work in collaboration with Manitoba
Education, Citizenship and Youth to produce the Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles
curriculum.
Kindergarten to Senior 4 Physical Education/ Health Education: Manitoba Curriculum

Framework of Outcomes for Active Healthy Lifestyles (the Framework) identifies the five
general learning outcomes and provides the basis for teaching, learning, and assessment
in PE/HE for all grades. Because the Framework identifies the specific learning outcomes
only for Kindergarten to Grade 10, this Grade 11 Active Health Lifestyles document includes
new information related to specific learning outcomes and guidelines for implementation
specifically for Grade 11.
Document Content and Organization
Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles contains the following sections:

5888 Introduction: The Introduction outlines the purpose, background, and content
and organization of this document.
5889 Overview of Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles: This section gives an overview
of the following:
5888 Framework Overview: This section contains key information from the
Framework that pertains to Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles. It also contains the
new policy information related to mandating Grades 11 and 12 PE/HE, including
a discussion of graduation requirements, potentially sensitive content,
involvement of parents, families, and communities, students with exceptional
learning needs and/or special health care needs, and safety and liability.
5889 Planning for Implementation: This section outlines the guiding principles,
requirements, and guidelines for implementing Grade 11 Active Healthy
Lifestyles, based on the Policy Document, for the three PE/HE components:
Physical Activity Practicum, Core Component, and Flexible Delivery Component.
5890 Specific Learning Outcomes: The specific learning outcomes
identified for Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles are presented by module
in this section. Specific learning outcomes drive instruction and assessment
for all students.
5891 Implementation Overview: This section discusses the philosophy for
effective programming in Grades 11 and 12 PE/HE and outlines how the Grade
11 Active Healthy Lifestyles curriculum is connected to each of the general
learning outcomes identified in the Framework.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Introduction 3
23 Planning for Instruction: This section refers to general information on planning
for instruction that appears in the Overview of Senior 1 and Senior 2 [Grades 9
and 10] Physical Education/Health Education: A Foundation for Implementation but
also applies to Grades 11 and 12 PE/HE. More detailed information is provided
in Appendix D: Planning Guidelines for Physical Education/Health Education.
24 Assessment and Reporting: This section identifies how students will be graded for
completion of the Grades 11 and 12 PE/HE courses using complete/incomplete
designations. It also discusses the purposes of assessment and provides
suggestions for teachers to establish criteria for the compulsory personal fitness
portfolio, as well as suggestions on how teachers could assess student achievement
of the learning outcomes in the Core Component modules.
24 Modules for Physical Activity Practicum and Core Component: This section contains
the modules for the Physical Activity Practicum and the Core Component of this
curriculum:
23 Module A: Physical Activity Practicum
24 Module B: Fitness Management
25 Module C: Mental-Emotional Health
26 Module D: Social Impact of Sport
27 Module E: Substance Use and Abuse Prevention
The modules are units of instruction developed for a specific strand and/or component of
the curriculum. Each module presents lessons that identify the specific learning
outcomes, key understandings, and essential questions, provide background information,
offer suggestions for instruction/assessment, and present references to assist teachers
with planning for instruction. Many references are websites, which are hyperlinked on
the CD-ROM and online versions of the document. Resources Masters (RMs) are included
at the end of most lessons. Teachers may use the sample lessons and/or adjust them as
locally determined. All modules are available in Word format.
5888 Appendices: The following appendices provide additional information and

tools for planning, teaching, and assessment:
5888 Appendix A: Curriculum Map for Grade 11 and Grade 12 Healthy
Active Lifestyles
5889 Appendix B: Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles Curriculum Matrix
5890 Appendix C: Specific Learning Outcomes for Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles
5891 Appendix D: Planning Guidelines for Physical Education/Health Education
5892 Appendix E: Active Learning Strategies
5893 Appendix F: Sample Assessment Tools and Checklists
5894 Appendix G: Common Planning Tools and Forms
_____________________________________________________________________________
23 Bibliography: The print and online resources used in developing this document are
cited in the Bibliography.
24 CD-ROM: The CD-ROM that accompanies this document contains a copy of Grade
11 Active Healthy Lifestyles, along with other policy and support documents that
apply to this curriculum.
NOTE ABOUT COPYRIGHT

Please note that this document contains copyright-protected materials (images and text) that
have been reproduced or adapted from a variety of other sources. Manitoba Education,
Citizenship and Youth has obtained permission to use these materials in this document and has
made every effort to acknowledge the original sources. These materials should not be
extracted, accessed, reproduced, or adapted for any purpose other than for their intended
educational use in this document.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Introduction 5
OVERVIEW OF GRADE 11
ACTIVE HEALTHY LIFESTYLES
Framework Overview
Planning for Implementation
Specific Learning Outcomes
Implementation Overview
Planning for Instruction
Assessment and Reporting

OVERVIEW OF GRADE 11 ACTIVE HEALTHY LIFESTYLES
Framework Overview
The Framework was the basis for the development of the Grade 11 Active Healthy
Lifestyles curriculum. This Framework Overview highlights key characteristics from the
Framework that are reinforced in Grade 11, as well as changes to address the policy for
implementing Grades 11 and 12 PE/HE.
Key Characteristics from the Framework Reinforced in Grade 11
The Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles curriculum continues to support the vision
and aim identified for Kindergarten to Grade 12 PE/HE in the Framework:
5888 Vision: The vision is physically active and healthy lifestyles for all students.
5889 Aim: The aim is to provide students with planned and balanced
programming to develop the knowledge, skills, and attitudes for physically
active and healthy lifestyles. (3)
As highlighted in the Framework,

The Centres for Disease Control and Prevention (1997), supported by the Canadian
Fitness and Lifestyle Research Institute, identify the significant behaviours that
contribute to today’s major health issues:
23 inadequate physical activity
24 unhealthy dietary behaviours
25 drug use, including alcohol and tobacco
26 sexual behaviours that result in sexually transmitted diseases/infections and
unintended pregnancies
27 behaviours that result in intentional and unintentional injuries (5)
The Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles curriculum also addresses these five major health
risk areas for children and youth.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Overview 9
The Conceptual Framework
The content of both subject areas, PE and HE, is integrated and organized within five
interrelated general learning outcomes, as illustrated in the following Conceptual
Framework.
__________
23Source: Manitoba Education and Training. Kindergarten to Senior 4 Physical Education/Health Education: Manitoba
Curriculum Framework of Outcomes for Active Healthy Lifestyles. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education and Training, 2000. 21.
This Venn diagram captures many of the key characteristics and principles related to
PE/HE. For example, PE/HE builds on the foundation skill areas (i.e., literacy and
communication, human relations, problem solving, and technology), as well as on the
elements for integration (i.e., curriculum integration, human diversity, sustainable
development, anti-racist/anti-bias education, resource-based learning, differentiated
instruction, Aboriginal perspectives, gender fairness, appropriate age portrayals). The
diagram shows how the two subject areas PE and HE are connected through the five
general learning outcomes. The curriculum focus is student-centred, with each student
learning the knowledge, skills, and attitudes for a physically active and healthy lifestyle.
The five general learning outcomes and attitude indicators identified in the Framework are
addressed in PE/HE across all grades from Kindergarten to Grade 12. Refer to the
following chart for the descriptions of each general learning outcome and the
corresponding attitude indicators.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Kindergarten to Grade 12 Physical Education/Health Education
General Learning Outcomes and Attitude Indicators*
General Learning Outcomes Attitude Indicators
1 Movement 1.1 Show a willingness to participate in a variety of
physical activities.
The student will demonstrate
1.2 Express enjoyment in a variety of movement
competency in selected movement
experiences.
skills, and knowledge of movement
development and physical activities 1.3 Appreciate that time, commitment, and practice
with respect to different types of learning are required for skill development.
experiences, environments, and cultures. 1.4 Appreciate the aesthetic and athletic values of
movement.
1.5 Appreciate and respect diversity while participating
in physical activity.
1.6 Appreciate and respect the natural environment
while participating in physical activity.
2 Fitness Management 2.1 Show an interest in and responsibility for personal
fitness.
The student will demonstrate the ability
Specific Learning Outcomes 2.2 Appreciate the role and contribution of regular
to develop and follow a personal fitness
participation in physical activity for health and
plan for lifelong physical activity and
fitness.
well-being.
2.3 Show respect and acceptance for physical and
performance limitations of self and others.
3 Safety 3.1 Show respect for safety of self and others.
3.2 Show responsibility in following rules and
The student will demonstrate safe and
regulations in dealing with safety of self and
responsible behaviours to manage risks
others.
and prevent injuries in physical activity
participation and in daily living.
4 Personal and Social Management 4.1 Show a positive attitude toward learning, growth,
and personal health.
The student will demonstrate the
4.2 Be sensitive to the needs and abilities of others.
ability to develop self-
understanding, to make health- 4.3 Demonstrate personal responsibility in daily work
enhancing decisions, to work and play.
cooperatively and fairly with others, 4.4 Show a willingness to play fairly and work
and to build positive relationships with others. cooperatively/collaboratively with others.
4.5 Show a positive attitude toward change.
4.6 Enjoy participation and learning.
5 Healthy Lifestyle Practices 5.1 Appreciate and value the benefits of healthy
lifestyle practices for a healthy body.
The student will demonstrate the
5.2 Appreciate the importance of making health-
ability to make informed decisions for
enhancing decisions in daily living.
healthy living related to personal
health practices, active living, healthy 5.3 Appreciate the responsibilities and commitment
nutritional practices, substance use associated with developing healthy relationships.
and abuse, and human sexuality.
__________
23 Source: Manitoba Education and Training. Kindergarten to Senior 4 Physical Education/Health Education: Manitoba Curriculum
Framework of Outcomes for Active Healthy Lifestyles. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education and Training, 2000.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Overview 11
The Curriculum Map
In the Framework, a Curriculum Map (20) identifies all the strands that are addressed in all
or some of the grades. As the Grades 11 and 12 curricula were developed, key strand areas
were selected and specific modules were developed to expand on the learning outcomes
identified for Grade 9 and/or Grade 10. For example, the Substance Use and Abuse
Prevention strand was developed further in Grade 11 to build on the knowledge, skills,
and attitudes learned in previous grades.
New topics were also chosen for Grade 11 that connected to existing strands. For example,
Module D: Social Impact of Sport is a link to and an extension of the Social Development
strand. To see how the Grades 11 and 12 curricula connect with the strands or topics in the
Curriculum Map presented in the Framework, refer to Appendix A: Curriculum Map for
Grade 11 and Grade 12 Active Healthy Lifestyles at the end of this document. (The strands
that appear in CAPS are addressed in both grades or only in one grade, as specified.)
Policy for Implementing Grades 11 and 12 Physical Education/Health

Education
The information from the Framework that required updating for Grades 11 and 12 PE/HE
relates to the following areas:
5888 graduation requirements
5889 potentially sensitive content
5890 involvement of parents, families, and communities
5891 students with exceptional learning needs and/or special health care needs
5892 safety and liability
These areas are addressed below.
Graduation Requirements
Physical education/health education (PE/HE) is a compulsory subject area from Grades 9

to 12, effective September 2008. In 2008/2009, students are required to graduate with a
minimum of 29 credits, which must include three PE/HE credits. Beginning in 2009/2010,
students are required to graduate with a minimum of 30 credits, which must include four
PE/HE credits.
Grades 11 and 12 students will be graded for completion of courses using

complete/incomplete designations rather than percentages. Grades 11 and 12
PE/HE credits will not be compulsory for Mature Student graduation.
_____________________________________________________________________________
The following chart indicates the timeline for phasing in the PE/HE credits.
Timeline for Phasing in PE/HE Credits

Year Regulation
2008/2009 Students will be required to graduate with a minimum of 29 credits, which must
Transition Year include three PE/HE credits (i.e., 10F, 20F, and 40F credits).
2009/2010 Students will be required to graduate with a minimum of 30 credits, which must
include four PE/HE credits (i.e., 10F, 20F, 30F, and 40F credits).
For more information or updates on graduation requirements, refer to the Department’s

website at <www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/policy/grad_require.html>.
Potentially Sensitive Content
The Framework identifies the following content areas as potentially sensitive:

23 human sexuality
24 substance use and abuse prevention
25 personal safety (i.e., sexual exploitation/assault)
Content and issues related to the learning outcomes specific to these topics may be
potentially sensitive for some students and their parents/families and/or communities.
This sensitivity may be based on family, religious, and/or cultural values. Potentially
sensitive
P ARENTAL O PTION
content must be treated in ways that are
appropriate for the local school and community
A parental option means that parents
context. These areas require school divisions to use
may choose a school-based or
a planning process (that includes parental alternative delivery of potentially
involvement) to determine programming details sensitive content (i.e., human sexuality,
and establish local policy and procedures. Before substance use and abuse prevention,
implementation, teachers are required to check with and personal safety). Parents have the
the school administration for school and school right to opt for alternative delivery (e.g.,
home, professional counselling) for their
division guidelines and procedures related to depth
child where the content is in conflict
and breadth of content, choice of learning resources, with family, religious, and/or cultural
assessment and reporting procedures, and values.
providing a parental option.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Overview 13
In the Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles curriculum there also are specific learning
outcomes that are not considered sensitive but should be treated with sensitivity. These
learning outcomes relate to topics such as loss and grief, diversity related to individuals,
families, and cultures, healthy weight, body image, dress, and personal hygiene. Teachers
are required to follow local guidelines developed for content that requires sensitive
treatment.
For information on the decision areas to assist schools/divisions in establishing their

policy and procedures, refer to the chart Potential Decision Areas for School/Division
Planning provided in Appendix G: Common Planning Tools and Forms at the end of
this document.
Involvement of Parents, Families, and Communities
The Framework “encourages parents, families, and communities to work closely with
educators in areas such as promotion of health, safety, and physical activity” (9).
Implementation of the Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles curriculum includes an OUT-
of-class delivery model whereby parents will be involved with the pre- and post-sign-off
process. Pre- and Post-Sign-off Forms must be completed prior to students’ participation
in the physical activity practicum and upon its completion.
The Policy Document states:

Parents, students, and schools are encouraged to work together to determine what
will work best in their specific situations to help young people take ownership of
their own physical fitness. By doing so, they will discover interesting, rewarding
activities that help them establish active lifestyles that will persist into their
futures . . . . Local recreation and sports-related organizations are also encouraged to
explore how nearby school and community facilities could be jointly used. (15)
The roles and responsibilities of students and parents, as outlined in the Policy Document,
are as follows.
_____________________________________________________________________________
ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES*
Students: Roles and Responsibilities
5888 Discuss with parents/guardians and provide the school with a completed and
signed copy of the Pre-Sign-off Form. The form requires the signature of a parent/guardian
if the student is under the age of 18, or the student’s signature if he or she is 18 or older.
In some circumstances, parents/guardians may be required to sign for students who are 18
or older (e.g., students with severe disabilities).
5889 Indicate to the school, prior to commencing the activities and at the time specified
by the school, their intention to participate in activities that contribute to their personal
fitness plan and are consistent with school/division policy and risk-management measures for
the purpose of obtaining a PE/HE credit.
5890 Participate in the OUT-of-class physical activities as part of their personal fitness
plan towards the completion of their physical activity practicum. Track the hours, and
complete the sign-off process as per school and/or division requirements.
5891 Provide the school with pertinent documentation that will be used by the school for
evaluation purposes (e.g., fitness plan, activity log . . .).
5892 Assume, along with parents/guardians, responsibility for safety. Students should
discuss concerns related to the selected physical activity with their parents/guardians and,
together, they should exercise discretion and be aware of safety issues and the appropriate
level of instruction and/or supervision before deciding to participate in the physical activity.
Parents/Guardians: Roles and Responsibilities

23 Exercise discretion, be aware of safety issues and the recommended level of supervision,
and discuss with the school and student any concerns about the nature of the activity.
24 Assume responsibility for monitoring safety. Before making physical activity choice(s),
parents/guardians should be aware of safety issues, such as staffing qualifications, child
abuse registry policy, and community organization’s or group’s liability insurance coverage.
25 Approve OUT-of-class activity, taking into consideration the general state of health of the
student, information on risk, safety, school division policy, the educational and physical
benefit to the student, and costs, if applicable.
26 Complete paperwork and provide Parent/Guardian Pre- and Post-Sign-off Forms for the
selected activity and for the documentation provided to the school for evaluation purposes
(e.g., physical activity log). Students who are 18 years of age or older are required to
provide documentation for evaluation purposes.
__________
5888 Source: Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth. Implementation of Grades 11 and 12 Physical
Education/Health
Education: A Policy Document. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth, 2007. 15–16.
For more information on parental involvement and consent forms for the OUT-of-class
delivery, refer to OUT-of-Class Safety Handbook (Manitoba Education, Citizenship and
Youth).
_____________________________________________________________________________
Overview 15
Students with Exceptional Learning Needs and/or Special Health Care Needs
School divisions are responsible for

establishing local policy and procedures
within the context of the provincial STUDENT WITH EXCEPTIONAL LEARNING
policies related to students with NEEDS
exceptional learning needs and/or A student who requires specialized services or
special health care needs. Consideration programming when deemed necessary by the in-
for students with exceptional learning school team because of exceptional learning,
social/emotional, behavioural, sensory, physical,
needs is an essential component of an
cognitive/intellectual, communication, academic,
inclusionary, learner-centred approach. or special health care needs that affect his or her
PE/HE programming may necessitate ability to meet learning outcomes (Manitoba
various changes in the form of Education, Citizenship and Youth, Appropriate
modifications, adaptations, and/or Educational Programming in Manitoba:
accommodations to support a student Standards for Student Services 28).
with exceptional learning needs.
As indicated in the Framework (12–13), school divisions should include the following
when establishing local policy and procedures for students with special health care needs
that limit participation in PE/HE:
23 Establish definition for short-term and long-term absence, considering scheduling
implications (e.g., may depend on the number of classes per week or cycle).
24 Require notification from parents for short-term injuries/special health care needs.
25 Require a medical certificate for students with special health care needs that limit or
prohibit participation in physical activity for a longer term (e.g., more than two
weeks).
26 Seek out medical information to include in the child’s individual health care plan,
where appropriate.
27 Establish a means of communication for seeking further information or direction
related to policy and supports for students with special health care needs (e.g.,
contact divisional student service administrator).
28 Provide adaptations where possible.
29 Refer to any available medical information (e.g., a student’s individual health care
plan) when planning appropriate adaptations.
30 Follow regular grading practices and reporting procedures when students with special
health care needs are expected to achieve the student learning outcomes, with or
without adaptations.
_____________________________________________________________________________
At the Senior Years, four credits of PE/HE are compulsory. Where a student’s temporary
physical limitations and/or special health care needs prohibits him or her from
participating in physical activity, it may be possible, depending on timetabling and
scheduling, to reschedule the credit to another semester or year. In certain cases, it may be
possible to apply accommodation procedures for students with special health care needs.
For example, during the last semester of Grade 12, student learning outcomes could be
adjusted to accommodate a student who has sustained an injury that limits the
achievement of some physical skill-based outcomes.
IN-CLASS
IN refers to IN-class
instructional time that is
teacher-directed and based on
learning outcomes from the
curriculum. This class time is
timetabled as part of the
instructional day, and students
are required to attend.
Where none of the above options is possible, and in exceptional circumstances where the
PE/HE credit cannot be obtained, the credit must be substituted from another subject
area. In such a case, medical documentation is necessary to explain the substitution when
recording student marks and credits locally.
For more information on these options, refer to Summary of Options for Students with
Exceptional Learning Needs and Special Health Care Needs provided in Appendix G:
Common Planning Tools and Forms at the end of this document. Also refer to Appropriate
Educational Programming in Manitoba: Standards for Student Services (Manitoba Education,
Citizenship and Youth), available online at <www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/specedu/aep/>.
Safety and Liability

Safety is of particular concern in planning and implementing PE/HE. The primary
responsibility and legal liability for ensuring safe practices for school-based activities rests
with the school division and its employees. Refer to OUT-of-Class Safety Handbook (12–15).
IN-Class Delivery
For school-based activities that occur IN-class, schools

must develop safe routines and procedures, and teachers
need to be knowledgeable of the best safety practices,
whether teaching, learning, and assessment take place in
the classroom, gymnasium, playground, or alternative
environments. Teachers responsible for providing a wide
variety of challenging movement experiences in
physically active settings must anticipate hazards and
minimize the risk inherent in physical activity. Expertise
in physical activity management is essential. For some
specific physical activities/programming, such as
aquatics, it is recommended that certified training be required.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Overview 17
The Framework states:
Sections 86, 87, and [90] of The Public Schools Act address exemption from liability
in areas of physical education, and may provide some degree of exemption from
liability and negligence.
However, it is important that school divisions be aware that it is their primary

responsibility for ensuring safe practices when planning and implementing
[school-based activities].
In several litigations resulting from students being injured during physical

education classes, Canadian courts have demonstrated a clear departure from “the
careful and prudent parent” standard of care when assessing teacher negligence,
adopting instead a “professional” standard of care. (15)
The Supreme Court of Canada has said that to determine whether a physical education
teacher has not been negligent or in breach of the necessary and appropriate standard
of care, the following criteria, identified in YouthSafe Manitoba, must be considered:
5888 Is the activity sanctioned by the school administration and school authority?
5889 Is the activity suitable to the age, mental and physical condition of
the participant(s)?
5890 Have students been informed of the risks and responsibilities (e.g.,
safety procedures, behaviour expectations and consequences) of
participation?
5891 Have the participants been progressively taught and coached to perform the
activity properly and to identify and manage the risks inherent in the activity and
environment?
5892 Is the equipment adequate and suitable for the activity?
5893 Is the activity being supervised properly for the inherent risk involved?
(Hanna, Quest Research and Consulting Inc., and YouthSafe Outdoors, Safety
First 7–8)
Schools continue to use the following resources when developing or revising local policy
and procedures, as well as when obtaining information related to equipment, facilities,
supervision, teaching progressions, and risk management:
23 Safety Guidelines for Physical Activity in Manitoba Schools (Manitoba Physical
Education Teachers Association, et al.)
24 YouthSafe Manitoba: School Field Trip Resource (Hanna, Quest Research and Consulting
Inc., and YouthSafe Outdoors)
_____________________________________________________________________________
OUT-of-Class Delivery
For the purposes of implementing

the OUT-of-class delivery model, OUT-OF-CLASS
physical activities are defined in the OUT refers to OUT-of-class time that is student-
following two categories because directed and based on learning outcomes from the
the safety rules and regulations are curriculum that promote participation in physical
different for each (see OUT-of-Class activity. The OUT-of-class delivery option will require
Safety Handbook, Glossary of Terms): teacher and parent/guardian sign-off.
5888 School-based activities: The OUT-of-class time may include physical

activities that occur
School-based activities that may
be selected for the OUT-of-class 0 in school with teacher supervision (e.g.,
intramurals, interschool sports, fitness workouts)
component of PE/HE are
but not during instructional class time
organized by the
1 outside of the school or off school property, and
school/division and include without direct supervision by a certified teacher or
activities that do not occur as other person employed by or under contract with
part of the scheduled class time, a school division
such as sports teams,
intramurals, clubs, field trips, and others. Note that the safety rules governing
school-based activities for OUT-of class are the same for IN-class.
0 Non-school-based activities: Non-school-based activities are home-, community- or
independently based activities that are not directly organized by the school or school
division, such as community sports, classes and clubs, and exercising at home. Note
that the safety rules governing non-school-based activities for OUT-of class are
different than for IN-class.
For non-school-based activities as part of the OUT-of-class delivery model, different rules
apply as compared to school-based activities. For OUT-of-class activities that are not
organized by the school, the primary responsibility and legal liability for ensuring safe
practices rests with the students, parents, and community organizations that organize
and provide the coaches/instructors for the activity.
Schools and school divisions are required to develop a risk-management policy related to
the OUT-of-class physical activity practicum, as well as provide risk-management
measures and a teacher and parent/guardian sign-off process that aligns with
government policy.
Determining eligibility of physical activities that students may include for the OUT-of-
class physical activity practicum is a local decision. Certain high-risk activities that are
inherently dangerous may be prohibited by the school/division and will not be eligible
for credit under any circumstances. This policy might also require that certain activities
(e.g., trampolining) that are known to be associated with a higher rate of injury when
unsupervised be directly supervised by a qualified instructor or coach to be eligible for
credit. Other risk factors, conditions, or exceptional circumstances may also need to be
considered prior to acceptance.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Overview 19
A Physical Activity Inventory (RM 3–PA: Physical Activity Inventory) is provided in this
document to help schools/divisions develop their eligible activities list. If students choose
an activity that is not included in the eligible activities list, this activity will need to be
approved by the school/division according to the process outlined in its policy. The
school division has the right to prohibit inclusion of a high-risk physical activity as part of
a physical activity plan and/or log.
For information on developing local policy and procedures, sample Parent Declaration and
Consent Forms, Physical Activity Safety Checklists, glossary of terms, criteria established
by the Supreme Court of Canada to determine the necessary and appropriate standard of
care within the context of physical education for non-school-based activities, refer to OUT-
of-Class Safety Handbook, available online at
_____________________________________________________________________________
Planning for Implementation
Implementation of Grades 11 and 12 Physical Education/Health Education: A Policy Document

(Policy Document) outlines guiding principles (see page 4) and provides information on the
curriculum design and the IN-class and OUT-of-class delivery model (see page 9) that
schools must be aware of before planning for implementation.
Guiding Principles
The guiding principles were developed for Grades 11 and 12 PE/HE based on information
collected from research, stakeholders, and educational partners to serve as a foundation
for supporting the development and future implementation of Grades 11 and 12 PE/HE.
The guiding principles outlined in the Policy Document include the following.
GUIDING PRINCIPLES*
0 Develop learning outcomes that align with the K–12 PE/HE Framework to maintain the
vision and integrity of this [Policy Document].
1 Encourage youth to take greater ownership of their physical fitness and become involved
in physical activities suited to their own individual interests and abilities.
2 Involve parents/guardians/schools/community in a supportive and complementary role to
build positive values and attitudes.
3 Provide schools with flexibility in determining the best delivery model depending on
local resources.
4 Provide variety and choice of activities to students through an IN-class and OUT-of-
class delivery model.
5 Allow for schools and students/parents/guardians to determine how the learning outcomes
of the curriculum will be achieved, that is, through a teacher-directed delivery model during
IN-class time and a student-directed model as part of the OUT-of-class time.
6 Ensure clarity of roles and responsibilities of students, parents/guardians, school
administrators, teachers, school divisions, and Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth.
__________
0 Source: Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth. Implementation of Grades 11 and 12 Physical Education/Health
Education: A Policy Document. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth, 2007. 4.
As schools begin and continue to implement the Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles
curriculum, the intent of the flexible delivery model is to ensure that variety and choice of
physical activities is offered to students to accommodate personal factors such as interest,
accessibility, and ability, considering local resources.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Overview 21
Guidelines for Implementation
When planning for implementation, consider the following four steps:

0 Choose an implementation model.
1 Develop an OUT-of-class safety policy.
2 Develop a pre- and post-sign-off process.
3 Establish evaluation and reporting procedures.
A discussion of each step follows. Guidelines are suggested for each identified step to
address the requirements and guiding principles identified in the Policy Document.
5888 Choose an Implementation Model

Schools will implement the Grades 11 and 12 PE/HE curriculum based on the
following Implementation Model.
____________________________________________________________________________
IMPLEMENTATION MODEL*
____________________________________________________________________________
__________
_____________________________________________________________________________
The curriculum learning outcomes are achievable through an IN-class and/or an OUT-of-
class delivery model. Schools may choose the proportion of IN-class and OUT-of-class
time for the courses they offer based on local priorities and preferences, while ensuring
alignment with minimum requirements related to this model. The delivery model must
include an IN-class component that must be a minimum of 25% of IN-class time. It must
also include a physical activity practicum (whether or not it is delivered IN- or OUT-of-
class), which must be a minimum of 50% and up to a maximum of 75% of time.
The Implementation Model is made up of three components, as described below:

256Core Component: This component refers to the minimum of 25% of IN-class time
(approximately 30 hours) that must be teacher-directed. This component focuses on
health and personal planning and contains specific learning outcomes organized into
four units of instruction called modules. The Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles Core
Component modules are: Module B: Fitness Management, Module C: Mental-
Emotional Health, Module D: Social Impact of Sport, and Module E: Substance Use
and Abuse Prevention. Each module aligns with one or more of the five general
learning outcomes.
257Physical Activity (PA) Practicum: A minimum of 50% (i.e., 55 hours) is required for
the physical activity practicum, which contains specific learning outcomes that focus
on safe participation in physical activity. This may be achieved through IN-class,
OUT-of-class, or a combination of IN-class and OUT-of-class time. Therefore, schools
could choose to offer 100% IN-class time, which would include a minimum of 50%
physical activity practicum that would occur in class or in school-supervised activities.
Module A: Physical Activity Practicum contains suggestions and tools for getting
started on and implementing the physical activity plan that may be useful for IN-class
or OUT-of-class delivery. The primary purpose of the physical activity practicum is to
allow students to choose, with teacher guidance, physical activities that they enjoy to
address health-related fitness components over a period of time, with a primary
emphasis on cardiorespiratory endurance.
Eligible physical activities for the physical activity practicum, particularly for the
student-directed OUT-of-class time, must
256contain a minimum of 55 hours of moderate to vigorous physical activity that
contributes to cardiorespiratory endurance (heart, lungs, circulatory system)
plus one or more of the other health-related fitness components (muscular
strength, muscular endurance, and flexibility)
257be safe, ethical, and age/developmentally appropriate
258address risk-management measures based on Safety Guidelines for Physical
Activity in Manitoba Schools and YouthSafe Manitoba: School Field Trip Resource, and
require special parental permission
259require students to submit a personal fitness portfolio containing elements such as
a fitness plan, a physical activity log, or journal entries
260include a teacher and parent/guardian pre- and post-sign-off process
_____________________________________________________________________________
Overview 23
0 Flexible Delivery Component: Schools have the choice or flexibility to expand the time to
address the learning outcomes identified for the Core Component or for the Physical
Activity Practicum. It allows up to 25% of the time to be spent exploring selected areas of
interest or specialization, either by the class, through an increase in the IN-class time, or by
individual students, through an increase in OUT-of-class time, depending on local
resources and needs. There is opportunity to increase the depth or breadth of each
strand/module. Learning outcomes are teacher- or student-developed.
The time for the Flexible Delivery Component of the curriculum can be used in a
variety of ways. Some examples follow:
0 Increase time for the IN-class Physical Activity Practicum.
1 Increase time for the OUT-of-class Physical Activity Practicum.
2 Increase time for one or more of the Core Component modules to allow teachers
more IN-class time for in-depth study.
3 Increase time for one or more of the Core Component modules to allow students
more OUT-of-class time for in-depth study.
4 Allow IN- or OUT-of-class time for teachers or students to expand on a topic that
connects with one or more of the modules from the Core Component or the
Physical Activity Practicum. Some examples are suggested below:
– Module A: Physical Activity Practicum could include opportunities for
alternative pursuits/outdoor education, sport or dance specialization, and
biomechanics for high performance.
– Module B: Fitness Management could include more exercise science topics
such as energy systems, fitness training, and fitness leadership.
– Module C: Mental-Emotional Health could include research projects or
learning more about alternative health options.
– Module D: Social Impact of Sport could include leadership in sport and
recreation.
– Module E: Substance Use and Abuse Prevention could include developing an
anti-drug or anti-violence prevention campaign.
Examples of Delivery Models
Schools will choose different implementation models, depending on their local needs and
resources. Schools may choose one model, or they may wish to offer a combination of
models and allow students to choose which delivery model suits their needs.
_____________________________________________________________________________
The following are examples of various delivery or timetabling models that different
schools have created:
0 Block programming: Require students to complete “x” number of blocks or units of
instruction, as identified in the school course outline. This type of programming
depends on the number of teachers available to be scheduled. With more teachers
available, a greater number of blocks or units can be offered to students. When
students are not participating in a block or unit, they are on unassigned or OUT-of-
class time.
1 Looping: Schedule Grades 11 and 12 students together so that in the first year all
students take the Grade 11 course, and then in the second year all students take the
Grade 12 course.
2 Course pathways or streams: Offer a choice of course options to students, based on
factors such as percentage of IN-class/OUT-of-class time, topic or sport, gender, and
so on.
3 Flexible scheduling: Provide the opportunity for students and teachers to deliver the
course in different ways or at different times of the day (e.g., early bird classes, after-
hour classes, seminars).
4 Other
The following diagram shows ways of scheduling course pathways or streams based on
percentage of IN-class/OUT-of-class time.
__________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Overview 25
The Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles course could vary from teacher to teacher,
depending on what delivery model is chosen and how the flexible component will be
treated. Whatever model is chosen, teachers will need to develop a plan for each of the
components (Core, Physical Activity Practicum, and Flexible Delivery).
The following examples show a variety of ways to schedule course components based on
percentage of IN-class/OUT-of-class time. The intent is that students would be able to
choose the combination that best meets their needs.
25%/75% IN/OUT – Active Healthy Lifestyles

Component Module % Time IN % Time OUT
Core Component (25%) Module B: Fitness Management 10%
Module C: Mental-Emotional Health 5%
Module D: Social Impact of Sport 5%
Module E: Substance Use and Abuse 5%
Prevention
Physical Activity Practicum (50%) Personal Fitness Portfolio 50%
Flexible Delivery Component (25%) Personal Fitness Portfolio 25%
Student/Teacher Conferencing (e.g., 1 hour per student)

Prevention
Flexible Delivery Component (25%) Physical Activity/Sport Options 25%
Health Options
_____________________________________________________________________________
Prevention
Health Options
100% IN – Active Healthy Lifestyles

Prevention
Physical Activity Practicum (50%) Physical Activity/Sport Options 50%
Teacher-Developed Module (e.g., 15%
Leadership, Sport Science,
Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation [CPR]
Certification, Health Research
Projects)
0 Develop an OUT-of-Class Safety Policy

Schools and school divisions are required to develop a risk-management policy related
to the OUT-of-class physical activity practicum, as well as provide risk-management
measures and a teacher and parent/guardian sign-off process that aligns with
government policy.
For information on developing an OUT-of-class safety policy, refer to the guidelines

and suggestions in OUT-of-Class Safety Handbook (Manitoba Education, Citizenship
and Youth), available online at
_____________________________________________________________________________
Overview 27
3. Develop a Pre- and Post-Sign-off Process
The Policy Document requires a teacher
PRE- AND POST-SIGN-OFF
and parent/guardian pre- and post-sign-
off process for the OUT-of-class delivery Pre- and post-sign-off refers to the sign-off
model. As schools are developing their process required for the student-directed option
local policies and procedures, the prior to implementing the physical activity
following must be taken into practicum and upon its completion. This process
consideration: involves teachers, students, parents/guardians,
and/or supervising adult(s). The purpose of the
If a parent/guardian is unwilling to Pre-Sign-off Form is to ensure the
approve the OUT-of-class time student/parent/guardian has chosen physical
component outlined by the school, the activity that is safe and appropriate to meet the
learning outcomes. The purpose of the Post-Sign-
school should provide other off Form is to provide the documentation or
opportunities for the student to meet evidence that the student met the requirements
the time expectation, such as IN- of the physical activity practicum.
school supervised activities (e.g., (Policy Document 6)
intramurals, fitness clubs). Examples
of circumstances that may necessitate this special type of support are exceptional
learning needs, safety concerns, and religious and cultural values.
0 At a parent’s/guardian’s request, a school offering a 100% IN-class model must
allow the student to opt for a minimum 25% OUT-of-class option as part of a
personalized physical activity practicum. Schools will determine eligibility of a
higher percentage based on local policy.
1 For students who cannot achieve the required credit or credits because of
exceptional circumstances (e.g., unforeseen serious physical or medical limitation,
cultural values), the school administrator, in discussion with parents/guardians,
can decide to substitute a maximum of two credits, as per school division policy
and existing departmental policy. This substitution of credits must be reported to
the Department.
2 Physical activities selected for the OUT-of-class component do not qualify when the
activities are the result of employment where the student receives payment, or
when they are related to another course for which the student receives credit (e.g.,
school-initiated courses related to dance or sports).
Sign-off Process for OUT-of-Class Activities
Schools/divisions are responsible for ensuring, through a sign-off process, that

0 the student’s choices of OUT-of-class physical activities for the course have been
accepted by the teacher based on criteria for completion and divisional policy and
approved by the parent (if the student is under 18 years of age)
1 the student and parent (or only the student if 18 years or older) have been
informed about the recommended safety guidelines and risk-management
strategies related to the student’s chosen physical activities
_____________________________________________________________________________
0 the student and parent (or only the student if 18 years or older) are aware of their
responsibility for the student’s safety during participation in the selected physical
activities
1 the student has completed the requirements of the physical activity practicum
There are two parts to the sign-off process involving the student, parent, and teacher:
pre-sign-off and post-sign-off.
Pre-Sign-off Process
23 The purpose of the student pre-sign-off is to

– identify what physical activities the student has chosen for his or her physical
activity practicum based on division policy
– demonstrate awareness of safety guidelines and risk-management strategies
24 The purpose of the parent pre-sign-off is to
– demonstrate agreement with their child’s choice of physical activities
– demonstrate an assumption of responsibility for monitoring their child’s safety
during participation in these activities
25 The purpose of the teacher pre-sign-off for non-school-based and/or OUT-of-class
school-based activities is to
– show acceptance of the physical activity plan (i.e., that the student has met the
criteria for completion of the plan, addressing factors such as personal goals,
frequency of participation, intensity level, amount of time, and type of physical
activity)
– acknowledge that the student has demonstrated an understanding of the risk-
management process and appropriate planning related to physical activity
– ensure the student is aware of the safety guidelines and risk-management
information and associated responsibilities for discussion with parents for their
approval
The following steps are suggested to help facilitate the pre-sign-off process:
5888 The PE/HE teacher provides student orientation regarding the physical
activity practicum requirements, personal physical activity plan, and risk
management.
5889 The student selects eligible physical activities in consultation with the
PE/HE teacher and parents, and as per division policy.
5890 The student, with teacher guidance, develops a personal physical activity
plan that includes safety guidelines and risk-management strategies.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Overview 29
23 The PE/HE teacher accepts the proposed plan based on criteria for completion and
on division policy, and signs it.
24 The student and parent (or only the student if 18 years or older) show acceptance
of the personal physical activity plan and of the responsibility for safety by signing
the Declaration and Consent Form.
Post-Sign-off Process
5888 The purpose of the post-sign-off for the student and for the parent is to show
that the student has fulfilled the requirements of the physical activity practicum
(i.e., a minimum of 55 hours of moderate to vigorous physical activity that is safe,
ethical, and age/developmentally appropriate).
For more details and suggestions on the pre- and post-sign-off process, refer to the
lessons in Module A: Physical Activity Practicum, as well as to the OUT-of-Class
Safety Handbook (Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth).
23 Establish Evaluation and Reporting Procedures

For the Grades 11 and 12 PE/HE credits, students will be graded for completion of the
courses using complete/incomplete designations and not percentages (Policy
Document 14). Teachers are responsible for evaluating and reporting PE/HE credits.
Schools are responsible for awarding the credits for both IN- and OUT-of-class
delivery. Students are responsible for achieving the identified learning outcomes,
regardless of the delivery model used.
Physical activities selected for the OUT-of-class component do not qualify when the
activities are the result of employment where the student receives payment, or
when they are related to another course for which the student receives credit (e.g.,
school-initiated courses related to dance or sports).
As evidence for demonstrating progress and achievement of the learning outcomes

related to the physical activity practicum, regardless of the delivery model used,
students are required to submit a personal fitness portfolio. This portfolio should
contain elements such as a fitness plan, a physical activity log, or journal entries
(Policy Document 14). Because of the importance of the teacher managing and
evaluating the OUT-of-class time for each student, staff time allocation should include
conferencing time for the teacher to meet with each student periodically throughout
the course. It is recommended that administrators allot staff time to manage and
evaluate the IN/OUT-of-class activities in accordance with school division policy
(Policy Document 16).
_____________________________________________________________________________
Schools will need to update current reporting systems to accommodate the
complete/incomplete designation. Criteria for grading for completion of the personal
fitness portfolio for the Physical Activity Practicum module, as well as the criteria for
each of the four Core Component modules and other modules if applicable (i.e.,
Flexible Delivery Component modules) will need to be determined.
For additional information, refer to Assessment and Reporting in the Overview of

Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles, as well as the discussion on planning for
assessment in Appendix D: Planning Guidelines for Physical Education/Health
Education. Specific suggestions for instruction/assessment are provided in each
module contained in this document.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Overview 31
Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles—Specific Learning Outcomes
The specific learning outcomes identified for the Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles
curriculum are focused on developing active healthy lifestyles that are achievable
through an IN-class and/or OUT-of-class delivery model, and are assessed by teachers.
The specific learning outcomes for Grade 11 curriculum are organized within five
modules according to the three curriculum components:
23 The Physical Activity Practicum contains specific learning outcomes that focus
on participation in physical activity.
24 The Core Component contains specific learning outcomes (for each of the
four modules) focusing on health and personal planning.
25 The Flexible Delivery Component will address specific learning outcomes
developed by the teacher and/or student.
Furthermore, the specific learning outcomes align with certain general learning
outcomes (GLOs), as identified on the following pages.
Module Codes
The following codes are used for the respective modules:

PA Physical Activity Practicum (Module A)
FM Fitness Management (Module B)
MH Mental-Emotional Health (Module C)
SI Social Impact of Sport (Module D)
SU Substance Use and Abuse Prevention (Module E)
Specific Learning Outcome Codes
A code is used to identify each specific learning outcome by grade and module, as shown
in the following example:
11.PA.1 The first two numbers refer to the grade (Grade 11).
The two letters refer to the module (Physical Activity Practicum)
The last digit indicates the specific learning outcome number.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Physical Activity Practicum
Module A: Physical Activity Practicum (PA)
GLO 3—Safety The student will demonstrate safe and responsible

behaviours to manage risks and prevent injuries in
physical activity participation and in daily living.
11.PA.1 Demonstrate appropriate critical thinking, planning, and decision-making skills

in the development and implementation of a personal physical activity plan
that is safe and ethical and contributes to health-related fitness goals.
11.PA.2 Demonstrate an understanding of the risk-management process and responsibilities

related to physical activity participation.
11.PA.3 Demonstrate the ability to access and use information for making informed
decisions about safety and risk management related to physical activity
participation.
Includes: level of instruction, level of supervision, facilities/environment,
equipment, clothing/footwear, and personal and other considerations
GLO 1— The student will demonstrate competency in selected

Movement movement skills, and knowledge of movement development
and physical activities with respect to different types of
learning experiences, environments, and cultures.
11.PA.4 Apply movement skills and concepts in selected physical activities that meet
the goals of a personal physical activity plan.
GLO 2—Fitness The student will demonstrate the ability to develop and follow a
Management personal fitness plan for lifelong physical activity and
well-being.
11.PA.5 Participate in physical activities at a moderate to vigorous intensity level.
11.PA.6 Record and report the frequency, intensity, time, and type of the physical
activities, as indicated in the personal physical activity plan, and reflect on
physical activity participation.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Overview 33
Core Component
Module B: Fitness Management (FM)

GLO 2—Fitness The student will demonstrate the ability to develop and follow a
Management personal fitness plan for lifelong physical activity and well-
being.
11.FM.1 Evaluate the benefits of selected types of physical activities in the development
of fitness and in the prevention of disease at various stages of life.
Examples: relationship between aerobic activity and cardiovascular
disease, breast cancer, type 2 diabetes, mental health; relationship between
weight-bearing activities and osteoporosis
11.FM.2 Examine factors that have an impact on the development and implementation
of and adherence to a personal physical activity plan.
Examples: motivation, barriers, changing lifestyle, values and attitudes,
social benefits, finances, medical conditions, incentives, readiness for change
11.FM.3 Examine and evaluate factors that affect fitness and activity choices.
Examples: intrinsic and extrinsic motivation, personal interests, personal
health, family history, environment, finances, culture, level of risk
11.FM.4 Demonstrate an understanding of the concepts and principles related to the

development and implementation of a personal physical activity plan.
Examples: cardiorespiratory endurance/aerobic fitness, musculoskeletal
fitness, training principles, FITT (frequency, intensity, time, type) principle
11.FM.5 Design, implement, evaluate, and revise an exercise routine that contributes to
the health-related fitness components.
Examples: resistance training, walking, running programs
_____________________________________________________________________________
Module C: Mental-Emotional Health (MH)
GLO 4—Personal The student will demonstrate the ability to develop self-
and Social understanding, to make health-enhancing decisions, to work
Management cooperatively and fairly with others, and to build
positive relationships with others.
11.MH.1 Identify and apply positive health strategies to deal with issues such as stress,
anxiety, depression, and eating disorders.
11.MH.2 Examine media influence(s) on self-image and behaviour.
11.MH.3 Investigate the impact and importance of active healthy lifestyle practices on
mental-emotional health issues.
11.MH.4 Examine the signs and symptoms of mental-emotional health issues related to
stress, anxiety, depression, and eating disorders.
11.MH.5 Identify community service agencies that support individuals concerned about
11.MH.6 Apply problem-solving and decision-making strategies in case scenarios

related to selected mental-emotional health issues.
Module D: Social Impact of Sport (SI)

GLO 4—Personal The student will demonstrate the ability to develop self-
and Social understanding, to make health-enhancing decisions, to work
Management cooperatively and fairly with others, and to build
11.SI.1 Identify the different stages of sport participation and their role in society.
11.SI.2 Examine the impact of sport on various social issues.

Examples: ethnic background, gender equity, populations with exceptional
needs, politics, technology, business
11.SI.3 Analyze sporting behaviours that may be positive and/or negative.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Overview 35
Module E: Substance Use and Abuse Prevention (SU)
GLO 5—Healthy The student will demonstrate the ability to make informed
Lifestyle decisions for healthy living related to personal health practices,
Practices active living, healthy nutritional practices, substance use and
abuse, and human sexuality.
11.SU.1 Explain ways in which drugs and other substances are classified.
11.SU.2 Explain the stages of involvement in substance use or abuse.

Includes: non-involvement, irregular involvement, regular
involvement, harmful involvement, and dependent involvement
11.SU.3 Examine factors that influence decisions regarding substance use and abuse.
11.SU.4 Use reliable information in making healthy decisions for helping self and/or
others regarding substance use and abuse.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Implementation Overview
Grades 11 and 12 Philosophy for Effective Programming
The following are the key philosophical underpinnings to support effective

programming for Grades 11 and 12 PE/HE.
5888 Lifelong physical activity participation: The intent of the Grades 11 and 12
curricula is to help students develop the necessary knowledge, skills, and attitudes
in personal planning for lifelong physical activity participation.
5889 Taking greater ownership: Due to the age and maturity of students in Grades 11
and 12, the goal is to encourage students to take greater ownership for their physical
fitness and to become involved in physical activities suited to their own individual
interests and abilities.
5890 Healthy decision making: Leading an active healthy lifestyle will contribute to
health and well-being. Helping students understand the importance of making
informed healthy decisions relevant to the five major health risk areas for youth
continues to be the focus in promoting active healthy lifestyles for all students.
5891 Choice and variety: A key element for lifelong physical activity participation is
finding activities that one personally enjoys and feels successful at. Where schools can
offer students a choice and variety of activities within the IN-class component or the
opportunity to choose their own activities as part of the OUT-of-class component,
students are more likely to choose something that they enjoy and that would be suited
to their interests and abilities.
5892 Active and interactive learning strategies: Brain research (Cone, et al.; Jensen)
supports the approach of engaging students in active learning to increase retention
and to make learning more relevant, meaningful, and enjoyable. In a PE setting,
learning/teaching strategies engage students through a variety of physical activities
that involve many of the multiple intelligences (e.g., bodily/kinesthetic, visual,
spatial). From an HE perspective, interactive learning/teaching strategies (e.g.,
brainstorming, Think-Pair-Share, role playing) promote social interaction and
cooperative learning, which highlight interpersonal intelligence.
5893 Cooperative and low competitive-type learning activities: Cooperative and low
competitive-type activities help promote positive social interactions among students,
promote inclusion, and allow students to work together toward achieving a common
goal. Competitive experiences that allow students to participate at or near their own
ability level contribute to increasing self-confidence and make the games or challenges
more enjoyable.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Overview 37
23 Involvement of parents/families and communities: Building partnerships is essential
for providing a healthy, supportive environment for children and youth. Schools,
parents, and communities need to work together to achieve the vision of realizing
physically active and healthy lifestyles for all students. The home, school, and community
all play an important role in providing opportunities for Senior Years students to be
physically active daily or regularly.
24 Promote sustainable development: PE/HE helps students to learn how active healthy
lifestyles contribute to human health and well-being, the environment, and the
economy. It is essential for students to understand the consequences of their
behaviour today and the impact it may have on their future quality of life.
Connections between the General Learning Outcomes and the Modules
To maintain the integrity of the Framework and the vision of the curriculum, each of
the five modules in this document connects to a strand or sub-strand under one or
more general learning outcomes (GLOs). Students in Kindergarten to Grade 12 are to
demonstrate learning relative to the general learning outcomes. The following is a
description of each GLO and how the Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles curriculum
addresses or connects to each GLO.
GLO 1—Movement
The student will demonstrate competency in selected movement skills, and
knowledge of movement development and physical activities with respect to different
types of learning experiences, environments, and cultures.
Connections to Grade 11 Modules
Throughout Kindergarten to Grade 10, PE/HE programming emphasizes acquisition

and application of movement skills in a variety of physical activities for developing
physical literacy. In Grade 11, through Module A: Physical Activity Practicum, students
have the opportunity to participate or specialize in activities of their choice. Students will
set personal goals related to their physical activity plan. These personal goals may focus
on health-related fitness components and/or skill-related fitness components, depending
on the students’ choice of physical activity/sport and ability.
_____________________________________________________________________________
GLO 2—Fitness Management
The student will demonstrate the ability to develop and follow a personal fitness
plan for lifelong physical activity and well-being.
The specific learning outcomes addressed in Module B: Fitness Management continue to

help students develop a pattern of daily and/or regular participation in physical activities
and develop an understanding of how to acquire/maintain optimal personal health and
fitness. The ultimate goal is for each student to value physical activity as a key component
of health and to take ownership for his or her fitness through regular participation in
physical activity. In the physical activity practicum, Grade 11 students are required to
achieve a minimum of 55 hours of moderate to vigorous physical activity that contributes
to cardiorespiratory endurance plus one or more of the other health-related fitness
components (muscular strength, muscular endurance, and flexibility).
There is a strong connection between the lessons in Module B: Fitness Management and
the physical activity practicum. Students will determine where they are on the Stages of
Change continuum (i.e., pre-contemplation, contemplation, preparation, action, or
maintenance stage), set goals accordingly, and then develop and implement a physical
activity plan. Students will choose safe, ethical, and age/developmentally appropriate
physical activities IN-class or OUT-of-class that will contribute to the goals of their
physical activity plan. The OUT-of-class model provides students with more opportunity
to take responsibility and to be accountable for their participation while receiving
guidance and support from their teacher and parents.
Fitness assessment is optional as part of this curriculum. If teachers and/or students

choose to do fitness assessments, they need to use a humanistic approach that emphasizes
education, prevention, and intervention. Fitness assessment is used to establish personal
goals and to monitor individual progress, rather than to compare one student’s results to
those of others, as in norm-referenced testing.
For more information about fitness assessment, refer to Guidelines for Fitness Assessment in
Manitoba Schools: A Resource for Physical Education/Health Education (Manitoba Education,
Citizenship and Youth), which is available on the CD-ROM that accompanies this
document, as well as online at
_____________________________________________________________________________
Overview 39
GLO 3—Safety
The student will demonstrate safe and responsible behaviours to manage risks and
prevent injuries in physical activity participation and in daily living.
This GLO continues to be emphasized in Module A: Physical Activity Practicum and in

Module B: Fitness Management relative to physical activity participation and in the other
PE/HE modules relative to making safe decisions in daily living. Safety education and
risk management are essential to helping students prevent injury, reduce risks, and avoid
potentially dangerous situations, whether the topic is related to PE or HE.
Students, parents, the school, and the community are all involved in managing risk for the
non-school-based activities that occur during the OUT-of-class component of this course.
Students are provided the opportunity to choose physical activities suited to their own
interests and abilities through the OUT-of-class delivery model. With this choice, students
take more responsibility, along with their parents, for becoming informed about the safe
and responsible behaviours related to the selected physical activities.
Since all physical activity involves an element of risk, teachers, parents, and students have
the responsibility to minimize risks and hazards at all times. Students and parents must
follow the local policy and procedures (i.e., sign-off process) for school-based and non-
school-based OUT-of-class physical activities.
Students will be responsible for demonstrating an awareness of the safe and responsible
behaviours to manage risks and prevent injuries in physical activity participation in
accordance with the following risk factors:
5888 level of risk of the activity
5889 level of instruction
5890 level of supervision
5891 facilities/environment
5892 equipment
5893 clothing/footwear
5894 environmental factors
5895 personal and other considerations
_____________________________________________________________________________
The OUT-of-Class Safety Handbook provides Physical Activity Safety Checklists to support
the implementation Module A: Physical Activity Practicum. These checklists are intended
to assist with providing students, teachers, and parents with the necessary safety
information. Note, however, that many of these checklists include risk-management
strategies recommended as minimum standards for participation in what are
predominantly organized programs. Instructors, coaches, or program leaders of OUT-of-
class physical activities may also impose more stringent safety standards. These standards
may vary according to the nature of the activity (e.g., recreational versus competitive).
Any number of variables may increase or decrease the risks involved, such as the
student’s personal experience, skill level and physical condition, the level of intensity of
the activity, as well as the student’s personal behaviour during physical activity
participation.
For more information about safety and specific Physical Activity Safety Checklists, refer to
OUT-of-Class Safety Handbook (Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth), which is
available online at <www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/cur/physhlth/curriculum.html>.
GLO 4—Personal and Social Management

The student will demonstrate the ability to develop self-understanding, to make
health-enhancing decisions, to work cooperatively and fairly with others, and to
build positive relationships with others.
In the Grade 11 curriculum, Module C: Mental-Emotional Health and Module D: Social

Impact of Sport are extensions of the learning outcomes related to Social Development
and Mental-Emotional Development.
The following personal and social management skills that are identified in the
Framework are reinforced in each module:
23 goal-setting/planning skills
24 decision-making/problem-solving skills
25 interpersonal skills
26 conflict-resolution skills
27 stress-management skills
For example, goal-setting/planning skills are reinforced in the lessons in Module B:
Fitness Management. Decision-making/problem-solving skills continue to be the
foundation skills emphasized in every module.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Overview 41
GLO 5—Healthy Lifestyle Practices
The student will demonstrate the ability to make informed decisions for healthy living
related to personal health practices, active living, healthy nutritional practices,
substance use and abuse, and human sexuality.
The strands identified for GLO 5 in the Framework, Personal Health Practices, Active
Living, and Substance Use and Abuse Prevention, are addressed in the Grade 11
curriculum. The focus continues to be on accessing accurate and useful information to
support healthy decision making. Learning about the benefits and importance of active
healthy lifestyle practices for prevention of chronic disease or illness is also reinforced.
Health promotion for self and others is emphasized in the suggested learning activities
that build on the positive and negative aspects of different influences such as the media
and peer pressure.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Planning for Instruction
Planning Guidelines and Tools
The Overview in Senior 1 and Senior 2 Physical Education/Health Education: A Foundation for
Implementation (Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth) contains planning guidelines
on various topics for Grades 9 and 10 PE/HE that will also be useful to teachers planning
for IN-class delivery of Grades 11 and 12 PE/HE.
To make this planning information more accessible for teachers to use in the context of the
Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles curriculum, Appendix D: Planning Guidelines for
Physical Education/Health Education provides guidelines and suggestions for the
following areas:
5888 Part A: Planning for Instruction
5888 Creating a Meaningful Learning Environment
5889 Implementation Guidelines for the General Learning Outcomes
5890 Planning for Students with Exceptional Learning Needs
5891 Fostering a Safe and Supportive Learning Environment for Potentially
Sensitive Content
5892 Yearly/Semester Planning
5893 Unit Planning
5894 Lesson Planning
5889 Part B: Planning for Assessment
5890 Part C: Additional Planning
Teachers may also refer to Appendix G: Common Planning Tools and Forms at the end of
this document. In addition, teachers are encouraged to use the planning tools provided on
the Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth website at
<www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/cur/physhlth/>.
Active Learning Strategies
Many of the instructional and assessment strategies suggested in each module of this
curriculum document are active and/or interactive. They encourage students to
collaborate with their peers, parents, caregivers, Elders, and other adults in their
community. Interaction with others allows students to clarify and explore their own ideas,
expand on what they know, learn from others, challenge each other, and construct new
meanings.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Overview 43
Teachers are encouraged to use active and/or interactive learning strategies that promote
discussion and health-enhancing decision making and accommodate different learning
approaches (e.g., creating posters or pamphlets, brainstorming, reflection exercises,
debates, drama, songs, videos, interviews, case studies, anonymous question box). The use
of examples of current events from newspapers, magazines, television, radio, and/or
movies also moves the content away from the students themselves and makes certain
issues easier to talk about. Furthermore, brain research supports the benefits of physically
active learning strategies, as physical activity increases the blood flow and oxygen to the
brain.
Refer to Appendix E: Active Learning Strategies for examples of physically active learning
strategies such as Carousel Brainstorming and Scavenger Hunts and interactive learning
strategies such as Jigsaw, Think-Pair-Share, and Think and Link.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Assessment and Reporting
For the Grades 11 and 12 PE/HE credits, students will be graded for completion of the
courses using complete/incomplete designations and not percentages (Policy
Document 14). Therefore, assessment and reporting may look different but the
principles and best practices remain the same.
PE/HE teachers will require multifaceted assessment tools and strategies for a number of
reasons. First, the assessment process must measure the kinesthetic, affective, and
cognitive domains of each student’s learning. Second, the assessment must account for all
students within an inclusive learning environment. Third, as PE/HE in Grades 11 and 12
allows schools to choose an IN-class and/or OUT-of-class implementation model, the
assessment must be adaptable enough to allow for this choice and flexibility. Finally, as
previously stated, schools will report course credits as complete/incomplete instead of as
percentages.
This section on assessment and reporting includes suggested assessment tools and
strategies that will help teachers determine whether or not students provide the evidence
for meeting the expectations of the specific learning outcomes to grant credit in the course.
Suggestions for assessing student achievement of the learning outcomes are also offered in
other departmental documents:
23 Kindergarten to Senior 4 Physical Education/Health Education: Manitoba Curriculum
Framework of Outcomes for Active Healthy Lifestyles (Manitoba Education and Training)
24 Guidelines for Fitness Assessment in Manitoba Schools: A Resource for
Physical Education/Health Education (Manitoba Education, Citizenship and
Youth)
25 Rethinking Classroom Assessment with Purpose in Mind: Assessment for Learning,
Assessment as Learning, Assessment of Learning (Earl, Katz, and Manitoba Education,
Citizenship and Youth)
26 Communicating Student Learning: Guidelines for Schools (Manitoba
Education, Citizenship and Youth)
The discussion that follows synthesizes ideas about assessment from these documents
from the unique perspective of today’s PE/HE classroom. The following are addressed:
5888 Purposes of Assessment
5888 Assessment for Learning
5889 Assessment as Learning
5890 Assessment of Learning
5889 Determining Course Completion
5888 Assessing the Physical Activity Practicum
5889 Assessing the Core Component
5890 Assessing the Flexible Delivery Component
_____________________________________________________________________________
Overview 45
Purposes of Assessment
Rethinking Classroom Assessment with Purpose in Mind (Earl, Katz, and Manitoba Education,
Citizenship and Youth) defines three purposes for assessment: assessment for learning,
assessment as learning, and assessment of learning.
Assessment for Learning
Assessment for learning is designed to give teachers information to differentiate teaching

and learning activities. It acknowledges that individual students learn in idiosyncratic
ways, but also recognizes that there are predictable patterns and pathways that many
students follow. It requires careful design on the part of teachers so that they use the
resulting information to determine not only what students know, but also to gain insights
into how, when, and whether students apply what they know. Teachers can also use this
information to streamline and target instruction and resources, and to provide feedback to
students to help them advance their learning.
Research has clearly demonstrated that student achievement increases when teachers
increase the amount of descriptive feedback on student performance (Black and Wiliam). In
the Grades 11 and 12 PE/HE courses, students will benefit from such feedback from teachers
during conferencing, coaching sessions, and classroom observations.
Assessment for learning occurs throughout the learning process. It is interactive,

with teachers
23 aligning instruction with the targeted learning outcomes
24 identifying particular learning needs of individual students or groups
25 selecting and adapting materials and resources
26 creating differentiated teaching strategies and learning opportunities for helping
individual students move forward in their learning
27 providing immediate feedback and direction to students
Assessment as Learning
Assessment as learning is a process of developing and supporting metacognition for

students. It focuses on the role of the students as the critical connector between
assessment and learning. When students are active, engaged, and critical assessors, they
make sense of information, relate it to prior knowledge, and use it for new learning. This
is the regulatory process in metacognition. It occurs when students monitor their own
learning and use the feedback from this monitoring to make adjustments, adaptations,
and even major changes in what they understand.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Black and Wiliam showed that student achievement increased when they were more
involved in their own assessment. Reflection, using tools such as goal setting, weekly
physical activity reflections, and self-assessment/peer assessment, will increase the
chances of student success.
The teacher’s role in promoting the development of independent learners through
assessment as learning is to
5888 model and teach the skills of self-assessment
5889 guide students in setting goals, and monitoring their progress toward reaching them
5890 provide exemplars and models of good practice and quality work that
reflect curriculum outcomes
5891 work with students to develop clear criteria of good practice
5892 guide students in developing internal feedback or self-monitoring mechanisms
to validate and question their own thinking, and to become comfortable with the
ambiguity and uncertainty that is inevitable in learning anything new
5893 provide regular and challenging opportunities to practise, so that students can
become confident, competent self-assessors
5894 monitor students’ metacognitive processes as well as their learning, and
provide descriptive feedback
5895 create an environment where it is safe for students to take chances and where
support is readily available
5896 set realistic goals (SMART goals: specific, measurable, attainable, realistic, and
time framed—refer to Module B, Lesson 5)
The gradual increase of student responsibility for assessment is part of developing
students’ autonomy as lifelong learners. The goal is to decrease students’ dependence both
on the teacher’s comments for direction in learning and on their marks for validation of
their accomplishments. This is paramount if students are to take responsibility for their
own physical fitness and designing an exercise program that suits their lifestyle and time
commitments.
Below are some suggestions for increasing students’ role in assessment:
23 Encourage students to suggest alternative assignments to demonstrate
their learning.
24 Involve students in developing scoring rubrics.
A class preparing oral presentations, for example, may develop a rubric in several
stages:
23 brainstorm ideas on the qualities of an effective presentation
24 refine the criteria after viewing a simulated or videotaped presentation
25 list the criteria in order of priority and assign values
_____________________________________________________________________________
Overview 47
23 Use assessment tools for student reflection and self-assessment at every
opportunity.
Assessment tools may include
23 learning logs
24 statement of goals
25 self-reflective captions on portfolio items
26 self-assessment rubrics
(See Appendix F: Sample Assessment Tools and Checklists.)
23 Remove the mystery from assessment by using “backward design.”

Wiggins and McTighe’s “backward design” model identifies three distinct but related
stages:
23 Identify desired results.
24 Determine acceptable evidence.
25 Plan learning experiences and instruction.
It is important to plan assessments before teaching. It is necessary to communicate

course completion expectations to students and parents at the beginning of each term.
This helps ensure that students understand precisely what products and performances
they are accountable for producing as evidence of learning; it also encourages parents
to provide support and encouragement to increase the likelihood that these
assessment components are completed and submitted on time.
Assessment of Learning
Assessment of learning is summative in nature and is used to confirm what students know
and can do, and, occasionally, to show how they are placed in relation to others. Teachers
concentrate on ensuring that they have used assessment evidence to provide accurate and
sound statements of students’ proficiency.
Assessment of learning refers to strategies designed to confirm what students know,

demonstrate whether or not they have met curriculum outcomes or the goals of their
individualized programs, or to certify proficiency and make decisions about students’
future programs or placements. It provides evidence of students’ achievement to
parents, other educators, the students themselves, and sometimes to outside groups (e.g.,
employers, other educational institutions). Assessment of learning is the assessment that
becomes public and results in statements or symbols about how well students are
learning. It often contributes to pivotal decisions that will affect students’ futures. It is
important, then, that the underlying logic and measurement of assessment of learning be
credible and defensible.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Due to the nature of experiential learning in PE, self-reflection and self-assessment are an
important part of the assessment of learning process. Students need to understand the
importance of monitoring their own progress as they work towards, for example, meeting
the fitness goals set in the physical activity plan. Because the consequences of assessment
of learning are often far-reaching and affect students seriously, teachers have the
responsibility of reporting student learning accurately and fairly, based on the most recent
evidence obtained from a variety of contexts and applications.
Effective assessment of learning requires that teachers provide

5888 a rationale for undertaking a particular assessment of learning at a particular point
in time
5889 clear descriptions of the intended learning
5890 processes that make it possible for students to demonstrate their competence and
skill
5891 a range of alternative mechanisms for assessing the same learning outcomes
5892 public and defensible reference points for making judgements
5893 transparent approaches to interpretation
5894 descriptions of the assessment process
5895 strategies for recourse in the event of disagreement about the decisions
With the help of their teachers, students can look forward to assessment of learning tasks
as occasions to show completion, competence, as well as the depth and breadth of their
learning.
Determining Course Completion
Students in Grades 11 and 12 are assessed for completion of the PE/HE courses using
complete and incomplete designations, not percentage grades. A complete designation
indicates the student has demonstrated achievement of the learning outcomes through
completion of learning experiences based on the selected criteria and expectations
outlined by the teacher. Teachers are responsible for assessing and reporting PE/HE
credits based on locally developed policy.
Assessment instruments such as portfolios, teacher observations and anecdotal records,

and performance-based tests and examinations can be used to evaluate what students
know and are able to do in a variety of contexts. (Sample teacher checklists and tracking
forms are provided in Appendix F: Sample Assessment Tools and Checklists.)
_____________________________________________________________________________
Overview 49
The variety of methods available for collecting, interpreting, and reporting information
about what students know and can do is endless, and many excellent resources are
available for teachers. Although some methods have come to be associated with
assessment during instruction and learning, and others with assessment at the end of a
unit or term, a variety of methods can be used for all three purposes: assessment for
learning, assessment as learning, and assessment of learning. What is important is that
teachers first clarify the purpose of assessment and then select the method that best
serves the purpose in the particular context.
Assessing the Physical Activity Practicum

Each student is required to participate in a physical activity practicum. Students must
complete a minimum of 55 hours of physical activity participation at a moderate to
vigorous intensity level over a period of time that contributes to cardiorespiratory
endurance plus one or more of the other health-related fitness components (muscular
strength, muscular endurance, and flexibility) (Policy Document 5).
As part of the assessment of this physical activity practicum, students must submit a
personal fitness portfolio as evidence of their completion of the physical activity
practicum. This personal fitness portfolio may contain elements such as a fitness plan,
a physical activity log, journal entries, and personal reflections (Policy Document 14).
The purpose of the personal fitness portfolio is to show evidence of the students taking
ownership for their physical fitness through personal planning and participating in
physical activity. The planning will be related to personal goal setting and analysis, as
well as safety and risk management. The personal fitness portfolio would contain the
evidence to demonstrate the achievement of learning outcomes for active healthy
lifestyles. The main focus of the planning is physical activity involvement, but other
health issues could be integrated as well.
The following elements are recommended to use as evidence of student learning for the
personal fitness portfolio:
0 physical activity plan (includes personal goals)
1 safety and risk-management plan (includes appropriate safety checklists and safety
form)
2 Parent and Student Declaration and Consent Forms
3 physical activity log (a record of a minimum of 55 hours of moderate to vigorous
physical activity that is safe, ethical, and age/developmentally appropriate)
4 fitness portfolio reflections (recorded regularly)
_____________________________________________________________________________
Teachers are responsible for assessing and reporting PE/HE credits. Assigned teachers
would be required to approve appropriateness of the personal fitness portfolio items
based on locally developed criteria before authorizing their implementation.
It is up to individual teachers to decide on the format for the student presentation of the
personal fitness portfolio. For example, teachers may wish to have students present their
personal fitness portfolios in one of the following ways:
0 at a Portfolio Fair organized by teachers
1 as a student presentation (participants invited by the student presenting)
2 in an electronic/multimedia format
3 in a student-teacher conference
The learning outcomes that must be assessed are related primarily to the following
general learning outcomes (GLOs):
0 GLO 1—Movement
1 GLO 2—Fitness Management
2 GLO 3—Safety
The following chart provides suggested elements and criteria for completion of the
Physical Activity Practicum module. For each of the identified learning outcomes, the
chart provides suggested instructional/assessment strategies as well as guiding questions
for criteria development. These, in turn, would become the elements and criteria that
could be considered as evidence for student achievement of the learning outcomes
specifically related to the physical activity plan, safety and risk-management plan, sign-off
forms, physical activity log, and portfolio reflections. The Resource Masters (RMs) cited in
the chart are provided in the modules at the end of individual lessons.
Details about how to implement the physical activity practicum are contained in
Module A: Physical Activity Practicum.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Overview 51
Suggested Elements and Criteria for Completion of the
Specific Learning Outcomes Evidence Questions to Guide
(Examples from Assessment
Module)
11.PA.1 Demonstrate appropriate critical thinking, RM 5–PA Does the student
planning, and decision-making skills in the demonstrate an
development and implementation of a personal understanding of the
physical activity plan that is safe and ethical and importance of relating risk
contributes to health-related fitness goals. factors (safety) to achieving
11.PA.3 Demonstrate the ability to access and use fitness goals?
information for making informed decisions about
safety and risk management related to physical
activity participation.
Includes: level of instruction, level of supervision,
facilities/environment, equipment,
clothing/footwear, and personal and other
considerations
11.PA.2 Demonstrate an understanding of the risk- RM 5–PA Does the student
management process and responsibilities related demonstrate an
to physical activity participation. understanding of the risks
associated with the physical
activities chosen?
Does the student provide
evidence of appropriate
consent forms?
11.PA.4 Apply movement skills and concepts in selected RM 4–PA Can the student choose
physical activities that meet the goals of a appropriate physical
personal physical activity plan. activities that assist him or
her in reaching the stated
goals?
11.PA.5 Participate in physical activities at a moderate to RM 7–PA Has the student documented
vigorous intensity level. a minimum of 55 hours of
moderate to vigorous
physical activity?
11.PA.6 Record and report the frequency, intensity, time, RM 7–PA Can the student collect and
and type of the physical activities, as indicated in record information in a
the personal physical activity plan, and reflect on systematic way?
_____________________________________________________________________________
Assessing the Core Component
The Core Component modules for the Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles are as follows:
23 Module B: Fitness Management
24 Module C: Mental-Emotional Health
25 Module D: Social Impact of Sport
26 Module E: Substance Use and Abuse Prevention
The learning outcomes that must be assessed are related primarily to the following GLOs:
5888 GLO 2—Fitness Management
5889 GLO 3—Safety
5890 GLO 4—Personal and Social Management
5891 GLO 5—Healthy Lifestyle Practices
The following chart identifies the specific learning outcomes and examples of
instructional/assessment strategies that are contained in the Core Component modules.
Guiding questions for assessment are also identified for each learning outcome. These
strategies and questions become the elements and criteria that could be considered as
evidence for student achievement of the learning outcomes. The RMs cited in the chart are
provided in the modules at the end of individual lessons.
Teachers may choose to use a portfolio for the entire course (including Modules A to E) or
they may choose to use alternative assessment tools for Modules B to E. A Sample
Portfolio Rubric is provided in Appendix F: Sample Assessment Tools and Checklists.
This sample rubric could be used for the personal fitness portfolio, a course portfolio, or
both.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Overview 53
Core Component Modules
Modules)
11.PA.1 Demonstrate appropriate critical thinking, RM 6–FM Can the student formulate
planning, and decision-making skills in the Physical Activity clear health-related fitness
development and implementation of a personal Plan goals?
physical activity plan that is safe and ethical and SMART Goals Does the student clearly link
contributes to health-related fitness goals. the benefits of his or her
RM 7–FM
chosen physical activities to
the stated goals?
11.FM.1 Evaluate the benefits of selected types of physical Benefits of Physical Does the student know and
activities in the development of fitness and in the Activity and understand the connection
prevention of disease at various stages of life. Exercise (Lesson 1) between various types of
Examples: relationship between aerobic activity Benefits of Physical physical activities and
and cardiovascular disease, breast cancer, type 2 Activity/Sports for health-related benefits?
diabetes, mental health; relationship between Different Age
weight-bearing activities and osteoporosis Groups (Lesson 1)
11.FM.2 Examine factors that have an impact on the Think-Pair-Share Can the student reflect on
development and implementation of and RM 1–FM his or her level of personal
adherence to a personal physical activity plan. RM 2–FM commitment to the physical
Examples: motivation, barriers, changing lifestyle, activity plan?
values and attitudes, social benefits, finances, Does the student have the
medical conditions, incentives, readiness for ability to assess barriers to
change active participation and how
to problem-solve?
11.FM.3 Examine and evaluate factors that affect fitness RM 3–FM Can the student identify
and activity choices. Three-Point realistic fitness goals based
Examples: intrinsic and extrinsic motivation, Approach on personal resources and
personal interests, personal health, family history, RM 4–FM interests?
environment, finances, culture, level of risk RM 5–FM
11.FM.4 Demonstrate an understanding of the concepts RM 8–FM Has the student

and principles related to the development and RM 9–FM incorporated the fitness
implementation of a personal physical activity RM 10–FM principles and concepts in
plan. physical activity into his or
Examples: cardiorespiratory endurance/aerobic her physical activity plan?
fitness, musculoskeletal fitness, training principles,
FITT (frequency, intensity, time, type) principle
11.FM.5 Design, implement, evaluate, and revise an RM 11–FM Can the student analyze his
exercise routine that contributes to the health- RM 12–FM or her physical activity plan
related fitness components. RM 13–FM and make changes
Examples: resistance training, walking, running necessary to reach the
programs fitness goals?
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
Core Component Modules (Continued)
Modules)
11.MH.1 Identify and apply positive health strategies to Think-Pair-Share Does the student know the
deal with issues such as stress, anxiety, RM 1–MH factors that cause or lead to
depression, and eating disorders. RM 2–MH stress, anxiety, depression,
and so on?
Is the student aware of
coping mechanisms for
dealing with stress?
11.MH.2 Examine media influence(s) on self-image and Brainstorming How well does the student
behaviour. RM 3–MH formulate an opinion based
on current information?
11.MH.3 Investigate the impact and importance of active RM 4–MH Can the student identify a
healthy lifestyle practices on mental-emotional RM 5–MH variety of healthy lifestyle
health issues. Rotating Reel practices?
Can the student
demonstrate how these
healthy lifestyle practices
can positively affect mental-
emotional health?
11.MH.4 Examine the signs and symptoms of mental- T-Chart Can the student identify the
emotional health issues related to stress, (Lesson 3) warning signs and
anxiety, depression, and eating disorders. symptoms of someone
experiencing mental-
emotional health issues?
11.MH.5 Identify community service agencies that Community Supports Does the student
support individuals concerned about mental- and Services understand how to access
emotional health issues. (Lesson 3) health-related community
resources?
11.MH.6 Apply problem-solving and decision-making RM 6–MH Can the student use critical
strategies in case scenarios related to selected thinking and problem-solving
mental-emotional health issues. skills to develop action plans
based on the case
scenarios?
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
Overview 55
Core Component Modules (Continued)
Modules)
11.SI.1 Identify the different stages of sport RM 1–SI Does the student know and
participation and their role in society. RM 2–SI understand the different
stages of sport involvement?
11.SI.2 Examine the impact of sport on various social Think-Pair-Share Can the student articulate
issues. RM 3–SI the connection between
Examples: ethnic background, gender equity, issues in sport and greater
populations with exceptional needs, politics, social issues?
technology, business
11.SI.3 Analyze sporting behaviours that may be Opinion Corners How well does the student
positive and/or negative. Think-Pair-Share formulate and defend an
RM 3–SI informed opinion?

11.SU.1 Explain ways in which drugs and other KWL Can the student
substances are classified. RM 1–SU demonstrate knowledge of
Jigsaw where to access current
information?
RM 2–SU
11.SU.2 Explain the stages of involvement in substance RM 3–SU How well does the student
use or abuse. RM 4–SU know and understand the
Includes: non-involvement, irregular RM 5–SU various stages of
involvement, regular involvement, harmful involvement in substance
involvement, and dependent involvement use and abuse?
11.SU.3 Examine factors that influence decisions Think-Pair-Share Can the student identify a
regarding substance use and abuse. number of factors that
influence substance use and
abuse?
11.SU.4 Use reliable information in making healthy RM 6–SU Can the student
decisions for helping self and/or others DECIDE Model demonstrate that he or she
regarding substance use and abuse. RM 7–SU knows how and where to
access current information
RM 8–SU
and support?
RM 9–SU
RM 10–SU
RM 11–SU
_____________________________________________________________________________
Assessing the Flexible Delivery Component
For schools offering a Flexible Delivery Component of the PE/HE curriculum, it is the
responsibility of the teacher and/or student to expand on or to develop the student
learning outcomes. It is also the responsibility of the teacher and/or student to identify
how these learning outcomes will be assessed.
For more information related to the Flexible Delivery Component, refer to Guidelines for
Implementation in the Overview of Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Overview 57
MODULES FOR PHYSICAL ACTIVITY
PRACTICUM AND CORE COMPONENT
Introduction
Module A: Physical Activity Practicum
Module B: Fitness Management
Module C: Mental-Emotional Health
Module D: Social Impact of Sport
Module E: Substance Use and Abuse Prevention

MODULES FOR PHYSICAL ACTIVITY
PRACTICUM AND CORE COMPONENT
Introduction
This section contains the modules and lessons for the Physical Activity Practicum and the
Core Component of the Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles curriculum.
The modules are units of instruction developed for a specific strand and/or component of
the curriculum. Each module presents lessons that identify the specific learning outcomes,
key understandings, and essential questions, provide background information, offer
suggestions for instruction/assessment, and present references to assist teachers with
planning for instruction. Many references are websites, which are hyperlinked on the CD-
ROM and online versions of the document. Resource Masters are included at the end of
most lessons.
Teachers may use the sample lessons and/or adjust them as locally determined. All
modules are available in Word format.
NOTE ABOUT COPYRIGHT

Please note that this document contains copyright-protected materials (images and text) that have
been reproduced or adapted from a variety of other sources. Manitoba Education, Citizenship and
Youth has obtained permission to use these materials in this document and has made every effort to
acknowledge the original sources. These materials should not be extracted, accessed, reproduced,
or adapted for any purpose other than for their intended educational use in this document.
Guide to Reading the Modules and Lessons
Module Organization and Codes
Each module begins with an Introduction that gives an overview of the context and focus
of the lessons to follow.
The following codes are used for the respective modules:

PA Physical Activity Practicum (Module A)
FM Fitness Management (Module B)
MH Mental-Emotional Health (Module C)
SI Social Impact of Sport (Module D)
SU Substance Use and Abuse Prevention (Module E)
_____________________________________________________________________________ 61
Modules, Introduction
Lesson Organization and Codes
Each module presents lessons that include the components and codes described below.
________________________________________________________________________________
Introduction
NOTE TO TEACHER
The Introduction provides teachers with
information about the lesson content and Notes are used to draw attention to specific
about what students are expected to do. aspects of a lesson, such as treatment of
potentially sensitive content, cautions, definition
of terms, and other important information.
________________________________________________________________________________
Specific learning outcome (SLO) statements define what students are expected to
achieve by the end of the grade.
A code is used to identify each SLO by grade and module, as shown in the
following example:
11.PA.1 The first two numbers refer to the grade (Grade 11).
The two letters refer to the module (Physical Activity Practicum).
The last digit indicates the specific learning outcome number.
________________________________________________________________________________
Key Understandings
These are the core concepts, principles, theories, and processes that students
will understand and be able to use.
______________________________________ NOTE TO TEACHER
Essential Questions The lessons in Module A do not include Key
Understandings or Essential Questions. The
purpose of these lessons is to assist teachers
These are the questions that students will with the process of getting students started on
be able to answer after participating in the their physical activity practicum.
learning experiences in the lessons.
________________________________________________________________________________
62 _____________________________________________________________________________
Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles
Background Information
This information is intended to be used by teachers to develop the student learning

experiences and depth of content for each lesson.
________________________________________________________________________________
Suggestion for Instruction / Assessment
The suggested learning activities give students a practical way of exploring the lesson
content and demonstrating their understanding of the essential learning of each lesson.
________________________________________________________________________________
REFERENCES
Many references are provided to assist teachers with planning for instruction.
In the print version of the document, the website addresses are provided to enable
teachers to perform personal searches. On the CD-ROM and online versions of the
document, the website references are hyperlinked.
When a website is referenced in a module, it is linked to a page on the Manitoba Education,
Citizenship and Youth website where the hyperlinks are active. When accessing websites
online or when using the CD-ROM, users will see the following message and can click on
the website address:
For website updates, please visit Websites to Support the Grades 11 and 12 Curriculum
at <www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/cur/physhlth/>.
Those using the print version of the document will need to key in the Department’s
website address. This address goes to a master list of websites referenced for each
module so that the references can be updated as needed.
Any websites referenced in this document are subject to change. Educators are advised to
preview and evaluate websites and online resources before recommending them for
student use.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________ 63
Resource Masters (RMs)
The RMs included at the end of most lessons are intended to provide teachers and/or
students with additional information to support and enhance student learning and
assessment.
The RMs are numbered sequentially within each module, using the code shown in
the following example:
Refer to RM 1–PA: Five-Day Physical Activity Recall.
RM 1–PA RM refers to Resource Master.

The number refers to the sequence of RMs within the module
(i.e., this is the first RM within the module).
The last two letters refer to the module (Physical Activity
Practicum).
A list of the RMs provided in this document follows. Some RMs are available in both
Word and Excel formats.
________________________________________________________________________________
64 _____________________________________________________________________________
List of Resource Masters
Module A
Lesson 1 RM 1–PA: Five-Day Physical Activity Recall
Lesson 2 RM 2–PA: Where Am I Now?
RM 3–PA: Physical Activity Inventory (Word and Excel)
Lesson 3 RM 4–PA: Personal Physical Activity Plan
RM 5–PA: Safety and Risk-Management Planner
RM 6–PA: Sample Cover Letter for Physical Activity Practicum
RM 7–PA: Physical Activity Log (Word and Excel)
RM 8–PA: Sample Sign-off Form for Completion of OUT-of-Class Physical Activity Practicum (Form for Parent/Guardian)
RM 9–PA: Sample Sign-off Form for Completion of OUT-of-Class Physical Activity Practicum (Form for Authorized Adult)
Module B
Lesson 1
Lesson 2 RM 1–FM: Physical Activity Stages of Change—Questionnaire
RM 2–FM: Process of Change: Tailoring Your Approach
Lesson 3 RM 3–FM: Mini-Biographies (and Answer Key)
RM 4–FM: Motivation for Physical Activity and Exercise/Working Out—Questionnaires (Word and Excel)
Lesson 4 RM 5–FM: Barriers to Being Active Quiz (Word and Excel)
Lesson 5 RM 6–FM: New Habit Chart (Word and Excel)
RM 7–FM: Physical Activity Contract
Lesson 6 RM 8–FM: Fitness Rating of Common Activities (Word and Excel)
RM 9–FM: Level of Exertion/Intensity
RM 10–FM: Comparative Chart of Cardiorespiratory Endurance (CRE) for Unfit and Fit Individuals
RM 11–FM: FITT Principle Guidelines
RM 12–FM: Split Routines for Resistance Training
RM 13–FM: Resistance Training Log
Resistance Training Planner (Excel)—available at <www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/cur/physhlth/curriculum.html>.
Module C
Lesson 1 RM 1–MH: Influences on Mental-Emotional Health (and Answer Key)
RM 2–MH: Healthy Lifestyle Practices for Mental-Emotional Health
RM 3–MH: Life Experiences Leading to Mental Health Issues
Lesson 2 RM 4–MH: Wellness Inventory
RM 5–MH: Common Questions about Body Image
Lesson 3 RM 6–MH: Mental Health Scenarios
Module D
Lesson 1 RM 1–SI: History of Sport: Match the Columns (and Answer Key)
RM 2–SI: The Continuum of Physical Activity/Sport Participation
Lesson 2 RM 3–SI: Human Rights Appeal
Lesson 3 RM 4–SI: Moral Dilemmas in Sport
Module E
Lesson 1 RM 1–SU: How to Read a Prescription Drug Label (and Answer Key)
RM 2–SU: You Be the Judge
Lesson 2 RM 3–SU: From Experimenting to Dependency in 43 Seconds
RM 4–SU: Levels of Involvement in Substance Use (and Answer Key)
Lesson 3 RM 5–SU: Risk and Protective Factors Related to Substance Misuse (and Answer Key)
RM 6–SU: Techniques for Challenging Individual Risk Perception
RM 7–SU: Consequences…To Drive or Not to Drive, That Is the Decision
RM 8–SU: Unintended Consequences: A Case Study of Elvis Presley
RM 9–SU: Sam’s Story: Walnut Creek Teen’s Road from Meth
Lesson 4 RM 10–SU: Learning Advocacy through Expert Testimony
RM 11–SU: Drug Prevention Presentation
_____________________________________________________________________________ 65
MODULE A:
PHYSICAL ACTIVITY PRACTICUM
Introduction
Lesson 1: Personal Physical Activity Inventory
Lesson 2: Managing Risks Related to Physical Activity
Lesson 3: Implementing the Safety and Physical

Activity Plan
MODULE A: PHYSICAL ACTIVITY PRACTICUM


participation.
MODULE A: PHYSICAL ACTIVITY PRACTICUM
Introduction
The name of this course is Grade 11 Active Healthy NOTE TO TEACHER

Lifestyles. What is an active healthy lifestyle? Some
The lessons in Module A do not
would say that being healthy is the absence of disease. include Key Understandings or
While this is true, this view may not capture the true Essential Questions. The purpose
essence or goals of this course. Individuals who are of of these lessons is to assist
this opinion may be more reactive than proactive in teachers with the process of getting
the sense that they “take care” of themselves when the students started on their physical
activity practicum.
need arises (i.e., when they become ill).
Individuals who truly embrace the active healthy lifestyle concept understand that it adds
“value” to their lives. For these individuals, leading an active healthy lifestyle does not
happen by chance. It is a purposeful choice that involves making decisions about the
delicate balance between being physically active and healthy eating, as well as other
health behaviours. Engaging in an active healthy lifestyle also leads to positive self-
concept and healthy relationships with others.
In this module students learn to analyze their own situations and make decisions about
how to become more physically active or how to maintain their current level of physical
activity participation in order to realize improvements in their own health-related fitness
components. As part of the physical activity practicum, students develop their own
physical activity plan, based on their interests. They also develop their understanding of
the importance of risk management related to safe and appropriate participation in
physical activity. Once the physical activity practicum is underway, students begin to
record their progress as proof that they have met the course requirements.
Module A: Physical Activity Practicum contains three lessons:

23 Lesson 1: Personal Physical Activity Inventory
24 Lesson 2: Managing Risks Related to Physical Activity
25 Lesson 3: Implementing the Safety and Physical Activity Plan
Resource Masters to support the lessons are provided at the end of all lessons.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Module A, Introduction 69
Lesson 1: Personal Physical Activity Inventory
Introduction
In this lesson students reflect on their understanding of an active healthy lifestyle. They
also reflect on their own personal situation and what is required of them to meet the
requirements for the physical activity practicum.
________________________________________________________________________________
Specific Learning Outcome

________________________________________________________________________________
Purpose of Physical Activity Practicum
Manitobans are concerned with the health of children and youth, specifically in the areas
of nutrition, physical activity, and injury prevention. The intent of this course is to have
parents, students, and schools “work together to help youth take greater ownership of
their own physical fitness, promote the discovery of activities suited to their own
individual interests, and encourage active lifestyles that persist into their futures”
(Healthy Kids 25).
REFERENCE
For additional information, refer to the following report:
Healthy Kids, Healthy Futures All-Party Task Force. Healthy Kids, Healthy Futures:
Task Force Report. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Healthy Living, n.d. Available online
at <www.gov.mb.ca/healthykids/>.
Requirements for Physical Activity Practicum
The Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles course requires students to demonstrate

achievement of learning outcomes in the three course components, Physical Activity
Practicum, Core Component, and Flexible Delivery Component, as applicable.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Module A, Lesson 1 71
To satisfy the requirements for the
physical activity practicum, all NOTE TO TEACHER
students must meet the following Identify for students exactly how this course is to be
criteria, as identified in delivered, when classes are scheduled, and when students
Implementation of Grades 11 and 12 are to meet individually with the teacher. Clarify for students
the IN/OUT-of-class implementation model that is being
Physical Education/Health Education:
offered in the school. For example,
A Policy Document (Manitoba 23 100% IN model
Education, Citizenship and 24 75% IN / 25% OUT model
Youth), regardless of whether the 25 50% IN / 50% OUT model
course is implemented according 26 25% IN / 75% OUT model
to the IN-class model and/or the 27 combination of the above
OUT-of-class model. (Further For the purpose of the lessons in Module A, the suggested
information is provided in steps/procedures for developing the physical activity
subsequent lessons.) practicum are related to schools that have some percentage
of an OUT-of-class component.
Criteria for Physical Activity Practicum
5888 Students must complete a

minimum of 55 hours of physical NOTE TO TEACHER
activity participation over a
period of time (e.g., a minimum The number of hours required for the physical activity
practicum may be greater, depending on the
of 11 hours per month per
implementation model chosen by the school. If the number
semester) that contributes to of hours required for the physical activity practicum is
cardiorespiratory endurance at a greater than 55 hours, the teacher and/or student could
moderate to vigorous intensity determine the criterion for the additional time.
level plus one or more of the
other health-related fitness components (muscular strength, muscular endurance,
and flexibility).
23 The selected physical activities must be safe, ethical, and age/developmentally
appropriate, and they may include
23 school-based physical activities (e.g., physical education classes, interschool
sports, intramural programming, special events, or regularly scheduled
activity offerings such as a morning running club)
24 non-school-based physical activities (e.g., community-based sports
programming such as a hockey team, fitness club, aerobics classes, weight
training, special-interest club such as karate, home-based exercise or fitness
development such as jogging, television or video exercise programs,
family/church/community-organized activities)
24 Students must address risk-management measures for their selected physical
activities.
_____________________________________________________________________________
5888 Forms must be completed prior to students’ participation in the physical
activity practicum and upon its completion:
5888 Pre-Sign-off Form: Before students begin the physical activity practicum, a
Declaration and Consent Form must be signed. For a student under 18 years of
age, the form must be signed by his or her parent and by the student. For a student
18 or over, the form must be signed by the student.
5889 Post-Sign-off Form: To verify that students have participated in and
accurately recorded their participation in the physical activity practicum, a form
must be signed by the parent for students under 18 or by the parent/authorized
adult for students 18 and over.
23 Students are required to submit a personal
fitness portfolio as evidence of their NOTE TO TEACHER
completion of the physical activity
It is crucial to plan ahead and identify all
practicum. The personal fitness portfolio the required components of the personal
may contain elements such as the following: fitness portfolio. The creation of a
checklist for the teacher and student
23 physical activity plan (includes would be useful.
personal goals)
5888 safety and risk-management plan (includes appropriate safety
checklists and safety form)
5889 Parent and Student Declaration and Consent Forms
5890 physical activity log (a record of a minimum of 55 hours of moderate to
vigorous physical activity that is safe, ethical, and age/developmentally
appropriate)
5891 fitness portfolio reflections (recorded regularly)
Other Considerations
As indicated above, the minimum number of hours required for the physical activity
practicum is 55 hours, and physical activity participation within this time must be at the
moderate to vigorous intensity level. For some students who are at the pre-contemplation,
contemplation, or preparation stage of the States of Change continuum (see Module B,
Lesson 2), a minimum of 55 hours of physical activity participation may seem
overwhelming. However, students will find that, with planning on their part and
assistance from the teacher, this requirement can be met. It is important to be respectful of
each student’s starting point when providing assistance.
_____________________________________________________________________________
According to Canada’s Physical Activity Guide for Youth (Public Health Agency of Canada),
youth should accumulate 90 minutes of physical activity every day to stay healthy or to
improve health. Of the 90 minutes of physical activity, 30 minutes should be of vigorous
intensity and 60 minutes should be of moderate intensity. This activity does not have to
come from one bout of exercise, but can be accumulated from brief intervals throughout
the day (e.g., climbing stairs, walking to and from school). When comparing these
guidelines to the minimum requirements for the physical activity practicum, it becomes
evident that the requirements are fair and realistic.
It is important to break down the requirement of a minimum of 55 hours of physical

activity participation for the physical activity practicum in a manner that is realistic
and manageable for students. For example,
23 55 hours over 1 semester = approximately 11 hours per month
24 11 hours per month = approximately 3 hours per week
25 3 hours per week = approximately 25 minutes per day
Also point out that if students meet only the minimum requirements for the physical
activity practicum, they would not meet the daily physical activity requirements as
recommended in Canada’s Physical Activity Guide for Youth.
The other significant criterion for the physical activity practicum is that the minimum of
55 hours of physical activity must be at the moderate to vigorous intensity level:
23 Moderate activities are physical activities that cause breathing and heart rate to
increase. People engaging in moderate activities can hear themselves breathe but they
can still talk.
24 Vigorous activities are physical activities that cause breathing and heart rate to
increase to a higher level, whereby it would be difficult to talk.
For further information, review RM 9–FM: Level of Exertion/Intensity. (Also see

Module B, Lesson 6.)
_____________________________________________________________________________
REFERENCES
For additional information, refer to the following resources:
Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth. Implementation of Grades 11 and 12 Physical
Education/Health Education: A Policy Document. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education,
Citizenship and Youth, 2007. Available online at
---. OUT-of-Class Safety Handbook: A Resource for Grades 9 to 12 Physical
Education/Health Education. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth,
2008. Available online at <www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/cur/physhlth/curriculum.html>.
Public Health Agency of Canada. Canada’s Physical Activity Guide for Youth. Ottawa, ON:
Public Health Agency of Canada, 2002. Available online at <www.phac-
aspc.gc.ca/pau-uap/fitness/downloads.html>.
To view a list of physical activities by intensity level (i.e., light, moderate, vigorous), refer
to the following website:
Capital Health. Activity Intensity Classification. Your Health.
<www.capitalhealth.ca/EspeciallyFor/WeightWise/Activity_Intensity_Classifications.htm>.
________________________________________________________________________________

Physical Activity Recall
To develop a realistic and manageable plan for their

NOTE TO TEACHER
physical activity practicum, students need to reflect
on and analyze their current physical activity Physical activity is defined as “all forms
situation. of large-muscle movement, including
sports, dance, games, walking, and
Ask students to think about how they can meet the exercise for fitness and physical well-
being. It may also include physical
requirements of their physical activity practicum by therapy or mobility training for students
completing RM 1–PA. Students recall what their with special needs” (Manitoba
physical activity participation has been for a five- Education, Citizenship and Youth,
day period. They also answer questions related to Implementation of Grades 11 and 12
the physical demands of their potential career/job. Physical Education/Health Education 5).
Once students have completed the questions
individually, ask them to share with the class the potential careers/jobs and the associated
physical activity demands they identified. As a class, attempt to categorize the identified
careers/jobs by their physical activity requirements.
Refer to RM 1–PA: Five-Day Physical Activity Recall.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 1–PA: Five-Day Physical Activity Recall
Name ____________________________________ Date _______________ Class __________________
Instructions
Complete the following Five-Day Physical Activity Recall table, indicating the
5888 days/dates you engaged in physical activities (two of the five days must be weekend days)
5889 types of physical activities in which you participated
5890 amount of time (hours : minutes) you spent participating in activities of various intensity:
5888 Light activities: You begin to notice your breathing, but talking is fairly easy.
5889 Moderate activities: You can hear yourself breathe, but can still talk.
5890 Vigorous activities: You are breathing heavily. It is difficult to talk.
Once you have completed the table, answer the questions that follow.
Five-Day Physical Activity Recall
Day/Date Physical Activity Amount of Time (hours : minutes) and Perceived Exertion
Light Moderate Vigorous
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Total Time
Current Status
23 Is the amount and type of physical activity identified in the table above an accurate reflection
of your physical activity profile? Why or why not?
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
24 Based on the criteria of the physical activity practicum that your teacher has identified for
you and the information you provided in the Five-Day Physical Activity Recall table, how do
you see yourself meeting the requirements for your physical activity practicum?
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 1–PA: Five-Day Physical Activity Recall (Continued)
5888 I am already on track to meet the requirements for my physical activity practicum.
5889 I will be able to meet the requirements for my physical activity practicum with
some additions to my current level of physical activity.
5890 I am currently not active enough to meet the requirements of this course and will
need the assistance of my teacher, friends, and family to do so.
Career/Job Aspirations
23 Identify, in the space provided, three careers/jobs that you envision for yourself in the next five
to ten years. Identify the physical activity demands required to be successful in each career/job.
Careers/Jobs Physical Activity Demands
__________________________ _______________________________________________
_______________________________________________
__________________________ _______________________________________________
_______________________________________________
__________________________ _______________________________________________
_______________________________________________
5888 Examine the physical activity demands of each of the three careers/jobs that you
identified. Are there commonalities? If so, what are they?
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
5889 Now compare the information you recorded in the Five-Day Physical Activity Recall
table and the information you identified for your three potential careers/jobs. Based on
this comparison, how do you see yourself meeting the physical demands of your
potential career/job?
5888 I am already on track to meet the physical demands of my potential career/job.
5889 I will be able to meet the physical demands of my potential career/job with
some additions to my current level of physical activity.
5890 I am currently not active enough to meet the physical demands of my potential
career/job. Comments
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Lesson 2: Managing Risks Related to Physical Activity
Introduction
In this lesson students begin to identify physical activities that interest them and that
contribute to the health-related fitness components. Students also begin to understand
that participating in physical activities involves certain levels of risk, but identifying these
risks in advance may help reduce or minimize the occurrence of injury.
________________________________________________________________________________

11.PA.2 Demonstrate an understanding of the risk-management process and
responsibilities related to physical activity participation.
________________________________________________________________________________
Health-Related Fitness Components
On the overhead projector or on the chalkboard, write the following health-related fitness
components:
cardiorespiratory endurance
muscular strength
muscular endurance
flexibility
As an activating strategy, brainstorm and discuss with the class the physical activities that
could contribute to each of these health-related fitness components. (These components
are addressed in Module B, Lesson 6.) Note that many physical activities contribute to
more than one health-related fitness component; therefore, ask students to identify the
primary contribution.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Module A, Lesson 2
79
REFERENCE
For more information on the health-related fitness components, including definitions, refer
to the following resource:
Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth. Guidelines for Fitness Assessment in Manitoba
Schools: A Resource for Physical Education/Health Education. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba
Education, Citizenship and Youth, 2004. 9. Available online at
________________________________________________________________________________
Individual Preferences for Physical Activity Participation
No two people are created alike. By understanding this, we can begin to appreciate that
everyone participates in various physical activities for different reasons. Some may not
participate at all, while others participate for recreational purposes or for the thrill of
competition. Some enjoy the solitude of being physically active outdoors, while others
enjoy the company of a workout/exercise partner or the camaraderie of a team, or a
little of each, depending on the circumstances.
________________________________________________________________________________
Suggestion for Instruction /
Assessment Where Am I Now?
To begin planning the physical activity practicum effectively, have students use RM 2–PA
to reflect on the physical activities that they enjoy participating in (or would consider
participating in) with friends, with family, or individually.
Refer to RM 2–PA: Where Am I Now?
________________________________________________________________________________
80 _____________________________________________________________________________
Risk Factors Related to Physical Activity
Participating in physical activity contributes to a sense of well-being and to overall health.

It also involves taking educated and calculated risks. To ensure participants’ safety and to
minimize the risk of injury, it is necessary to understand the inherent or potential risks
that may be involved during participation in any physical activity.
The risk factors that may be involved during participation in physical activities include
level of instruction
level of supervision
facilities/environment
equipment
clothing/footwear
personal and other considerations
OUT-of-Class Safety Handbook: A Resource for Grades 9 to 12 Physical Education/Health

Education (Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth) provides general safety guidelines
and Physical Activity Safety Checklists to assist in planning for student participation in a
variety of physical activities and managing risk factors for each activity. Each activity has
been assigned a risk factor rating (RFR) on a scale of 1 to 4, with an RFR of 4 representing
the highest risk.
REFERENCE
For more information on safety and managing risk factors, refer to the following resource:
Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth. OUT-of-Class Safety Handbook: A Resource
for Grades 9 to 12 Physical Education/Health Education. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba
Education, Citizenship and Youth, 2008. Available online at
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Module A, Lesson 2
81
Physical Activity Inventory

NOTE TO TEACHER
Using RM 3–PA, students can begin to
The following considerations need to be kept in
identify the physical activities that they will be mind in selecting physical activities for the
including in their physical activity practicum. physical activity practicum:
Students can choose activities by Activities: It is important for students to
the type of activity identify all the physical activities in which
they may take part, even if participation is a
the health-related fitness component(s) remote possibility. By identifying all potential
to which the activity contributes activities, students can be taken through the
process of managing risks for activities that
the level of risk involved in the activity have a similar RFR, with teacher assistance.
Risk: Students should consider the number
of physical activities they have selected from
Refer to RM 3–PA: Physical Activity each RFR category. If all the activities that
Inventory (available in Word and students select have an RFR of 3 or 4, they
Excel formats). may be in a situation of having too much
risk to manage.
The Excel version of the Physical Activity Intensity: To meet the course
requirements, students need to choose
Inventory is available on the CD-ROM activities of moderate to vigorous intensity
version of this document, as well as that will contribute to their development of
online at cardiorespiratory endurance (heart, lungs,
<www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/cur/physhlth/ circulatory system) plus one or more of the
curriculum.html>. other health-related fitness components
(muscular strength, muscular endurance,
and flexibility).
________________________________________________________________________________
82 _____________________________________________________________________________
RM 2–PA: Where Am I Now?
Name ______________________________________ Date __________________ Class ___________
Complete the following table, listing the

Physical activity is defined as “all forms of large-muscle
physical activities you are currently movement, including sports, dance, games, walking, and
involved in or would like to consider exercise for fitness and physical well-being. It may also
participating in, given the opportunity. include physical therapy or mobility training for students
Some activities could be included under with special needs” (Manitoba Education, Citizenship and
more than one heading. Youth, Implementation of Grades 11 and 12 Physical
Education/Health Education 5).
I enjoy participating in or would consider participating in the following physical activities on

my own and/or with the identified groups.
Individually With Friends With Family Members
_____________________________________________________________________________
Module A, Lesson 2
83
RM 3–PA: Physical Activity Inventory
This Physical Activity Inventory is intended to assist students in identifying activities that they
would like to include in their physical activity practicum. Students may choose physical activities
based on the type of activity, the health-related fitness component(s) to which the activity
contributes, the level of risk involved in the activity, or a combination of these factors.
A Physical Activity Safety Checklist is available for each of the activities listed. These checklists
contain information about managing risk, under the following risk factors:
level of instruction
level of supervision
facilities/environment
equipment
clothing/footwear
REFERENCE
For copies of the Physical Activity Safety Checklists, refer to the following resource:
Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth. OUT-of-Class Safety Handbook: A Resource for Grades
9 to 12 Physical Education/Health Education. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education, Citizenship
and Youth, 2008. Available online at <www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/cur/physhlth/curriculum.html>.
Codes for Physical Activity Inventory

The following codes are used in the Physical Activity Inventory.
Code for Type of Activity Code for Risk Factor Rating (RFR)
AL Active Living RFR Level of safety concerns; recommended
instruction and supervision.
AP Alternative Pursuits
23 There are few safety concerns for this physical
CO Combative Activities
activity; little or no qualified instruction or adult
FIT Fitness Activities supervision is required.
IT Invasion/Territory-Type 24 There are some safety concerns for this physical
Sports/Games activity; quality instruction is recommended, and little
NW Net/Wall-Type Sports/Games or no adult supervision is required.
RG Rhythmic Gymnastic-Type Activities 25 There are several safety concerns for this
SF Striking/Fielding-Type Sports/Games physical activity; qualified instruction is required,
and adult supervision is recommended.
TG Target-Type Sports/Games
26 There is a high level of safety concern for this
physical activity; qualified instruction and adult
supervision are required.
Code for Health-Related Fitness Component

Indicates that the activity contributes to the specific health-related fitness component.
Continued
84 _____________________________________________________________________________

Physical Activity Inventory
Type Health-Related Fitness Components
Cardio-
of respiratory Muscular Muscular
Interest All Activities Activity Endurance Strength Endurance Flexibility Risk
Aerobics—Dance FIT 2
Aerobics—Step FIT 2
Aerobics— FIT 4
Water/Aqua
Aikido CO 4
Archery TG 4
Athletics—Jumps FIT 3
Athletics—Long- FIT 2
Distance Running
Athletics—Middle- FIT 2
Distance Running
Athletics—Sprints, FIT 2
Relays, Hurdles
Athletics—Throws FIT 4
Backpacking AP 3
Badminton NW 2
Bandy IT 3
Baseball SF 2
Basketball IT 2
Biathlon AP 4
Bocce TG 1
Bowling—5-Pin, TG 1
10-Pin
Boxing CO 4
Broomball IT 3
Calisthenics FIT 1
Canoeing/Kayaking/ AP 4
Rowing
Canoe/Kayak
Tripping AP 4
(Wilderness/
Whitewater)
Catch (For safety, 1
see Low-Organized AL
Games)
Cheerleading RG 4
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________ 85
Module A, Lesson 2
Physical Activity Inventory (Continued)
Cardio-
Interest All Activities of respiratory Muscular Muscular Risk
Activity Endurance Strength Endurance Flexibility
Circuit Training FIT 2
Climbing—Wall, 4
Rock, Bouldering, AP
Ice Tower
Cricket SF 2
Croquet (For safety, 1
see Low-Organized TG
Games)
Cross-Country FIT 2
Running
Curling TG 2
Cycling—BMX,
Cyclocross, Mountain AP 3
Bike, Road Racing,
Track Racing
Cycling—Indoor/ FIT 1
Stationary
Cycling— AL 2
Recreational
Cycling—Trips AP 3
Dance—Ballet RG 2
Dancing—Ballroom RG 2
Dancing—Folk RG 2
Dancing—Hip Hop RG 2
Dancing—Hoop RG 2
Dancing—Line RG 2
Dancing—Square RG 2
Dancing—Tap RG 2
Diving— 4
Springboard, RG
Platform
Dodging Games (For
safety, see Low- FIT 1–4
Organized Games)
Continued
86 _____________________________________________________________________________
Cardio-
Fencing CO 4
Field Hockey IT 3
Fitness Training FIT 3
(Exercise Machines)
Fitness Training
(Small Equipment)
(e.g., Stretch Bands, FIT 2
Physio Balls, Jump
Ropes, Agility
Ladders, Medicine
Balls)
Football—Flag IT 2
Football—Tackle IT 4
Frisbee (For safety, 1
see Low-Organized AL
Games)
Geocaching AP 4
Goal Ball IT 4
Golf TG 2
Gymnastics— 4
General, Tumbling, RG
Artistic
Hacky Sack (For 1
safety, see Low- AL
Organized Games)
Handball—1-Wall, NW 1
4-Wall
Hiking AP 2
Hockey—Ice IT 4
Hockey— IT 4
Roller/Inline
Hockey-Type
Games—Ball, Floor, IT 3
Road, Floorball, Gym
Ringette, Shinny
Horseback Riding— 4
Western, English AP
Saddle
House and Yard AL 1
Work
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
Module A, Lesson 2
87
Cardio-
Jogging FIT 1
Judo CO 4
Jump Rope (For 1
safety, see Fitness FIT
Training)
Karate CO 4
Kickball (Soccer- AL 1
Baseball)
Kickboxing CO 4
Lacrosse—Box, Field IT 4
Lacrosse—Soft IT 3
Lawn Bowling TG 1
Lawn Mowing AL 3
Low-Organized AL Effect on health-related fitness will vary from one 1–4
Games game/activity to another.
Martial Arts CO 4
Orienteering AP 2
Paddleball NW 2
Pilates (For safety, FIT 2
see Fitness Training)
Qigong FIT 2
Racquetball NW 2
Rhythmic RG 2
Gymnastics
Ringette IT 4
Rock Climbing (For AP 4
safety, see Climbing)
Rowing—Ergometer
(For safety, see FIT 3
Fitness Training
[Exercise Machines])
Continued
88 _____________________________________________________________________________
Cardio-
Rowing—Sport (For
safety, see AP 4
Canoeing/Kayaking/
Rowing)
Rugby—Flag IT 3
Rugby—Tackle IT 4
Sailing/Yachting AP 4
Scuba Diving AP 4
Sepak Takraw NW 2
Skateboarding AL 2
Skating—Figure RG 2
Skating—Ice AL 2
Skating—
Inline/Roller AL 2
(Indoor, Outdoor)
Skiing—Alpine AP 4
Skiing—Cross- AP 2
Country
Skiing—Water AP 4
Snorkelling AP 4
Snowboarding AP 3
Snowshoeing AP 2
Soccer IT 2
Softball—Slo Pitch, SF 2
Modified, Fast Pitch
Speed Skating AP 3
Spinning (For safety,
see Cycling—Indoor/ FIT 1
Stationary)
Squash NW 2
Stretch Banding (For
safety, see Fitness FIT 1
Training)
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
Module A, Lesson 2
89
Cardio-
Stretching (For
safety, see Fitness FIT 1
Training [Small
Equipment])
Swimming—Open FIT 4
Water
Swimming—Pool FIT 4
Table Tennis NW 2
Tae Bo FIT 2
Tae Kwon Do CO 4
Tai Chi FIT 1
Tchoukball IT 2
Team Handball IT 2
Tennis NW 2
Tobogganing, AP 3
Sledding, Tubing
Triathlon FIT 4
Tumbling (For 4
safety, see RG
Gymnastics)
Ultimate IT 2
Volleyball NW 2
Walking AL 1
Water Polo IT 4
Weightlifting FIT 3
Weight (Strength/ FIT 3
Resistance) Training
Windsurfing/ AP 4
Sailboarding
Wrestling—
Freestyle, Greco- CO 4
Roman
Yoga FIT 2
90 _____________________________________________________________________________
Lesson 3: Implementing the Safety and Physical Activity Plan
Introduction
In this lesson students begin the process of identifying inherent risks in the physical
activities that they have selected for their physical activity practicum. In addition, students
demonstrate the ability to access appropriate information to make informed decisions
about managing risk and safety related to participation in physical activity. They also
begin to implement their physical activity plan and record their physical activity
participation.
________________________________________________________________________________

participation.
________________________________________________________________________________
Personal Physical Activity Plan

Now that students have identified the activities in which they will participate for their
physical activity practicum, they need to start putting together the components in a
manner that they understand and can adhere to.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Putting Together the Physical Activity Plan
Have students begin putting together their personal physical activity plan for approval
and sign-off, using a physical activity planner such as the one provided in RM 4–PA. This
tool can be used to identify to parents the physical activities that students have selected
as part of their physical activity plan.
Refer to RM 4–PA: Personal Physical Activity Plan.
________________________________________________________________________________
Safety and Risk Management

The risk-management process is an essential part of a personal physical activity plan. Risk
management is not about eliminating risk or injury. Rather, the process of risk
management involves identifying the risk inherent in any physical activity and then
identifying strategies to deal with the identified risk. By doing this, the risk is minimized
and, if an injury does occur, the injury is minimized because of the proactive risk
management.
________________________________________________________________________________
Planning for Risk Management

NOTE TO TEACHER
Have students complete at least two Safety
Physical Activity Safety Checklists
and Risk-Management Planner sheets
(provided in RM 5–PA) for physical Teachers must provide students either with copies of the
individual Physical Activity Safety Checklists or with access
activities that they have chosen for their to OUT-of-Class Safety Handbook: A Resource for Grades
physical activity plan that have the highest 9 to 12 Physical Education/Health Education (Manitoba
risk factor rating. Education, Citizenship and Youth) in which the checklists
appear. Physical Activity Safety Checklists must be
Refer to RM 5–PA: Safety and included with the student’s physical activity plan that goes
Risk-Management Planner. home for parent approval.
Once students have completed the Safety Addition of Physical Activities

and Risk-Management Planner sheets, they The process of adding new activities to a physical activity
must compare their physical activity plan plan once a plan has been signed by the teacher and
parent will be unique to each school/division. The process
to the appropriate Physical Activity Safety of including activities not identified in the Physical Activity
Checklists (available from the teacher) to Inventory or on the school/division-approved activities list
check for accuracy. will also be unique to each school/division. Teachers are
encouraged to be familiar with these processes and
outline them for students and parents as necessary.
_____________________________________________________________________________
New physical activities may be added to a physical activity plan once the original plan
has been signed by the teacher and approved by the parent. Activities may also be
included that are not listed on the Physical Activity Inventory (see RM 3–PA).
REFERENCES
Schools: A Resource for Physical Education/Health Education. Winnipeg, MB:
Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth, 2004.
---. Implementation of Grades 11 and 12 Physical Education/Health Education: A Policy
Document. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth, 2007.
---. OUT-of-Class Safety Handbook: A Resource for Grades 9 to 12 Physical
Education/Health Education. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education, Citizenship and
Youth, 2008.
These resources are available online at
________________________________________________________________________________
Finalizing the Physical Activity Plan

The following steps outline a process to be considered when finalizing and obtaining
approval for a student’s physical activity plan:
5888 The physical activity plan, developed in accordance with the specified criteria,
should include
5888 selected physical activities that contribute to cardiorespiratory endurance
plus one or more of the other health-related fitness components (muscular
strength, muscular endurance, and flexibility)
5889 a risk-management plan
5890 Physical Activity Safety Checklists for the selected physical activities
5889 Once the plan is developed, the teacher signs a letter addressed to the
parents explaining the information they are receiving.
Refer to RM 6–PA: Sample Cover Letter for Physical Activity Practicum.
23 The Parent Declaration and Consent Form and the Student Declaration Form must be
completed, as applicable, before a student begins implementing the OUT-of-class
physical activity plan. As these forms will be specific to each school/division, teachers
need to be aware of their content and location. These forms need to be signed by the
parent for students under 18. There is also a Student Declaration and Consent Form
for students 18 and over.
_____________________________________________________________________________
23 The personal physical activity plan, the Parent Declaration and Consent Form, and the
Student Declaration Form are to be returned to the school. The teacher records that the
appropriate forms have been signed and collected and keeps these until the end of the
course.
Implementing the Physical Activity Plan

Now it is time for students to begin
implementing their physical activity plan and NOTE TO TEACHER
enjoying the physical activities they have Teachers are encouraged to confer regularly with
chosen. Students also need to have a tool to individual students to monitor and discuss their
record their physical activity participation. progress related to their physical activity plan
and other elements of the course.
Recording Physical Activity Participation
Students need to record their participation in physical activities and submit the record
to the teacher. The students’ record will include
5888 details of the physical activity participation on a schedule decided upon by the
teacher
5889 an assessment of the amount of time spent in the development of health-related
fitness components
5890 daily reflections of satisfaction with certain health habits. (Reflections may provide
possible explanations for the level of satisfaction or feelings about the day in general.)
The following tools are provided to assist students with recording their participation.
Refer to RM 7–PA: Physical Activity Log (available in Word and Excel formats).
The Excel version of the Physical Activity Log is a more comprehensive log than the Word
version. It is available on the CD-ROM version of this document, as well as online at
Completing the Physical Activity Plan

At the conclusion of the course, parents will need to sign a form indicating that the
information that the students have provided to the teacher is an accurate record of the
students’ participation in the OUT-of-class physical activity practicum. Students who are
18 years of age or older will need to have their sign-off form signed by their parents or
an authorized adult.
Refer to RM 8–PA: Sample Sign-off Form for Completion of OUT-of-Class
Physical Activity Practicum (Form for Parent/Guardian).
Refer to RM 9–PA: Sample Sign-off Form for Completion of OUT-of-Class
Physical Activity Practicum (Form for Authorized Adult).
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 4–PA: Personal Physical Activity Plan
Name ______________________________________ Date __________________ Class _____________
Physical Activity Frequency of Estimated Risk Safety

Activity Time Factor Checklists
(in Minutes) Rating Included
(RFR)
Examples: Indoor Soccer 3 practices + 1 game 2 9
per week
Inline Skating 5 days—to and from 2 9
school
Student Comments:
Teacher Comments:
___________________________________ ________________________________
Teacher Signature Date
The teacher’s signature is an acknowledgement of the following:

23 The student has met the criteria for formulating his or her personal physical activity plan.
24 The student has demonstrated an understanding of how to manage risk and take appropriate steps
to participate safely in physical activity.
25 The student is aware of the safety guidelines information and associated responsibilities for
discussion with and approval by his or her parent/guardian.
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 5–PA: Safety and Risk-Management Planner
Name ______________________________________ Date __________________ Class ___________
Taking responsibility for safety is a very important part of the OUT-of-class component of the
Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles course. The following questions will assist you in managing
the risks while participating in any physical activity:
5888 Do you understand the safety rules related to the physical activity?
5889 Is the activity suitable to your age, ability, and physical condition?
5890 Is the activity suitable to any medical conditions or special health care needs that you
might have?
5891 Do you understand the correct form or technique of the exercises or skills needed to practise?
5892 Do you understand the risks associated with the physical activity and ways to avoid
the dangers?
5893 Is the equipment you will be using suitable and in good condition?
5894 Is the facility or playing area you will be using safe?
5895 Will appropriate instruction and/or supervision be provided to you in light of the
danger or risk associated with the physical activity?
5896 Have you discussed your choice of physical activities with your parent and
physical education/health education teacher?
I understand the risks associated with (name of physical activity) _________________________ , which has
a risk factor rating (RFR) of _____ , and I intend to respect the following strategies to minimize some of the
potential risks I can anticipate during my participation in this activity.
Risk Areas Potential Risks Involved Personal Strategies to Minimize Risks
Level of Instruction

Level of Supervision

Equipment

Facility/Environment

Clothing/Footwear

Personal and Other
Considerations*

__________
23 Special health care needs, skill level, experience, accessibility, and so on.
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 5–PA: Safety and Risk-Management Planner (Continued)
Risk Factor Rating (RFR) Scale

RFR Level of safety concerns; recommended instruction and supervision. Examples
1 There are few safety concerns for this physical activity; little or no qualified Walking
instruction or adult supervision required. Stretching
2 There are some safety concerns for this physical activity; qualified instruction Racquetball
is recommended, and little or no adult supervision is required. Ice Skating
3 There are several safety concerns for this physical activity; qualified instruction Snowboarding
is required, and adult supervision is recommended. Field Hockey
4 There is a high level of safety concerns for this physical activity; qualified Swimming
instruction and adult supervision are required. Karate
Reference:
For more information on safety and risk management for physical activities, go to the following
school/division website to access the OUT-of-Class Safety Handbook: A Resource for Grades 9 to 12
Physical Education/Health Education (Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth):
_____________________________________________________________________________________
(Insert school/division website address where this safety information may be found.)
If you do not have access to the Internet, ask your teacher for a print copy of the Physical Activity
Safety Checklists for the selected physical activities.
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 6–PA: Sample Cover Letter for Physical Activity Practicum
Date ___________________________
Dear Parent/Guardian:
The health of our students is a responsibility that our school and Physical Education/
Health Education Department take very seriously. Taking part in physical education/
health education and being physically active can have a positive impact on students’
health and well-being. To this end, our department’s goal is to empower your
son/daughter to adopt an active healthy lifestyle by providing the tools he/she needs to
succeed.
Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles Course
The goal of this physical education/health education course is to have parents, students,
and schools work together to help youth
23 take greater ownership of their physical fitness
24 promote the discovery of activities suited to their own individual interests
25 encourage active healthy lifestyles that persist into their futures
As part of this course, your son/daughter will be involved in learning activities in the
following core areas:
23 fitness management
24 social impact of sport
25 mental-emotional health
26 substance use and abuse prevention
Your son/daughter will also be required to plan, implement, and record his/her
participation in the OUT-of-class physical activity practicum for a minimum of 55
hours. The details are contained within the attached physical activity plan.
Based on the physical activities your son/daughter has chosen for the OUT-of-class
component of this course, safety guidelines have been provided, as part of the attached
plan, to inform you and your son/daughter of the safety concerns and/or standards to
consider when selecting and participating in the physical activities. The intent is not to
restrict your son’s/daughter’s physical activity participation, but rather to assist in the
process of identifying inherent or potential risks and recommending strategies/safest
practices to manage these risks and to minimize the possibility of injury during
participation.
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 6–PA: Sample Cover Letter for Physical Activity Practicum (Continued)
The suggested risk-management strategies are considered minimum standards for physical
activity in an organized or formal setting. However, some of these strategies may not apply to all
situations (e.g., home-based, recreational, or modified physical activities). Many variables will
need to be taken into consideration when determining what level of instruction or supervision is
appropriate for your son’s/daughter’s participation in selected physical activities, as well as
determining appropriate safety practices related to the facilities/environment, the equipment,
and the clothing/footwear used for the activities. Examples of personal and other variables
include level of risk, medical/physical condition, skill level, experience, accessibility, intensity,
and type of pursuit (e.g., competitive/recreational, individual/group).
Your involvement is important!
Your son’s/daughter’s success in the Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles course will require
coordinated and supportive communication between you and your son/daughter as well as with
me, as the teacher of this course. The first step is to review the attached physical activity plan with
your son/daughter. Then, once you approve of the specified intentions, please sign the attached
Parent Declaration and Consent Form. Your son/daughter also needs to sign the Student
Declaration Form. Once these forms have been signed, the plan and forms are to be returned to
me promptly.
Throughout the duration of the course I will be meeting at predetermined times with your
son/daughter. The nature of these individual meetings will be to check on the progress of your
son’s/daughter’s OUT-of-class physical activity practicum as well as review his/her
understanding of related topics discussed in class.
I encourage you to engage your son/daughter in conversation about his/her progress and to
encourage him/her in pursuing personal physical activity goals and interests. If at any time you
have questions/concerns, please feel free to contact me by telephone (___- _____) or by email at
_________________________.
Actively yours,
_________________________________________
Teacher Signature
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 7–PA: Physical Activity Log*
Name _____________________________ Class _________________________

Month _____________________________ Week of ______________________
Activity Description Duration Intensity Personal Reflection

(Light, Moderate,
Vigorous)
Example Walked to school 20 min. Light Felt great today. Had a good
Jogged after school 30 min. Vigorous sleep. Ate too much at dinner.
Mowed the lawn 15 min. Moderate Feel a bit stressed about math
test tomorrow.
Day 1

Day 2

Day 3

Day 4

Day 5

Day 6

Day 7

Totals
Consider ways to increase your physical activity:

5888 Add activity. Find a new activity that you enjoy. Walk for 15 to 30 minutes before you
sit down for your favourite TV show or as a break during your work day.
5889 Trade active time for inactive time. Take a walk after dinner, ride an exercise bike or
do curl-ups while watching TV, walk to return video rentals or to pick up small grocery
items.
5890 Do more of what you are already doing. Walk at a faster pace, walk for 30
minutes instead of 20, or walk five times a week instead of three times.
5891 Work a little harder. Turn your walks into power walks or jogs.
__________
23 Source: Dairy Council of California. “Physical Activity Journal.” Meals Matter: Eating for Health—Health Topics. 2005.
<www.mealsmatter.org>. Adapted with permission of Dairy Council of California.
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 8–PA: Sample Sign-off Form for Completion of
OUT-of-Class Physical Activity Practicum (Form for
Parent/Guardian)
Dear Parent/Guardian:
Please review this form and, upon agreement, provide your signature.
I _______________________________ parent/guardian of _____________________________

Name of Parent/Guardian Name of Son/Daughter
do hereby certify and acknowledge the following:
5888 My son/daughter has participated in the physical activities as selected for

his/her OUT-of-class physical activity practicum.
5889 My son/daughter has accurately recorded his/her participation in the selected
physical activities for the OUT-of- class physical activity practicum.
_________________________________ _____________________________
Parent/Guardian Signature Date
Student Sign-off
11776 ________________________________
Name of Student
certify that this record is an accurate account of my physical activity participation in the
OUT-of-class physical activity practicum.
__________________________________ ______________________________
Student Signature Date
Date Received _____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 9–PA: Sample Sign-off Form for Completion of
OUT-of-Class Physical Activity Practicum (Form for
Authorized Adult)
Dear Authorized Adult:
Please review this form and, upon agreement, provide your signature.
I _______________________________ the authorized adult for __________________________

Name of Authorized Adult Name of Student
do hereby certify and acknowledge the following:
0 The above-named student has participated in the physical activities as selected for his/her
OUT-of-class physical activity practicum.
1 The above-named student has accurately recorded his/her participation in the selected
physical activities for the OUT-of-class physical activity practicum.
_________________________________ _____________________________
Authorized Adult Signature Date
Please indicate your relationship with this student (e.g., parent, aunt, uncle, coach, instructor):
_________________________________________________________________________________
Student Sign-off
0_________________________________
Name of Student
certify that this record is an accurate account of my physical activity participation in

the OUT-of-class physical activity practicum.
___________________________________ _____________________________
Student Signature Date
Date Received _____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
MODULE B:
FITNESS MANAGEMENT
Introduction
Lesson 1: Physical Activity for Optimal Health

and Fitness
Lesson 2: Changing Physical Activity Behaviour
Lesson 3: Understanding Your Personal Motivation for

Physical Activity
Lesson 4: Addressing Barriers to Physical Activity
Lesson 5: Making Physical Activity a Habit
Lesson 6: Planning for Physical Fitness

MODULE B: FITNESS MANAGEMENT
11.FM.1 Evaluate the benefits of selected types of physical activities in the

development of fitness and in the prevention of disease at various stages
of life.
11.FM.2 Examine factors that have an impact on the development and

implementation of and adherence to a personal physical activity plan.

fitness, training principles, FITT (frequency, intensity, time, type) principle
11.FM.5 Design, implement, evaluate, and revise an exercise routine that contributes
to the health-related fitness components.
MODULE B: FITNESS MANAGEMENT
Introduction
People need to be physically active to attain and maintain good health. Our fast-paced
modern lifestyle with all its conveniences has made us progressively more inactive, and that
is dangerous for our health. Sitting in front of the TV or computer screen, riding in the car,
and using elevators all contribute to our inactivity. Physical inactivity is as dangerous to our
health as smoking (Public Health Agency of Canada, “Why Should I Be Active?”).
Numerous health risks are associated with physical inactivity, including osteoporosis,
type 2 diabetes, cancer, heart attack, and stroke. Conversely, being active has many benefits,
such as improved self-esteem, increased work capacity, and better pain tolerance. Simply
being aware of these risks and benefits has not been enough to make us adopt active
lifestyles. To adopt active healthy lifestyles, people require a change in attitude, along with
motivation to practise new active behaviours.
The Public Health Agency of Canada states that youth should accumulate 90 minutes of
physical activity every day, of which 30 minutes should be of vigorous intensity and 60
minutes should be of moderate intensity, to stay healthy or to improve health (Canada’s
Physical Activity Guide for Youth 2). This does not have to come from one bout of exercise, but
can be accumulated from brief intervals of activity throughout the day, such as climbing
stairs, riding bike, and so on. The majority of Canadians are not physically active enough in
their leisure time to reap any health benefits.
REFERENCES
For additional information, refer to the following guides:
---. “Why Should I Be Active?” Canada’s Physical Activity Guide to Healthy Active Living
for Older Adults. 8 Oct. 2003. <www.phac-aspc.gc.ca/pau-uap/paguide/older/why.html>.
In this module students examine ways of changing physical activity behaviour, discuss the
barriers to physical activity and some of the ways to overcome them, and learn how to
adhere to a physical activity program once started.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Module B, Introduction 105
Module B: Fitness Management contains six lessons:
0 Lesson 1: Physical Activity for Optimal Health and Fitness
1 Lesson 2: Changing Physical Activity Behaviour
2 Lesson 3: Understanding Your Personal Motivation for Physical Activity
3 Lesson 4: Addressing Barriers to Physical Activity
4 Lesson 5: Making Physical Activity a Habit
5 Lesson 6: Planning for Physical Fitness
Resource Masters to support the lessons are provided at the end of most lessons.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Lesson 1: Physical Activity for Optimal Health and Fitness
“Lack of activity destroys the good condition of every human being, while movement
and methodical physical exercise save it and preserve it.”
—Plato (427–347 BCE)
Introduction
Participating in physical activity and exercise are important health maintenance strategies
for people of all ages—children, youth, adults, and seniors. If being physically active is to
become a part of a person’s lifestyle, it will be important to make a positive emotional
connection to the activities of choice. In other words, there needs to be a feeling that
physical activity is enjoyable and fun. Part of feeling that physical activity/exercise is fun is
achieved by simply making it a habit.
This lesson focuses on the many benefits of physical activity and exercise. The benefits are
organized into three categories: physical fitness, health, and mental-emotional benefits.
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
Key Understandings
0 Physical activity contributes to fitness, health, and mental-emotional benefits.

1 Specific benefits are associated with selected physical activities.
2 There are key benefits of physical activities at various life stages.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Module B, Lesson 1 107
Essential Questions
0 What are the health benefits of fitness that affect five systems of the body?
1 Why are the effects of exercise referred to as systemic effects?
2 What benefits of exercise affect the mental-emotional health of an individual?
3 What benefits of physical activity may be different or the same for specific age groups?
________________________________________________________________________________
Benefits of Physical Activity and Exercise
To help students think about and identify the numerous benefits of physical activity and
exercise, have them reflect on the following:
0 What makes or would make being physically active or exercising fun for you?
1 List as many benefits of physical activity and exercise as you can.
Once students have had an opportunity to list the benefits individually, have them work
in groups to compile a group list. Ask students to discuss and sort the identified benefits
into three categories: fitness, health, and mental-emotional benefits. Discuss any identified
benefits that do not fit into any of the three categories and have students create their own
category.
________________________________________________________________________________
Fitness Benefits of Physical Activity
Regular physical activity increases the body’s capacity and efficiency for work (performing
movement), reduces the risk of injury and disease, and positively affects body composition
(increased muscle mass, increased bone mass, and decreased fat mass). Movement places
increased demands on the cardiovascular, respiratory, muscular, skeletal, and nervous
systems of the body. Each system benefits from an activity plan that has consistent and
progressive increases in the level of work intensity (activities that are harder to do and take
longer to complete). The body’s systems adapt to the increasing load, resulting in greater
efficiency in these systems and thereby resulting in an increased ability to perform work.
In other words, the body is able work longer and harder than it was able to before. After a
person has achieved a new level of fitness, everyday tasks are no longer as difficult as they
once were.
_____________________________________________________________________________
We do not have to spend hours in a gymnasium to gain the fitness benefits of physical
activity. Every time we throw a ball, swim a lap, or climb a flight of stairs, our five main
body systems are adapting. If these activities are consistent enough, our overall fitness will
improve.
The human body responds well to consistent and progressive physical activity. Substantial
improvements may be anticipated in cardiovascular and respiratory (heart, circulatory, and
lung) function, muscular strength and endurance, flexibility, body composition, and the
ability to respond to psychological stress.
Some of the more noticeable changes resulting from physical activity may include
0 increased heart and circulatory function and endurance, seen as a lower heart rate for a
given activity and a lower resting heart rate
1 increased muscular strength, seen as an ability to lift heavier loads or an increased ease
in lifting lighter loads
2 increased muscular endurance, seen as the ability to execute more repetitions without
rest
3 increased bone strength, seen as a decreased risk of fracture or injury
4 increased joint range of motion or flexibility, seen as an ability to reach or move into
body positions impossible to attain previously
5 increased physical work capacity, seen as an ability to complete more work in a single
bout (e.g., shovelling a driveway with lower risk of injury or adverse effect)
6 improved body composition (more muscle, stronger bones, and less body fat)
Health Benefits of Physical Activity
The health benefits of physical activity and exercise are well researched and documented. In
addition to benefiting the cardiovascular, respiratory, muscular, skeletal, and nervous
systems, physical activity and exercise also have a positive effect on the endocrine
(hormonal responses) and immune (ability to defend against infection) systems. Because
physical activity and exercise have such a wide-ranging effect on all the body’s systems they
have been referred to as having a systemic effect. Systemic means system wide—across all
body systems.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Evidence shows that regular physical activity and exercise can reduce the risk of many
diseases and conditions, as well as having many other health benefits:
0 Physical activity and exercise reduce the risk of diseases and conditions such as
0 heart attack or heart disease
1 second heart attack
2 stroke
3 colon, lung, breast, prostate, and many other cancers
4 high cholesterol and triglycerides (fats)
5 high blood pressure (hypertension)
6 abnormal blood sugar levels
7 type 2 diabetes
8 osteoporosis (reduced bone density)
9 pain
10 arthritis and total hip or knee replacements
11 depression and anxiety
12 sleep apnea
1 Physical activity and exercise can also result in benefits such as
0 improved pain tolerance
1 improved self-esteem
2 improved immune system
3 better posture and balance
4 decreased incidence of unintended falls
5 greater energy
6 improved sleeping habits
7 faster recovery from injury or surgery
8 increased high-density lipoproteins (HDL, or the “good” cholesterol)
9 increased potential to achieve and maintain a healthy body weight by
burning calories
10 improved work capacity
11 improved nervous system (better neurons)
_____________________________________________________________________________
Mental-Emotional Benefits of Physical Activity
Physical activity participation provides children and youth with opportunities for growth
and development far beyond the obvious health benefits. Participation in sport, exercise,
and physical activity also helps individuals
0 develop social skills, such as sharing, taking turns, cooperating, and learning about
winning and losing
1 develop physical skills (e.g., coordination, posture, balance), locomotor skills
(e.g., running), and manipulation skills (e.g., using a racquet or hockey stick),
which contribute to a person’s self-efficacy
2 develop a sense of belonging (when doing things with others, either in casual or
organized activities and sports)
3 develop family relationships (when parents play and exercise with their children
and support their children’s sports)
4 achieve academically in school
5 prevent or control risky behaviours, such as the use of tobacco, alcohol, or other
substances, unhealthy diets, or violence
6 develop increased self-discipline, greater self-esteem, and a healthier body image
7 increase opportunities to take on leadership roles, deal with adversity, and develop the
ability to manage time
________________________________________________________________________________
Benefits of Physical Activities/Sports for Different Age Groups
Divide the class into six teams. Ask two teams (each team working independently of
the other) to identify at least five common physical activities/sports in which children
take part. Two different teams identify the same for adolescents, and two for adults.
Have each team share its list of common physical activities/sports with the other team
assigned to the same age group. From the combined list, the two teams
0 select the top five physical activities/sports for a given age group
1 identify (on chart paper or the chalk board) the key health and fitness benefits of each
of the top five physical activities/sports as it relates to a given age group
Each pair of teams then shares with the class the physical activities/sports that could have
the greatest health and fitness benefits for a specific age group (children, adolescents,
adults), and provides reasons for its decisions. Finally, have a class discussion to identify the
common physical activities/sports that could have the greatest health and fitness benefits
among the three age groups.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Lesson 2: Changing Physical Activity Behaviour
Introduction
This lesson focuses on the Stages of Change model, which has been used to help people
adopt new healthy behaviours and dispense with unhealthy behaviours. Identifying where
we are along the Stages of Change continuum can assist us in making desired change. The
learning experiences in this lesson will help students understand their own stage of change
in relation to physical activity and the processes they have used or could use to facilitate
their desired change.
________________________________________________________________________________
11.FM.2 Examine factors that have an impact on the development and implementation of
and adherence to a personal physical activity plan.
Examples: intrinsic and extrinsic motivation, personal interests, personal health,
family history, environment, finances, culture, level of risk
________________________________________________________________________________
Key Understandings
0 People progress along a continuum known as the Stages of Change when changing their
behaviour.
1 Each stage of change is associated with specific characteristics.
2 There are specific approaches to assisting individuals with adopting healthy
behaviours, depending upon where they are along the Stages of Change continuum.
________________________________________________________________________________
Essential Questions
0 What are the stages in the Stages of Change model, and how can you move from one
stage to the next?
1 In the processes of change, what two cues can be used to move from one stage of change
to another? Why are these cues important?
2 How do the processes of change support the Stages of Change model?
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Physical Activity and Exercise Behaviour
We are all born with a need and a desire to be physically active. This need and desire are
kept alive through successful participation in physical activity, the freedom to explore
various movement experiences, and having fun. Staying active will do more than promote
the essential fitness behaviours that have been shown to add years to life. Staying active will
maintain the physical vitality that adds life to the years.
Unfortunately, many changes have taken place in our society, such as increased
consumerism, conveniences, and wealth orientation, which have reduced the necessity to
move or to be active. Along with the movement toward relative inactivity come the
increased risks of illnesses and diseases. This general trend toward inactive (sedentary) and
other unhealthy lifestyles (e.g., over-consumption of food) has led to a crisis in the health
care system, an increase in personal health-related tragedies, and an “obesity epidemic.”
There is an urgent need to address this trend. In other words, we need to change our
attitudes, giving higher priority to physical activity and exercise behaviours in our lives. We
must move physical activity from a “want to do” to a “must do.”
Stages of Change
Changing our attitudes and behaviours is a process that occurs over time, and we are all at
different stages of readiness to change. The Stages of Change model, as outlined by
Prochaska, Norcross, and DiClemente, provides a framework for explaining how
behaviour change occurs in people. The stages of change have been applied as a model of
how people change in relation to a variety of problem behaviours (e.g., related to substance
addictions, eating habits, disease prevention). The model helps identify where people are
along the continuum of change and provides specific approaches or types of assistance for
each stage of change to facilitate individuals in moving through the stages.
The Stages of Change model consists of five stages, which can help determine where
individuals are in the process of changing their attitudes and behaviours related, for
example, to increasing physical activity:
0 Pre-contemplation: People in this stage are not thinking about changing their inactive or
sedentary behaviour and are not aware of their problem. They have not considered
changing.
1 Contemplation: People in this stage have thought about their problem, can identify that
they are inactive, and have devoted some thought to changing. They have not taken
action to change, or they may be beginning to consider options for change.
2 Preparation/decision: People in this stage have begun the process of change by
examining possibilities and options, such as considering a gym membership, looking at
new exercise clothing, wanting to start using a pedometer, or contemplating a noon-
hour walking program.
_____________________________________________________________________________
0 Action: People in this stage have taken steps to overcome their sedentary lifestyle by
modifying their behaviour, experiences, or environment in order to overcome their
problem. Action involves the most overt behavioural changes and requires a
commitment of time and energy. Early indicators of the action stage include steps such
as evaluating different exercise facilities and costs, purchasing a gym membership,
purchasing exercise equipment, joining a walking group, and using exercise equipment
for physical activity rather than as “furniture.”
1 Maintenance: People in this stage consolidate the gains attained as a result of initial
action through sustained involvement in the new behaviour, in this case an active
lifestyle (or avoidance of the old behaviour—physical inactivity). Adoption of the new
behaviour usually requires a period of many weeks to months.
With this model, behaviour change is viewed as a process. An individual’s readiness for
change is related to how far along the person is in the Stages of Change continuum. People
can enter and exit a stage at any point, and some people may repeat a stage several times.
They can move both forward and backward between the stages. Generally, the goal is to
have a person move along each stage from pre-contemplation to maintenance (the new
behaviour). Once a person is identified as being at a specific stage for a certain behaviour
(e.g., increasing physical activity or decreasing sedentary behaviour), an approach is
adopted to aid the person, specific to that stage.
Example
A sedentary individual is disgusted with the rise in diabetes in society and the associated
health care costs, but he does not realize that his own inactivity is leading to increased
health risks, including the development of diabetes. He sees the problem in others but not in
himself (pre-contemplation).
Recently he applied for long-term disability insurance, and his insurance broker told him he
needed a medical check-up to get the preferred customer discount. His doctor informed him
of his high blood pressure, high triglycerides, and high blood sugars (pre-diabetic). He was
declined insurance. He realized it was time for a change and recognized that he was part of
the problem and needed to get his life in order for himself and for his family’s future
(contemplation).
He looked into many options and decided to sign up with a certified exercise physiologist at
0 private gym (decision). He paid for a one-year membership, bought exercise gear, and met
his trainer for the first session (action). Despite advice from the trainer, he now tries to
change his life too quickly by setting unrealistic goals and relapses after a week, but then
realizes that the effective way to change takes work and patience (contemplation and action).
With encouragement from his family and a new training partner he met at the gym in the
same circumstance, he keeps his personal activity plan and nutrition plan (decision). After
eight weeks, his body has changed and he has a new life, with activity every day
(maintenance). He knows that winter is coming, and he and his trainer have established a
new winter routine (prevent relapse).
_____________________________________________________________________________
REFERENCES
Prochaska, James O., John C. Norcross, and Carlo C. DiClemente. Changing for Good:
A Revolutionary Six-Stage Program for Overcoming Bad Habits and Moving Your
Life Positively Forward. New York, NY: Avon Books Inc., 1994.
Spencer, Leslie, Troy B. Adams, Sarah Malone, Lindsey Roy, and Elizabeth Yost. “Applying the
Transtheoretical Model to Exercise: A Systematic and Comprehensive Review of the
Literature.” Health Promotion Practice 7.4 (Oct. 2006): 428–43.
________________________________________________________________________________
Physical Activity Stages of Change—Questionnaire
Using the Think-Pair-Share strategy (see Appendix E), have students consider which stage
of change they are currently in as it relates to their own physical activity:
5888 Working individually, students complete the questionnaire provided in RM 1–FM.
They then use their results on the questionnaire and the information and examples from
this lesson to forecast what steps or strategies they could apply to advance along the
Stages of Change continuum toward the maintenance stage.
5889 Students then discuss their results and ideas with someone else who is currently
in the same stage as they are.
5890 Finally, the student pairs share their ideas with the class.
Refer to RM 1–FM: Physical Activity Stages of Change—Questionnaire.
________________________________________________________________________________
Processes of Change
Moving through the Stages of Change model is a process that requires both cognitive and
behavioural changes, such as
23 changes in attitude and awareness of one’s circumstances (cognitive—the way one
thinks)
24 changes in actions to decrease the occurrence of undesirable activities, such as
overeating, and actions to engage in new, desirable activities (behaviour—the way one
acts)
Both cognitive and behavioural aspects are necessary for people to change from one stage to
another.
_____________________________________________________________________________
The Stages of Change model works simultaneously on multiple attitudes and behaviours;
that is, a person could be in one stage for one behaviour and in a different stage for another.
Seeking and maintaining a healthy lifestyle involves many behaviours, and it is unlikely
that we will be in the maintenance phase for all healthy behaviours. We may have a
particular problem behaviour, or we may wander in and out (e.g., from maintenance to
relapse to maintenance) of a certain behaviour. For healthy lifestyles, being physically
active and having a nutritious diet are both key behaviours. It is quite common to have
someone doing well in one area, but not in the other. Very active athletes, for example, can
have a poor diet, even though they “know better.” Some inactive people may think that all
they need to do to be healthy is to eat well. To live healthy, active lives, we all need a
tailored approach to keep us in a given stage or to shift us to another stage.
The two cognitive keys to shifting through the Stages of Change continuum successfully are
motivation and self-esteem:
5888 Motivation is a state of readiness or eagerness to change, which may fluctuate from
one time or situation to another. This state can be strongly influenced by internal and
external factors. Motivation is the likelihood that a person will enter into, continue, and
adhere to a strategy of change.
5889 Self-esteem can be defined as the likelihood to see oneself as competent to cope
with life’s challenges and to be deserving of happiness. To improve self-esteem, a
person must experience success relative to expectations. Specifically, the more
realistic the expectation or goal is, the higher the degree of success will be. This
success, in turn, leads to an improved self-esteem in a shorter amount of time.
A Tailored Approach to Change
Successful approaches to the change process adhere to the following principles:

23 Tailor your approach to each stage of change.
24 Move one stage at a time.
25 Be patient and allow time to change.
Tailoring our approach to each stage of change requires specific cognitive and behavioural
cues, which are outlined in RM 2–FM. Specific approaches can be used to assist individuals
with adopting healthy behaviours, depending upon where they are along the Stages of
Change continuum.
Refer to RM 2–FM: Process of Change: Tailoring Your Approach.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Role Playing Stages of Change
Have students work in pairs to role play the stages of NOTE TO TEACHER
change. One student adopts a particular stage of change If there are any concerns about
using his or her own circumstances (as identified in RM how particular students may feel
1–FM) and the other student attempts to use appropriate about using their personal
behavioural and cognitive cues to move the partner circumstances in the role play,
teachers may want to provide the
along the Stages of Change continuum. Have students
students with a scenario of a
role play each stage of change, record methods that given stage of change rather
were suitable for assisting in each stage and than having them use their own
circumstance, and explain the rationale for each method. circumstances.
Students may consider using the cognitive and behavioural cues from RM 2–FM to
formulate their questions or to guide their discussion.
Refer to RM 1–FM: Physical Activity Stages of Change—Questionnaire and

RM 2–FM: Process of Change: Tailoring Your Approach.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 1–FM: Physical Activity Stages of Change—Questionnaire*
For each of the following questions, please circle Yes or No. Be sure to follow the
instructions carefully.
Physical activity or exercise includes activities such as walking briskly, jogging, bicycling,
swimming, or any other activity in which the exertion is at least as intense as these
activities.
No Yes
1. I am currently physically active. 0 1
2. I intend to become more physically active in the next six months. 0 1
For activity to be regular, it must add up to a total of 30 minutes or more per day and be
done at least five days per week. For example, you could take one 30-minute walk or take
three 10-minute walks for a total of 30 minutes.
No Yes
3. I currently engage in regular physical activity. 0 1
4. I have been regularly physically active for the past six months. 0 1
SCORING
If question 1 = 0 and question 2 = 0, then you are at stage 1 ( Pre-contemplation).
If question 1 = 0 and question 2 = 1, then you are at stage 2 ( Contemplation).
If question 1 = 1 and question 3 = 0, then you are at stage 3 ( Preparation).
If question 1 = 1, question 3 = 1, and question 4 = 0, then you are at stage 4 ( Decision/action).
If question 1 = 1, question 3 = 1, and question 4 = 1, then you are at stage 5 ( Maintenance).
__________
5888 Source: Adapted, with permission, from B. H. Marcus and L. H. Forsyth, 2003, Motivating People to Be Physically Active,
(Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics), page 21.
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 2–FM: Process of Change: Tailoring Your Approach
Stage of Cognitive and Behavioural Cues (with Explanatory Notes)

Change
Pre-contemplation “Raise doubt” about resistance to physical activity.
23 Raise doubt about people’s resistance to changing physical behaviour by providing
information and explaining why it is wise to adopt an active lifestyle. Simply providing
pamphlets is not enough. People need to understand the real risks of being
sedentary and that the risks apply to them personally, not only to others.
24 Many people think they don’t have the time or the finances to become active. Cast doubt
on the lack-of-time excuse by “talking a person through” a weekly schedule or calendar.
With patience, a few hours will be found in almost everyone’s schedule for physical
activity. When financial problems are cited as the reason for inactivity, it may be possible
to illustrate either that someone does have the funds (e.g., by spending money on
physical activities rather than on luxuries such as a new TV, car stereo, or game system)
or that becoming active may not require a large amount of money.
25 When people feel helpless, they may give up trying to be active. Support them by
helping them to understand how they could do things they might enjoy by
becoming active. Raise doubt about their helplessness by helping them to realize
that they can change and that although it may take time to change, the benefits will
be almost immediate.
26 In providing information, be as factual and unbiased as possible, and encourage people
to seek more information.
24 Increase awareness of risks and problems of inactivity.
25 Keep in mind that tolerance and patience are needed when resistance to change is high.
Contemplation Provide additional reasons to change.
People often focus on one reason to make a change (e.g., “I’m going on a vacation
and I want to drop 5 kg.” or “I want to run my first marathon.”). When people add
other reasons why a change may be beneficial, they don’t need to rely on only one
outcome to gauge success. Adding other reasons to engage in physical activity (e.g.,
strengthen bones, improve ability to do work or to keep up with others, learn to play a
sport) can help individuals create new process goals (e.g., buy new running shoes, get
a gym membership) or performance goals (e.g., keep a daily step-count log), which
often aids them in feeling successful. Simply listing additional benefits of change is OK,
but finding benefits that individuals “buy into” is important.
Discover reasons for ambivalence to change.
The feeling that “something is holding one back” from acting derives from the
coexistence of positive and negative feelings toward a new behaviour. To help
someone move forward, it is important to discover what the holdback is and to identify
whether there are enough positive feelings to outweigh negative ones (e.g., a concern
about not having the right clothing is a common negative that can be overcome).
Weigh the pros and cons.
There are always positive and negative aspects to any new behaviour. It is important
to recognize that negatives exist and that the positives, once weighed, will likely
outweigh the negatives. Simply listing and discussing the pros and cons is helpful.
Recognize when intent is high but desire to work is low.
Clearly, exercise is work. However, people almost invariably feel much better when
they work out, and especially afterwards. As small increments in exercise or physical
activity intensity and duration are recommended, encourage individuals to start small
and work their way up (e.g., a 10% increase per week accumulates quickly).
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 2–FM: Process of Change: Tailoring Your Approach (Continued)
Stage of Cognitive and Behavioural Cues (with Explanatory Notes)

Change
Preparation/ Assist in selecting the best options.
Decision Create a realistic action plan.
Make sure that goal setting is not simply based on outcomes (e.g., time in a race, placement in
an event, weight loss). Establish process or performance goals (e.g., change in step counts per
week, distance run, consistency in training).
Plan for “blips” in the change process.
Deviations in plans often occur due to external and internal factors, so it is best to anticipate
and plan for them before they occur, thereby minimizing the coping required (e.g., control the
emotional reaction to the possibility of not succeeding at a goal). Blips in plans for physical
activity may occur due to changes in seasons (e.g., transition from summer to winter),
holidays, illness, or heavy stress in school. Set up activity goals that have minimums, normal
values, and maximums (e.g., one workout a week is maintenance, two or three is very good,
and four or more is excellent). Setting up “contingency plans” is as important as setting up the
action plan.
Action Support decisions by eliminating doubt in actions.
All of us have likely felt uncertainty about decisions we’ve made. When individuals experience
doubt about their decision on a course of action, assure them that they “have done the right
thing” and remind them of the future benefits of following this path.
Establish goals using the SMART (specific, measurable, attainable, realistic, and time-framed) goal
approach.
Establish a means of providing feedback on how something is working.
Self-monitoring is often a key to success. Set up accountability frameworks such as pedometer
log sheets where individuals can record and identify process or performance changes. They
can evaluate their log sheets and possibly report their progress. The act of reporting makes
individuals accountable and indicates the importance of their physical activities. Other useful
self-monitoring tools include training diaries, calendars, and exercise logs.
Reinforce overt behavioural changes.
Use prompts to initiate a behaviour change (e.g., put up signs or posters at home as reminders
to exercise). These prompts remind individuals to engage in the new activity and to work at it
for some time before the effect of the prompts fades.
Consider getting a training partner to help with reinforcement of and adherence to a physical
activity plan. A training partner can be a person or a group, an animal (e.g., a dog), or a
device (e.g., a pedometer).
Having a close friend or family member “buy into” and help reinforce a change is also
important.
Find ways to make the activity experience a joy rather than a burden or a chore.
Rewards or incentives can be helpful, if needed.
Maintenance Support new behaviours.
Continued support through this time can help people avoid going back to thinking, “I don’t
have enough time” and “I have more important things to attend to.” Remind people what their
health is worth and that the steps they are taking are important.
Diversify behaviours and explore new ones.
Adding to the repertoire of activities can be helpful so that a person is not entirely dependent
upon one form of exercise (e.g., combining stationary cycling with bicycling outdoors adds a
new dimension and the possibility of cycling through the change of seasons).
Although structured physical activity plans are important, some variety in workouts can make
the exercise more enjoyable and decrease boredom.
Provide accountability frameworks.
Some form of continued self-monitoring is important. Individuals can change the self-
monitoring tool they use (e.g., from a calendar to a diary to an exercise log). This form of
feedback helps reinforce behaviour.
Realistically examine the outcome goals (e.g., weight loss). Unrealistic expectations in
terms of a rapid change in outcome can sabotage success at this stage.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Lesson 3: Understanding Your Personal Motivation for Physical Activity
Introduction
In this lesson students learn about intrinsic and extrinsic motivation and apply that
understanding to their own physical activity motivation. The suggested learning
experiences reinforce students’ understanding of the different types of motivation and
provide them with opportunities to assess their own motivation related to physical activity
and exercise.
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
Key Understandings
5888 Motivation can be classified as intrinsic or extrinsic motivation.
5889 Physical activity participation is affected by different motivational factors.
5890 Awareness of personal motivation helps to strengthen, regulate, or change a
person’s behaviour.
________________________________________________________________________________
Essential Question
4 What intrinsic and extrinsic factors motivate you to exercise and to be active?
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Understanding Motivation for Physical Activity
Self-regulation (or self-control) is an important concept for understanding why individuals

are motivated to exercise or to be physically active. Factors that influence self-control can
be organized into two categories: intrinsic motivators and extrinsic motivators. Intrinsic
motivation represents our internal drive toward behaviour, while extrinsic motivation
includes factors such as rewards or punishment. Understanding what best motivates
individuals requires awareness of both the intrinsic and extrinsic factors that regulate
behaviour. Both intrinsic and extrinsic regulators of motivation are important to consider
when attempting to achieve or maintain an active healthy lifestyle.
Intrinsic Motivation
Internal motivators produce a long-lasting commitment to exercise. Making exercise or

physical activity more internally motivating might be a practical way of enhancing
persistence to exercise. There are many intrinsic motivators to exercise, such as improved
health, enhanced personal skill and ability, increased energy, and decreased stress.
People who successfully maintain a physical activity plan learn to shift their focus from
long-term external outcomes, such as losing weight, to more positive internal experiences
that occur in the short term, such as feeling good or performing better. Intrinsically
motivated exercisers, by being physically active, have discovered things that hold true value
for them. While some individuals may be exercising because they enjoy the actual
movement, others may find that each exercise session holds a personal challenge for them.
Whatever the reasoning behind the motivation to exercise, it must come from within a
person for true meaning to be attached to it.
People who are intrinsically motivated do physical activity for its own sake and because
they want to. They like the positive feelings of success and enjoyment that come from
doing it well.
Extrinsic Motivation
Many people begin an exercise or physical activity plan because they are motivated by
extrinsic factors, such as a desire to lose weight or to get in better shape. Unfortunately,
body-related motives are not usually sufficient to sustain regular exercise programs,
and, therefore, should not be made the most important reasons for engaging in exercise.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Examples of extrinsically motivated exercisers could be those who are inspired to begin an
exercise program by the promise that it will help them lose weight. Those focusing on the
goal of losing weight will likely be excited and motivated by the early results. They may
experience significant weight loss early in the exercise program, largely due to water loss.
With continued exercise, however, they will not continue to see the same degree of weight
loss as their bodies become accustomed to the new activity. Individuals will often become
unmotivated and drop out of an exercise program because they are no longer seeing the
reward (weight loss) for their effort.
________________________________________________________________________________
Types of Motivation: Mini-Biographies
Have students read the mini-biographies of fictitious individuals in RM 3–FM. Then ask
students to decide which type of motivation is regulating each person’s behaviour and
explain their decision.
Refer to RM 3–FM: Mini-Biographies.
________________________________________________________________________________
Motivation Questionnaires
To help students find out what motivates them to participate in physical activity, have them
complete the questionnaires provided in RM 4–FM. After students have completed the
questionnaires, have a class discussion to examine possible strategies that could be used to
move a person from extrinsic motivation to intrinsic motivation.
Refer to RM 4–FM: Motivation for Physical Activity and Exercise/Working Out—

Questionnaires (available in Word and Excel formats).
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 3–FM: Mini-Biographies*
Read the following fictitious mini-biographies. Each mini-biography illustrates a different

form of motivation (i.e., intrinsic or extrinsic) for behaviour in an exercise context. Identify
the motivation shown by each individual and give reasons for your choice.
Beth
Beth is a high school student. She has not taken any regular exercise since Grade 10 and has
unhappy memories of cold, wet, and windy days on the school playing field. She feels that
exercising would have little effect on her fitness and health, and so sees no point in taking it
up now. Beth says: “I think I am pretty fit for my age, anyway. And I’ve never had any
serious health problems. I don’t smoke or drink and I eat well. I think those things are far
more important than exercise as far as health is concerned. In any case, you hear all the time
about these fitness fanatics who are always in the gym or jogging or something and then
they drop down dead in their thirties from a heart attack. I think exercising is likely to do
you more harm than good.”
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Continued
__________
4 Source: Markland, David. “The Behavioural Regulation in Exercise Questionnaire—The Theory.” Exercise Motivation
Measurement. 2007. <www.bangor.ac.uk/~pes004/exercise_motivation/breq/theory.htm>. Adapted with permission.
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 3–FM: Mini-Biographies (Continued)
Paul
Paul is a recent high school graduate who has just reluctantly signed up for a workout
program at his local gym. He passed his basic paramedic training, but two weeks ago had to
take a fitness test before he could proceed to the next stage. Unfortunately, he failed the test.
He does not see himself as a sporty type and has never done much exercise except when he
had to in his school days. After the fitness test, the station commander called him into his
office and told him in no uncertain terms that if he fails to pass the test within three months
he will be out. Paul is not too happy about it: “I really don’t see why you have to be all that
fit to be a paramedic. Alright, the job can be physically demanding at times, lugging
patients up and down stairs and things, but I think I am well capable of handling it as I am.
I mean, it’s not as if I’m training for the Olympics, is it? Still, I have no choice really but to
do as I am told.”
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
Hans
Hans is a civil engineer in his forties. He works out at a local gym a couple of times a week
and is trying, fairly successfully, to go jogging regularly. He has two young children. Hans
has a family history of heart disease and this has been weighing heavily on his mind in
recent years. Although he was quite physically active in his youth, as an adult he did little
exercise for many years until the children came along. He gave up smoking at around the
same time. Hans says: “My father, uncle, and grandfather all died of heart disease in their
early sixties. I can’t afford to let it happen to me, what with a wife and two young kids to
worry about. So I exercise as much as I reasonably can. I can’t say I particularly enjoy it, and
I usually have to push myself to go. But if I feel like skipping a session, I just think about the
kids and what would happen if I had a heart attack. That makes me feel really bad if don’t
go, like I’m guilty of letting them down.”
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
David
David had a hard time socially as a child and as an adolescent. He was timid, small, and
skinny and was frequently bullied. Although he liked sports in school, he never got the
chance to participate outside of compulsory physical education lessons because the school
coaches didn’t consider him to be capable enough. He always looked up to his older
brother, who was a competitive weightlifter and wrestler. On graduating from high school a
few years ago, David was taken to a gym a few times by his brother, and he also became
interested in bodybuilding. He now trains hard and regularly and his social life has been
transformed from his high school days. He has lots of friends, both male and female, and
seems to others to be a very confident and self-assured young man. David says: “I hated it
as a youngster, being smaller than everyone and never being taken seriously. Now I’m
strong and, well, I think I look good and I’m proud of that. It’s important to me to look fit
and strong and have a good physique. People give me respect and sort of look up to me
now like they never did before. When I was a kid it was like I wanted to be someone else all
the time. You know, to be like one of the bigger boys who was good at sports and popular
and all that. Now it’s other people who look at me and say to themselves, ‘Hey, look at him,
I wish I could look like that.’ I would never have come to feel so good about myself if it
weren’t for the bodybuilding.”
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
Darlene
Darlene is a Grade 12 student who also works part time after school and on weekends.
Despite her busy work schedule, she finds time to exercise for half an hour on most days,
either in the school’s fitness centre or at the local YMCA. Darlene feels it is absolutely vital
for her to keep fit and sees this as an essential ingredient in the success of her future career:
“For me, keeping fit is so important. It’s tough, you know, making time to get to the gym
every day. But in my last year at school, with the long hours, I have to keep as sharp as I
can, and exercising regularly helps me to do that. I really don’t think I would have gotten
to where I am today without it.”
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
Sheila
Sheila was a teacher but retrained a few years ago as a fitness instructor. She runs classes
every evening and on weekends and also trains in the gym most days. She is highly
committed to exercise and sees it as the centre point of her lifestyle: “For years, working as a
teacher, I used to exercise as much as I possibly could but never felt I was doing enough. So
that’s why I gave up teaching and got into this new career. I know what you’re thinking,
but it’s definitely not that I am addicted to exercise or obsessive about it or anything like
that. It’s just that, well, it’s hard to explain, but being an exerciser, being a fit person, is a big
part of who I am, if you see what I mean. If I had to stop tomorrow, it wouldn’t exactly be
the end of the world but it would mean that I’d have to do some serious thinking about my
life and I’d find it difficult to readjust. It sounds silly, but it’d be a bit like losing my name or
something. I wouldn’t know who I was any more.”
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
Lenin
Lenin is a construction worker. He loves physical activity of all sorts. He usually plays
basketball or racquetball once a week, runs often (he takes part in his city’s annual 10 km
fun run every year). “I’ve always been into sport and exercise,” he says. “It’s not as if I’m
really all that good at it. I mean, I never had any illusions about playing professionally or
anything like that. It’s just great to go out and kick a ball around or run in the park or
whatever, have a laugh with your friends, and just forget about work and everything for a
bit. I love it.” When asked if he thinks exercising is good for your health, he says: “Well,
yeah, I suppose it must be. But that’s not what it’s all about for me, to be honest. I don’t
worry too much about the future and all that, you know. I just like having a good time. I
mean, if I started thinking like, ‘Oh, this’ll stop me from getting a heart attack,’ or
whatever, I think it would end up being just like work. I’d hate to get all obsessed about it
like some people. It wouldn’t be any fun then, would it?”
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 3–FM: Mini-Biographies*
(Answer Key)
Regulatory Behaviours Reflected in the Mini-Biographies
Clearly, the people featured in the mini-biographies all have very different feelings and
beliefs about exercise. Apart from Beth, they are all engaging in exercise but the
motivational forces driving their behaviour differ markedly. In other words, their
exercise behaviour (or lack of it) is regulated in quite diverse ways.
Beth lacks intrinsic motivation to change. Beth is said to be amotivated, a completely non-
self-determined form of regulation. This is a state of lacking any intention to engage in a
behaviour. It results from not valuing the activity, not feeling competent to engage in it,
and/or not feeling that it will produce any desired outcomes. Beth’s school history probably
left her feeling incompetent with regard to exercise. She does not believe that she would
benefit from exercising and, in fact, she thinks that it might actually be harmful to her
health. Consequently, it is not surprising that she does not value physical activity and
chooses not to exercise at all.
Paul is extrinsically motivated. Paul has started to exercise, but it is very obvious that, like
Beth, he does not value it as a worthwhile activity. His exercise behaviour can be described
as externally regulated and is also not self-determined. He is exercising simply because he has
been told by someone in authority that he has to, even though he thinks that it is not
necessary. When regulated in this way, people may be motivated to comply with the
external pressure to act but they do so unwillingly, even resentfully, and are unlikely to
continue with the activity if the external pressures are relaxed.
Hans has extrinsic motivation and some intrinsic motivation. Hans is not exercising because
of externally imposed pressures but because he is putting the pressure on himself. Thus, his
behavioural regulation is somewhat internalized and can be said to be introjected. He acts
because of his anxieties about heart disease and an anticipated sense of guilt that if he does
become ill he will be letting down his young family. Thus, although Hans is internally
driven, his behaviour is only somewhat self-determined.
David has strong intrinsic motivation. David’s story demonstrates how introjection can also
manifest itself as a need to engage in an activity in order to demonstrate one’s ability or
worth and maintain one’s sense of self-esteem. David believes that bodybuilding has
changed his life and given him the popularity with his peers that he always wanted, but
only because it has made him look good. So, although he now has a strong sense of self-
worth, it is highly dependent on his bodybuilding activities. If he were unable to continue
with this activity for some reason, it seems likely that his self-esteem would soon begin to
suffer.
Continued
__________
0 Source: Markland, David. “The Behavioural Regulation in Exercise Questionnaire—The Theory.” Exercise Motivation
Measurement. 2007. <www.bangor.ac.uk/~pes004/exercise_motivation/breq/theory.htm>. Adapted with permission.
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 3–FM: Mini-Biographies: Answer Key (Continued)
Darlene has strong intrinsic motivation. Darlene’s exercise behaviour is less controlled and
shows much greater self-determination. Her behavioural regulation is identified.
Identification involves a conscious acceptance of the behaviour as being important in order
to achieve personally valued outcomes. The importance of the outcomes provides a strong
incentive that overrides any difficulties or obstacles to the behaviour. Thus, Darlene
manages to find time to exercise regularly even though she finds it difficult to fit it into her
busy school and work life.
Sheila has strong intrinsic motivation. Sheila is obviously a very committed exerciser—so
much so that she changed careers in order to be able to exercise more. Her regulation can be
described as integrated. Integration involves the internalization of identified regulation so
that engaging in the behaviour matches one’s sense of self and who one is. Integration is
similar to intrinsic regulation in that the behaviour is engaged in willingly, with no sense of
coercion, and is therefore fully self-determined. However, it differs from intrinsic
regulation because the behaviour is still engaged in for separable outcomes rather than for
the enjoyment inherent in the activity itself. Note the subtle difference between Sheila’s
feelings about why she exercises and David’s feelings about his exercising. Although
exercising is so important to Sheila’s sense of who she is, her self-esteem is not on the line in
the way that it is for David.
Lenin has strong intrinsic motivation. Lenin’s motivation for exercise is purely intrinsic and
fully self-determined. Although he recognizes the health benefits of exercise, he is not
concerned about such extrinsic outcomes of exercising; he just loves doing it as a social and
aesthetic experience. Notice also that his competence in physical activities is not a big issue
for him. The immediate rewards of taking part in exercise are the only important factors,
and if exercising were to become a chore or like work, as he puts it, there would no longer
be any point in doing it.
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 4–FM: Motivation for Physical Activity and Exercise/
Working Out—Questionnaires*
Motivation for Physical Activity*

People are active regularly for a variety of reasons. Using the rating scale provided below, please indicate
how true each of the following reasons is for why you are, or would like to be, active regularly.
Rating Scale 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
not at all true somewhat true very true
Example
I try, or would like to try, to be physically active regularly Rating Extrinsically Intrinsically
Motivated Motivated
1. because I would feel bad about myself if I did not 2 6
2. because others would be angry at me if I did not 6 2
3. because I enjoy physical activities 3 7
4. because I would feel like a failure if I did not 6 2
5. because I feel as if it’s the best way to help myself 3 5
6. because people would think I’m a weak person if I did not 7 1
7. because I feel as if I have no choice about being active; others make me 6 1
do it
8. because it is a challenge to accomplish my goal 2 6
9. because I believe physical activity helps me feel better 3 6
10. because it’s fun 3 6
11. because I worry that I would get into trouble with others if I did not 6 2
12. because it feels important to me personally to accomplish this goal 3 5
13. because I feel guilty if I am not regularly active 5 5
14. because I want others to acknowledge that I am doing what I have been 6 2
told I should do
15. because it is interesting to see my own improvement 3 6
16. because feeling healthier is an important value for me 3 7
External Regulation: Questions 2, 7, 11, 14 6.0 1.8

Introjected Regulation: Questions 1, 4, 6, 13 5.0 3.5
Identified Regulation: Questions 5, 9, 12, 16 3.0 5.8
Intrinsic Motivation: Questions 3, 8, 10, 15 2.8 6.3
Relative Autonomy Index -8.5 11.3
Autonomy index indicates the relative impact of intrinsic and extrinsic factors in your motivation to be active.
0 Negative numbers reflect that you are extrinsically motivated for change; that is, external factors are important in
regulating your behaviour.
1 Positive numbers reflect that intrinsic motivation is primarily involved in your behaviour.
Continued
__________
11776 Source: Deci, Edward L., and Richard M. Ryan. “Exercise Self-Regulation Questionnaires.” Self-Determination Theory: An
Approach to Human Motivation and Personality—The Self-Regulation Questionnaires . 2004.
<www.psych.rochester.edu/SDT/measures/selfreg_exer.html>. Adapted with permission.
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 4–FM: Motivation for Physical Activity and Exercise/
Working Out—Questionnaires* (Continued)
Motivation for Exercise/Working Out*

People exercise/work out for a variety of reasons. Using the rating scale provided below, please
indicate how true each of the following reasons is for why you work out or would like to work out.
Rating Scale 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
not at all true somewhat true very true
Example
I exercise/work out (or would like to work out) Rating Extrinsically Intrinsically
Motivated Motivated
1. because I simply enjoy working out 2 7
2. because working out is important and beneficial for my health and lifestyle 2 6
3. because I would feel bad about myself if I didn’t do it 4 4
4. because it is fun and interesting 2 6
5. because others like me better when I am in shape 5 2
6. because I’d be afraid of falling too far out of shape if I didn’t 2 3
7. because it helps my image 5 2
8. because it is personally important to me to work out 2 6
9. because I feel pressured to work out 5 2
10. because I have a strong value for being active and healthy 2 7
11. because I find pleasure in discovering and mastering new training 2 6
techniques
12. because I want others to see me as physically fit 6 3
External Regulation: 5, 7, 12 5.3 2.3

Introjected Regulation: 3, 6, 9 3.7 3.0
Identified Regulation: 2, 8, 10 2.0 6.3
Intrinsic Motivation: 1, 4, 11 2.0 6.3
Relative Autonomy Index -8.3 11.3
Autonomy index indicates the relative impact of intrinsic and extrinsic factors in your motivation to be active.
0 Negative numbers reflect that you are extrinsically motivated for change; that is, external factors are important in
regulating your behaviour.
1 Positive numbers reflect that intrinsic motivation is primarily involved in your behaviour.
__________
0 Source: Deci, Edward L., and Richard M. Ryan. “Exercise Self-Regulation Questionnaires.” Self-Determination Theory: An Approach
to Human Motivation and Personality—The Self-Regulation Questionnaires. 2004.
<www.psych.rochester.edu/SDT/measures/selfreg_exer.html>. Adapted with permission.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Lesson 4: Addressing Barriers to Physical Activity
Introduction
Given the health benefits of regular physical activity, we might ask why two-thirds of
Canadians are not active at recommended levels. According to the Public Health Agency of
Canada, “Two-thirds of Canadians are inactive, a serious threat to their health and a burden
on the public health care system” (Canada’s Physical Activity Guide to Healthy Active Living,
“What Is It?”). This reality clearly points to the need to help Canadians become more
physically active. There are barriers that keep Canadians from being, or becoming,
physically active regularly. Understanding common barriers to physical activity and
creating strategies to overcome them may help make physical activity part of daily life.
In this lesson students examine the common barriers to physical activity and determine
which barriers are holding them back from being physically active. Students also determine
ways to overcome those barriers.
REFERENCES
For additional information, refer to the following websites:
Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. “Overcoming Barriers to Physical Activity.”
Physical Activity for Everyone. 22 May 2007.
<www.cdc.gov/nccdphp/dnpa/physical/life/overcome.htm>.
---. Canada’s Physical Activity Guide to Healthy Active Living. Ottawa, ON: Public
Health Agency of Canada, 2004. Available online at <www.phac-aspc.gc.ca/pau-
uap/fitness/downloads.html>.
---. “What Is It?” Canada’s Physical Activity Guide to Healthy Active Living. 15 Dec. 2003.
<www.phac-aspc.gc.ca/pau-uap/paguide/intro.html>.
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Key Understandings
0 People encounter many personal and environmental barriers to physical activity.

1 It is necessary to develop self-understanding of own barriers to physical activity.
2 There are ways to overcome common barriers to physical activity.
________________________________________________________________________________
Essential Questions
0 What are the differences between personal and environmental barriers?

1 What strategies worked best in overcoming your own barriers to becoming more
physically active?
________________________________________________________________________________
Barriers to Physical Activity*
People experience a variety of personal and environmental barriers to engaging in regular

physical activity.
0Personal barriers: With technological advances and conveniences, people’s lives have in
many ways become increasingly easier, as well as less active. In addition, people have
many personal reasons or explanations for being inactive. Some common explanations
(barriers) that people cite for resistance to exercise are (Sallis and Hovell; Sallis, Hovell,
and Hofstetter)
0insufficient time to exercise
1inconvenience of exercise
2lack of self-motivation
3non-enjoyment of exercise
4boredom with exercise
5lack of confidence in their ability to be physically active (low self-efficacy)
6fear of being injured or having been injured recently
7lack of self-management skills, such as the ability to set personal goals, monitor
progress, or reward progress toward such goals
8lack of encouragement, support, or companionship from family and friends
9non-availability of parks, sidewalks, bicycle trails, or safe and pleasant walking
paths close to home or the workplace
_________
23 Source: Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. “Overcoming Barriers to Physical Activity.” Physical Activity
for Everyone. 22 May 2007. <www.cdc.gov/nccdphp/dnpa/physical/life/overcome.htm>. Adapted with permission.
_____________________________________________________________________________
The top three barriers to engaging in physical activity across the adult lifespan are
23 time
24 energy
25 motivation
Other barriers include
5888 cost
5889 facilities
5890 illness or injury
5891 transportation
5892 partner issues
5893 skill
5894 safety considerations
5895 child care
5896 uneasiness with change
5897 unsuitable programs
5889 Environmental barriers: The environment in which we live has a great influence on
our level of physical activity. Many factors in our environment affect us. Obvious
factors include the accessibility of walking paths, cycling trails, and recreation facilities.
Factors such as traffic, availability of public transportation, crime, and pollution may
also have an effect. Other environmental factors include our social environment, such
as support from family and friends, and community spirit.
It is possible to make changes in our environment through campaigns to support active
transportation, legislation for safer communities, and the creation of new recreation
facilities.
REFERENCES
Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. “Overcoming Barriers to Physical Activity.”
Physical Activity for Everyone. 22 May 2007.
<www.cdc.gov/nccdphp/dnpa/physical/life/overcome.htm>.
Sallis, J. F., and M. F. Hovell. “Determinants of Exercise Behavior.” Exercise and
Sport Science Reviews 18 (1990): 307–30.
Sallis, J. F., M. F. Hovell, and C. R. Hofstetter. “Predictors of Adoption and Maintenance
of Vigorous Physical Activity in Men and Women.” Preventive Medicine 21.2 (1992):
237–51.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Barriers to Being Active Quiz
To help students identify the types of physical activity barriers that are undermining their
own ability to make regular physical activity a part of their lives, have them complete RM
5–FM.
Once students have completed the quiz, ask them to analyze their results and determine the
key barriers to their physical activity participation. Also encourage students to identify
personal barriers that are not part of the quiz. To give the class a visual representation of
responses, have students list and discuss all the barriers they identified.
Refer to RM 5–FM: Barriers to Being Active Quiz (available in Word and Excel
formats).
REFERENCE
For another sample questionnaire, refer to the following website:
Cederberg, Michelle. “Barriers to Physical Activity Q.” Live Out Loud!
<http://liveoutloud.ca/pdf/BarriersQ.pdf>.
________________________________________________________________________________
Overcoming Barriers to Physical Activity
Have students brainstorm realistic ways of overcoming barriers to physical activity. This
could be done by assigning certain barriers to small groups of students. As a class, discuss
students’ suggestions of the various ways to address the barriers.
As a follow-up, have students make a journal entry responding to the following question:
What strategies have worked best for you in overcoming your own barriers to
become more physically active?
Use the following suggestions for overcoming physical activity barriers to assist with
strengthening students’ suggestions.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Suggestions for Overcoming Physical Activity Barriers*
Barriers Suggestions for Overcoming Barriers
Lack of time Identify the available time slots or create time slots during which you are willing to give up a
sedentary activity (e.g., watching television). Monitor your daily activities for one week. Identify
at least three 30-minute time slots you could use for physical activity.
Add physical activity to your daily routine (e.g., walk or ride your bike to school or work or
shopping, organize school activities around physical activity, walk the dog, exercise while you
watch TV, park farther away from your destination).
Make time for physical activity (e.g., walk, jog, or swim during your lunch hour, take fitness
breaks while you study, walk up and down stairs between classes).
Select activities requiring minimal time, such as walking, jogging, or stair climbing.
Social influence Explain your interest in physical activity to friends and family. Ask them to support your efforts.
Invite friends and family members to exercise with you. Plan social activities involving exercise.
Develop new friendships with physically active people. Join a group (e.g., hiking or cycling club).
Lack of energy Schedule physical activity for times in the day or week when you feel energetic.
Convince yourself that if you give it a chance, physical activity will increase your energy level;
then, try it.
Lack of Plan ahead and make the commitment. Make physical activity a regular part of your daily or
motivation weekly schedule and write it on your calendar.
Invite a friend to exercise with you on a regular basis and write it on both your calendars.
Join an exercise group or class.
Fear of injury Learn how to warm up and cool down to prevent injury.
Learn how to exercise appropriately, considering your age, fitness level, skill level, and health
status.
Choose activities involving minimum risk.
Lack of skill Select activities requiring no new skills, such as walking, climbing stairs, or jogging.
Exercise with friends who are at the same skill level as you are.
Find a friend who is willing to teach you some new skills.
Take a class to develop new skills.
Lack of Select activities that require minimal facilities or equipment, such as walking, jogging, jumping
resources rope, or calisthenics.
Identify inexpensive, convenient resources available in your community (e.g., community
education programs, park and recreation programs, worksite programs).
Weather Develop a set of regular activities that are always available regardless of weather (e.g., indoor
conditions cycling, aerobic dance, indoor swimming, calisthenics, stair climbing, rope skipping, mall
walking, dancing, gymnasium games).
Look on outdoor activities that depend on weather conditions (e.g., cross-country skiing,
snowshoeing, skating, outdoor swimming, outdoor tennis) as “bonuses”—extra activities possible
when weather and circumstances permit.
Travel Put a jump rope in your suitcase and jump rope.
Walk the halls and climb the stairs in hotels.
Stay in places with swimming pools or exercise facilities.
Join the YMCA or YWCA (ask about reciprocal membership agreement).
During gas station stops, take exercise breaks.
Bring your favourite music that motivates you.
Family Exercise with your brother or sister when babysitting (e.g., go for a walk together, play tag or
involvement other running games, get an aerobic dance DVD for kids and exercise together). You can spend
time together and still get your exercise.
Find ways to be active around your home with others (e.g., shoot hoops on the driveway, play
tennis at a nearby tennis court, go for a bicycle ride with a friend, play with siblings, do
household chores such as mowing the lawn).
__________
23 Source: Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. “Overcoming Barriers to Physical Activity.” Physical Activity for Everyone.
22 May 2007. <www.cdc.gov/nccdphp/dnpa/physical/life/overcome.htm>. Adapted with permission.
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 5–FM: Barriers to Being Active Quiz*
What Keeps You from Being More Active?
Listed below are reasons that people give to describe why they do not get as much physical
activity as they think they should. Please read each statement and indicate how likely you are
to say each of the following statements. (Circle the applicable number for each statement.)
How likely are you to say? Very Somewhat Somewhat Very

Likely Likely Unlikely Unlikely
1. My day is so busy now, I just don’t think I can make the 3 2 1 0
time to include physical activity in my regular schedule.
2. None of my family members or friends likes to do anything 3 2 1 0
active, so I don’t have a chance to exercise.
3. I’m just too tired after school or work to get any exercise. 3 2 1 0
4. I’ve been thinking about getting more exercise, but I just 3 2 1 0
can’t seem to get started.
5. Exercise can be risky. 3 2 1 0
6. I don’t get enough exercise because I have never learned 3 2 1 0
the skills for any sport.
7. I don’t have access to jogging trails, swimming pools, bike 3 2 1 0
paths, etc.
8. Physical activity takes too much time away from other 3 2 1 0
commitments—time, work, family, etc.
9. I’m embarrassed about how I will look when I exercise 3 2 1 0
with others.
10. I don’t get enough sleep as it is. I just couldn’t get up 3 2 1 0
early or stay up late to get some exercise.
11. It’s easier for me to find excuses not to exercise than to 3 2 1 0
go out to do something.
12. I know of too many people who have hurt themselves by 3 2 1 0
overdoing it with exercise.
13. I really can’t see learning a new sport. 3 2 1 0
14. It’s just too expensive. You have to take a class or join a 3 2 1 0
club or buy the right equipment.
15. My free times during the day are too short to include 3 2 1 0
exercise.
16. My usual social activities with family or friends do not 3 2 1 0
include physical activity.
17. I’m too tired during the week and I need the weekend to 3 2 1 0
catch up on my rest.
Continued
__________
5888Source: Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. “Barriers to Physical Activity Quiz.” Physical Activity for
Everyone: Overcoming Barriers to Physical Activity. <www.cdc.gov/nccdphp/dnpa/physical/life/barriers_quiz.pdf>.
Adapted with permission.
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 5–FM: Barriers to Being Active Quiz (Continued)
How likely are you to say? Very Somewhat Somewhat Very

Likely Likely Unlikely Unlikely
18. I want to get more exercise, but I just can’t seem to make 3 2 1 0
myself stick to anything.
19. I’m afraid I might injure myself. 3 2 1 0
20. I’m not good enough at any physical activity to make it 3 2 1 0
fun.
21. If we had exercise facilities and showers at school or at 3 2 1 0
work, then I would be more likely to exercise.
Scoring
Follow these instructions to score yourself:
23 In the spaces provided below, enter the number you circled for the applicable questions
(on the quiz), recording the circled number for statement 1 on line 1, statement 2 on
line 2, and so on.
24 Add the three scores on each line. Your barriers to physical activity fall into one or more
of seven categories: lack of time, social influences, lack of energy, lack of willpower, fear
of injury, lack of skill, and lack of resources. A score of 5 or above in any category shows
that this is an important barrier for you to overcome.
_____ + _____ + _____ = ____________________

1 8 15 Lack of time
_____ + _____ + _____ = ____________________
2 9 16 Social influence
_____ + _____ + _____ = ____________________
3 10 17 Lack of energy
_____ + _____ + _____ = ____________________
4 11 18 Lack of willpower
_____ + _____ + _____ = ____________________
5 12 19 Fear of injury
_____ + _____ + _____ = ____________________
6 13 20 Lack of skill
_____ + _____ + _____ = ____________________
7 14 21 Lack of resources
_____________________________________________________________________________
Lesson 5: Making Physical Activity a Habit
Introduction
In this lesson students learn how a habit (the maintenance phase of the Stages of Change
model addressed in Module B, Lesson 2) is created and take steps to creating their own
exercise habit. In order for behaviours to become a habit, repetition is required. Adopting a
new habit can take from a few weeks to many months. Students also investigate ways of
addressing some of the factors that prevent people from making physical activity a habit.
________________________________________________________________________________
in the development and implementation of a personal physical activity plan that
is safe and ethical and contributes to health-related fitness goals.
________________________________________________________________________________
Key Understandings
5888 Healthy lifestyle habits can be created.

5889 There are factors that promote and detract from making physical activity and
exercise a lifestyle habit.
5890 Goal setting and personality awareness have an important influence on habit creation.
________________________________________________________________________________
Essential Questions
0 What are some ways to create a new habit?

1 What are some factors that affect a person’s adherence to a personal activity plan,
including an activity or exercise routine?
2 Identify a personal goal as part of your physical activity plan using the goal-setting steps.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Background Information Getting
Beyond Just Getting Started

NOTE TO TEACHER
This course, and the physical activity practicum To help students make physical activity a
(see Module A) in particular, is intended to habit, especially those who are inactive,
it is important to include the information
0 help students take greater ownership of their in this lesson in class lectures or
own physical fitness discussions, as well as in student-teacher
1 promote the discovery of physical conferences. Be considerate of different
activities suited to students’ own interests starting points or activity levels of
students (e.g., inactive, active, very
2 encourage students to engage in active active).
lifestyles that persist into their futures
To realize these goals, students need to form good habits so that they can adhere to
their physical activity plan, meet the requirements for this course, and be active and
healthy beyond graduation for a lifetime.
Forming a Habit
The formation of a habit (good or bad) typically

depends on two things, time and repetition. We all
“Those who think they have not time for
tend to have some habits that we are not bodily exercise will sooner or later have to
particularly fond of or perhaps not even aware of. find time for illness.”
Some of these habits may not be overt or may not — Edward Stanley, Earl of Derby, 1873
have a major impact on our day-to-day living;
however, the lack of “healthy” habits can and will have long-term effects. The good news is
that while taking the first step to forming a new habit may be difficult, subsequent steps can
be relatively easy. Many of us take that first step as a result of some external motivator,
such as a personal encounter with an undesirable outcome (e.g., a heart attack, clothes don’t
fit) or a health warning from a doctor. While these examples tend not to catch the attention
of adolescents, it is essential to begin the formation of good exercise habits as early in life as
possible because these habits then become part of who we are and what we do, thereby
eliminating the excuse, “I don’t have time.”
All good things in life, including exercise habits, take time to develop. Once we decide to
begin regular physical activity, it is important to take things slowly. We need to be
cautious about not taking on more than we can handle, making sure that our activity plan
“fits” us and that we will be able to carry on beyond the first week, month, and so on.
Motivation is an underlying theme in the Stages of Change model, from contemplation to

maintenance. It is generally accepted that intrinsic motivation is necessary for maintenance
and that extrinsic motivators are useful to commence change and to reinforce it later on
through the stages of change.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Being Physically Active Is a Habit
Our physical activity experiences should be founded on a desire to engage in activities we

enjoy, while also providing the benefits of a formal exercise program. Our interests should
guide our activity experiences. If we don’t have any obvious interests, we need to find
someone who can expose us to new activities in a safe environment so that we can try them
and find out what we like to do.
Once we find an activity to our liking, we need to make it a regular occurrence in our lives
in a realistic manner (i.e., not approaching it too aggressively and not going overboard by
doing it all at once). If we have not been physically active regularly for a while, we need to
start gradually and ease into a small number of activities of differing intensities. Over time,
as some features of boredom creep in, we can explore new activities, keeping in mind that
variety will enhance adherence to exercise.
Generally, people tend to give up on activity programs because they don’t see the desired
results as quickly as they had wished for. When we begin exercising regularly, gradually
increasing the demands of our exercise program, we need to be patient and trust that things
are happening. We need to understand that our bodies are changing, making adjustments to
circulation, respiration, the heart, lungs, liver, blood vessels, hormones, glands, and the
immune system, even the blood supply itself. Changes are happening, even if we cannot see
or measure them.
It is essential to take on realistic performance goals in personal physical activity plans.

Measuring or logging performance can be helpful. Even a change in the frequency of
exercise per week is a success. For example, someone who has a plan for walking at every
lunch hour (five times a week) can set a minimum successful level of two times in the first
week. In this way, the individual will experience success, and then attempt to add more the
next week. Unrealistic goals result in feelings of failure and decrease self-esteem, leading to
avoidance of activity or relapse to inactivity.
While incorporating physical activity strategies into daily life (e.g., taking stairs instead of
using elevators, parking farther out in the parking lot) should not be confused with exercise
programs, these efforts may well be ways to ease into an exercise program or to begin
building the basics of an exercise habit. Every little bit helps. Before long, these efforts are no
longer seen as a chore. Taking the stairs instead of the elevator (or escalator) each day for as
little as three weeks can make this activity a lifelong habit. (It is a general belief that it takes
20 to 30 days of repetition to form a new habit.) After a while, we will ask ourselves, “Why
didn’t I do that in the first place?”
It is said that variety is the spice of life. However, if we are just beginning a physical activity
plan, we need to choose one activity that appeals to us, and get started. When we have
incorporated this activity as part of our routine, we can try to do it more frequently. Once
we are feeling comfortable with an activity, it is time to consider other activities that interest
us. We might want to try different activities we had previously only thought about but now
have the motivation to try, to explore what we really enjoy, and to find out what will fit into
_____________________________________________________________________________
our lifestyle and schedule. Those who enjoy the company of others may choose to join a
team or find an exercise partner (e.g., a person, pet, pedometer, training log). In fact, doing a
number of activities is a great way of incorporating variety into a physical activity program.
We don’t have to do the same exercise every day to get the health and fitness benefits.
With a gradual beginning and small incremental increases in duration or intensity, we soon
see and feel positive results from physical activities. Once our chosen activities become a
habit, we will not want to miss our workouts. Then we are on a solid pathway to health.
REFERENCES
Baldwin, Donovan. “Health as Habit: Nutrition, Exercise, and Weight Loss.” Nutrition–
Weight Loss–Alternative Medicine. Dietneeds.com. <www.dietneeds.com/Health-As-
Habit-- Nutrition-Exercise-And-Weight-Loss.php>.
Quinn, Elizabeth. “Getting Started and Sticking with Exercise.” Sports Medicine. About.com.
0 Jul. 2004. <http://sportsmedicine.about.com/od/tipsandtricks/a/gettingstarted.htm>.
For website updates, please visit Websites to Support the Grades 11 and 12 Curriculum at
________________________________________________________________________________
Assessment New Physical Activity Habit
Have students track their progress in forming new physical activity habits, using the
Six Steps to New Habits identified in RM 6–FM.
Refer to RM 6–FM: New Habit Chart (available in Word and Excel formats).
________________________________________________________________________________
Commitment and Exercise Adherence

It is generally understood that exercise is good for us, yet a high percentage of the people
who begin exercise programs drop out within the first six months. Even people who are
active or seriously training for a sport can have difficulty adhering to their training
programs. The most commonly cited reasons for dropping out of an exercise program
include “lack of time, inconvenience, expense, physical discomfort, embarrassment, poor
instruction, inadequate support, and loss of interest” (Doyle). Clearly, these reasons are
closely linked to the barriers to exercise (addressed in Module B, Lesson 4). Encourage
_____________________________________________________________________________
students to take ownership of their personal physical activity plan, as ownership instils
commitment. This is their new life.
The factors that affect exercise adherence and motivation can be organized into two
categories: situation factors and personal factors. These factors are examined in the
discussion that follows.
REFERENCES
Doyle, J. Andrew. “Exercise Adherence.” The Exercise and Physical Fitness Page. 1999.
<http://www2.gsu.edu/~wwwfit/adherence.html>.
Public Health Agency of Canada. “Activity Guidelines.” Canada’s Physical Activity Guide
to Healthy Active Living. 20 Sept. 2002. <www.phac-aspc.gc.ca/pau-
uap/paguide/child_youth/youth/guidelines.html>.
Situation Factors Affecting Exercise Adherence*
The factors that affect our commitment or adherence to physical activity or exercise are
similar to those that act as barriers to commencing physical activity for the first time.
By knowing the situations or environments in which we enjoy exercise, we can put

ourselves into those situations as often as possible. The following factors must be
considered to maximize exercise commitment:
0 time
1 money
2 energy
3 other commitments
4 social support
5 exercising with others
6 facilities
7 climate
8 physical discomfort
A discussion of these situation factors follows.
__________
0 Source: Doyle, J. Andrew. “Exercise Adherence.” The Exercise and Physical Fitness Page.
<http://www2.gsu.edu/~wwwfit/adherence.html>. © Board of Regents of the University System of Georgia by Georgia State
University (1999). Adapted with permission.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Time
Finding time to exercise is of vital importance if we are to adhere to an exercise program.

According to the “Activity Guidelines” set out in Canada’s Physical Activity Guide to Healthy
Active Living (Public Health Agency of Canada), individuals should aim to exercise 60 minutes
or more on most days of the week. This increase in time may be accumulated throughout the
day and should include activities of moderate to vigorous intensity.
In scheduling workout time, allow for other factors before and after the workout (e.g.,
travelling, changing clothes, showering). Incorporate these considerations into the overall
time set aside for exercise. If we are not relaxed or if we feel hurried when working out, we
are less likely to enjoy a workout and so will be less likely to adhere to an exercise program
in the future. The exercise program can’t be squeezed in—it must be a well-placed,
intentional part of our schedule. Getting support from friends and family to “keep this
personal time” can be valuable. Working with an exercise partner can also increase
commitment to an exercise schedule.
It is a good idea to plan for exercise time to avoid any possible time conflicts. Getting into a
weekly exercise routine with which we feel comfortable will aid in exercise adherence. Keep
in mind that “blips” in the routine can happen due to a variety of reasons (e.g., illness,
special family occasions, examination stress). These are not failures.
Money
We all make decisions based on our current situation. This includes being able to do
things in life based on our personal financial resources.
Many people feel that getting “fit” or becoming physically active requires joining a gym or a
health club or enrolling in some type of exercise program. While these options may be
possible for some, they are not possible for others due to their financial situation.
Lack of finances need not be a reason for inactivity, however. Many activities (e.g., walking,
running) cost little or no money and can be done without having to purchase expensive
equipment (e.g., consider borrowing equipment). Correct instruction for some activities can
be obtained from a physical education teacher or from books, videos, or DVDs available at
school or at a local library. Many affordable public sports facilities and community clubs
have trained individuals who can assist people in designing an appropriate exercise
program. In general, physical activity choices must align with one’s personal income and
budget, just like other choices in life. However, being active does not have to require
money. There are many ways to be active at no cost or at minimal cost to the individual.
Energy
Lack of energy is a common excuse for not exercising. This excuse is ironic, given that we
actually feel energized by working out. There will be occasions when we will not feel like
_____________________________________________________________________________
exercising due to tiredness, lack of energy, illness, and so on. During these times it is
important to try to do at least parts of our exercise program, or run through a workout at a
lower intensity level. Doing something is always better than doing nothing.
We typically have more energy at certain times of the day than at others. Make a note of
these “up” times and schedule workouts at these times.
Nutrition or healthy eating also plays an important part in exercise. A meal plan should
include sufficient complex carbohydrates to make the proper fuel available to the body
during exercise.
Finally, sleep is a key to energy for exercise. Many young people do not sleep enough,
making it easy for them to yield to the temptation not to exercise due to tiredness. Rest,
recovery, and sleep are as vital to a regular physical activity plan as the activity itself.
Other Commitments
Naturally, we all have responsibilities and commitments (e.g., homework, work, family)
that may affect our adherence to a regular exercise plan. All these commitments require
time and energy. Therefore, scheduling and prioritizing our commitments is essential, and
this includes exercising. Incorporating exercise into other commitments may help us to meet
our responsibilities to ourselves, as well as to others (e.g., walk, run, or cycle to and from
school or work, include play time in babysitting).
If we are serious about adhering to an exercise program it may be necessary to forgo other
activities to make time for exercise. We have to identify where our priorities lie and be
prepared to make sacrifices (e.g., instead of spending money on conveniences and
consumer-oriented purchases such as a new TV, car, or stereo, choose to spend the money
on health). We need to ask ourselves, “What is our health worth?”
Social Support
Ongoing social support is important all along the Stages of Change continuum. Gaining and
maintaining the support of family and friends is critical if we are going to remain faithful to
our exercise program. We need to demonstrate to family and friends, and help them
understand, how important our physical activity is to us. This will make it easier for all
involved to support our efforts. Once our social supports are in place, others will try to
avoid scheduling events that may interfere with our exercise time.
Exercising with Others
For some individuals, exercising with a group or a partner can greatly improve exercise
adherence. By exercising with others, we are more likely to keep than to neglect our
commitment to an exercise plan. Knowing that we will let others down, in addition to
ourselves, by missing an exercise session, can sometimes be good motivation to continue
exercising.
_____________________________________________________________________________
The same is true if we are part of a team or a group exercise class or program. If we miss a
practice or class we generally have to explain the reason for our absence to others. The fear
of this embarrassment is often enough to maintain high exercise adherence, which is the
desired outcome. Managing this is important, as fear of missing an obligation itself is not a
good motivator alone to continue with exercise. Once we miss one session, we may
establish a sense of failure, and then it may be hard to get back to the group.
Facilities
Affordability and location are key considerations in choosing the right facilities or space in
which to exercise. When deciding on the proper place for exercise (indoors or outdoors),
consider an easily accessible location close to home, school, and/or the workplace. Giving
strong consideration to these factors in choosing facilities increases the likelihood of
adherence to exercise.
Feeling comfortable with our surroundings during exercise is vital. We can increase our
sense of ease and safety by understanding how to use the facilities, where everything is
located, and where to get assistance if required. We benefit if we find the staff of the
facilities friendly, approachable, and sensitive to our needs. Those who prefer to exercise
when the facilities are less crowded could try to find out when the best time is and see
whether it fits into their weekly schedule. When exercising outdoors, safety and access to a
phone may be a consideration.
Climate
Climate is especially relevant to outdoor exercises, such as running and cycling, and
outdoor team sports. Having an alternate exercise plan in the event of bad weather will
help keep us on track.
The weather, be it too hot or too cold, too dry or too wet, can make some facilities unusable.
Exercising in inclement weather may also compromise health. Individuals with allergies to
pollen may not be able to exercise outdoors during some seasons. Those with asthma may
be unable to exercise comfortably in cold, dry conditions. Exercising in cold, wet weather
may cause the onset of common colds and respiratory infections.
Manitoba’s climate provides opportunities for a tremendous variety of physical activities

and sports in every season. Being able to maintain a regular exercise routine, regardless of
the weather or season, can ensure high exercise adherence. Planning for a change in seasons
is a critical component of a successful personal activity plan. Someone who begins a
physical activity plan in fall or winter should also plan activities for the spring and summer,
and vice versa. Putting all our effort into one type of activity is risky.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Physical Discomfort
Physical discomfort from exercise can be a deterring factor to our pattern of activity. Not
everyone enjoys intense physical activity, or finds it easy. The belief that the “fat-burning
zone” is the only right place to be for exercise intensity is a misconception. We are able to
realize significant health and fitness benefits from activities of very low intensity. If we are
capable of exercising at a higher intensity, however, then we should progress. We will burn
more calories with vigorous activity.
Although we can expect to experience discomfort with vigorous exercise, we gain

significant benefits from exercising at this level. It is important to be able to distinguish
between pain and discomfort, as any pain experienced may indicate that something is
wrong and may warrant a visit to a physician. Nonetheless, a little discomfort is normal,
and it is up to each of us to do what we can to minimize it. Once exercise is part of a normal
routine, the level of discomfort experienced from vigorous exercise will diminish. Keep in
mind that exercise should still be fun.
The following are a few tips for minimizing discomfort with exercise:
0 It is normal to experience “delayed onset muscle soreness” after starting a new exercise
program, or even when changing exercises. This soreness (or stiffness) develops after 24
hours and will diminish over the next few days. The benefit is that the second time we
do an exercise we won’t be nearly as sore. So, staying active is a key to minimizing
discomfort.
1 Always include warm-up and cool-down sessions in exercise. When beginning a new
exercise program, start off slowly and gradually make increases in frequency, intensity,
and time. The body needs time to adapt to new stresses.
2 Expect to sweat and breathe harder when increasing work intensity. Learn to
distinguish between normal breathing during exercise and shortness of breath or
hyperventilation.
Personal Factors Affecting Exercise Adherence and Motivation*
By understanding more about ourselves, we can more successfully handle the inevitable
difficult situations when they arise. Therefore, in addition to paying attention to the
situation factors affecting our exercise program, we need to devote attention to personal
factors and capabilities such as
0 awareness of personality
1 goal setting
A discussion of the personal factors affecting exercise adherence and motivation follows.
__________
0 Source: Doyle, J. Andrew. “Exercise Adherence.” The Exercise and Physical Fitness Page.
<http://www2.gsu.edu/~wwwfit/adherence.html>. © Board of Regents of the University System of Georgia by Georgia
State University (1999). Adapted with permission.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Awareness of Personality
Personality is an interrelated combination of a person’s body, thoughts, and

behaviours. How individuals explain, or to what they attribute, their successes and
failures may say something about their personalities.
To increase awareness of how personality affects exercise adherence and motivation, it is

helpful to consider the following three questions:
0 Do you tend to see your exercise habit, or lack thereof, as permanent or as changeable?
1 Do you attribute your habit, or lack thereof, to things primarily within or outside
your control?
2 Do you attribute your habit, or lack thereof, to internal characteristics or
external circumstances?
Explaining a lack of adherence or motivation to exercise as permanent and beyond our

control diminishes our expectations, perhaps to the point of feeling helpless. Attributing
failures to internal characteristics may result in feelings of guilt or shame; attributing
failures to external circumstances may provide a way to avoid such feelings.
Alternatively, explaining a lack of adherence or motivation as changeable and within our

control provides a sense of empowerment, increasing the expectation of success. Attributing
successes to internal characteristics may lead to feelings of pride, self-worth, or a sense of
accomplishment; attributing successes to external circumstances may bring a sense of luck
or humility.
Analyzing expectations can reveal something about personalities. An individual with

expectations of success is often referred to as having a high degree of self-confidence or
self-efficacy; an individual with expectations of failure is often referred to as having a low
degree of self-confidence or self-efficacy.
It is important to establish our expectations regarding the exercise program we are

considering starting or have just started. At least four things can help improve our
self-confidence with regard to an exercise program:
0 prior successes and achievements
1 role models and success stories
2 verbal encouragement and persuasion
3 awareness and control of emotional responses to exercise
_____________________________________________________________________________
Goal Setting
Setting goals is an effective way to enhance motivation for physical activity and to improve
the likelihood of developing the habit of exercise. To be most effective, our physical activity
goals should be SMART: specific, measurable, attainable, realistic, and time framed.
Common reasons to start exercising include losing weight or body fat or getting into better
condition. To improve the chances of success, goals need to be more specific (e.g., If you
want to lose weight or body fat, how much do you want to lose and by when? Are there
clothes you’d like to fit into by a certain date?). In any case, specific goals are measurable.
Having specific goals will enable us, at a certain time in the future, to determine clearly and
easily whether or not we have met our goals.
In addition to being specific and measurable, goals should be challenging, as well as

attainable and realistic. If our goals require dramatic changes to well-established habits, we
will be much less likely to succeed. Setting extreme goals may say something about an
individual’s personality. We increase our chances of success by attempting to make gradual
changes. Those who have been relatively inactive for a while may wish to introduce exercise
on three or four days a week. They could focus first on getting exercise on those days, and
then gradually increase the duration and/or the intensity of exercise. Those who don’t have
the time or the inclination for an exercise program could set specific goals about
incorporating greater physical activity into their daily routine.
Whether or not individuals reach a specific and realistic goal within an allotted period of
time may, to some degree, be affected by circumstances beyond their control. To increase
the chances of ultimate success, goals should state both the desired outcomes and the tasks.
Tasks are the behaviours that an individual commits to doing to achieve goals. For example,
a person’s goal might involve losing a certain amount of weight in 12 weeks. The task goals
might then include specific behaviours such as lifting weights or jogging for 30 minutes
three or four times a week, taking the stairs instead of elevators, and maintaining an
appropriate balanced diet.
Once we’ve set specific and realistic goals that include both outcomes and tasks, we might
consider writing them down in an exercise contract. By writing them down, we promise to
perform our tasks in order to achieve specific and realistic goals by a certain date.
Alternatively, we might consider memorizing our goals and reminding ourselves of them
daily. We can also promise ourselves that if we meet such goals we will give ourselves a
specific reward.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Reflecting on Personal Exercise Habits
Ask students to reflect on the successes they have experienced in their physical activity
habits, or on how they overcame challenges.
Have students respond to the following questions:
0 What are the key factors that have allowed you to stay with an exercise program or
a new physical activity plan?
1 Do you know of others who have successfully added the habit of exercise to their lives?
How do they maintain the activity?
2 Are there others who can give you support and encouragement? Who could aid you in
maintaining activity? How could these people help?
3 Are you aware of your emotions related to physical activity or exercise? Do you feel
worried or confidently under control, anxious or relaxed, excited or bored? Your
awareness of and your ability to regulate such emotions can improve your self-
confidence or self-efficacy and increase the likelihood that you will stick with your
exercise program.
Have students individually
0 assess their personal state of emotional response NOTE TO TEACHER

during exercise along a continuum ranging from If individuals begin to find their
boredom at one extreme to anxiety at the other extreme exercise program boring, or if they
begin to worry too much about
1 identify and appropriately place their emotions their exercise program, they
(e.g., relaxed, under control, worried, nervous) in decrease the likelihood of
between the two extremes of the emotional developing the habit of exercise.
response continuum
0 suggest ways of addressing the emotional states they experience during
exercise Examples:
0 If I begin to feel bored, perhaps I could introduce new settings, new challenges,
or different exercises.
1 If I feel too anxious, I could try some techniques (e.g., progressive relaxation, deep
breathing) that might help me regulate the level of emotional response and
maintain appropriate focus. (Ultimately, one can learn to use such techniques as
automatic, learned responses to feelings of stress or anxiety.)
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Time to Get Moving
In this module, students have learned about themselves and the ways in which they can
take charge of their lifestyle. They have learned about their own motivation regarding
physical activity, examined their perceived barriers and the ways to get past them, and
explored techniques to “stick with” an exercise plan. It is now time for students to make a
commitment to a personal physical activity plan.
________________________________________________________________________________
A Personal Physical Activity Plan/Contract
To prepare students for establishing their own physical activity plan, have them review the
SMART (specific, measurable, attainable, realistic, and time framed) goals.
SMART GOALS
Specific: What kind of exercise will you do? When will you do it?
Measurable: How many minutes? What is your target heart rate?
Attainable: Are your body and mind ready for and capable of these challenges?
Realistic: Have you created a schedule that works for you and that you can stick to?
Time framed: What will you do each week? each month? How long are you giving yourself to
reach your goal?
Students should now be able to establish their personal physical activity goals and start or
continue on the road to an active healthy lifestyle. Have each student complete RM 7–FM.
Refer to RM 7–FM: Physical Activity Contract.
Ask students to include their personal goals as part of their physical activity plan, for
periodic review and amendment. Amending the contract is tantamount to success, as this
means that students are constantly assessing their performance goals and outcomes. It is
better to revise the contract than to use it as a means to identify failure.
The goal is to have students achieve and maintain a physically active lifestyle. So, in the
next few weeks they will need to find the methods to succeed in their new physical activity
plan, as opposed to assuming it will work. It might take two to five activity sessions to get
physically active.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
REFERENCES
For more information on goal setting, refer to the following documents provided by the
Manitoba Physical Education Teachers Association:
5888 Goal Setting PowerPoint
5889 Goal Setting Worksheet
5890 Goal Setting: Personal Plan
These documents can be found on the following website:
Manitoba Physical Education Teachers Association (MPETA). MPETA Resources to
Support the Grades 11 and 12 Curriculum. <www.mpeta.ca/resources.html>.
at <http://www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/cur/physhlth/>.
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 6–FM: New Habit Chart
Three keys to forming new habits are consistency, rewards, and motivation. The recipe for a
habit mixes together all three ingredients. A habit has to be something you want, done
regularly for a decent period of time.
Think of something you can start today, something you’d like to turn into a habit. You could
consider starting a walking program. Weight training is a popular activity for many. Forming a
habit is all about building momentum, so start with something you are pretty sure you can
succeed with. Then see how long you can keep it up. Make it fun and challenge yourself!
Six Steps to New Habits

5888 Print this page. Hang it where you’ll see it every day (e.g., on the fridge, by your bed,
over your desk).
5889 Choose the habit you want to add/drop. If you’re looking to drop a bad habit, try
to include a positive substitute.
5890 Using two coloured markers, track your success by filling in the blocks in the
chart. Red = Did it. Blue = Missed it.
5891 Most habits take three to four weeks to really form. That’s why each row has 21
blocks. You can stop at the end of the first row and move on to another habit, or keep
your streak alive and fill up the whole page (30 weeks)!
5892 Don’t get discouraged if you don’t have 100% success. Keep trying and enjoy
your progress.
5893 Remember to reward yourself! Some good reward milestones are marked on the chart
for you.
Paste a picture that represents

your new habit or its benefits here!
Habit I want to add/drop: ______________________________________________________

Why I want to do this: _________________________________________________________
What will happen if I don’t:____________________________________________________
Notes
21
30
50
75
100
150
200
__________
23 Source: Used with permission from SparkTeens.com. Visit SparkTeens.com for a free nutrition and fitness program.
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 7–FM: Physical Activity Contract
I believe that routine physical activity and exercise may benefit me physically,
mentally, socially, and emotionally.
I, , DO HEREBY PLEDGE TO THE

FOLLOWING GOALS:
Specific and Realistic Goal #1 By When?
Tasks to Accomplish Goal #1
PLEDGED BY THIS DAY OF ,
(student) (day) (month) (year)
______
5888 Source: Doyle, J. Andrew. "Exercise Adherence." The Exercise and Physical Fitness Page.
<http://www2.gsu.edu/~wwwfit/adherence.html>. © Board of Regents of the University System of Georgia by Georgia State
University (1999). Adapted with permission.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Lesson 6: Planning for Physical Fitness
Introduction
In this lesson students review the basics of physical fitness, including
23 definitions of physical fitness
24 health- and skill-related fitness components
25 principles of fitness development
26 the FITT principle
27 resistance training
At the completion of this lesson students develop and implement an exercise routine as part
of their personal physical activity practicum (see Module A).
________________________________________________________________________________

Examples: cardiorespiratory endurance/aerobic fitness, musculoskeletal fitness,
training principles, FITT (frequency, intensity, time, type) principle
11.FM.5 Design, implement, evaluate, and revise an exercise routine that contributes to
________________________________________________________________________________
Key Understandings
5888 Physical fitness is a complex concept related to the effects of physical activity on
the human body.
5889 Physical fitness comprises health- and skill-related components.
5890 The development of physical fitness is governed by the FITT principle.
5891 Planning is important for successful physical fitness development.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Essential Questions
23 What is the definition of physical fitness?

24 How did the FITT principle help you to develop your exercise routine?
25 Explain how your exercise routine contributed to the five health-related components of
physical fitness.
26 If you were helping someone begin a resistance training program, what guidelines and
safety considerations would you provide?
________________________________________________________________________________
Understanding Physical Fitness
Physical fitness, in general terms, is a person’s ability to meet the physical stresses and
demands of a variety of physical activities efficiently and effectively. Physical fitness
provides a person with the capacity to perform work safely in activities of daily living,
including activities required for work at home and in the workplace, for leisure-time
pursuits, and for sports.
The physical stresses and demands of daily living range, for example, from sitting, eating,
standing, showering, and walking to the extreme physical demands of shovelling after a
major snowstorm, marathon running, participating in a triathlon, and firefighting. Each of
these activities requires varying degrees of cardiorespiratory endurance (CRE), muscular
strength, muscular endurance, and flexibility to perform it well. Fortunately, the physical
demands of showering or walking are not great, making it quite easy for most of us to
engage in these physical activities. For a small percentage of the population these activities
pose difficulty. Many people are faced with demanding tasks, such as lifting/carrying
heavy objects, building, and snow shovelling, which can over-stress the body if it does not
have an adequate level of physical fitness. Adequate preparation for these periodic tasks is
essential to help minimize the risks of heart attack, stroke, and back injury.
On the other end of the physical activity continuum are the occupations and activities that
fall outside the realm of possibility for most of us. These activities require physical fitness
levels and skills that are beyond our contemplation or aspiration. They are performed by
people who have been genetically gifted and have worked and trained for years to perform
at the extreme levels required for these physical activities.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Fitness Rating of Common Activities
It is important for students to understand that a minimum level of physical fitness is

required for all activities of daily living. One or more physical fitness components
are required (or emphasized) in performing any type of activity well and safely.
As an activating strategy, have students rate the degree of fitness required (in relation to
each of four health-related fitness components) for each of the activities listed in RM 8–FM.
Students use a rating scale from 1 to 10, with 1 being little or no fitness requirement and 10
being the greatest fitness requirement.
Refer to RM 8–FM: Fitness Rating of Common Activities (available in Word and

Excel formats).
Have students discuss the results of their fitness ratings in small groups, using the following
questions to guide their discussion:
5888 For which activities was there the greatest agreement in fitness rating?
5889 For which activities was there the least agreement in fitness rating?
5890 Which activity would provide the greatest amount of fitness development? Explain.
5891 Which activity would provide the least amount of fitness development? Explain.
5892 Which occupation would require the greatest level of fitness? Why?
________________________________________________________________________________
Definitions of Physical Fitness DEFINITIONS

physical fitness
While many sources provide definitions of “A set of attributes that people have or
physical fitness (see sample definitions to the achieve that relate to their ability to
right), there is no universally agreed upon perform physical activity” (Howley and
definition of physical fitness and of its Franks).
components. Instructors are encouraged to use “A set of attributes, primarily respiratory
definitions from their own sources. and cardiovascular, relating to the ability
to perform tasks requiring expenditure of
energy” (Stedman’s Concise Medical
Physical fitness involves the integrated and
Dictionary for the Health Professions).
efficient performance of all the major systems of
“The ability to perform moderate to
the body, including the heart and lungs, the vigorous levels of physical activity without
skeleton, the muscles, and the brain. The brain is undue fatigue and the capability of
an essential element, as it learns to control the maintaining such ability throughout life”
muscles that move the bones, as well as (American College of Sports Medicine).
controlling the heart and lungs to provide
_____________________________________________________________________________
energy for the working muscles. Fitness also influences our psychological well-being,
including mental alertness and emotional stability, because what we do with our bodies also
affects our minds.
Physical fitness is an individual condition that varies from person to person. It is influenced
by factors such as age, gender, heredity, personal health habits, amount and level of
exercise, and eating practices. Making physical fitness a priority is important for a long and
healthy life.
REFERENCE
For additional information, refer to the following resource:
Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth, 2004. 9. Available online at
Knowing the Basics of Physical Fitness

Physical fitness is more easily understood by examining its components, or parts. As
students have learned in earlier grades, there are two categories of physical fitness
components: health-related fitness components and skill-related fitness components:
23 Health-related fitness components consist of
5888 cardiorespiratory endurance
5889 muscular strength
5890 muscular endurance
5891 flexibility
5892 body composition
24 Skill-related fitness components include
5888 agility
5889 balance
5890 coordination
5891 speed
5892 power
5893 reaction time
This lesson focuses on the health-related fitness components.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Health-Related Fitness Components
Health-related fitness components not only help

the body to perform more efficiently, but also help DEFINITION health-
prevent disease and improve overall health and related fitness
well-being. Manitoba’s combined physical “The state of physical and
education/health education curriculum physiological characteristics that define
emphasizes the health-related components of the risk levels for the premature
fitness—that is, the physical and physiological development of diseases or morbid
components of fitness that have a direct impact on conditions presenting a relationship
with a sedentary mode of life”
health status.
(Bouchard and Shephard).
The five health-related physical fitness components are cardiorespiratory endurance,

muscular strength, muscular endurance, flexibility, and body composition:
5888 Cardiorespiratory endurance (CRE) is the ability of the cardiovascular system (heart,
blood, blood vessels) and respiratory system (lungs, air passages) to deliver oxygen and
other nutrients to the working muscles and to remove wastes. Tests that involve
running (e.g., 20 m shuttle run test), cycling, and swimming can be used to measure this
fitness component. Aerobic power (maximal oxygen consumption) and aerobic capacity
are terms used to describe CRE fitness.
Activities vary in intensity level:
23 Light activities are physical activities that NOTE TO TEACHER
involve large muscle groups. While While examples of activities can be
engaging in light activities, people begin to categorized as typically light, moderate, or
notice their breathing, but they can still talk vigorous activities, an individual’s response
fairly easily. to physical activity, exercise, or workload
is dependent upon his or her current level
24 Moderate activities are physical activities of fitness. In other words, two individuals
that cause breathing and heart rate to who may appear to be quite similar (e.g.,
increase. People engaging in moderate in age, height, body
activities can hear themselves breathe, but type) may, in fact, respond very differently
physiologically to the same workload.
they can still talk.
5888 Vigorous activities are physical activities that cause breathing and heart
rate to increase to a higher level, making it difficult to talk.
Note that an individual may be working at the moderate to vigorous intensity level
while engaging in muscular strength activities and muscular endurance activities if
performed in a circuit format.
For more information on exercise intensity, refer to RM 9–FM: Level

of Exertion/Intensity.
For more information on cardiorespiratory endurance values for unfit and fit
individuals, refer to RM 10–FM: Comparative Chart of Cardiorespiratory
Endurance (CRE) for Unfit and Fit Individuals.
_____________________________________________________________________________
23 Muscular strength is the ability of a muscle, or a group of muscles, to exert force for
a brief period of time. Strength of different muscles can be measured by having a
person perform weightlifting exercises and determining the maximum amount of
weight the person can lift. A person’s strength can be expressed as absolute strength
(the actual weight lifted) or as relative strength (the weight lifted, divided by the
person’s body weight).
24 Muscular endurance is the ability of a muscle, or a group of muscles, to sustain
repeated contractions or to continue applying force against a fixed object. Push-ups
and curl-ups are often used to test muscular endurance. The person’s endurance is
expressed as the number of repetitions completed without stopping for a set period
of time (often one minute).
25 Flexibility is the ability to move joints through their full range of motion. The sit-
and-reach test is a good measure of flexibility of the lower back and the backs of the
upper legs (hamstrings). A person’s flexibility is usually expressed in how far a joint
can be moved or the degrees through which a joint can be moved.
23 Body composition refers to the makeup of
the body in terms of lean mass (muscle, bone, NOTE TO TEACHER
vital tissue, and organs) and fat mass. Good
body composition has strong bones, adequate Treat the topic of body composition with
sensitivity. Be sensitive to issues related
skeletal muscle size, a strong heart, and a low
to self-esteem, body size, and weight. A
amount of fat mass. Regular physical activity key message is that a healthy body
and exercise will help decrease body fat and comes in all shapes and sizes.
increase or maintain muscle mass, increase For a discussion of body composition,
bone mass, and improve heart function. refer to pages 37 to 42 of Guidelines
Although body composition entails muscle, for Fitness Assessment in Manitoba
bone, and fat, it is often expressed only as Schools (Manitoba Education,
percentage of body fat. Citizenship and Youth).
Many types of tools can be used to assess body composition, including skinfold
callipers, bioelectrical impedance analyzers (found in many weigh scales), body
mass index (BMI), underwater weighing, and dual energy X-ray absorptiometry
(the latest in tools).
REFERENCE
For more information and ideas on how to assess the health-related fitness
components, refer to the following resource:
Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth, 2004. Available online at
_____________________________________________________________________________
Principles of Fitness Development
The keys to selecting the right kinds of exercises for developing and maintaining each of the
basic components of fitness are found in the principles of specificity, overload, reversibility,
progression, diminishing returns, and individual differences.
5888 Specificity: The type of training in which individuals engage should be directed
specifically at improving their abilities in life. Therefore, choose the right kind of
activities to improve each physical fitness component, and the right combination of
physical fitness components to help in activities of daily living. Strength training results
in increases in strength for the muscles being exercised but does little to improve
cardiorespiratory endurance.
Also, train specifically for the specific activity of interest. For example, optimal
running performance is best achieved when the muscles involved in running are
trained for the movements required. It does not necessarily follow that a good
swimmer is a good runner. Specificity also requires that one consider the speed of
motion, the number of limbs moving, the direction in which they are moving, and the
range over which the movement occurs.
5889 Overload: If a person works often (frequency) enough, hard (intensity) enough, and
long (duration) enough to load the body above its resting level, physical fitness will
improve. If this is done regularly over a period of time, the body will gradually adapt to
the increase in demands. The term overload does not refer to the idea that one needs to
overexert or exert at high intensities to obtain gains in fitness; it simply means that one
needs to load the body more than it is usually accustomed to.
5890 Reversibility: Physical fitness or the effects of a physical activity program or an
exercise program cannot be stored. If a person stops training for a period of time (three
to five days, in some cases) a process of detraining will begin. The gains in fitness that
were made begin to reverse themselves. If no exercise is done for a long enough period,
fitness levels can revert to the original starting point. At least three balanced workouts a
week (three hours minimum) are necessary to maintain a good level of fitness.
5891 Progression: Increasing the frequency, intensity, and/or duration of an activity over
periods of time is necessary for continued improvement in physical fitness.
Improvements in physical fitness are realized fairly rapidly at the onset of an exercise or
training program. The rate of improvement will gradually slow down and level off
(adaptation) if an overload is present (meaning that the load is increasing and that there
is progress). At high levels of physical fitness it may even be necessary to change the
type(s) of exercise(s) being performed.
5892 Diminishing returns: The fitter a person becomes, the more difficult it is to continue
to become fitter at the same rate. Individuals who begin jogging can, over a relatively
short time, improve the speed and duration of their runs. However, experienced
distance runners may have to spend an entire training season to decrease their run time
by just a few seconds.
_____________________________________________________________________________
23 Individual differences: Every person has a unique physical and psychological makeup that
requires a unique training program. Factors that may play a role are current fitness level,
gender, age, heredity, susceptibility to injury, rest and recovery needs, and diet. Two people
working out with the same program could experience completely different results.
Some activities can be used to fulfill more than one of a person’s basic exercise
requirements. For example, in addition to increasing cardiorespiratory endurance, running
builds muscular endurance in the legs, and swimming develops the arm, shoulder, and
chest muscles. If the proper physical activities are selected, it is possible to fit parts of a
muscular endurance workout into a cardiorespiratory endurance workout and save time.
REFERENCE
Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth, 2004. 10-13. Available online at
The FITT Principle
A well-designed personal physical activity plan will outline how often (frequency), how long
(time), and how hard (intensity) a person exercises, and what kinds of exercises (type) are
selected. The exercise frequency, intensity, time, and type (FITT principle) are key components
of any fitness plan or routine.
An individual’s goals, present fitness level, age, health, skills, interest, and availability of time
are among the factors to consider in developing a personal physical activity plan. In particular,
every plan should have a schedule that progresses over time. Progression can take the form of
changes in any of the FITT components, but not all at once. For example, an athlete training for
high-level competition would follow a different program than would a person whose goals are
to develop good health from a sedentary start. Regardless of the specific goals, both programs
would be based upon the elements of the FITT principle.
Initially, a personal physical activity plan does not need to include all the health-related fitness
components. The choice of which components to focus on initially should be based upon the
likelihood of adopting the new behaviour and a consideration of whether the goals are SMART
(specific, measurable, attainable, realistic, and time framed—see Module B, Lesson 5). Over the
course of weeks or months, other components would be added. A common progression is to
adopt a CRE program (three times a week, 20 minutes per session, moderate intensity) without
specific muscular strength or muscular endurance elements. After each CRE session the cool-
down would simply entail a few stretches for flexibility. After a few weeks of successful
completion of the program, a new element could be added.
For additional information, refer to RM 11–FM: FITT Principle Guidelines.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Applying the FITT Principle
According to the FITT principle, an exercise
routine should include exercises and activities NOTE TO TEACHER
that will improve the health-related fitness Improving in these four health-related
components: fitness areas will increase lean body
5888 cardiorespiratory endurance mass (stronger bones and muscle)
and decrease fat mass, and therefore
5889 muscular strength significantly affect body composition.
5890 muscular endurance Improvements will also reduce risk of
disease and improve work capacity.
5891 flexibility
Each workout or exercise session should begin with a warm-up and end with a cool-down.
Generally, rest and recovery are as important to plan as the physical activity and exercise,
and should be equally spaced between workouts. The more intense the exercise is, the
longer the time required to recover. Likewise, the more novel the exercise is, the longer the
time required to recover. Trying to adopt all aspects of health-related fitness at once may
not be realistic. Begin with small realistic goals in one or two areas of health-related fitness
and plan to introduce more as time progresses and new behaviours become habits.
The following guidelines are provided to identify the amount of activity or exercise
necessary for the average healthy person to attain and/or maintain a minimum level of
overall fitness. Included are examples of activities/exercises, as well as safety considerations
for each health-related fitness component.
23 Warm-up: Warm-up activities are crucial parts of any exercise routine or sports training
to prepare the body and mind for movement. The importance of a structured warm-up
routine should not be underestimated in relation to preventing injury, having optimal
performance, and maximizing enjoyment. An effective warm-up increases both the
respiratory rate and the heart rate. This helps increase the body’s core temperature,
while also increasing the body’s muscle temperature through an increase in the delivery
of oxygen and nutrients to the working muscles. Increasing muscle temperature helps
make the muscles loose, supple, and pliable. Another reason why warm-up activities are
important is that they provide the participant with an opportunity to prepare mentally
for the upcoming exercise session.
A warm-up should consist of light physical activity for 5 to 10 minutes of exercise, such
as walking, slow jogging, knee lifts, arm circles, or trunk rotations. Low-intensity
movements that simulate movements to be used in the activity can also be included in
the warm-up. Static stretching, per se, is not considered part of a warm-up routine. A
warm-up can consist of a lower intensity form of the exercise about to commence.
24 Cardiorespiratory endurance (CRE): At least three 20- to 30-minute bouts of aerobic
(activity requiring oxygen) exercise each week are recommended. Popular aerobic
conditioning activities include brisk walking, jogging, swimming, cycling, rope-
jumping, rowing, cross-country skiing, and some continuous action games such as
basketball and soccer. The type of activity suitable for a person to develop
cardiorespiratory fitness is dependent upon the person’s initial fitness. A jog may be
intense for one individual and serve as a warm-up for another.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Safety Considerations
To ensure safety, the following need to be considered:

5888 Know how to calculate target heart-rate zone.
5889 Know how to monitor intensity (e.g., talk test, rate of perceived exertion, heart-
rate monitors).
23 When increasing the intensity (speed, incline, and/or 10 Percent Rule
resistance) or duration of exercise, keep in mind the
Increase selected activity
10 percent rule (e.g., if a person is running continuously for
no more than 10 percent
10 minutes per session in week 1, then in week 2 the per week.
maximum increase recommended would be to run
continuously for 11 minutes per session).
23 Include a variety of activities to avoid overuse injuries or to prevent boredom.
24 Include a cardiorespiratory cool-down. To prevent post-exercise peril (e.g.,
dizziness, light-headedness, fainting), gradually reduce the heart rate, breathing
rate, and body temperature before moving on to resistance training or flexibility
training. This could be accomplished by simply walking slowly for 5 to 10 minutes.
5889 Resistance training: Resistance training is used primarily to develop muscular
strength and muscular endurance, but can develop cardiorespiratory endurance if it is
incorporated within a circuit-type workout.
23 Muscular strength: Two or three 20-minute sessions each week that include
exercises for all the major muscle groups are required. Lifting weights is one of the
most effective ways to increase strength. For sedentary people, as little as two
workouts per week can be beneficial.
and/or
24 Muscular endurance: Two to three 30-minute sessions each week that include
exercises such as calisthenics, push-ups, curl-ups, pull-ups, and light weight training
for all the major muscle groups are required.
For a sedentary person, muscular strength and muscular endurance sessions can be
combined and limited to two sessions per week. Then, as the behaviour is adopted
(becomes a habit), additional sessions per week can be added.
Most of the skill-related components of fitness can also be developed with resistance
training. Most people associate weightlifting with resistance training. Although lifting
weights is one of the most effective forms of resistance training, it is not the only one.
Other forms include the use of medicine balls, body balls, elastic bands, and calisthenics.
_____________________________________________________________________________
General Resistance Training Guidelines
When engaging in resistance training, exercises must be performed to the point of

fatigue or failure (i.e., cannot complete one more repetition), regardless of whether one
is training for strength or for endurance. If it feels as if four more repetitions could have
been performed after the set is completed, then there was not sufficient overload.
Additional guidelines for resistance training include the following:

23 Sessions: A minimum of 2 or 3 sessions per week are required to see change (2 for
beginners, more than 2 for intermediate and advanced).
24 Muscle or muscle group: Perform 1 to 3 exercises per muscle or muscle group (1 for
beginners, 1 or 2 for intermediate, 1 to 3 for advanced). Change each exercise for
each muscle group every one to two months to prevent injuries and boredom.
25 Sets: Perform 1 to 3 sets per exercise (1 for beginners, 1 or 2 for intermediate, 1 to 3
for advanced).
26 Repetitions: Do 6 to 20 repetitions (16 to 20 = endurance, 10 to 16 =
strength/endurance, 6 to 10 = strength,). Cycle through all three repetition ranges
— first month for endurance, second month for strength/endurance, third month
for strength, and so on. Allow 30 to 90 seconds for isometric/static activities.

ᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀĀȀ⸀ĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀ0 Seek
guidance from the physical education instructor or weight room supervisor.
ᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀĀȀ⸀ĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀ1 Include a
general warm-up prior to resistance training even if not engaging in any CRE
workout.
ᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀĀȀ⸀ĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀ2 Make sure
that a qualified instructor shows how to perform the exercises correctly. Good
form reduces the risk of injury and leads to faster gains in muscle size and
strength.
ᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀĀȀ⸀ĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀ3 Before
using free weights, bars, and plates, beginners should consider using body
weight exercises and cable machine exercises until they have learned proper
technique and have established that they can stabilize their core effectively.
ᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀĀȀ⸀ĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀ4 Wear
appropriate clothes and protective equipment. For example, gloves reduce the risk
of blisters. Solid running shoes provide a stable base from which to exercise.
ᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀĀȀ⸀ĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀ5 Check all
equipment before using it. Do not use a piece of equipment if it seems faulty.
Inform the physical education instructor or weight room supervisor at once.
ᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀĀȀ⸀ĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀĀᜀ6 Always
secure weight plates with safety collars.
_____________________________________________________________________________
0 Don’t hold the breath while lifting weights. In general, breathe out on the exertion
or when tightening the muscle, and breathe in when lowering the weight or
returning to the start position.
1 Never completely straighten a joint.
2 Work big muscle groups before small ones.
3 Perform multi-joint exercises before single-joint exercises.
4 Train the core area last.
5 Never work the same muscle or muscle group two days in a row.
6 Stand on a non-slip surface to reduce the risk of slips and falls.
7 When in a situation where a “spotter” may be required, check with the physical
education instructor or weight room supervisor regarding safety and proper
technique.
8 Stop immediately if an injury occurs or if pain is felt, and consult a physician for
diagnosis and treatment. Understanding the difference between pain and muscle
fatigue/failure is important.
9 Always control the speed of the lifting and lowering. It is recommended that one
repetition should take approximately 4 to 7 seconds to complete. Avoid jerky
motion.
1 Flexibility: At the end of every workout, perform 5 to 10 minutes of static stretching

exercises. If a workout session includes a CRE session and a resistance training session,
flexibility is best left to the end of the entire exercise routine.

0 A stretch should feel like a gentle pull and should not be painful.
1 Avoid bouncing.
2 Work towards holding a stretch for 30 seconds.
3 Remember to breathe normally.
4 Be sure to stretch tight postural muscles (e.g., chest) as well as the muscle focused on
in the workout.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Designing an Exercise Routine
In developing their exercise routine, students need to consider the general guidelines
outlined earlier in this lesson in relation to the discussion of the FITT principle.
The definitions provided in the following table are intended to support individuals in
determining where they are on the Stages of Change continuum and in selecting
appropriate exercises for an exercise routine. Refer to this table when assisting students in
the appropriate selection, sequencing, and planning of cardiorespiratory and resistance
training exercises.
Defining Participant Experience

Participant Stage of Change Resistance Training Muscular Endurance
Recommendations and Strength
Training
Beginner Pre-contemplation 1 exercise per body part Endurance training for
Little or no previous Contemplation 1 set per body part first six weeks
experience Preparation/Decision
Intermediate Action 1 or 2 exercises per body part Endurance and strength

Limited experience 1 or 2 sets per body part training
but active within (As one becomes more experienced
last three months with resistance training, one will need
to increase the sets and exercises to
create overload and to challenge the
body.)
Advanced Maintenance 1 to 3 exercises per body part Endurance and strength
Prior experience 1 to 3 sets per body part training
and active for last (As one becomes more experienced
six months with resistance training, one will need
to increase the sets and exercises to
create overload and to challenge the
body.)
________________________________________________________________________________
Designing an Exercise Routine
As part of a personal physical activity practicum (see Module A), all students will create
their own exercise routine and record their progress. To create an exercise routine, students
should select activities that will improve their personal fitness level.
_____________________________________________________________________________
0 Beginners
Beginners may start with a cardiorespiratory plan as the first step in developing their
exercise routine. The following suggestions should be used in conjunction with the FITT
principle:
0 For some students, simply walking three times a week may be a start in their
exercise routine. Their plan would then involve increasing the walking time
(number of minutes of walking), increasing the speed of walking, or increasing the
frequency of walking (e.g., from three to five times per week). These changes could
take a month or so before any other fitness component was added.
0 A pedometer program can be used Step-Count Guidelines for ADULTS
for some students. All that is
Steps per Day Description
required is a pedometer and a
monthly calendar. Students record < 5000 steps/day
the number of steps they take for the 5000 - 7,499 steps/day typical or low active
first week and then determine a goal > 7500 - 9,999 steps/day somewhat active
for the total number of steps the > 10,000 steps/day active
next week using the 10 percent rule.
> 12,5000 steps/day highly active
Students record their daily step
For Active CHILDREN
counts and use their weekly totals to
12,000 – 16,000 steps/day
observe change.
0 Beginners may consider incorporating resistance training once they have achieved
a base of cardiorespiratory (aerobic) fitness, established the habit of being
physically active, improved body awareness, and gained confidence.
1 Intermediate or Advanced
0 For students who already participate in cardiorespiratory activities (e.g.,
intermediate or advanced) it is suggested that they incorporate some resistance
training in their exercise routine.
1 Students who are advanced in their resistance training may simply continue with an
existing plan, but will add new and different exercises. Be sure that these students
make a plan for their cardiorespiratory fitness.
Regardless of their experience (beginner, intermediate, or advanced), students must

0 include exercises from the major muscle groups (i.e., chest, back, shoulders, biceps,
triceps, core, quadriceps, hamstrings) in their exercise routine
1 identify the safety procedures they will use in executing their exercise routine
Refer to the discussion of Applying the FITT Principle earlier in this lesson.
_____________________________________________________________________________
There are a number of ways to design a resistance training routine with respect to the
number of days to train and the muscle groups to include on a particular day. RM 12–FM
provides examples of two-day, three-day, and four-day split routines to be considered when
developing a resistance training routine. Also provided is an example of a total body
resistance routine in two-day, three-day, and four-day formats.
Refer to RM 12–FM: Split Routines for Resistance Training.
Resistance Training Planner
A Resistance Training Planner is available to assist

with planning an exercise routine. This tool NOTE TO TEACHER
contains over 250 exercises of the major muscle If a student does not have access to this
groups and provides information on how to electronic planner, it could be printed off
perform these exercises correctly and safely. The and used in paper format. Be sure to sort
planner also contains links to other websites for the activities alphabetically and by level
of difficulty (beginner, intermediate,
obtaining additional information. advanced).
The Resistance Training Planner (Excel spreadsheet) is available online

at <www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/cur/physhlth/curriculum.html>.
To record or log resistance training sessions, refer to RM 13–FM: Resistance

Training Log.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 8–FM: Fitness Rating of Common Activities
Rate the degree of fitness required (in relation to each of the four health-related fitness
components) for each of the activities listed below. Use a rating scale from 1 to 10, with 1 being
little or no fitness requirement and 10 being the greatest fitness requirement. (Highest possible
overall score = 40.)
Activity Fitness Rating for Health-Related Fitness Components Overall

Cardiorespiratory Muscular Muscular Flexibility Fitness
Endurance Strength Endurance Rating
Sports
Cross-Country
Skiing
Volleyball
Bowling
Step Aerobics
Ice Hockey
Other?
Daily Activities
Mowing the Lawn
Vacuuming the
House
Shovelling Snow
Other?
Occupations
Mail Carrier
Flight Attendant
Roofer / Shingler
Waiter / Waitress
Other?
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 9–FM: Level of Exertion/Intensity
Level of Exertion/Intensity
Amount of Effort
Rate of Heart-Rate
Range*
Perceived Exertion
(Age Based)
Exertion Intensity Exertion Description
(RPE) Scale Descriptor Maximum Descriptor
(Modified
Borg Scale) Heart Rate
(MHR)
1 Resting You are breathing normally. It is very easy to talk.
2 LIGHT 50% – 65% Somewhat Your rate of breathing increases slightly, but it is
of MHR Light still easy to talk.
3 Light You notice your breathing. You can still talk fairly
easily.
4 Medium You are breathing more heavily, but you do not
hear yourself breathe.
65% – 80% Somewhat
5 MODERATE You can hear yourself breathe, but can still talk.
of MHR Hard
6 Medium It is getting difficult to talk.
Hard
7 Hard You are breathing heavily. It is difficult to talk.
8 80% – 100% Very Hard Your breathing is laboured. It is very difficult to
talk.
VIGOROUS
9 of MHR Gruelling It is almost impossible to talk.
10 Maximum You are breathing very heavily. You cannot talk.
You may feel pain.
0 The heart-rate range may vary, depending on the source of reference, age, physical abilities, individual fitness levels, and so on.
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 10–FM: Comparative Chart of
Cardiorespiratory Endurance (CRE) for Unfit and Fit Individuals
(Based on Performance on 20 m Beep Test )
Level of Fitness Level Completed VO2 Max* Moderate Intensity Vigorous Intensity
on 20m Beep mL/kg/min. (60% of VO2 Max) (80% of VO2 Max)
Test
Unfit—Low CRE 4 26 15.6 20.8
walking fast slow jog
15 min./mile
Very Fit—High CRE 14 60.64 36.384 48.512
running at 6 mph running at 8 mph
10 min./mile 7.5 min./mile
* VO2 Max—the maximum amount of oxygen, in millilitres, one can use in one minute per kilogram of body weight.
Pace Treadmill Speed ACSM* Walk/Run Equations VO2 Max

min./mile mile/hr. (mph) metres/min. mL/kg/min.
30 2 53.6 0.1 8.86
20 3 80.4 0.1 11.54
15 4 107.2 0.1 14.22
12 5 134 0.2 30.3
10 6 160.8 0.2 35.66
8.571428571 7 187.6 0.2 41.02
7.5 8 214.4 0.2 46.38
6.666666667 9 241.2 0.2 51.74
6 10 268 0.2 57.1
5.454545455 11 294.8 0.2 62.46
5 12 321.6 0.2 67.82
*ACSM—American College of Sports Medicine.
Completed Level on Corresponding VO2 Max

20 m Beep Test mL/kg/min.
4 26.04
5 29.5
6 32.95
7 36.42
8 39.88
9 43.3
10 46.8
11 50.26
12 53.7
13 57.2
14 60.64
15 64.1
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 11–FM: FITT Principle Guidelines
Fitness and/or Variables

Health Benefit F I T T
Frequency Intensity Time Type
Cardiorespiratory 3 to 5 times per moderate to minimum of 20 running
Endurance (CRE) week vigorous minutes cycling
(Aerobic) intensity cross-country
(60% to 85%
skiing
of maximum
(continuous
heart rate)
motion of large
muscle
group[s])
Muscular 2 or 3 times high resistance minimum of 20 free weights
Strength per week, with (sets to minutes per universal gym
rest days in maximum session tubing
between bouts capability) 1 to 3 sets of
body weight
6 to 10
repetitions
Muscular 2 or 3 times low to minimum of 20 free weights
Endurance per week, with moderate minutes per universal gym
rest days in resistance session tubing
between bouts 3 sets of
body weight
16 to 20
repetitions
Flexibility daily slow and 10 to 12 static
controlled minutes
movement
Body 5 to 7 times per combination of dependent on aerobic
Composition week intensities intensity anaerobic
resistance
Anaerobic alternate days 90% of 2 to 3 minutes sprinting
2 or 3 times maximum heart per bout jumping
per week rate
Active Daily daily low to 30 to 60 gardening
Living / Health moderate minutes walking
intensity bowling
References:
Manitoba Fitness Council. Active Healthy People: Fitness Theory Manual. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Fitness Council, n.d.
---. Resistance Training Manual. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Fitness Council, n.d.
_____________________________________________________________________________
The following page provides examples of routines to be considered when developing a

resistance training routine:
0 Two-Day Split Routine
1 Three-Day Split Routine
2 Four-Day Split Routine
Also provided is an example of a Total Body Resistance Routine in two-day, three-day, and
four-day formats. Be sure to include at least one to two days of rest to allow for recovery.
To determine the appropriate number of sets and repetitions for resistance training, refer to
the following table.
Defining Participant Experience

Participant Stage of Change Resistance Training Muscular Endurance
Recommendations and Strength Training
Beginner Pre-contemplation 1 exercise per body part Endurance training for first
Little or no previous Contemplation 1 set per body part six weeks
experience Preparation/
Decision
Intermediate Action 1 or 2 exercises per body part Endurance and strength
Limited experience 1 or 2 sets per body part training
but active within last (As one becomes more
three months experienced with resistance
training, one will need to
increase the sets and exercises
to create overload and to
challenge the body.)
Advanced Maintenance 1 to 3 exercises per body part Endurance and strength
Prior experience and 1 to 3 sets per body part training
active for last six (As one becomes more
months experienced with resistance
training, one will need to
increase the sets and exercises
to create overload and to
challenge the body.)
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
(Continued) Two-Day Split Routine
Ideal for Beginner, Day 1 Legs Back Biceps
Intermediate, and/or Day 2 Chest Triceps Shoulder Core

Advanced
Day 3 Rest or go back to Day 1 and repeat.
Three-Day Split Routine

Day 1 Chest Triceps Shoulders
For Intermediate or Day 2 Back Biceps Core
Advanced Day 3 Quads Hamstrings Calves
Four-Day Split Routine

Day 1 Chest Triceps Core
For Intermediate or Day 2 Quads Hamstrings
Day 3 Back Biceps
Advanced
Day 4 Shoulders Core
Total Body Resistance Routine

Ideal for Beginner, Day 1 Order of Exercises
Intermediate, or Day 3 Chest
Advanced Day 5 Back
Day 7 Triceps
Day 1 (Rest) Biceps
Day 2 Shoulders
Day 4 Legs
Day 6 Core
Day 7 (Rest)
Day 1
Repeat
Day 1 Order of Exercises
Day 3 Chest
Day 5 Back
Repeat Triceps
Biceps
Shoulders
Legs
Core
Day 1 Order of Exercises
Day 5 Chest
Repeat Back
Triceps
Biceps
Shoulders
Legs
Core
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 13–FM: Resistance Training Log
Name
Program Type Program Day(s)
The time spent in workouts should be recorded in RM 7–PA: Physical Activity Log
(Excel version) and used for the completion of the physical activity practicum (see
Module A, Lesson 3).
Exercise Day 1
Set 1 Set 2 Set 3
Beginner, Intermediate, Advanced
Intermediate, Advanced
Advanced
Wt. Reps Wt. Reps Wt. Reps
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 13–FM: Resistance Training Log (Continued)
Exercise Day 2
Set 1 Set 2 Set 3
Beginner, Intermediate, Advanced
Intermediate, Advanced
Advanced
_____________________________________________________________________________
MODULE C:
MENTAL-EMOTIONAL HEALTH
Introduction
Lesson 1: Mental Health, Health Habits, and Exercise
Lesson 2: Stress and Body Image
Lesson 3: Anxiety and Depression

MODULE C: MENTAL-EMOTIONAL HEALTH
11.MH.1 Identify and apply positive health strategies to deal with issues such as
11.MH.4 Examine the signs and symptoms of mental-emotional health issues related
to stress, anxiety, depression, and eating disorders.
11.MH.5 Identify community service agencies that support individuals concerned

about mental-emotional health issues.

MODULE C: MENTAL-EMOTIONAL HEALTH
Introduction
The benefits of physical exercise on the body, which are addressed extensively in this
document, are without doubt of great importance to the overall physical health and
fitness of every person. This module discusses the links between mental-emotional health
and physical activity in greater detail. Physical activity is one of the most important and
powerful lifestyle practices. Research in recent years has clearly established that the brain
needs physical activity to function properly, to keep mood positive, and to combat aging.
We only need to review A Report on Mental Illnesses in Canada (Health Canada, Chapter 1) to
recognize how significant mental health issues are to the citizens of our country. If all the
people suffering from a mental health disorder could realize some measure of relief through
physical activity we could easily imagine physical activity and exercise as being a “magic
pill” that could be prescribed for many of life’s ills.
Module C: Mental-Emotional Health contains three lessons:

0 Lesson 1: Mental Health, Health Habits, and Exercise
1 Lesson 2: Stress and Body Image
2 Lesson 3: Anxiety and Depression
Resource Masters to support the lessons are provided at the end of each lesson.
REFERENCE
Health Canada. A Report on Mental Illnesses in Canada. Ottawa, ON: Health Canada,
2002. Available on the Public Health Agency of Canada website at <www.phac-
aspc.gc.ca/publicat/miic-mmac/index.html>.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Module C, Introduction 187
Lesson 1: Mental Health, Health Habits, and Exercise
Introduction
Mental-emotional health and physical health affect each other. People with physical health
problems often experience anxiety or depression that affects their recovery and overall well-
being. According to Health Canada (“Mental Health—Mental Illness”), mental health
factors can increase the risk of developing physical problems such as
0 diabetes
1 heart disease
2 weight gain or weight loss
3 gastrointestinal problems
4 reductions in immune system efficiency
5 blood biochemical imbalances
This lesson defines mental health and discusses how exercise and other healthy lifestyle
practices can positively affect mental health. Students learn about ways to help themselves or
to seek help when dealing with their feelings and emotions from day to day.
REFERENCE
For additional information, refer to the following article:
Health Canada. “Mental Health—Mental Illness.” It’s Your Health. Ottawa, ON: Health
Canada, 2006. Available online at
<http://hc-sc.gc.ca/iyh-vsv/diseases-maladies/mental_e.html>.
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________ 189
Module C, Lesson 1
Key Understandings
0 Mental-emotional health is a critical component of overall well-being.

1 The stigma regarding mental-emotional health issues needs to be removed so that
people with mental health concerns engage in help-seeking behaviour.
2 Healthy lifestyle practices support positive mental-emotional health.
________________________________________________________________________________
Essential Questions
0 How is mental-emotional health different from mental illness?

1 How do active lifestyle practices affect mental-emotional health issues (e.g.,
anxiety, depression, stress, eating disorders) and vice versa?
________________________________________________________________________________
As indicated by Health Canada (“Mental Health—Mental Illness”), most people will likely
experience feelings of isolation, loneliness, sadness, stress, or disconnection from things
during their lifetime. These feelings are often short-term, normal reactions to difficult
situations, such as the death of a loved one, the loss of a job, a romantic breakup, or a
sudden change of circumstances. Learning to cope or deal with these “ups and downs” or
the good and bad times is part of life.
What Is Mental or Emotional Health?
Mental wellness, or good mental health, “is

feeling, thinking, and interacting in ways that DEFINITION mental-
help you enjoy life and deal effectively with emotional health
difficult situations” (Manitoba Healthy
The state or balance of a person’s
Schools). thoughts, feelings, and actions. Mental-
emotional health relates to how people
Good mental health, more recently referred to look at themselves, their lives, and the
as mental wellness, is not just the absence of other people in their lives, how they
mental health problems. Although different evaluate their challenges and problems,
cultures have differing expectations for health, and how they explore choices. This
includes handling stress, relating to
many of the following characteristics are likely
other people, and making decisions.
to be present in individuals with good mental
health in many cultures:
0 sense of well-being and satisfaction
1 ability to enjoy life, to laugh, and to have fun
2 ability to deal with life’s stresses and to bounce back from adversity
190 _____________________________________________________________________________
0 participation in life to the fullest extent possible, through meaningful activities and
positive relationships
1 capacity to change, grow, and experience a range of feelings, as life’s circumstances
change
2 sense of balance in own life between solitude and sociability, work and play, sleep and
wakefulness, rest and exercise, and so on
3 self-care that attends to the needs of the whole person—mind, body, spirit, creativity,
intellectual development, health, and so on
4 ability to care for others
5 self-confidence and good self-esteem
Why Is Mental-Emotional Health Important?
Our minds are not separate entities from the rest of us. When
“Mens sana in corpore
we are distressed, our physical health is also affected sano (a healthy mind in a
negatively, and our spirits decline. Many physical conditions healthy body)”
are actually rooted in a state of mind (psychosomatic illness), —Juvenal (Roman poet)
or in a history of stress that has never been balanced. Hence it
is important to take care of the body, mind, and spirit.
What Is Mental Illness?
Mental illness, by definition, is quite different from everyday feelings and reactions to
difficult situations. People who suffer from a mental illness may experience a serious
disturbance in thinking, mood, or behaviour, which may have an impact on their ability to
function effectively over a long period of time. Mental illness may affect people’s ability to
cope with the simplest aspects of everyday life. Many people need help in regaining balance
in their lives.
Healthy Lifestyle Practices
Examining healthy lifestyle practices or

coping mechanisms to deal with everyday
DEFINITION healthy
living is an important part of developing
mental-emotional health. The engagement lifestyle practices
in healthy lifestyle practices contributes to Any behaviour that has an effect on a
both the quality and duration of life. The person’s health and well-being. (The level
or amount of the behaviour engaged in will
health habits or healthy lifestyle practices
determine the degree of the positive
explored in the following Suggestions for effect.)
Instruction/Assessment can significantly
affect a person’s life.
_____________________________________________________________________________ 191
Module C, Lesson 1
REFERENCES
For information on mental and emotional health, refer to the following websites:
Health Canada. “Mental Health—Mental Illness.” It’s Your Health. Ottawa, ON: Health
Canada, 2006. Available online at
Helpguide. “Mental and Emotional Health.”
<www.helpguide.org/mental/mental_emotional_health.htm>.
Manitoba Healthy Schools. “Mental Health: What Is Mental Wellness?” Mental Health.
<www.gov.mb.ca/healthyschools/issues/mental.html>.
________________________________________________________________________________
10 Basic Health Habits
Using the active learning strategy Think-Pair-Share (see Appendix E), have students think
of 10 basic health habits individually. Students then work in pairs to share their ideas and to
check for similarities and differences. Two pairs then join to form a small group of four to
develop consensus on 10 basic health habits as a group.
To help guide the group discussion, encourage students to include health habits related to
0 physical activity (see Public Health Agency of Canada, Canada’s Physical Activity Guide
to Healthy Active Living)
1 healthy eating (see Health Canada, Eating Well with Canada’s Food Guide)
2 sleep
3 substance use, including tobacco and alcohol
4 body weight
5 personal and dental hygiene
6 stress
7 building healthy relationships
8 general safety
Students could also develop an advertising campaign promoting one or more health habit(s)
using different media.
192 _____________________________________________________________________________
REFERENCES
For additional information on basic health habits, refer to the following article:
Zamora, Dulce. “13 Health Habits to Improve Your Life.” WebMD—Features Related to
Health and Balance. 2004.
<www.webmd.com/balance/features/13-healthy-habits-to-improve-your-life>.
The following guides are available online:
Health Canada. Eating Well with Canada’s Food Guide. 2007.
<www.hc-sc.gc.ca/fn-an/food-guide-aliment/index_e.html>.
---. Eating Well with Canada’s Food Guide: First Nations, Inuit and Métis. 2007.
<www.hc-sc.gc.ca/fn-an/food-guide-aliment/index_e.html>.
Public Health Agency of Canada. Canada’s Physical Activity Guide for Youth. 2002.
<www.phac-aspc.gc.ca/pau-uap/fitness/downloads.html>.
---. Canada’s Physical Activity Guide to Healthy Active Living. 2004.
<www.phac-aspc.gc.ca/pau-uap/fitness/downloads.html>.
________________________________________________________________________________
Suggestion for Instruction/Assessment
Influences on Mental-Emotional Health
Provide each student with a copy of RM 1–MH (with the Mental Health Benefits left blank).
Using the Think-Pair-Share strategy again, ask each student to identify and record mental
health benefits of healthy lifestyle practices on RM 1–MH. After students have completed
the task individually, they work with a partner to expand their list of benefits. Finally,
students form small groups to share all the mental health benefits they have identified.
Have each group present their top 10 mental health benefits.
Refer to RM 1–MH: Influences on Mental-Emotional Health.
REFERENCE
Nieman, David C. “The Health Continuum.” The Exercise-Health Connection. Champaign, IL:
Human Kinetics, 1998. 5.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________ 193
Module C, Lesson 1
Effect of Exercise on Mental Health
As a result of exercise, the body releases different chemicals that affect the brain. One group
of chemicals is called endorphins. During exercise, the release of the beta-endorphin by the
pituitary gland increases and produces an analgesic effect on the body as well as a feeling of
elation or euphoria.
In his article “Exercise is a State of Mind,” Miller states that “for several decades we’ve
known about one effect of exercise on the brain, the ‘endorphin high’ that makes us feel
good during and right after exercise” (48). He goes on to say that more recent scientists have
discovered some longer-lasting effects of exercise on the brain, such as
decreased anxiety
reduced depression
improved ability to cope with stress
raised self-esteem
improved mood
improved sleep
increased cognition (mental functions such as the ability to think, reason, and
remember)
With exercise, several biological changes occur that make nerve cells more active or increase
the ability of neurons to communicate with one another. The way this works is that the
exercise fuels the body with blood, which carries energy and oxygen to the brain, which in
turn tells the body to produce more proteins called neurotrophic factors or growth factors.
These substances stimulate nerve cells to grow and connect with one another
(neuroplasticity) or to develop new nerve cells (neurogenesis).
The hippocampus, a seahorse-shaped region in the temporal lobe of the brain, is involved in
regulating mood and storing memories. Studies have shown that “exercise caused an
increase in the production of neuropeptide Y (NPY) in the hippocampus . . . [and] induced
an increase in brain-derived neurotrophic factor (BDNF) in the same region. These two
proteins—NPY and BDNF—are important prerequisites for nerve growth and survival”
(Miller 49). These proteins can be thought of as the “fertilizers” for the brain. BDNF is a
natural substance that enhances cognition by boosting the ability of neurons to
communicate with one another.
194 _____________________________________________________________________________
The release of other chemicals such as serotonin, dopamine, norepinephrine, melatonin, and
insulin are also affected by exercise, which in turn can affect mental and emotional health.
Because activities such as going for a walk or a run, shooting baskets, skateboarding,
participating in a sport, or doing yard work can contribute to better functioning of the mind
and the body, exercising is a healthy lifestyle practice for everyone to do every day.
REFERENCE
Miller, Michael Craig. “Exercise is a State of Mind.” Newsweek 149.13 (26 Mar. 2007):
48–50, 52, 55.
________________________________________________________________________________
Suggestion for Instruction / Assessment Healthy
Lifestyle Practices for Mental-Emotional Health
Have students describe, by completing the chart in RM 2–MH, how healthy lifestyle
practices (health habits) affect selected mental-emotional health issues.
Refer to RM 2–MH: Healthy Lifestyle Practices for Mental-Emotional Health.
After students have completed the chart, lead a class discussion on questions such as the
following:
How do the identified lifestyle practices affect mental-emotional health?
How does mental-emotional health affect lifestyle practices?
Which lifestyle practice has the greatest impact on mental-emotional health, and why?
________________________________________________________________________________
Is It Important to Seek Help for Mental-Emotional Problems?
People encounter stressful situations that could range from minor to major on a day-to-
day basis. Depending on the circumstances, individuals may need to seek help if their
reaction to stressors (e.g., loss, conflict, illness) becomes long term or interferes with other
aspects of life.
Most people who experience mental health problems can overcome them or learn to live with
them, especially if they seek help from a qualified source soon enough. Although people
usually do not hesitate to seek medical advice for a physical problem, some believe it is
shameful or a sign of weakness to seek help for an emotional health problem. There is
_____________________________________________________________________________ 195
Module C, Lesson 1
often a stigma of weakness associated with seeking help when encountering a mental or
emotional health problem.
Students need to be reminded that it is OK to seek help and should learn how to access help
for mental-emotional problems when needed.
REFERENCES
For information on getting help for a mental health problem, refer to the following website:
Manitoba Healthy Schools. “Mental Health: Where Can I Go For Help?” Mental Health.
For information related to working with students on the thinking, feeling, behavioural
cycle, refer to the following text:
Vernon, Ann. Thinking, Feeling, Behaving: An Emotional Education Curriculum for
Adolescents, Grades 7–12. Rev. ed. Champagne, IL: Research Press, 2006.
What Increases the Risk of Mental-Emotional Health Problems?
Mental health problems can be the result of many different kinds of experiences in a
person’s life, from early childhood to later life. These life experiences may relate to a
person’s environment, hereditary history, psychological factors, and/or sociological factors.
People may or may not have control over these factors.
________________________________________________________________________________
Life Experiences Leading to Mental Health Issues
In a class brainstorming session, have students

identify life experiences that they think could lead NOTE TO TEACHER
to mental health issues. Encourage students to
Please indicate to students that issues
think of situations or factors over which they have identified in this learning activity are not
control and situations over which they have no required to be personal.
control.
Once the class has identified numerous life experiences, have students classify which
situations they do not have control over (e.g., biochemical issues, family history)
situations they can have some control over (e.g., by getting support, making good
choices, or learning more about their situation)
Some situations or factors may fit into both categories.
196 _____________________________________________________________________________
Check student responses against the list provided in RM 3–MH and add to the list any
areas identified by students in the class discussion (for future reference).
Review the list of things over which students have some control. Discuss ways they
can control a given situation.
Reflect on the list of things over which students usually do not have control. Talk
about ways they can get support and improve their mental health outcomes even if
they have experienced situations they could control.
Refer to RM 3-MH: Life Experiences Leading to Mental Health Issues for

additional suggestions and/or information to support this learning strategy.
________________________________________________________________________________
Helping Oneself
Each of us must learn to deal with our own feelings and emotions from day to day. All life
experiences, whether positive or negative, are character building. The key is to develop
skills for coping and managing our feelings and emotions and to learn from all
experiences.
Resilience is the capability of an individual or group of individuals (such as a family, a

group of friends, or a community) to cope with significant adversity or stress in ways that
are not only effective, but also tend to result in an increased ability to respond
constructively to future adversity (Resiliency Canada). Research tells us that despite
growing up in high-risk environments, the majority of young people not only become
successful by societal standards, but also become self-confident, capable, and caring
persons. This is most often due to people’s ability to bounce back from challenging times
(resiliency), to use self-help or self-care measures (healthy behaviour choices) to help them
through, and to talk to someone who can offer support, as needed.
Many minor mental health problems can be relieved by self-help or self-care measures. If
we are feeling “blue,” “out of sorts,” or “stressed out,” healthy lifestyle practices such as
the following can help us to feel better:
Get enough rest and sleep.
Eat a well-balanced diet.
Avoid caffeine, alcohol, tobacco, or other drugs, and avoid mixing alcohol and drugs.
Participate in physical activities.
Do something that is enjoyable or relaxing (e.g., go to a funny movie, take a walk for
enjoyment, listen to music, read a good book, talk to a friend, engage in an activity that
is safe and appealing).
_____________________________________________________________________________ 197
Module C, Lesson 1
Attend to spiritual needs (e.g., by meditating, visualizing, praying, appreciating a
beautiful sunset).
Make a list of the things that are troubling or causing tension, and then put away the list
for the rest of the day.
Prioritize personal challenges and deal with the ones that are either most stressful or
easiest to check off the list.
Spend ample time with people whose company is enjoyable, generally those who have a
positive and respectful attitude.
Talk to a trustworthy friend or family member about own feelings and concerns, and
discuss possible reasons for those feelings. Ask them just to listen if advice is not
desired.
If students continue to feel down, depressed, or anxious to the extent that these feelings
are interfering with school work or personal life (friends and family), they will need to
talk to people who can help. School guidance counsellors can provide a safe place for
students to share their feelings and develop problem-solving strategies for challenging
situations. Guidance counsellors also have connections to resources outside the school that
can provide help.
REFERENCES
For further suggestions on ways to develop and maintain positive mental and
emotional health, refer to the following websites:
Health Canada. “Mental Health—Mental Illness.” It’s Your Health. 2006.
Helpguide.org. “Mental and Emotional Health.” Mental Health.
<www.helpguide.org/mental/mental_emotional_health.htm>.
Manitoba Healthy Schools. “Mental Health: What Is Mental Wellness?” Mental Health.
This site lists 10 tips for good mental health provided by the National Canadian Mental
Health Association.
Resiliency Canada. “Understanding Resiliency.”
<www.resiliencycanada.ca/index.php?option=com_content&task=view&id=17&Itemid=
37>.
198 _____________________________________________________________________________
RM 1–MH: Influences on Mental-Emotional Health*
Mental Health
How people
Healthy Adequate
look at themselves, their lives, Sleep
and the other people in Relations
their lives Healthy Personal
evaluate challenges and Weight Safety
problems
explore choices
Healthy
Physical
Healthy Lifestyle
Eating Activity
Practices
Managing
Stress Dental Hygiene

No Avoiding
Alcohol
Smoking
and Drugs
Mental Health
Benefits
Continued
__________
Source: Adapted, with permission, from D. C. Nieman, 1998, The Exercise-Health Connection, (Champaign, IL: Human
Kinetics), 5.
_____________________________________________________________________________
199
Module C, Lesson 1
RM 1–MH: Influences on Mental-Emotional Health* (Continued)
(Answer Key)
Mental Health
How people
Healthy Adequate
look at themselves, their lives, Sleep
and the other people in Relations
their lives Healthy Personal
evaluate challenges and Weight Safety
problems
explore choices
Healthy
Physical
Healthy Lifestyle
Eating Activity
Practices
Managing
Dental
Stress
Hygiene
No Avoiding
Alcohol
Smoking
and Drugs
Increased
Energy
Improved
Self-esteem Improved
Mood
Increased
Cognition Improved
Self-control
Mental Health
Benefits
Increased
Self-confidence Decreased
Anxiety
Positive
Body Image Reduced
Improved Depression
Resilience
__________
Source: Adapted, with permission, from D. C. Nieman, 1998, The Exercise-Health Connection, (Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics), 5.
200 _____________________________________________________________________________
RM 2–MH: Healthy Lifestyle Practices for Mental-Emotional Health
Complete the chart below by providing a description of how the healthy lifestyle practices
(health habits) from the first column affect one of the selected mental-emotional health
issues found along the top row (determined by the student).
Place a plus sign (+) in the corner of the box for a description that represents a positive or
beneficial effect.
Place a minus sign (–) in the corner of the box for a description that represents a
negative or detrimental effect.
Place a zero (0) in the corner of the box for a description that could have both a positive
and a negative effect.
Healthy Lifestyle Mental-Emotional Health Issues

Disordered Other
Practices Stress Anxiety Depression
Eating ( )
Physical Activity
Healthy Eating
Quality Sleep
Substance Use
Stress Management
Smoking
Weight Management
Personal Safety
Dental Hygiene
Healthy Relationships
_____________________________________________________________________________ 201
Module C, Lesson 1
RM 3–MH: Life Experiences Leading to Mental Health Issues
The following lists identify factors or situations that students usually do not have control
over and situations that students usually have some control over. Check student responses
against the lists provided below.
Situations Students Usually Do Not Have Control Over
Life experiences that may contribute to mental health issues that teenagers usually do not
have control over could include the following:
Inheriting genetic causes. (People with a history of mental health problems in their
family may be more likely to develop problems themselves.)
Experiencing biochemical causes. (An imbalance of neurotransmitters, such as serotonin, is
known to affect the processing of thoughts and emotions.)
Undergoing hormonal changes (that are a natural part of puberty and life transition)
Having a low income or being homeless
Living with a family member who has a mental illness or an addiction
Experiencing violence, abuse, or other trauma
Living in an environment that is chaotic, unsafe, or dangerous (e.g., living in a violent
home, or living in a house with shedding asbestos, peeling lead paint, or toxic drinking
water, living in a community where drug use or gang violence is widespread)
Experiencing chronic illnesses (whether born with or developed)
Growing up in a homeland of unrest (e.g., witnessing or experiencing war, violence, or
fear)
Experiencing racism or other forms of prejudice (e.g., because of sexual orientation, age,
religion, culture, class, body type)
Dealing with the death of a family member or a close friend
Experiencing a change in parental relationships (e.g., separation, divorce)
Encountering a change in living environments (e.g., moving from one home to another
due to a change in parental relationship, foster home, job transition of a parent or
guardian)
Continued
202 _____________________________________________________________________________
RM 3–MH: Life Experiences Leading to Mental Health Issues (Continued)
Situations Students Usually Have Some Control Over
Life experiences that may contribute to mental health issues that teenagers usually have
some control over could include the following:
Using or abusing substances. (Alcohol and some drugs are known to have depressive
effects or to increase anxiety. Some drugs such as crystal meth can cause symptoms that
resemble those of schizophrenia. The negative social and personal consequences of
substance abuse can also be a contributing factor to depression.)
Using violence to solve problems (resulting in problems at home and/or at school and
involvement in the justice system)
Under-eating or overeating. (Restricting food intake below what the body needs or eating
beyond comfort to cope with problems or difficult feelings can cause additional
mental and physical health problems.)
Being in an unhealthy relationship. (The long-term toll of staying in an unhealthy
relationship or peer group is greater than the short-term turmoil and stress involved in
leaving it.)
Overdoing it by taking on too many things at one time to the point that it causes
additional stress (e.g., working too much while going to school, being involved in too
many activities)
Not sleeping enough for what the body needs. (On its own, sleep deprivation will not
cause a mental health problem, but when combined with other factors, including stress,
insufficient sleep puts people at risk of poor health and a decreased coping capacity.)
_____________________________________________________________________________ 203
Module C, Lesson 1
Lesson 2: Stress and Body Image
Introduction
NOTE TO TEACHER
This lesson helps students to gain an
understanding of common mental health issues The following content related to stress
related to stress and poor body image. Students and body image should be treated with
sensitivity. Potentially sensitive content
have the opportunity to increase their self- is to be treated in ways that are
awareness of stressful situations and to appropriate for the local school, school
understand that the ways in which people react division, and community context.
to stress may vary. Using exercise for dealing
with stress is addressed as well.
Students also examine common questions about body image and the factors that affect
body image. This lesson explains the relationship between eating and body image. It also
allows students to examine media influences on people’s body image and behaviour.
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
Key Understandings
Mental-emotional health is a critical component of overall well-being.

Healthy lifestyle practices, including physical activity participation, support positive
mental-emotional health and reduce stress.
Healthy bodies come in all shapes and sizes.
People who have a positive body image tend to demonstrate more healthy eating
behaviours than those who have a negative body image.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Module C, Lesson 2 205
Essential Questions
How does exercise help reduce stress?

What are the connections between body image and mental health? Explain.
___________________________________________________________________
Dealing with Stressful Situations
Stress can be defined as the body’s normal physiological response to situations or

stimuli perceived as “dangerous” to the body (Stressfocus.com). The ways in which
people react to stress can vary greatly.
Healthy lifestyle choices have a positive impact on our ability to cope with stress and to
manage day-to-day activities. Everyone can learn skills to cope with stress that contribute
to optimal mental health. Making healthy behaviour choices and seeking support when
needed helps us lead a balanced life.
________________________________________________________________________________
Assessment Stressful Situations
Discuss with students the definition of stress. Emphasize that stress can cause powerful
feelings, as well as biological changes in the body. Allow students to brainstorm some
feelings and biological changes that stress can cause. Write their responses on a board or
chart. Student suggestions will likely include ideas related to the “fight or flight” theory
of stress response. This theory has already been introduced to students in earlier grades.
Using the active learning strategy Carousel Brainstorming (see Appendix E), arrange
students into six groups. Position each group in an area of the classroom and tape a sheet
of poster board to the wall by each group. Each poster should feature one of the following
headings:
Situations That Make Me Angry
Situations That Make Me Frustrated NOTE TO TEACHER
Situations That Make Me Worry Remind students that responses must be
Situations That Make Me Happy appropriate (e.g., do not make sexual
references), safe, ethical, and not
Situations That Take a Lot of Time hurtful to others.
Situations That Take Money
_____________________________________________________________________________
Tell each group they have one to two minutes to write down their responses to the
situation identified on the poster in front of them. Teachers may choose to play music
(something lively) while students are engaged in the learning activity.
When the designated time is up, have students move to the poster to their right. Allow
two more minutes for students to respond to the situation identified on the poster that is
now in front of them.
Continue rotating until each group has had a chance to write their responses to the
situations on all six posters. Then have a spokesperson from each group read the
responses on the poster in front of them. Discuss similarities, insights, or perceptions
related to the ideas listed. Talk about which responses are positive stressors and which are
negative stressors.
Have students return to their seats. As a class, brainstorm appropriate and healthy
strategies to cope with the stressful situations they wrote about. Students take notes on
those strategies.
REFERENCES
For more information on stress, refer to the following websites:
Columbia St. Mary’s MedicalMoment.org. “Gender Differences in Behavioral Responses to
Stress: ‘Fight or Flight’ vs. ‘Tend and Befriend.’” 2003.
<www.medicalmoment.org/_content/healthupdates/dec03/187868.asp>.
Stressfocus.com. “Discover the Basics of Stress.” 14 July 2007.
<www.stressfocus.com/stress_focus_article/stress-and-its-causes.htm>.
________________________________________________________________________________
Stress Can Be Positive or Negative
A certain level of stress is not a bad thing and can in certain situations contribute to
optimum performance. If a person is under too little stress, it will be difficult to become
self-motivated to perform well. Too little stress can express itself in feelings of boredom
and not being challenged. An optimum level of stress can bring benefits of alertness and
activation.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Excessive levels of stress, in sport for example, can hamper performance and
enjoyment. These excessive levels of stress occur when
what is asked of us is beyond our perceived abilities
too much is asked of us in too short a space of time
unnecessary obstacles are put in the way of achieving our goals
In sport performance, negative stress

gets in the way of good judgement and fine motor control
causes competition to be seen as a threat, not a challenge
damages the positive frame of mind needed for high-quality competition by
promoting negative thinking
damaging self-confidence
narrowing attention
disrupting flow
consumes mental energy (e.g., in worry) that could be devoted to focusing on effective
technique
Very often stress can be caused by negative thinking. We are more likely to do well if we
take a positive perspective, seeing a new situation as an opportunity to exhibit skills at a
higher level, than if we approach or interpret a new or difficult situation by saying, “I’m in
trouble.”
Exercise and Stress
Many people use exercise as their primary stress-management strategy. Regular exercise
can remove by-products of the stress response or help release emotions. Bouts of physical
activity allow muscles to release their stored energy and to return to resting state, which
reduces tension. The endorphin hormone is released as a result of exercising, which is
known to affect mood and promote a sense of elation or joy.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Physiological Responses of Exercise
Have students use various websites or other

resources to investigate the physiological NOTE TO TEACHER Teachers
responses of exercise, which in turn could reduce
are advised to
stress, and report their findings to the class using
review websites before recommending
index cards. Students put a physiological response
them to students
(short title) on one side of an index card and the
check school/division policy regarding
explanation of the response on the other. Use
appropriate Internet use
these class cards in games such as scavenger
hunts, people search, and so on.
REFERENCE
The following is an example of a useful website for this learning activity:
Randolfi, Ernesto A. “Exercise as a Stress Management Modality.” Optimal Health Concepts.
<www.OptimalHealthConcepts.com/ExerciseStress.html>.
________________________________________________________________________________
Wellness Inventory
Ask students to complete a wellness survey (such as RM 4–MH) to increase their self-
awareness of stressful situations or behaviours they may encounter on a given day. Ask
them to complete the same survey at different times during the course and compare
results, or have them reflect on whether or not their responses would be the same or
different from day to day.
Using a Think-Pair-Share strategy (see Appendix E), have students think about what
question may concern them and, in pairs, discuss ways to improve in that area.
Refer to RM 4–MH: Wellness Inventory.
REFERENCE
For ideas on coping with stress, refer to appropriate websites, such as the following:
mindyourmind.ca. <www.mindyourmind.ca>.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Body Image
Body image is linked to self-esteem and self-concept and is shaped by past experiences,
whether these are positive (such as athletic performance) or negative (such as abuse,
disability, or bullying). Body image can be a concern for boys and girls no matter what
their actual bodies look like. Body image is linked to how we cope with both past and
present experiences and is much more complex than our weight, height, or muscle mass.
It is important not to assume that a large-bodied teenager will have a negative body image
and a slim-bodied teenager will have a positive body image.
Students are often interested in discussing body image, and may steer discussions to
their body size, body parts, ideal body types, and so on. To avoid a power struggle, avoid
getting caught up in debates over the “right body type,” “ideal body weight,” or issues
related to obesity prevention. When discussing body image with adolescents it is
important to keep the focus off individual or optimal body size or weight, knowing that
body image is actually related to how we feel about our bodies and our life experiences.
What Is Body Image?
Our body image begins to form at an early age and can be influenced by our parents,
caregivers, peers, and life experiences. We often think of body image in terms of
physical appearance, attractiveness, and beauty. Our body image relates to how we feel
about our bodies and what we think our bodies look like to others. In some cases, our
perspectives may not be objective.
Remember that every body is different. We all have different genetics, which influence our
facial features, body shape, height, and weight. Even if everyone ate the same things and
did the same amount of exercise, we still would not all look the same.
The ideal body weight is the weight that allows us to feel strong and energetic and lets us
lead a healthy life. Someone with a healthy body has the energy, for example, to spend
time with friends, participate in sports, and concentrate on school or work. Encourage
students to avoid comparing their bodies with those of their friends or the people shown
in advertisements and on television. Students don’t need to rely on charts, formulas, or
tables to dictate what the right body weight is for them. Instead, they need to eat balanced
meals full of nutritious foods and participate in moderate to vigorous exercise regularly.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Common Body Image Questions
As a strategy to activate student thinking, place a set number of questions about body
image in a bag (see RM 5–MH). Have the corresponding number of groups pick a question
for group discussion. Ask students in each group to identify a chairperson, a recorder, and
a reporter in preparation for reporting their responses to the selected questions to the
class.
Refer to RM 5–MH: Common Questions about Body Image for examples of

common questions that students may have about body image, as well as suggested
responses to the questions.
________________________________________________________________________________
CANADIAN STATISTICS ON EATING
How Big Is the Body Image Problem?
DISORDERS
Poor body image increases the risk for A recent study showed that 27% of
extreme body/weight control behaviours. Ontario girls 12 to 18 years old are
Researchers have found that increased engaged in disordered food and
weight behaviour (Jones, et al).
preoccupation with appearance and body
Eating disorders are now the third most
dissatisfaction put people at greater risk for
common chronic illness in adolescent
engaging in dangerous practices to control girls (Adolescent Medicine Committee).
weight and size (e.g., extreme dieting and
Health Canada found that almost one in
exercise compulsion). These behaviours can every two girls and almost one in every
lead to more harmful behaviours that can put five boys in Grade 10 either was on a
an individual at risk for developing diet or wanted to lose weight (King,
disordered eating or an eating disorder. Boyce, and King, Chapter 7).
How Do Positive and Negative Body Image Differ?
We have a positive body image when we have a realistic perception of our bodies and
enjoy them just as they are. Positive body image involves understanding that healthy,
attractive bodies come in many shapes and sizes, and that physical appearance says very
little about our character or value as a person. Having a healthy body image means that
we keep our assessment of our bodies separate from our sense of self-esteem, and it
ensures that we don’t spend an unreasonable amount of time worrying about food,
weight, and calories. The adoption of an active healthy lifestyle has a positive impact on
our attitudes towards our bodies.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Negative body image can cause more serious disorders such as body dysmorphic
disorder and muscle dysmorphia:
Body dysmorphic disorder (BDD) is an over-preoccupation with an “imagined” physical
defect in appearance (that is, an individual thinks there is a problem with an aspect of
his or her body that others don’t see). The most common focus of preoccupation is the
nose, skin, or hair, but other body parts can also be the focus. This disorder can cause
stress for the individuals who have this problem, as well as for family and friends
around them. In addition to spending a lot of time obsessing about a feature of their
body or body parts, individuals with BDD experience anxiety and/or depression, and
they may avoid social situations. People have been known to try plastic surgery to
“fix” the problem but end up worse off because the underlying reason for the
preoccupation is not treated.
Muscle dysmorphia (sometimes referred to as bigorexia) is the over-preoccupation with
the perception or feeling that one’s muscles are too small or too weak. In an attempt
to avoid this self-perception, individuals with this disorder often spend unrealistic
amounts of time working out in the gym, and yet they don’t feel “good enough.”
Muscle dysmorphia occurs most often in men but has been known to occur in
women as well.
With the right supports, both disorders are treatable.
What Are Some Factors That Affect Body Image?*
Body image, whether negative or positive, is shaped by a variety of factors:

Body image is influenced by standards set by
society and the culture that surrounds us. POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE BODY
As well, comments from family, friends, IMAGE*
and others about our bodies, their bodies,
People with positive body image exhibit
and other people’s bodies, both positive
self-confidence, energy, vitality, and positive
and negative, affect body image. self-appraisal
Self-esteem has an impact on how we view feelings of attractiveness and beauty
our bodies and is related to how we trust and respect for their bodies
evaluate our own physical abilities, job freedom of expression with their bodies, not
skills, interpersonal abilities, family role, dependent on weight
and body image. People with negative body image describe
dissatisfaction with their physical appearance
Low self-esteem may develop if “ideal” body
a belief that their appearance is being
standards are not met and may result in
scrutinized and evaluated by others
size misperceptions, faulty beliefs about
excessive emphasis on physical appearance in
body shape, and negative feelings about how they evaluate themselves
one’s own body. distressing preoccupation with their bodies
feelings of shame and/or embarrassment
__________
Source: Sheena’s Place. “Body Image.” Education and Outreach.
<www.sheenasplace.org/index.php?page=body_image>. Adapted with permission.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Negative body image may develop or be influenced by a history of abuse (physical or
sexual), teasing by friends or family, life changes such as moving to a new school or
city, and any physical changes that may be a result of puberty, medical problems,
surgery, or sports injuries. Exposure to images of idealized versus normal bodies may
also have a negative impact on body image.
Experiencing problems with body image and body dissatisfaction place individuals at
risk for the development of an eating disorder.
Individuals with anorexia or bulimia nervosa often perceive themselves as being
larger than they actually are, resulting in negative body image and an increase in
dieting behaviour.
An increase in dieting behaviour is associated with depression, decreased self-confidence,
increased feelings of anxiety, feelings of unattractiveness, and persistent concern about
weight. In other words, negative body image can be a significant mental health issue.
People with negative body image may
engage in excessive body checking (weighing, measuring, and trying on clothing)
camouflage their size and shape with loose and bulky clothing
avoid social situations that trigger physical self-consciousness
avoid exposing their bodies (not wearing bathing suits or shorts)
How Do Eating and Body Image Go Together?
There is a relationship between eating behaviours and body image. In general, eating
disorders are examples of internal conflicts about food and/or body size and shape. They
are more complicated, however, than just having a big appetite and unhealthy eating
patterns.
The range of feelings and behaviours associated with eating and body image can be
represented along a continuum (Gannett Health Services).
Healthy eating behaviours, at one end of the continuum, are associated with feeling
confident about body shape and size.
Disordered eating behaviours, at the other end of the scale, are associated with a
preoccupation with appearance and an attempt to change body size through a
focus on diets.
Eating disorders include anorexia nervosa, bulimia nervosa, and binge eating disorder:
Anorexia nervosa is characterized by fear of weight gain and severe restriction of food
intake, which can result in significant weight loss.
Bulimia nervosa involves an attempt to avoid weight gain or to manage weight
through frequent compensation by purging.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Binge eating disorder defines a pattern of binge eating (feeling out of control while
eating) without purging.
Note, however, that “eating disorders often do not fall neatly into these categories and
may take a variety of forms, from mild to severe. Treatment for eating disorders is
important at any level of severity to reduce the risk of short-term and long-term health
problems” (Gannett Health Services).
In the next learning activity students have an opportunity to examine the

relationship between eating behaviours and body image.
REFERENCES
For definitions of positive and negative body image, and the factors that affect them, and
for information on the relationship between eating behaviours and body image, refer to
the following websites:
Body Sense: Canadian Centre for Ethics in Sport. “Developing Positive Body
Image.” Athletes. 2005. www.bodysense.ca/athletes/m_body_image_e.html>.
---. “What Is Body Dysmorphia?” Athletes. 2005.
<www.bodysense.ca/athletes/m_body_dysporphia_e.html>.
Brown University. “Nutrition: Body Image.” Health Education.
<www.brown.edu/Student_Services/Health_Services/Health_Education/nutrition/bodyi
mage.htm>.
Butler Hospital. “What Is Body Dysmorphic Disorder?” The Body Image Program.
<www.butler.org/body.cfm?id=123>.
College of Education and Human Ecology, The Ohio State University. “Muscle Dysmorphia.”
Body Image and Health Task Force (BIHTF).
<http://hec.osu.edu/bitf/muscle_dysmorphia.htm>.
Gannett Health Services, Cornell University. “The Eating and Body Image Continuum.”
Nutrition and Eating Problems. 2004. <www.gannett.cornell.edu/top10Topics/nutrition-
eating/continuum.html>.
National Eating Disorders Association (NEDA). Eating Disorders Information. 2002.
<www.nationaleatingdisorders.org/p.asp?WebPage_ID=294>.
Sheena’s Place. “Body Image.” Education and Outreach.
<www.sheenasplace.org/index.php?page=body_image>.
For additional Canadian statistics on eating disorders, refer to the following reports:
Adolescent Medicine Committee, Canadian Paediatric Society. “Eating Disorders in
Adolescents: Principles of Diagnosis and Treatment.” Paediatrics and Child Health 3.3
(1998): 189–92.
Jones, Jennifer M., et al. “Disordered Eating Attitudes and Behaviours in Teenaged Girls: A
School-Based Study.” Canadian Medical Association Journal 165.5 (2001): 547–52.
King, Alan J. C., William F. Boyce, and Matthew A. King, Trends in the Health of
Canadian Youth: Health Behaviours of School-Age Children. Ottawa, ON: Health
Canada, 1999. Available on the Public Health Agency of Canada website at
<www.phac-aspc.gc.ca/dca-dea/7-18yrs-ans/index_e.html>.
_____________________________________________________________________________
How Can Body Image Affect Personal Health?
Ask students to think about and respond to the following question: How can body image
affect personal health? Write down their answers for class discussion.
Have students look at a continuum showing the range of behaviours and attitudes related
to eating and body image. People who have a positive body image tend to demonstrate
more healthy eating behaviours than those who have a negative body image. People may,
however, find themselves at different points on the continuum from one time to another.
REFERENCES
Examples of the eating and body image continuum are available on several websites:
Barke, Sheri. “Eating Issues and Body Image Continuum.” Student Nutrition (and Body
Image) Action Committee (SNAC). 2002.
<www.snac.ucla.edu/pages/Resources/Handouts/HOEatingIssues.pdf>.
Gannett Health Services, Cornell University. “The Eating Issues and Body Image
Continuum.” Nutrition and Eating Problems. 2004.
<www.gannett.cornell.edu/downloads/CHEP/Continuum.pdf>.
________________________________________________________________________________
Boosting a Body Image?
A variety of strategies can help individuals boost or improve their feelings about how
their bodies look. Using the active learning strategy Rotating Reel (see Appendix E), have
students respond to the following sample questions:
What are three ways to boost body image?
How can you change your body type? NOTE TO TEACHER
If you know people who are always If someone has a disordered eating
problem, it is important to note that
comparing themselves to others in terms of body image therapy and counselling
appearance, what could you do or say to may facilitate changes in eating and help
help? people overcome disordered eating
symptoms or recover from eating
How could participating in physical activity
disorders.
contribute to positive body image?
_____________________________________________________________________________
REFERENCES
The following article on boosting body image may be helpful:
<www.brown.edu/Student_Services/Health_Services/Health_Education/nutrition/bodyi
mage.htm>.
Refer to the following websites for more information:
Dove Campaign for Real Beauty. The Dove Self-Esteem Fund. 2007.
<www.campaignforrealbeauty.ca/dsef>.
This link goes to The Dove Self-Esteem Fund website, which provides free resources on
media awareness, body image, and self-esteem. It also provides the Real Beauty School
Program, specifically for teachers, and a series of films with accompanying classroom
activity sheets.
Media Awareness Network. <www.media-awareness.ca>.
The Media Awareness Network is a Canadian non-profit organization. This website has a
comprehensive collection of media education and Internet literacy resources. Media
Awareness Network partners with the Canadian Teachers’ Federation to present the
annual National Media Literacy Week.
<www.nationaleatingdisorders.org/p.asp?WebPage_ID=294>.
________________________________________________________________________________
Option A: Media Messages
This learning activity is intended to EXPOSURE TO MASS MEDIA AND WEIGHT

increase students’ awareness of the CONCERNS
impact the media have on the public A study on the exposure to the mass media and
and of how students can play a role in weight concerns among girls between Grades 5
protecting themselves and others from and 12 found the following (Field, et al. 5):
media influences by creating a body- Of the girls surveyed, 69% reported that magazine
friendly culture in their school. pictures influence their idea of the perfect body
shape, and 47% reported wanting to lose weight
Students can empower themselves by
because of magazine pictures.
choosing not to buy into the messages
Girls who were frequent readers of fashion
the media try to sell to them.
magazines were two to three times more
likely than infrequent readers
Teachers may want to use some of the
to diet to lose weight because of a magazine
findings from a survey on the effects of article
exposure to the mass media and to exercise to lose weight because of a
weight concerns to generate class magazine article
discussion or a debate. to feel that magazines influence what they
believe is the ideal body shape
_____________________________________________________________________________
REFERENCE
For more information on the survey, refer to the following article:
Field, Alison E., et al. “Exposure to the Mass Media and Weight Concerns among Young
Girls.” Pediatrics 103.3 (March 1999): e36. Available on the American Academy of
Pediatrics website at <http://pediatrics.aappublications.org/cgi/reprint/103/3/e36>.
Option B: Dove Self-Esteem Fund (Film Review)
This learning activity is

intended to help students NOTE TO TEACHER
become critical thinkers about
the media and about how These films should be reviewed and chosen by the educator.
Following each film viewing, educators can guide students
much the media work to
through a series of questions for discussion. The educator
influence people of all ages. sheets with questions specific to each film are available at:
Students can view one to three Dove Campaign for Real Beauty. “Ideas to Take Action for
short video clips (Onslaught, Educators.” The Dove Self-Esteem Fund.
Evolution, and Amy) on the <http://www.campaignforrealbeauty.ca/dsef07/t4.aspx?id=8408 >.
following website:
Dove Campaign for Real Beauty. “Dove Self-Esteem Film Gallery.” The Dove Self-
Esteem Fund. 2007. <www.campaignforrealbeauty.ca/dsef07/t5.aspx?id=7985>.
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 4–MH: Wellness Inventory*
Instructions
Below is list of health and wellness indicators that describe how people feel and behave.
The regular use of this inventory will increase your self-awareness. Additionally, it will
provide a record for you to track such indicators in yourself.
Name ________________________________________ Class ______________ Date ______________
Rate how much these indicators described you today. Very Fairly Hardly None
1. How oriented or clear-headed did you feel today?
2. How rested did you feel when you woke up this morning?
3. How energetic, ready to go did you feel today?
4. How strong did you feel today?
5. How well were you able to meet challenges in your life
today?
6. How happy did you feel today?
7. How well were you able to maintain your sense of humour
today?
8. How prone were you to “lose it,” or experience rage attacks
or explosive outbursts, today?
9. How interesting were you to be with today?
10. How stressful was your day?
11. How well were you able to manage stresses in your life
today?
12. How well were you able to fulfill your responsibilities today?
13. How well did you get along with teachers today?
14. How much did you enjoy your family life today?
15. How well did you get along with your friend(s) today?
16. How confident did you feel today?
17. How good did you feel about your body today?
18. How well were you able to stay on task today?
19. Did you have bothersome health symptoms today?
20. Did you feel susceptible to illness today?
__________
*Source: Brain Injury Resource Center <http://www.headinjury.com>. Adapted with permission.
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 4–MH: Wellness Inventory (Continued)
Assess your wellness further by responding to the following questions.

21. What was most stressful to you today?
22. What did you do about it?
23. Did your action make it better, make it worse, or make no

difference?
24. What was the most restful to you today?
25. How much time did you take for yourself today?
26. How did it make your day better or worse?
27. What did you have to celebrate today?
28. For what did you have to be thankful today?
29. Did you have any trouble with your appetite today?
30. Did you start your day with a nutritious breakfast?
31. How many meals did you eat today?
32. Was that normal for you? (Refer to #31.)
33. Were the meals well balanced?
34. How often did you snack today?
35. Were they healthy snacks?
36. How much water did you drink today?
37. How many servings of caffeine drinks (e.g., coffee, tea, soda)
did you have today?
38. Did you take any medication or drugs today?
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 4–MH: Wellness Inventory (Continued)
39. How many (total) minutes of each type of activity did you have today?
Type of Activity Minutes
Light
Moderate
Vigorous
Strength/Resistance Training
Other:
40. How did your physical activity change today compared with yesterday?
Increased Activity Cut Down Activity No Change in Activity
Stayed in Bed Stayed Home and Inside Other:
41. I went to sleep at ________ a.m./p.m. I woke up at ________ a.m./p.m. (Last time woke up)
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 5–MH: Common Questions about Body Image
Common questions students raise in the classroom on the topic of body image include the
following:
How do I know what is a healthy weight for me?
What diet really works?
What causes eating disorders?
How can I help my friend who might have an eating disorder?
The following information may be useful to educators if they are faced with similar
questions in their classrooms. This information is based on a “do no harm” approach,
which is considered best practice for eating disorder prevention.
How do I know what is a healthy weight for me?
There are different charts and formulas that are said to determine healthy weight. In
reality, healthy weight is determined best by a person’s lifestyle rather than by a number
on a scale or a chart. We all have a natural body shape and weight that is determined by
our genetics and is different for everyone. We are meant to have different amounts of
muscle, bone, and fat, which make up our body’s composition and influence our weight.
The healthiest body weight is what the body sets for itself when a person’s lifestyle
includes balanced, healthy food choices and regular physical activity.
Regardless of our weight or shape, every body needs nutritious food and daily physical
movement to be strong and healthy. If this is a lifestyle that you practise, then rest assured
your body is at the right weight for you.
What diet really works?
The issue of dieting is a confusing one because the media, in the attempt to sell ideas and
products, bombard the public with dieting information. The first thing to know is that
diets can be dangerous, particularly for young people, because the growth of bones,
organs, and the brain are dependent on the nutrition put into the body. Diets that restrict
food intake below what the body needs can actually affect internal growth and the
efficiency of one’s metabolism (the rate at which the body burns energy). This doesn’t
mean the body needs a lot of fast food or treats to be healthy. What it does mean is the
best diet (or eating plan) for young bodies includes balance, variety, and moderation, and
should not include skipping meals, restricting food, or omitting any food groups.
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 5–MH: Common Questions about Body Image (Continued)
If you are concerned that your body weight is not healthy for you, talk to your doctor and
your parents about how you feel. Many teens are perfectly healthy but are uncomfortable
with the natural body changes that occur during puberty. Your doctor can refer you to a
dietician if he or she thinks this is really necessary. If you want to change anything about
your diet and explore the healthiest eating plan for you, take a look at your pattern of
eating. Are you eating nutritious meals and snacks that include all the food groups? If not,
you might want to address your lifestyle or eating behaviours. If your eating pattern
includes skipping meals, getting overly hungry, and choosing foods in a hurry that are
low in nutrients (high in saturated fat and/or sugar), you would want to make healthier
choices about your diet, not go on a diet.
If you are convinced that you need to diet, ask yourself instead, “Am I physically active on
a daily basis?” If not, you might consider how you can incorporate a regular schedule of
exercise into your lifestyle.
What causes eating disorders?
There is no single reason why a young person develops an eating disorder, just as there is
no one person who is protected from developing an eating disorder. We hear mostly of
young women developing eating disorders, but in reality, girls, boys, men, and women of
all ethnicities and backgrounds can have eating problems and body image issues.
Researchers have shown that dieting behaviour puts an individual at greater risk for
developing an eating disorder because, combined with other factors, it can set up a pattern
where an individual is not listening to the body’s internal cues for hunger and satiety.
Usually a person’s relationship with food and his or her body gets out of control
(restricting food, over-exercising, and/or binge eating) because he or she has underlying
feelings (such as anxiety, anger, sadness, guilt, loss, or fear) that need to be explored.
Sometimes life stresses or traumatic events can also cause uncomfortable feelings that a
young person does not know how to deal with. Regardless of the underlying reasons,
disordered eating and eating disorders are serious problems that should not be ignored or
minimized.
It is important that you tell a trusted adult (your parent or guardian, school counsellor,
doctor) if you think you might have an eating problem. If the person you tell does not
take you seriously, tell someone else. There are health professionals who specialize in
disordered eating and body image issues. They can help individuals work through the
underlying reasons for why this problem has developed so that the individuals are not at
risk for long-term physical, mental, and emotional health consequences.
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 5–MH: Common Questions about Body Image (Continued)
How can I help my friend who might have an eating disorder?
If you think your friend has eating problems or concerns about body image, talk to your
friend.
Show your friend that you are concerned and care about her or him.
Let your friend know that sometimes people under-eat or overeat or try to control their
body size because they are unhappy or stressed about something and you want to
know more about how he or she is feeling.
Remind your friend that because you care and ultimately want her or him to be healthy
and happy, you want to be supportive but are worried about what your friend is
doing to herself or himself.
Encourage your friend to tell a trusted adult about the problems, or tell one yourself if
you don’t see your friend getting the necessary help. It might seem as though you are
not being a good friend if you tell, but the truth is that getting help with body image
concerns or eating problems when they first begin is the best way to help your friend
avoid dangerous health problems in the future. Even if this temporarily puts a strain
on your relationship, you are still doing the right thing.
Be a good role model. This means not making negative comments about food or about
your own body or others’ bodies. Remind yourself and your friend that there is no
such thing as being perfect or “having it all together.” Compliment each other for the
character traits that are unrelated to appearance.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Lesson 3: Anxiety and Depression
Introduction
This lesson focuses on two of the more common mental health issues, anxiety and
depression, and how an active healthy lifestyle can be a positive influence on them.
Although a number of healthy lifestyle practices are discussed in this lesson, the primary
emphasis is on the benefits derived from physical activity.
Anxiety and depression affect all people in one way or another. They are considered
disorders only when these feelings are almost always there and when they significantly
interfere with daily life. In A Report on Mental Illnesses in Canada, Health Canada reports
the following:
“Anxiety disorders affect 12% of the population, causing mild to severe impairment.
For a variety of reasons, many individuals may not seek treatment for their anxiety;
they may consider the symptoms mild or normal, or the symptoms themselves may
interfere with help-seeking” (Chapter 4, Highlights).
It is important to remove the stigma of weakness associated with seeking help if one is
feeling overwhelmed, anxious, or depressed. People who are experiencing anxious
behaviour or any other mental health problem that is significantly interfering with daily
living should feel that is not only OK, but also wise to seek medical advice, just as they
would for physical injuries.
REFERENCES
Anxiety Disorder Association of British Columbia (AnxietyBC). <www.anxietybc.com/> .
Health Canada. “Chapter 4: Anxiety Disorders.” A Report on Mental Illnesses in Canada.
Ottawa, ON: Health Canada, 2002. Available on the Public Health Agency of
Canada website at <www.phac-aspc.gc.ca/publicat/miic-mmac/index.html>.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________
Key Understandings
Anxiety may make people feel anxious most of the time without an obvious reason.
Anxiety has a wide range of signs and symptoms.
Major depression is a medical condition characterized by long-lasting feelings of
intense sadness and hopelessness, with a biological and chemical basis.
Active healthy lifestyle practices are helpful in dealing with anxiety and depression
and support positive mental-emotional health.
Community service agencies are available to support individuals concerned about
________________________________________________________________________________
Essential Questions
What are important signs and symptoms of anxiety and depression?

How does an active healthy lifestyle support positive mental-emotional health?
What health agencies support issues of mental-emotional health in your community?
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Anxiety Disorders
Anxiety, or feeling anxious, describes a mood familiar to most of us, one that we may
experience every day. Anxiety comes from a concern over lack of control over
circumstances. In some cases being anxious and worrying over a problem may generate a
solution. Normally, however, it will just result in negative thinking. When anxiety seems
to come out of nowhere, is excessive, persists for many weeks without relief, or interferes
with everyday life, it may not be an ordinary mood anymore. It may be an illness.
Signs and Symptoms
People with an anxiety disorder may have a number of common physical symptoms,
including the following (Canadian Psychiatric Association; Anxiety Disorders Association
of Manitoba; AnxietyBC):
■
shortness of breath feelings of unreality
■
shakiness irritability
muscle aches and tension ■ insomnia
tight chest ■ restlessness

■
racing heart sweating and nausea
■
choking sensations abdominal distress
numbness or tingling
Emotionally, people with an anxiety disorder may feel short-tempered and apprehensive,
fearing that bad things are about to happen.
According to the Anxiety Disorders Association of Manitoba (ADAM), anxiety disorders

are among the most common mental health problems. They can cause “significant
personal and societal costs in terms of lost wages, decreased productivity, reduced quality
of life and frequent use of health care services” (ADAM, Major Anxiety Disorders).
The different types of anxiety disorders include generalized anxiety disorder, panic
disorder, specific phobias, social anxiety disorder, obsessive compulsive disorder, and
post-traumatic stress disorder, which medical professionals would diagnose before
providing treatment.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Causes
As stated by ADAM, “research indicates that there is no single explanation for the
cause of anxiety disorders but that several . . . factors may contribute to their origins”
(Major Anxiety Disorders). The causes of anxiety may include the following (Manitoba
Healthy Schools, “Anxiety”):
inherited tendency ■ stressful experiences
shy temperament ■ anxious parents
unpredictable lifestyle
REFERENCES
For information on anxiety disorders, refer to the following websites:
Anxiety Disorder Association of British Columbia (AnxietyBC). “Overview of
Anxiety Disorders.” <www.anxietybc.com/resources/introduction.php>.
Anxiety Disorders Association of Manitoba (ADAM). Major Anxiety Disorders.
<www.adam.mb.ca/about.asp>.
Canadian Psychiatric Association. “Anxiety, Depression and Manic Depression.” Public
Education Materials. <http://publications.cpa-apc.org/browse/documents/17>.
Manitoba Healthy Schools. “Anxiety.” Mental Health.
<www.gov.mb.ca/healthyschools/issues/anxiety.html>.
Depression
Depression is a mental disorder that affects a person’s thoughts, moods, feelings, behaviour,
and physical health. People once thought that depression was “all in the head” and that if one
really tried, one could “snap out of it” or just “get over it.” Some people still respond to
depression in this way. Health professionals now know that depression is not a weakness,
and it is not something people can treat on their own. Depression is a medical disorder with a
biological and chemical basis, and it may affect people of all ages or nationalities. Some
mental health problems, such as bipolar depression or major depression, tend to run in
families due to genetics or family interaction styles.
Sometimes depression is triggered by a stressful life event. At other times depression

seems to occur spontaneously with no specific identifiable cause. Depression is much
more than grieving or experiencing a bout of sadness.
Depression may occur only once in a person’s life, or it could occur sporadically
throughout life, with periods when the person would not feel depressed. It may also be
a chronic condition, which may require ongoing treatment over a lifetime. With proper
treatment, most people with serious depression improve within weeks, and can return
to normal daily activities.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Signs and Symptoms
The two main symptoms associated with depression are lack of interest in normal daily
living, even in the activities that are enjoyable, and feeling miserable or “down in the
dumps.” A depressed person shows feelings of sadness and helplessness, or may cry
often.
A health professional would also look for other signs and symptoms lasting at least two
weeks, such as changes in sleep patterns, concentration, weight or eating patterns,
demeanour (more irritable), self-esteem, and desire to live. Physical complaints, such as
gastrointestinal problems (indigestion, constipation, or diarrhoea), headache, and
backache may also be signs.
Different age groups may react differently to depression. Sometimes it is confusing to

determine what the actual problem is because the behaviour is a cover-up for the real
problem. For example, children may pretend to be sick, worry about being bullied, not do
well in school, or act out to cover up their feelings of sadness. Older people may focus
more on complaining about the physical symptoms of depression than on what situations
or emotions are causing them to feel that way.
The primary types of depression include major depression, dysthymia, adjustment

disorders, bipolar disorder, and seasonal affective disorder (Mayo Clinic). These types of
depression have similarities and differences. It is important that people who suffer from
depression obtain proper diagnosis from a medical professional rather than attempting
self-diagnosis.
REFERENCES
For additional information on the signs and symptoms of depression and definitions of
the primary types of depression, refer to the following websites:
Canadian Mental Health Association. Mental Health and High School.
<www.cmha.ca/highschool/>.
Finding Optimism: Health in Response to Mental Health. “Things to Say to Someone with
Depression.” Healthy Mind. <www.findingoptimism.com/healthy-mind/ways-to-build-
up-someone-with-depression/>.
Health Canada. “Chapter 2: Mood Disorders.” A Report on Mental Illnesses in Canada.
Ottawa, ON: Health Canada, 2002. Available on the Public Health Agency of
Canada website at <www.phac-aspc.gc.ca/publicat/miic-mmac/index.html>.
Mayo Clinic. Depression.
<www.mayoclinic.com/health/depression/DS00175/DSECTION=2>.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Signs and Symptoms of Mental Health Issues
Ask students to think about the signs and symptoms of Disorder:

selected disorders, using the information from this lesson.
Have students record on a T-Chart what each disorder Looks Like Feels Like
“looks like” and “feels like” as it relates to the signs and
symptoms.
________________________________________________________________________________
Self-Assessment of Mental Health
Check websites for sample mental health assessments.

Examples of self-tests include the following: NOTE TO TEACHER
Anxiety Test Educators are advised to preview
and evaluate websites and online
Coping Skills Test
resources before recommending
Eating Disorders and Emotional Eating Test them for student use. Ensure that
the selected websites and tests are
Optimism/Pessimism Test appropriate for student use.
Resilience Test
Self-Esteem Test
Social Anxiety Test
Have students choose a self-test they would like to try. Provide students with
an opportunity to discuss results, if desired.
REFERENCE
A variety of mental health assessment tests are available on the following website:
Discovery Health. “Mental Health Assessments.” Mental Health. 2007.
<http://health.discovery.com/centers/mental/assessments.html>.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Signs and Symptoms of Mental Health Issues
This learning activity will enable students to become more acquainted with various
mental health issues and some of their signs and symptoms. An assumption is that
teachers have already addressed these topics in class and are using this learning activity
primarily for review or for application of learning.
Refer to RM 6–MH: Mental Health Scenarios.
________________________________________________________________________________
REFERENCES
The following annotated bibliography is intended to be used as a reference for selecting
student and teacher learning resources. Decisions related to choice of learning resources
are determined at the local school/division level.
Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth. Physical Education/Health Education Learning
Resources: Kindergarten to Senior 2: Compilation of Annotated Bibliographies (2002-
2004). Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth, 2004. Available
online at <www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/learnres/bibliographies.html>.
Additional information about anxiety and depression may be obtained from the
following websites:
Canadian Mental Health Association. Mental Health and High School.
<www.cmha.ca/highschool/>.
---. “Resources.” Work-Life Balance: It’s a Matter of Time.
<www.manitoba.cmha.ca/bins/content_page.asp?cid=4-42&lang=1>.
Health Canada. “Mental Health.” Healthy Living. <www.hc-sc.gc.ca/hl-
vs/mental/index_e.html>.
Manitoba Healthy Schools. Mental Health.
Manitoba Health. Mental Health and Addictions. <www.gov.mb.ca/health/mh/>.
Mental Health Canada. Diseases and Disorders.
<www.mentalhealthcanada.com/ConditionsandDisorders.asp?lang=e>.
Mental Health Education Resource Centre (MHERC) Manitoba. Mental Health Disorders
and Issues. <www.mherc.mb.ca/mentalIllness.html>.
Mental Health First Aid. <www.mentalhealthfirstaid.ca/>.
National Institute of Mental Health. “The Numbers Count: Mental Disorders in
America.” Health and Outreach. <www.nimh.nih.gov/health/publications/the-
numbers-count-mental-disorders-in-america.shtml>.
Safe Healthy Schools. “Mental Health and Schools.” Communities and Schools Promoting
Health. <www.safehealthyschools.org/mental_health/mental_health.htm>.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Prevention Strategies
Learning how to control our feelings through healthy lifestyle practices can help us reduce
or prevent anxiety. Stress-management strategies may include deep breathing, relaxation,
guided imagery or visualization, yoga, meditation, and calming self-talk.
Physical exercise can be a key element in reducing anxiety (Repich). Some

research evidence suggests the following:
Exercise raises the levels of certain mood-enhancing neurotransmitters in the brain.
Exercise may also boost feel-good endorphins, release muscle tension, help you
sleep better, and reduce levels of the stress hormone cortisol. It also increases body
temperature, which may have calming effects. All of these changes in your mind and
body can improve such symptoms as sadness, anxiety, irritability, stress, fatigue,
anger, self-doubt and hopelessness. (Mayo Clinic)
Exercise isn’t a cure for depression or anxiety, but its psychological and physical
benefits can improve the symptoms.
REFERENCES
For additional information on the benefits of exercise for mental-emotional health, refer to
Khan, Adam. “Exercise.” YouMe Works. <www.youmeworks.com/exercise.html>.
Mayo Clinic. “Depression and Anxiety: Exercise Eases Symptoms.” Depression.
<www.mayoclinic.com/health/depression-and-exercise/MH00043>.
Repich, Deanne. “Exercise Your Anxiety Away!” Health Articles. 2007.
<www.healthandfitnessadvices.com/articles/health/exercise-your-anxiety-away.html>.
________________________________________________________________________________
Exercise as the Best Preventive Medicine
Building on the information from Lesson 1 of Module C, have students research the
benefits of exercise and physical activity for mental-emotional health and present their
findings in different ways (e.g., a poster, a rap song, an advertisement, an acrostic). An
example follows.
_____________________________________________________________________________
EXAMPLE
In the following example, an acrostic (BE ACTIVE) is used to promote the benefits of exercise
and physical activity:
B – Breath Taking deep breaths is an effective relaxation technique and helps
reduce stress-related symptoms.
E – Exercise Exercise increases levels of serotonin, dopamine, and norepinephrine, which
are neurotransmitters that help elevate or improve mood.
A – Attitude Taking a positive attitude is a strategy for reducing stress and dealing
with anxiety.
C – Confidence A person can develop confidence through exercise or training, because the body
becomes stronger and the physical activity becomes easier.
T – Time Planning a time to be active every day is important to good mental and emotional
health. Regular physical activity can help improve sleep, decrease anxiety, and
enhance ability to cope with stress.
I – Inactive Being inactive puts a person at risk for developing various chronic diseases
and mental health issues.
V – Vigorous Vigorous exercise contributes to developing cardiovascular/respiratory
endurance. The health benefits associated with cardiovascular fitness include
easier weight management, improved sleeping habits, decreased anxiety, reduced
depression, improved ability to cope with stress, improved mood, and enhanced
self-esteem.
E – Endorphin It is believed that, in response to exercise, the body releases different chemicals,
such as endorphins, which affect the brain. Endorphins have a pain-relieving
effect on the body and produce a feeling of euphoria.
REFERENCE
The following is an example of a song that promotes active healthy living. The song lyrics,
as well as an audio clip and video clip of the song, are available on the Manitoba Education,
Citizenship and Youth website.
Burnett, Aaron. Get off the Couch. Audio and video clip. 2003.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Seeking Professional Help
The diagnosis of depression should be left to a health professional. There are basic
questions to ask that may help steer a person in the direction of seeking
professional mental health care.
REFERENCE
For a list of questions, refer to the following website:
Aetna InteliHealth. “Are You Depressed?” Diseases and Conditions.
<www.intelihealth.com/IH/ihtIH/WSIHW000/8596/35222/362836.html?d=dmtContent>.
________________________________________________________________________________
Community Supports and Services
Have students use a variety of resources (e.g., Internet, directories, regional health
authority, counsellors) to research supports and services for mental-emotional health
issues available in the local community or in the province. Ask students to include
the name of the agency or organization, identify contact information, and describe the
supports and services provided.
Agency Contact Information Supports and Services Provided
REFERENCE
For ideas on supports and services available in Manitoba, refer to the following website:
Manitoba Healthy Schools. “Where Can I Go for Help?” Mental Health.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 6–MH: Mental Health Scenarios*
This learning activity will enable students to become more acquainted with various
mental health issues and some of their signs and symptoms. An assumption is that
teachers have already addressed these topics in class and are using this learning activity
primarily for review or application of learning.
Materials Needed
slips of paper with a different mental health scenario on each (see the following page)
notes taken in class
a health book
Directions
Place the class into groups of three or four students. Have one person from each group
pick a slip of paper that outlines a specific mental health scenario. Advise students that the
groups will have approximately 10 minutes to figure out which mental health issue their
selected scenario describes and to respond to three questions, providing explanations for
their answers:
From what mental health issue do you think the person described in the scenario is
suffering? Provide reasons for your decision (signs, symptoms, and possible causes of
the mental health issue).
What advice and assistance would you offer the person in the scenario? Explain.
Which health care professionals would best be able to help the person? Give reasons.
When the 10 minutes are up, the groups take turns reading their scenarios to the class and
presenting their response to the three problem-solving challenges. During the class
discussion, the teacher can include any other important information that is appropriate.
Continued
__________
Source of adaptation: Ballard, Michelle. “Mental Health Scenarios.” PE Central: Health Lesson Ideas. 2002.
<www.pecentral.org/lessonideas/ViewLesson.asp?ID=3221>. Used by permission of PE Central (percentral.org),
the premier website for physical education teachers.
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 6–MH: Mental Health Scenarios (Continued)
Mental Health Scenarios
Below are a few scenarios that may indicate a mental health issue. Teachers are
encouraged to make up more scenarios for any other mental health topics addressed in
class.
Suzie’s mother died a year ago, but Suzie just can’t seem to move on. Suzie is still
having a hard time sleeping at night and concentrating in school. Last week, I even
caught Suzie crying in the school washroom. Some people have seen her take some
pills.
Brandon has recently graduated from high school and will be attending a local university
this year. Brandon was always exercising and working out in high school. He now
spends a lot of time weight training at the gym. He’s been putting on a lot of muscle
lately, and he is always talking about working out and getting bigger. Brandon takes
supplements, drinks protein shakes, and has started using creatine (amino acid).
When I’m talking to Brandon it almost sounds as if he wants to become the next
“superman.” I’m really worried about Brandon because he gets agitated and angry
very easily.
Jenny is my best friend. We both play volleyball. We’ve been playing volleyball
together since Grade 7. I’ve noticed that every winter Jenny withdraws from her
friends and always seems sad. Every winter, I think that it’s me . . . that I’ve
done something to Jenny to upset her. Once spring hits, Jenny slowly returns to
her “normal” self.
Chris is constantly worried about catching colds. In fact, Chris washes his hands just
about 20 times a day. When asked, Chris says that he cannot afford to be sick, and
then goes into a lecture about how many germs there are around. Sometimes Chris
washes his hands so much that they bleed.
Hailey’s parents were divorced when she was six. Since then, she has been spending
every second weekend with her father. She is now in high school and doesn’t want to
go to her father’s house every second weekend anymore. She wants to work and
spend more time with her school friends. Her father lives in another part of the city
quite a distance away. When she’s at his house there isn’t much to do, and he’s a
smoker, which bothers her, but she realizes that he is lonely and needs her help to do
household chores.
ANSWER KEY
Health issue: depression
Health issue: muscle dysmorphia
Health issue: seasonal affective disorder
Health issue: anxiety, obsessive-compulsive disorder
Health issue: stress
_____________________________________________________________________________
MODULE D:
SOCIAL IMPACT OF SPORT
Introduction
Lesson 1: The Roles of Sport
Lesson 2: Sport as an Agent for Social Change
Lesson 3: Sporting Behaviour

MODULE D: SOCIAL IMPACT OF SPORT


MODULE D: SOCIAL IMPACT OF SPORT
TEACHER
For the purpose of this module,
the term sport refers to both
physical activity and recreational
and competitive sport.
Introduction
Sport and physical activity play a major role in shaping
our society. The topics addressed in this module are N OTE TO
intended to create student awareness and understanding
of the value and significance of physical activity and sport
from individual and societal perspectives. Students are
challenged to think critically about historical and
contemporary issues in sport pertaining to gender, race,
ethnicity, ethics, specific populations, media, technology, business, and politics. As
students develop a greater understanding of the impact and influence of physical
activity and sport, they will be better equipped to decide what role physical activity and
sport play in their lives.
REFERENCE
For additional information on this topic, refer to the following report:
Canadian Centre for Ethics in Sport (CCES). 2002 Canadian Public Opinion Survey on
Youth and Sport: Final Report. Ottawa, ON: CCES, July 2002. Available online at
<www.cces.ca/pdfs/CCES-RPT-2002Survey-E.pdf>.
Module D: Social Impact of Sport contains three lessons:

_____________________________________________________________________________
Module D, Introduction 239
Introduction
Through the ages, sport has been known to affect various cultures, traditions, and values
in our society. The stories that come from the world of sport help us to gain a better
understanding of our views on issues of equality, human rights, child development,
standards for health and fitness, and character development, as well as many other issues.
Sport has the capacity to create much debate over topics such as steroid use, fighting in
hockey, and salaries of professional athletes. There is no shortage of public opinion on
these and other related sport topics.
Many people have favourite physical activities, sports, teams, stars, or events, such as the
Olympic Games or world championships. Many fans dedicate much time to learning more
about their favourite sport and attending sporting events in support of their favourite
athletes and teams. Many children have aspirations of becoming like their favourite
players, yet very few actually get the opportunity to play against or alongside their
childhood idols.
Sport plays a vital role in Canadian society. Sport receives an inordinate amount of media
attention, and has attracted the interest of most Canadians, especially when it comes to
Olympic ice hockey, curling, and speed skating.
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
Key Understandings
The history of sport helps us to understand the impact of sport within our society.
Physical activity/sport participation can be classified in different stages.
Each person participates in sport for different reasons.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Module D, Lesson 1 241
Essential Questions
What is the role of physical activity/sport in your life?

Why is sport considered to have an important role in society?
Why do people participate in physical activity/sport?
________________________________________________________________________________
History of Sport
Sport has been recorded for centuries. In fact, the sport of wrestling is depicted on ancient
Egyptian urns known to be older than 4000 years. Formal sport was a natural follow-up to
the games children played in many cultures and in different countries.
The ancient Greeks are considered to be the originators of competitive sport. Their inter-
city competitions evolved into the original Olympic Games, which carried over to the
Roman gladiator sports. Throughout medieval times, productive work was considered of
utmost importance, and games and sport were considered to be trivial, unless they were
used in preparation for war and combat. Eventually, with the reincarnation of the
Olympic Games in 1896 by Baron Pierre de Coubertin of France, a venue was made
available for international competition at the amateur level. By the 1970s, professional
sport had begun to permeate many sports, and the concept of amateur was removed from
the Olympics in the 1980s.
The modern Olympic Games have the greatest economic impact of any world-wide event
and have the greatest media coverage of any event up to and including the two weeks of
competition. Unfortunately, drug use and abuse have taken away some of the glitter
from sport and even from the Olympics, but modern technology and people’s innate love
of sport are working towards overcoming this problem.
REFERENCE
For additional information on the origin of the Olympic Games, refer to The Olympic
Movement (Official Site):
International Olympic Committee (IOC). “The Ancient Olympic Games.” Olympic Games.
<www.olympic.org/uk/games/ancient/>.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Origin of Sport
Give students an opportunity to learn more about the origins of various sports by having
them complete RM1–SI. Students may want to add a few more sports to the list.
Students could work in pairs during class, or they could complete this task as a homework
assignment. In their search for information, students will likely need the Internet.
Refer to RM 1–SI: History of Sport: Match the Columns.
REFERENCES
Websites such as the following may be useful for locating information on the origin
of various sports:
Curling: Library and Archives Canada. Bonspiel! The History of Curling in Canada.
<www.collectionscanada.gc.ca/curling/>.
Ice hockey: Vaughan, Garth. “Nova Scotian and Canadian Hockey History.” Birthplace of
Hockey. 2001. <www.birthplaceofhockey.com/>.
Lacrosse: CBC Archives . “Lacrosse: A History of Canada’s Game.” Sport.
<http://archives.cbc.ca/IDD-1-41-824/sports/lacrosse/>.
Soccer: Jose, Colin. “History of Soccer in Canada.” History. Canadian Soccer
Association (CSA). <www.canadasoccer.com/eng/history/>.
Volleyball: International Olympic Committee (IOC). “Volleyball.” Sports.
<www.olympic.org/uk/sports/programme/index_uk.asp?SportCode=VB>.
________________________________________________________________________________
The Canadian Sport Landscape
Many games and sports are part of a country’s cultural heritage and a source of national
pride. Nowhere is this more evident than in Canada when our teams are competing at the
international level. Canada is a world power in men’s and women’s ice hockey, curling,
speed skating, and lacrosse, and has produced many world-class sprinters in track and
field, as well as producing world or Olympic champions in several sports. When these
athletes are competing, Canadians are “glued to” their television sets to watch our
national heroes compete for the top prize. One of the most popular sports is women’s and
men’s ice hockey, a sport in which Canada is considered to produce the world’s best
athletes.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Assessment Sport Origin
Choose six to eight famous Canadian athletes from Canada’s Sports Hall of Fame website.
Print out biographies of selected athletes. Using the Jigsaw learning strategy
(see Appendix E), have students learn about each athlete.
Alternatively, if students are in the computer lab, have them watch a video clip of their
assigned athlete, take notes, and then report back to their group (using the Jigsaw strategy).
REFERENCES
Canada’s Sports Hall of Fame. <www.cshof.ca/>.
Canada’s Sports Hall of Fame. Kidzone. <www.cshof.ca/kidzone.php>.
________________________________________________________________________________
The Continuum of Physical Activity and Sport*

As we examine physical activity and sport we quickly realize that sport is only one of
numerous stages along a continuum of human physical activity:
Free play is the first stage of the continuum, as this is the activity in which we engage as
children and in which we continue to participate throughout life. As children, we
explore, express ourselves, pretend, and role play using various forms of physical
activity. This form of play has no firm rules and can usually take place anywhere. We
engage in this form of play simply for the pleasure it provides.
Game play is the next stage of the continuum. This form of play requires greater structure
and involves some kind of competition. Game play has a clear set of objectives that
enhance our physical and mental capacities and are governed by a set of rules and/or
regulations. The final outcome of a game can be based on luck, skill, or strategy, or on
any combination of the three. Game play can be inactive or active:
Inactive games are very popular and include board games, card games, and video
games.
Active games include tag games, dodging games, relays, and pick-up games such as
touch football or street hockey.
In game play there are no leagues, standings, or schedules, and the players are usually
the officials.
__________
Source: Adapted, with permission, from R. B. Woods, 2007, Social Issues in Sport, (Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics),
pages 5-9.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Sport is the next stage along the continuum. As a specialized form of game play, sport
generally involves the following characteristics:
Sport contains a physical component such as strength, speed, endurance,
flexibility, coordination, balance, and/or agility.
Sport competition involves winning and losing; therefore, winning and losing
serve as motivating influences to practise, train, and give the best effort.
Sport is governed by an organization or institution that sets and enforces the rules
and regulations and establishes the way in which results are kept and used.
Sport almost always requires specialized facilities and equipment that conform to a
set standard. Courts, fields, and pools, for example, require set boundaries and
markings. Equipment must meet standards for size, shape, material, and weight to
ensure fair and equitable competition.
Sport in any given society reflects its values, beliefs, attitudes, and culture. In a society
that places great emphasis on cooperation and fair play one would expect to find
sports, games, and activities that are different from those found in a society that
focused on competition and winning. One might argue that the youth of today are
involved in a movement that may redefine sport within the North American culture
through greater involvement in alternative sports such as in-line skating, mountain
biking, and wakeboarding.
Most people play a sport as a hobby or for the love of the game. They are immensely
satisfied to achieve the intrinsic rewards of the sport, such as improved health and
fitness, improved skills, friendships, and enjoyment. Sporting activities and equipment
can be modified to include people with disabilities, thereby giving everyone an
opportunity to achieve the personal benefits of sport involvement.
Work is the final stage of the continuum of physical activity and sport. Some sport
participants have developed skills to such a high degree that they are able to earn a
living from their craft in organized sport. Professional players and coaches who are at
the highest level of organized sport can earn millions of dollars through salaries,
endorsements, and prize money. It is the financial payments they receive to perform in
sport that classifies them as professionals.
The level of training and commitment needed from a very early age to pursue a dream
of becoming a professional athlete is characteristic of work. Pushing the young body to
its physical, mental, and emotional limits at a very young age is similar to the work
that seasoned and well-conditioned professional athletes must endure. It is small
wonder that only a few amateur athletes can ever hope to attain the professional level.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Assessment Examples of Free Play
Have students cut or tear a sheet of paper into 12 pieces. Ask students to identify three
examples of free play that one might engage in as a child, as a teen, as an adult, and as
a senior, and have them write each example on one slip of paper.
Divide a board into the four age group categories (child, teen, adult, and senior) and have
students place their slips of paper into the appropriate categories. Ask students to respond
to the following questions:
Are there any suggestions that are not examples of free play?
How are the examples of free play for each age group different? How are they similar?
Does each of the four categories have examples of the purposes (exploration, self-
expression, pretence, role playing) of free play? If the purposes change, why do they
change from one age group to another?
________________________________________________________________________________
Assessment Continuum of Participation
Provide students with a copy of RM 2–SI and have them classify a list of activities
according to the stage that best describes each activity. As a class, create a Physical
Activity Continuum with examples of the stages included.
Refer to RM 2–SI: The Continuum of Physical Activity/Sport Participation.
________________________________________________________________________________
Why Do People Become Involved in Sport?
Have students form groups of three to discuss why people become involved in sport.
Two students in each group brainstorm reasons for participation in sport and the third
person records the suggested examples.
Some reasons for participation in sport that students may include are provided below:
enjoyment and fun
filling free time
parental influence and/or expectations
_____________________________________________________________________________
risk and excitement
meeting and playing with others (social relationships)
fitness and health (e.g., cardiovascular fitness, body shape, stress management)
skill development
character development (e.g., leadership, teamwork, communication, self-confidence,
self-esteem)
personal rewards (e.g., awards, scholarships, recognition)
financial gain
Next, have students distinguish between their suggested examples using the following
categories:
extrinsic motivators of participation in sport
intrinsic motivators of participation in sport
desirable outcomes of participation in sport
Facilitate a class discussion on the following questions:

Is sport valued or not valued in Canada at the various stages of the continuum of physical
activity and sport: free play, game play, sport, and work? How is this shown?
What does Canada need to do to promote physical activity participation?
What does Canada need to do to be known as an active and healthy country?
________________________________________________________________________________
Values in Sport
Using the Think-Pair-Share strategy (see Appendix E), have students reflect on and
discuss the following questions, first individually, then with a partner, and finally as
a class:
Has sport influenced society? If so, how?
Has sport influenced you in any way? If so, how?
Has sport helped young people develop positive values? Why or why not?
What are some of the values learned through sport? Are they positive or negative?
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 1–SI: History of Sport: Match the Columns
Sport/Event Match Description/Origin of Sport/Event

1. Golf The first of these festivals, which were part of a religious
festival to honour Zeus, was held in 776 BCE.
2. Ice hockey Canada’s official summer game. First played by the First
Nations in the 1600s.
3. Volleyball The Chinese played a form of this game more than 3000 years
ago.
4. Basketball A Scottish game played with rocks dating back to 1511.
5. First Olympic Game invented in 1895 by William G. Morgan in

Games Massachusetts, USA.
6. Curling Originated around 1800 in Windsor, Nova Scotia, Canada.
7. Weight lifting Games held in Athens, Greece, in 1896.
8. Lacrosse This sport, in some form, probably dates to prehistoric times.

Most likely, someone lifted a heavy rock and then challenged
someone else to try it.
9. Soccer Developed in the 1960s. The first piece of equipment used was
called the Snurfer.
10. Triathlon Invented by Canadian James Naismith in 1891.
11. Snowboarding The first game was played in Edinburgh, Scotland, in 1456.
12. Speed skating Cave drawings of this sport have been found, dating back to
3000 BCE, in the (Chinese) Sumero-Akkadian civilization.
13. Wrestling Dates back over 1000 years, to the canals and waterways of
Scandinavia and the Netherlands.
14. First modern- Invented in the early 1970s by the San Diego Track Club.
day Olympic
Games
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 1–SI: History of Sport: Match the Columns
(Answer Key)
Sport/Event Match Description/Origin of Sport/Event

1. Golf k The first of these festivals, which were part of a religious
festival to honour Zeus, was held in 776 BCE.
2. Ice hockey f Canada’s official summer game. First played by the First
Nations in the 1600s.
3. Volleyball e The Chinese played a form of this game more than 3000 years
ago.
4. Basketball j A Scottish game played with rocks dating back to 1511.
5. First Olympic a Game invented in 1895 by William G. Morgan in

Games Massachusetts, USA.
6. Curling d Originated around 1800 in Windsor, Nova Scotia, Canada.
7. Weight lifting h Games held in Athens, Greece, in 1896.
8. Lacrosse b This sport, in some form, probably dates to prehistoric times.

Most likely, someone lifted a heavy rock and then challenged
someone else to try it.
9. Soccer c Developed in the 1960s. The first piece of equipment used was
called the Snurfer.
10. Triathlon n Invented by Canadian James Naismith in 1891.
11. Snowboarding i The first game was played in Edinburgh, Scotland, in 1456.
12. Speed skating m Cave drawings of this sport have been found, dating back to
3000 BCE, in the (Chinese) Sumero-Akkadian civilization.
13. Wrestling l Dates back over 1000 years, to the canals and waterways of
Scandinavia and the Netherlands.
14. First modern- g Invented in the early 1970s by the San Diego Track Club.
day Olympic
Games
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 2–SI: The Continuum of Physical Activity/Sport Participation*
1. Classify each of the following activities as one of the following:

F — Free play
G — Game play
S — Sport
Archery Golfing Skipping rope
Ballet Horseshoes Skipping stones
Bowling In-line skating Street hockey
Checkers Jogging Throwing a ball
Cheerleading Rock climbing Tobogganing
Curling Skiing Weightlifting
Did you have difficulty classifying any of the above activities? If yes, which one(s)?
____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
Why were some of the activities harder to classify than others?

____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
Think of three activities different from the ones listed above that you think would be
hard to classify.
____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
Why did you select these three?

____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
__________
pages 5-9.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Introduction
According to Strengthening Canada, a report published by the Conference Board of Canada,

participation in sport is vital to our society:
Canadians love sport. It gives them pleasure, helps them to define themselves and
their communities, and contributes to a sense of what it means to be Canadian. In
any one year, more Canadians are involved as active participants in sport—more
than 8 million people in 2004—than take part in public education at all levels
combined. Millions more take part as volunteers and attendees. In all, about half
the entire population of Canada is involved annually with sport, including 55 per
cent of all adults.
It is because sport engages so many—as families, friends, communities and
individuals—that Canadians experience its effects so strongly. (Bloom, Grant, and
Watt 1)
The report further argues that while sport touches so many aspects of people’s lives, many
Canadians are unaware of how powerfully sport affects them directly or indirectly. Sport
changes us as individuals and communities (e.g., allowing us to enhance our skills,
improve our health and well-being, develop social connections and cohesion), affects our
economy (e.g., creating jobs in manufacturing, retail, and service industries), and
contributes to shaping our national and cultural identities (Bloom, Grant, and Watt 1).
The assertion that sport and physical activity are important to our culture and society
naturally leads to the question of whether people’s attitudes, values, and beliefs about
sport can influence social change. The challenge in this lesson is to examine critically the
role that sport and physical activity have played in shaping lives. What impact does sport
have on family and friends? How do the media influence thinking?
REFERENCE
Bloom, Michael, Michael Grant, and Douglas Watt. Strengthening Canada: The Socio-economic
Benefits of Sport Participation in Canada—Report August 2005 . Ottawa, ON: The
Conference Board of Canada, 2005. Available on the Canadian Heritage, Sport Canada,
website at <http://pch.gc.ca/progs/sc/pubs/recherches-research_e.cfm>.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________

Examples: ethnic background, gender equity, populations with
exceptional needs, politics, technology, business
________________________________________________________________________________
Key Understandings
Sport media are an important part of global entertainment, which provides immediate
connectivity to sports, regardless of location.
Physical activity and sport can be agents for social change.
Physical activity and sport programs provide a valuable resource for physical activity
and socialization.
________________________________________________________________________________
Essential Questions
How are the media involved in sport and in the portrayal of social issues through and in
sport?
How has sport shaped our society?
________________________________________________________________________________
The Media and Sport Partnerships*
The world seems to shrink every day due to the high level of connectedness achieved
by the many forms of media. Essentially, there are two forms of media:
Print media include newspapers, magazines, and books.
Electronic media include television, radio, and the Internet.
Sport, sport media, large corporations, and business in general are all linked, making
this unique partnership a significant economic contributor to society. But sport media
also fulfill many other functions, such as the following:
The media educate consumers about a game or sport, its history, the players, and the
strategies involved in the contest, making all of us “armchair experts” on the game
so that we can discuss and debate the events with others.
__________
page 72.
_____________________________________________________________________________
The media create excitement about upcoming events, motivating people to become avid
consumers, not only of the contest itself but also of all the festivities surrounding it.
Many people will watch a significant game (e.g., Stanley Cup final) even if they do
not usually watch the sport.
The media create emotional attachments to athletes, coaches, and teams through the
many features leading up to the start of a new season of play. The media often focus
attention on athletes who have been injured, or who have had to overcome adversity
in their lives to get them to a certain point.
The media provide a form of recreation and entertainment for many people, which is of
great value in stressful lives. Cheering for a local or favourite team or player is the
type of excitement and drama that can make a difference in a person’s life.
The media relate stories on social concerns that attract attention, stimulate thinking, and
often create lively debate. Significant topics addressed in the media include issues
related to
racial discrimination and inequities (e.g., coaching assignments, player positions,
team names, logos, mascots)
sport economics (e.g., profits, salaries, endorsements, public financing, careers)
gender inequities (e.g., salaries, attire, opportunity)
sport ethics (e.g., cheating, fighting, gambling, athlete and fan behaviour, alcohol
and tobacco sponsorships, role modelling, sexual harassment)
technological advancements (e.g., playing surfaces, equipment, clothing)
substance use and abuse (e.g., steroids, alcohol, drug testing, blood doping,
penalties)
________________________________________________________________________________
Advertising and Sport
Have students imagine they are in charge of securing advertising for the sports section of
a major newspaper. What products or businesses would be included in this section? Ask
them to list at least 10 products that they think would interest readers of the sports
section.
Compare the student-generated lists with what is actually advertised in the sports section
of a major newspaper.
Which products from the students’ lists match the ones in the actual paper?
Were any surprises found in the advertisements in the paper?
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Social Issues Highlighted through Sport
Sport engages the physical and mental abilities of groups and individuals world-wide,
whether as fans or participants, as professionals or amateurs. Sport experiences generate
a range of complex meanings that are shaped by many factors, including race, ethnicity,
gender, and socioeconomic status. To understand the significance of sport more fully, it is
necessary to examine the connections between sport and issues such as social mobility,
individual achievement, ethnic conflict, nationalism, and the drive for equity.
________________________________________________________________________________
Assessment Social Issues Snapshots
To activate thinking about social issues in sport, ask students to form groups of three or
four and have them
choose an issue that affects sport participation and development
use a web diagram or a mind map to identify challenges/barriers and successes for
their chosen issue
present their ideas to the class, asking for additional comments or feedback
In addressing gender equity in sport, for example, the following misconceptions could be
used in a class discussion about why women were/are excluded from sport:
Females aren’t interested in playing sports.
Certain physical activities harm the female body.
The aggressive and sometimes violent nature of sports does not reflect the
feminine character.
Women aren’t as good as men in sport and, therefore, shouldn’t have the same
opportunities.
Girls with exceptional athletic talent are “tomboys.”
If desired, have students investigate and expand on their topic further, using print or web-
based resources.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Social Issues and Values
The following are examples of social issues that affect sport participation and
development, including access to sport participation for populations with specific
or exceptional needs:
Special Olympics
Paralympic Games
Aboriginal sport participation
gender equity in sport
physical activity and sport for older adults
politics and sport
technology in sport
sport as business
A discussion of these social issues follows.
Special Olympics
In the early 1960s the Kennedy Foundation in Washington, DC, began to promote
international games for individuals who were intellectually challenged. The Kennedy
Foundation hired Dr. Frank Hayden, a well-known Canadian researcher in the area of
fitness and people with disabilities, and thus the Special Olympic Games were initiated in
1968, primarily with athletes from the United States and Canada. Events were later added
for athletes who were physically challenged. Hayden and other more recent investigators
have shown that the low fitness levels demonstrated by athletes with intellectual disabilities
in the 1960s and 1970s were the result of physical inactivity. Testing has shown that these
athletes are among the fitness elite, not only in physical skills for their peer groups, but also,
in many cases, when compared with other athletes. Today the Special Olympic Games are
the second largest international events, next to the Olympic Games.
REFERENCES
International Olympic Committee (IOC). Olympic Games. <www.olympic.org/>.
Special Olympics. <www.specialolympics.org/>.
Special Olympics Canada. <www.specialolympics.ca/>.
---. “The Birth of Special Olympics in Canada.” About Us: History.
<www.specialolympics.ca/en/default.aspx?tabid=10000013>.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Paralympic Games
Athletes with disabilities were included in the Olympic Games for the first time in
Rome in 1960. By the 1976 Olympic Games in Toronto, more groups with disabilities
were added. That same year the Winter Paralympics took place in Sweden.
Since that time, groups with disabilities have increasingly been included in international
sports competitions. Today, six different groups with disabilities are involved in the
Paralympics, with athletic achievement being highlighted over disability. The number of
athletes participating in the Summer Paralympics, for example, has increased from 400
athletes from 23 countries in Rome in 1960 to 3806 athletes from 136 countries in Athens
in 2004 (International Paralympics Committee).
Currently, the Paralympics and the Olympic Games are both held in the same year and
in the same location. The decision to ensure this practice for the future came about with a
2001 agreement between the International Olympic Committee (IOC) and the
International Paralympic Committee (IPC), establishing that any host city will be
presenting not only the Olympic Games but also the Paralympics.
REFERENCE
For additional information, refer to the following website:
International Paralympic Committee (IPC). Paralympic Games.
<www.paralympic.org/release/Main_Sections_Menu/Paralympic_Games/>.
Aboriginal Sport Participation
In Canada the Aboriginal Sport Circle is the national voice for Aboriginal sport, bringing
together the interests of First Nations, Inuit, and Métis peoples. Established in 1995, the
Aboriginal Sport Circle was created in response to the need for more accessible and
equitable sport and recreation opportunities for Aboriginal peoples. Canada is viewed
throughout the world as a leader in promoting and protecting the rights of all its citizens,
including the access and participation in sport and physical activity programs. Today,
many Native bands and individuals located near cities participate in athletic leagues. As
well, every four years competitive games are held between Aboriginals from places such
as Nunavut, the Northwest Territories, Yukon Territory, and Alaska. The competitions
include indigenous games and demonstrations such as the arm pull and high kicking.
REFERENCES
Aboriginal Sport Circle. <www.aboriginalsportcircle.ca/>.
Arctic Winter Games. <www.awg.ca/>.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Gender Equity in Sport
One of the most consistent injustices of the past and present is the lack of equal access to,
for example, job opportunities for women in our society. The quest for equitable and fair
access in all aspects of society including sport is still a struggle today, although great
strides have been made in recent history.
According to the Canadian Association for the Advancement of Women and Sport and
Physical Activity, “no women took part in the first modern Olympic Games in 1896”
(CAAWS, “Introduction”). At the 26th Olympic Games (1996) in Atlanta, for example, 97
of the 271 events were open to women, with both women and men contesting in 11 events;
3626 of the 10 629 athletes were women. Canada has fared better than other major
countries when it comes to representation: “Of the 307 Canadian athletes who competed
in Atlanta, 154 were women and 153 were men, making it the first Canadian Olympic
team ever to consist of more women than men, an impressive shift in a short time”
(CAAWS, “Introduction”).
Significant events that have ultimately changed the social view of women in sport include
the women’s movements of the 1950s and 1960s
the creation of organizations such as the National Organization for Women (NOW)
and the Canadian Association for Advancement of Women and Sport and Physical
Activity (CAAWS)
the passing of U.S. legislation called Title IX in 1972 prohibiting gender discrimination in
federally assisted education programs
Title IX states: “No person in the United States shall, on the basis of sex, be excluded
from participation in, be denied the benefits of, or be subjected to discrimination under
any education program or activity receiving financial assistance” (U.S. Department of
Labor).
The impact of events such as these has changed the level of female participation in sport
throughout the world.
REFERENCES
Canadian Association for the Advancement of Women and Sport and Physical
Activity (CAAWS). “Women’s Sport from 440 BC to 1998.” Milestones.
<www.caaws.ca/e/milestones/sport_print.cfm>.
National Organization for Women. <www.now.org/>.
Title IX. <www.titleix.info/>.
U.S. Department of Labor. Office of the Assistant Secretary for Administration
and Management. Title IX, Education Amendments of 1972.
<www.dol.gov/oasam/regs/statutes/titleix.htm>.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Physical Activity and Sport for Older Adults
As humans age, the body begins to deteriorate, from the cellular level to the total body.
Aging is inevitable, and the process cannot be stopped. Research has shown, however,
that it is possible to slow the loss of physiological and physical functions through exercise
and sport. The Canadian Centre for Activity and Aging is a world leader in aging research
and provides practical advice and materials on the benefits of physical activity for older
adults. Recently, the Canadian government was instrumental in the formation of the
Canada Senior Games, a national competition for seniors over the age of 55, which
includes sports such as snooker, swimming, five-pin bowling, golf, and track.
REFERENCES
Canadian Centre for Activity and Aging (CCAA). <www.uwo.ca/actage/>.
Canadian Senior Games Association. <www.canada55plusgames.com/>.
Politics and Sport
The Canadian Sport Policy, available on the Sport Canada website, “presents a powerful
vision for sport in Canada” and emphasizes the “goals of enhanced participation,
excellence, capacity, and interaction in sport” (“Introduction”):*
The Policy is unique in comparison to the many previous studies and policies on sport in
Canada because it
represents the shared vision and goals of 14 governmental jurisdictions for sport for
the period 2002 to 2012 and challenges the sport community to share in their
achievement
reflects the involvement in the policy development process of stakeholders not
previously included
emphasizes increased communication and collaboration amongst all the stakeholders
commits all governments to setting targets for enhanced participation and enhanced
high performance sport in collaboration with their respective sport communities
commits governments to strengthening their regular and formal communication with
their respective sport communities on issues affecting sport
will be implemented by complementary Action Plans developed by the governments
collectively and individually, bi-laterally and multi-laterally, and by the sport
community
__________
Source of Excerpts: Canadian Heritage. Sport Canada. “Introduction.” The Canadian Sport Policy. 24 May 2002.
<www.pch.gc.ca/progs/sc/pol/pcs-csp/2003/1_e.cfm>. Reproduced with permission.
_____________________________________________________________________________
THE GOALS OF THE CANADIAN SPORT POLICY ARE
Enhanced Participation
A significantly higher proportion of Canadians from all segments of society are involved in
quality sport activities at all levels and in all forms of participation.
Enhanced Excellence
The pool of talented athletes has expanded and Canadian athletes and teams are
systematically achieving world-class results at the highest levels of international competition
through fair and ethical means.
Enhanced Capacity
The essential components of an ethically based, athlete/participant-centred development
system are in place and are continually modernized and strengthened as required.
Enhanced Interaction
The components of the sport system are more connected and coordinated as a result of
the committed collaboration and communication amongst the stakeholders.
REFERENCE
For additional information on the policy, refer to the following website:
Canadian Heritage. Sport Canada. The Canadian Sport Policy. 24 May 2002.
<www.pch.gc.ca/progs/sc/pol/pcs-csp/index_e.cfm>.
Governments play a key role in protecting the rights of individuals. In Canada we refer to
these rights as human rights. When individuals perceive that their human rights are being
violated they may use legal means through the Human Rights Commission to ensure that
their rights are respected. For an example, refer to RM 3–SI, which reports on the ruling,
“Winnipeg Girls Win Right to Play on Boys’ Hockey Team.”
Refer to RM 3–SI: Human Rights Appeal.
Sport is often seen as a venue for the promotion of social values, thereby making sport a
political venue. For example, sport and physical activity enable participants to
enhance personal growth and development
develop life skills (e.g., skills in time management, priority and goal setting)
strive for excellence and success through hard work, discipline, and perseverance
experience change in socioeconomic status
contribute to and benefit from teamwork and team cohesion
_____________________________________________________________________________
Champion athletes can use their celebrity and success to bring attention to inequities,
injustices, and other social and personal causes (e.g., racism, gender bias,
homophobia, substance use, eating disorders, cancer, AIDS, disaster relief). Sport can
also inspire national pride and unite a nation.
Technology and Sport
New sport products are continually being developed, including sportswear, court and
field surfaces, equipment, fabrics, and materials. The primary reasons for the
development of new products are safety, increased speed of movement (e.g., better
trained athletes and the design of playing tools such as the shape and size of balls and the
configuration of skis), and improved performance. Innovations in sport products (e.g.,
larger racquet heads, new waxing techniques for cross-country skiers) have made sport
easier for beginners, assisted top-level athletes to reach superior performances, and eased
the transition from individual to team play and from recreational sport to highly
competitive sport.
Scientifically proven, sport-specific training regimes have significantly added to improved

performance, as well as helping to combat the deleterious effects of physical inactivity.
Advances in understanding how the body reacts to physiological and psychological
stress, as well as improved rehabilitation methodology and technology, have enhanced
knowledge of how to live a healthier life.
REFERENCE
Sport and Technology. <www.sportandtechnology.com>.
Sport as Business
Sport is big business. More individuals participate in sport as spectators, athletes, and/or
administrators than are involved in any other singular human endeavour. In many
nations, including Canada, more money is spent on physical activity and sportswear,
admission fees, salaries, equipment, and facilities than on the armed services or on any
other area of concern, with the exception of health care. Sport involvement contributes to
the fitness level of the nation, serves as a major form of entertainment, contributes to
personal and national pride, provides employment for thousands of individuals, results
in the construction of superior facilities, and thus contributes significantly to the gross
national product of the country.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Social Issues in Sport
Specific business aspects of sport include

investment income
ticket sales
facility revenue
media revenue
licensing fees
team merchandise
naming rights
player revenue through endorsements
Ask students to select one of the topics listed above and research its impact on a
specific sport, using information from newspapers, magazines, or web-based articles.
Have students write a report on their selected research topic in which they
state the sport and social issue
provide background on why it is an issue
explain how the issue was/is being addressed through sport and/or the business of
sport
________________________________________________________________________________
Player Endorsement Revenue
Have students predict the salaries, and identify any endorsement deals they know of, for
different key athletes, such as the following:
Tiger Woods (golf)
LeBron James (basketball)
David Beckham (soccer)
Sidney Crosby (hockey)
Cindy Klassen (speed skating)
After students have made their predictions, provide correct statistics for comparison. As a
class, discuss the impact of player endorsement deals on society.
_____________________________________________________________________________
REFERENCES
For information on current statistics, refer to the following websites:
Badenhausen, Kurt. “The World’s Top-Earning Athletes.” 26 Oct. 2007. Sports Business.
Forbes.com. <www.forbes.com/sportsbusiness/2007/10/25/sports-tiger-woods-biz-
sports-cz_kb_1026athletes.html>.
Forbes.com. <www.forbes.com/>.
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 3–SI: Human Rights Appeal
Winnipeg Girls Win Right to Play on Boys’ Hockey Team*
Two Winnipeg sisters have the right to try out for the boys’ hockey team at their high school, the
Manitoba Human Rights Commission ruled Friday.
__________
This story is available at the following website:
Canadian Broadcasting Corporation (CBC). “Winnipeg Girls Win Right to Play on Boys’ Hockey Team.” 24 Sept. 2006. CBC News.
<www.cbc.ca/canada/manitoba/story/2006/09/22/hockey-decision.html>.
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 3–SI: Human Rights Appeal (Continued)
Human Rights Appeal*
September 22, 2006
The Manitoba High Schools Athletic Association is disappointed with the decision regarding high
school sport programs. The association strongly believes that its eligibility rules promote equal
opportunity for boys and girls to participate in high school sport.
In this case, both the West Kildonan boys’ and girls’ high school hockey teams had approximately
the same number of games and practices. The coaching staff of the girls’ team consisted of a Level 2
coach, and a specialized goaltender coach, and other assistant coaches, while the boys’ team only
had Level 1 coaches.
The MHSAA followed the guidelines as set out by the Canadian Association for the Advancement
of Women and Sport (CAAWS) who assert that it is preferable for athletes to play on a gender
specific team, when resources are similar. The MHSAA policy is consistent with all other provincial
associations across Canada.
The MHSAA allows girls greater opportunity than boys in high school hockey. [The girls] could
have played for an “AAA” or “AA” boys’ hockey team, but stated it was too expensive or they did
not like the coach. They could have played both high school hockey and community hockey, which
is an opportunity not available for boys in Manitoba. They chose not to play. They could have
attended another school that didn’t have a girls’ hockey program and tried out for the boys’
hockey team there. They chose not to play any hockey for two years and then requested financial
compensation for their choices.
The Manitoba Human Rights Commission should consider that educators guide the Manitoba
High Schools Athletic Association and its rules and regulations. They should appreciate that
these individuals know what is appropriate for sport development at this level and what is best
for the student athletes. It is regrettable that the Manitoba Human Rights Commission has chosen
to uphold this challenge. This decision is a significant backward step for girls’ high school sport
progress, and amateur sport in general.
The school had opportunity to appeal the initial decision of the MHSAA Board. They chose not to
appeal. The mother and superintendent were informed that another appeal could be put forward.
The original appeal was not based on the differences of the games, but simply, “Can girls play on a
boys’ team, when the school has a girls’ team?” It is regrettable that the school chose not to appeal.
The school had the opportunity to present a formal Motion to change our rules. This could have
been considered at an Annual Meeting, but no motion was ever submitted.
This decision paves the way for a purely merit (ability)-driven high school sport program. This is
contrary to the expert evidence from the vast majority of school administrators, principals, and
coaches. Does this now mean that boys can try out for girls’ teams? Do we eliminate gender specific
teams? How will this affect female participation? Can this carry over to Canada Games and other
activities? The MHSAA feels that by providing funding and coaching in separate categories for
competition, they promote maximum participation and opportunity for all student athletes to
achieve personal success.
__________
Source: Manitoba High Schools Athletic Association (MHSAA). “Human Rights Appeal.” News. 22 Sept. 2006.
<http://www.mhsaa.mb.ca/pages/news/06_07/sep22a.php>. Used with permission.
Note: For updates, refer to the MHSAA website.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Introduction
All societies in the world are governed by a set of rules that have been decided upon by
the society as a whole, their elected representatives, or the rulers of that society. These
rules, known as the laws of the land, are necessary so that anarchy does not take hold.
In many instances, sport serves as a microcosm of society. It is necessary to have

guidelines, rules, or regulations of the way a sport is to be played. These rules are pliable
but become less flexible as sport moves from recreational physical activity to formal
structures, such as sports leagues. It is essential that all teams involved at similar levels
play by the same set of regulations. Even at the elite or professional level, however,
opportunities must be available to change the rules of sport, whether by popular demand,
for safety reasons, or for spectator and participant appeal.
The rules of sport, like the rules of society, are meant to satisfy the needs of the
participants and spectators, and must be seen to be fair, equitable, and judicious; that is,
they must include a set of consequences/penalties for a hierarchy of transgressions or
deviant behaviour.
REFERENCE
For information on this topic, refer to the following website:
Canadian Centre for Ethics in Sport (CCES). <www.cces.ca>.
________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________
Key Understandings
All athletes have the potential to be perceived as role models.

Character can be enhanced through systematic teaching and demonstration of fair
play and good sporting behaviour.
Sport participants behave in positive and negative ways.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Essential Questions
How does sport build or reveal the positive or negative character of an individual?
How is character “learned”?
How do athletes serve as role models for young sport competitors?
What is the difference between sporting behaviour and deviant behaviour in sport?
________________________________________________________________________________
Sporting behaviour is the term used to reflect sportsmanship, as it pertains to ethical

behaviour, fair play, and respect for the sport, the participants, and the spectators. Elite
athletes have become societal role models, whether or not they wish to carry this burden.
In recent years, because of increased and instantaneous media attention, the behaviour of
these athletes has come under society’s microscope, off as well as on the playing field, for
every aspect of their lives. As a result, elite athletes seriously influence the moral and
ethical development of children and youth of many societies.
Sport can also build character and personal qualities, such as courage, integrity, and the
capacity to commit to a goal or purpose, as well as values such as a sense of
responsibility to others, respect for others, self-discipline, a sense of fair play and fair
dealing, and honesty.
For these reasons it is important that parents and particularly coaches have a good
understanding of the positive values that the sporting experience is able to promote. Pointing
out and rewarding the positive behaviours while discussing and discouraging the negative
ones is every adult’s responsibility. Coaches and parents are role models too.
REFERENCE
For information on the skills, attitudes, and behaviours that sport builds, refer to the
following report:
Bloom, Michael, Michael Grant, and Douglas Watt. “Chapter 6: Skills Impacts.”
Strengthening Canada: The Socio-economic Benefits of Sport Participation in Canada—
Report August 2005. Ottawa, ON: The Conference Board of Canada, 2005. Available on
the Canadian Heritage, Sport Canada, website at
<www.pch.gc.ca/progs/sc/pubs/socio-eco/6_e.cfm>.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
The Athlete as Role Model
Many positive role models can be found in sport. As a class, discuss athletes who
contribute to the improvement of our society and are living examples of the best qualities
of our society. Have students respond to guiding questions such as the following:
What qualities do these athletes represent?
What other athletes come to mind when we use the term “role model”?
Examples of role models in sport are Cindy Klassen, Clara Hughes, Steve Nash, Todd
MacCulloch, Terry Fox, and Rick Hansen.
________________________________________________________________________________
The Marketable Athlete
Have each student reflect on “marketable” athletes by responding to the following

questions:
Identify a Canadian athlete who advertises products in the media.
What products does this athlete advertise?
Why did the company selling the product connect this athlete to it?
Think about the sports you watch on television. What other kinds of products do you see
advertised by athletes during television commercials or in print media?
What traits make an athlete “highly marketable”? Why?
What sort of image does an athlete bring to products? Give examples of positive and
negative sports images or sports figures.
Do these athletes have an impact on the consumer relative to personal values?
________________________________________________________________________________
An Athlete’s Creed
Have students create a creed (statement of belief) that reflects their personal views on
sport participation. Students could also develop a creed for a local sporting event in the
school or in the community and post it, where applicable. Have students compare and
discuss the importance of their creed in the context of their own sport experience.
_____________________________________________________________________________
The Olympic Creed, for example, is
meant to spur athletes to embrace the THE OLYMPIC CREED
Olympic spirit and to perform to the “The most important thing in the Olympic Games
best of their abilities. The words for is not to win but to take part, just as the most
this creed are attributed to Pierre de important thing in life is not the triumph but the
Coubertin, the founder of the modern struggle. The essential thing is not to have
Olympic Games, who got the idea for conquered but to have fought well” (Canadian
this phrase from a speech given by Olympic Committee).
Bishop Ethelbert Talbot at a service for
Olympic champions during the 1908
Olympic Games (Athens Info Guide;
Canadian Olympic Committee).
REFERENCES
Athens Info Guide. “Olympic Games.” Tourist Information Guide on Athens Greece.
<www.athensinfoguide.com/olympic.htm>.
Canadian Olympic Committee (COC). Frequently Asked Questions.
<www.olympic.ca/EN/faq.shtml>.
International Olympic Committee (IOC). “Olympians.” Athletes.
<www.olympic.org/uk/athletes/olympians/index_uk.asp>.
________________________________________________________________________________
Character Versus Sport Ethic
More often than not, the assumption is made that having good character also represents
the dominant sport ethic. In other words, the athletes’ behaviours are consistent with the
behaviour norms that are applauded and praised by the sporting culture. Individual
character and the prevailing sport ethic may, however, counter each other. Athletes who
demonstrate and endorse the sport ethic are rewarded, while those who rebel find it
difficult to be a part of the accepted society.
When athletes are exposed to various ethical dilemmas in sport over a period of time, they
may eventually adopt unethical behaviours that are expected of them (e.g., hockey players
may be expected to fight or to take penalties for their team). The behaviours are often
reinforced and appreciated by the fans and media. Although the behaviours are accepted
within the insular world of sport, they are often not acceptable in the world outside of sport.
The newspapers and television are full of examples of athletes who have difficulty keeping the
line clearly drawn between the world of sport and the world outside of sport.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
The World of Sport
Have students find in the media (or create) two positive or negative examples of ethical
issues in sport. These examples may pertain to issues related to gender fairness, violence,
cheating, fair play, foul language, use of performance-enhancing drugs, being forced to
play while injured, and so on.
Have students comment on each example using the following guiding

statement/questions:
Identify the ethical issue in the selected example and describe what was ethical
and/or unethical about the example.
Comment on whether or not the individual actions/character involved and the
prevailing sport ethic supported or countered each other.
Explain how the athletes/coaches will be treated as a result of their actions in each
example.
Comment on whether or not the behaviour was appropriate and justified. Explain.
The following are some examples of what students may find when they look at how
athletes’ behaviours are consistent with the behaviour norms that are applauded and
praised by the sporting culture but are not necessarily considered good character.
EXAMPLES
Athletes’ behaviours may be consistent with behaviour norms of sporting culture but may not
reflect good character when they
strive for excellence by cheating (e.g., using drugs, making dishonest line
calls, tampering with equipment)
strive for excellence by training to exhaustion and playing in pain
show love and respect for the game by gloating (e.g., after a touchdown, hockey goal,
slam dunk)
demonstrate being a team player by risk-taking or demonstrating violence and
aggression (e.g., fighting, “beanballing,” stick
smashing)
REFERENCE
For additional information on character and sport, refer to the following website:
Goodcharacter.com. Character and Sports. <www.goodcharacter.com/Sports.html>.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Deviant Behaviour in Sport
The term deviant behaviour describes actions or behaviours that take place in sport that
are outside expected or acceptable limits. This definition helps distinguish between
behaviours that are governed within the rules of the sport and those that may be
questioned, reviewed, or acted upon by the parent sport organization (e.g., National
Hockey League) or by the judicial system.
Deviant behaviour in sport may include the following:

Rule breaking: When rules are broken unintentionally during competition, or when
rules are broken intentionally but the results are not severe, game officials make a
ruling. Organizational or judicial intervention may become necessary when the rules
are broken intentionally or result in great harm. The penalties or sanctions levied
against the perpetrators range from heavy fines to lifetime bans in the sport, and, in
some cases, result in criminal charges.
Emotional involvement: Different levels of emotional involvement could also be
considered deviant behaviour. In many countries, sporting events have evolved into
avenues for emotional release and relief. Generally, the more important the event is,
the greater the emotional expression becomes, whether it be joy, anger, wonderment,
or sadness. Often the emotions are irrational and, in many instances, lead to violence,
usually between opposing team spectators, but sometimes between opponents,
athletes, and spectators, or even game officials. In any case, these actions are immature
and antisocial, and are definitely not acceptable.
________________________________________________________________________________
Assessment Rule Breaking
Using the Think-Pair-Share strategy (see Appendix E), students reflect individually and
then in pairs about situations in sport where spectators/athletes have broken rules as a
result of their frustration. Ask students to be prepared to discuss three examples in class.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Off-Field Violence in Sport
Sports that involve body contact of any kind also involve violent acts. It has been
suggested, although not substantiated, that watching or being involved in violent acts in
sport may lead to deviant behaviour outside the sport venue. Is it possible that people
who use physical intimidation and violence in sport are likely to exhibit these behaviours
when faced with situations of conflict outside of sport? Consider the case of Tonya
Harding (Olympic figure skater), who was involved with the attack on fellow skater
Nancy Kerrigan.
________________________________________________________________________________
Off-Field Violence in Sport
Develop statements related to violent behaviour for students to debate. Using the Opinion
Corners learning strategy (see Appendix E), students take a position on an issue by going
to the corner that most accurately depicts their viewpoint: strongly agree, agree, strongly
disagree, or disagree.
The following are examples of statements that could be debated by the class:
An athlete who feels that his or her character is being challenged will often respond
with physical force.
Male athletes (e.g., O. J. Simpson, Chris Benoit, Mike Tyson) are more frequently
involved in violent acts against women than are male non-athletes.
Sport serves as a way to release aggression in an acceptable way and actually reduces
violent tendencies in athletes and/or fans.
Parents promote violent behaviour of their children.
________________________________________________________________________________
Performance Enhancement
Although performance-enhancing substances have been used for hundreds of years, this
issue is becoming more prevalent in sport today. Athletes use many substances such as
anabolic steroids, stimulants, over-the-counter drugs, vitamins, amino-acid supplements,
health foods, and natural herbs to gain an advantage over their competitors. Not all
substances are illegal, but many are.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Athletes’ Use of Performance-Enhancing Drugs
Have students work in groups of three to discuss questions regarding athletes’ use of
performance-enhancing substances. Ask each student in a group to take one of the
following letters: A, B, or C. For the first round, A is the recorder, B asks C questions, and
C answers the questions. B does not speak other than to ask the questions. C has one
minute to answer questions. After the first round, have students rotate until each student
has had an opportunity to be a recorder, ask the questions, and respond to the questions.
Sample questions could include the following:

Name three athletes who have recently been caught using performance-enhancing
substances.
What should be the penalty for such actions?
Why do athletes take performance-enhancing substances?
________________________________________________________________________________
Sport Gambling
What are the issues/problems with betting on sporting events? There are strict rules
against players, coaches, and game officials being involved in gambling on the outcomes
of sporting events in which they are involved. Gambling in sport has long been an issue,
however. It is estimated that billions of dollars are spent around the world in illegal
wagering in sport.
In Manitoba, it appears that gambling is a concern not only for adults, but also for youth:
Based on the Addictions Foundation of Manitoba’s 2001 Youth Survey, close to
50% of students surveyed had gambled or bet on something during the past year.
Gambling activities played by these youth include: scratch tickets (29.7%), bingo
(18.2%), lottery tickets (16.6%), Sports Select games (14%), VLTs (11.3%), and slot
machines (10.3%). (MAAW, “Wanna Bet . . . Fast Facts on Gambling”)
REFERENCE
For additional statistics, refer to the following website:
Manitoba Addictions Awareness Week (MAAW) Committee. “Wanna Bet . . . Fast Facts on
Gambling.” Manitoba Addictions Awareness Week: Resource Kit . Winnipeg, MB: MAAW
Committee, October 2007. 2.4.8 Gambling. Available online at
<www.afm.mb.ca/maaw/Resource_Kit/FastFacts/gamblingwantabet.pdf>.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Does Sport Build Character?
The term character refers to a person acting in accordance with his or her own morals and
beliefs. How a person is socialized as a child determines, to a large extent, what the person
values, and this includes the elements of trustworthiness, honesty, respect, responsibility,
fairness, and caring. When athletes behave in a manner that is inconsistent with the way
they normally behave it is said that they are acting “out of character.” Why are there so
many examples of athletes acting “out of character”?
________________________________________________________________________________
The Time to Act—Or Not!
Ask students to brainstorm, in small groups, the reasons why they think that some
athletes (e.g., professional, amateur) demonstrate poor sporting behaviour. Have students
test their attitude toward sporting behaviours by responding to the scenarios presented in
RM 4–SI.
Refer to RM 4–SI: Moral Dilemmas in Sport.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 4–SI: Moral Dilemmas in Sport
The fundamental nature of positive sporting behaviour is a commitment to compete

within the letter and spirit of the rules, to treat the game itself and all participants with
respect, and to be gracious in both victory and defeat. For many sport participants and
spectators the dilemma is to know what is cheating or what is just a part of the game.
Here are 14 scenarios that test your attitude toward sporting behaviours. Identify each of
the behaviours described in the scenarios below as one of the following:
C – Cheating
P – Part of the Game
Be prepared to support your choices.
Scenarios C P
1. To get a needed time out, a coach instructs a soccer player to fake an injury.
2. After every score, a basketball player taunts the defender in an effort to “psyche him or
her out.”
3. To gain an edge, a golfer illegally alters equipment.
4. A baseball coach instructs a pitcher to throw the ball at the other team’s best batter’s
head to brush the batter back from the plate.
5. To motivate players, a coach uses foul language and insults.
6. In basketball, a player commits a deliberate foul to stop the clock in the final minute of
play.
7. In soccer, a coach teaches players to grab and hold shirts illegally without being
detected.
8. In volleyball, a player says nothing after a referee erroneously says the player never
touched the ball.
9. To set a new scoring record, a football team facing a badly overmatched opponent runs
up the score to 96-7.
10. In baseball, a fielder traps the ball against the ground, but tries to convince the umpire
that he or she caught it cleanly.
11. A wrestling coach instructs an athlete to attack a recent injury of the opponent.
12. In ice hockey, a coach sends in a player to instigate a fight with the other team’s top
scorer.
13. In a close tennis match, the referee calls a sideline shot you have made “in.” You know
it was out but don’t say anything.
14. You are fouled in a close basketball game with the time running out. The coach calls you
and another teammate over and instructs the other player to go to the shooting line in
your place.
15. Other
_____________________________________________________________________________
MODULE E:
SUBSTANCE USE AND ABUSE PREVENTION
Introduction
Lesson 1: Legal and Illegal Substances
Lesson 2: Stages of Substance Use and Addiction
Lesson 3: Risks and Consequences of Substance Use
Lesson 4: Advocacy against Substance Use and Abuse

MODULE E: SUBSTANCE USE AND ABUSE PREVENTION

Includes: non-involvement, irregular involvement, regular involvement,
harmful involvement, and dependent involvement
MODULE E: SUBSTANCE USE AND ABUSE PREVENTION
Introduction
Some substances or drugs may be helpful and/or

harmful, depending on their use. For example, many NOTE TO TEACHER
people use substances or drugs to help counter the
The background information and
symptoms of various illnesses, to relieve pain, to suggestions for instruction/
reduce inflammation, and so on. People also use assessment related to substance
drugs to alter their behaviour. Some overuse a drug use and abuse prevention may
until they become physically dependent on it. They include potentially sensitive
spend much time thinking about getting high, content. Before implementation
purchasing drugs, preparing drugs, or taking drugs, of this module, check with your
school administration for school
which can have serious effects on their own lives or and school division guidelines
on the lives of others. and procedures related to depth
and breadth of content, choice of
The goal of this module is to reinforce the importance learning resources, assessment
of avoiding the use and abuse of substances that may reporting procedures, and
be harmful to self or others, as taught in previous providing a parental option. A
grades. Helping students to learn more about drug parental option means that
parents may choose a school-
classifications, drug effects, levels of involvement, and
based or alternative delivery
avoidance and harm reduction strategies promotes (e.g., home, professional
and contributes to healthy decision making and counselling).
emphasizes the seriousness of drug problems. Review all Resource Masters
and/or case scenarios before
Module E: Substance Use and Abuse Prevention using them with students to
contains four lessons: check for suitability, and be
prepared for the discussions that
Lesson 1: Legal and Illegal Substances may occur.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Module E, Introduction 277
Lesson 1: Legal and Illegal Substances
Introduction
While some of the discussion on legal and illegal substances in this lesson is a review from
previous grades, there is a stronger focus on prescription and over-the-counter (OTC)
drugs. This lesson reinforces the drug classifications and challenges students to consider
both the positive and negative effects of all types of drugs.
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
Key Understandings
Drugs and other substances are often classified by the way they affect the mind
and/or body.
Misuse of any drug (OTC, prescription, illegal) can be a serious health risk.
Know the benefits and risks of a drug before taking it.
________________________________________________________________________________
Essential Questions
How are drugs classified?
What information is provided on a prescription drug label? Why?
How do you make healthy choices when using different drugs?
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Module E, Lesson 1 279
Alcohol and Other Drugs

Scientifically, a drug is any substance, other than food, that
is taken to change the way the body or the mind functions. NOTE TO TEACHER
In other words, a drug is any chemical that, when it enters
For the purposes of this
the body, affects the way the body works. Alcohol, caffeine,
document, the terms
nicotine, and medications are all drugs. A drug must be able substances and drugs are
to pass from the body into the brain. Drugs change the considered interchangeable.
messages that brain cells send to each other and to the rest of
the body. They do this by interfering with the brain’s own
chemical signals: neurotransmitters.
There are two types of drugs:
Legal drugs are known as over-the-counter (OTC) and prescription (Rx) drugs.
Alcohol, nicotine, and caffeine are all legal drugs as well.
Illegal drugs refer to drugs that are not prescribed by a licensed medical professional,
and their use is unlawful under the Controlled Drugs and Substances Act (Department
of Justice Canada).
REFERENCE
Canada. Department of Justice Canada. Controlled Drugs and Substances Act. Ottawa, ON:
Department of Justice, 1996. Available online at <http://laws.justice.gc.ca/en/C-38.8/>.
________________________________________________________________________________
Assessment KWL
To check students’ prior knowledge of different legal and illegal drugs, use the KWL
(Know – Want to know – Learned) strategy. Use K and W below to guide students’
thinking at the beginning of the lesson or unit, and L at the end of the lesson or unit.
Know: Identify the names of legal and illegal drugs that you know.
Want to know: Identify drugs that you would like to know more about.
Learned: Identify what you learned in this lesson or unit about legal and illegal drugs.
_____________________________________________________________________________
REFERENCES
For additional information on the KWL strategy (developed by Donna Ogle), refer to
the following departmental publications:
Manitoba Education and Training. Senior Years Science Teachers’ Handbook: A Teaching
Resource. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education and Training, 1997. See pages 9.8, 9.9,
9.24, and 9.25.
---. Success for All Learners: A Handbook on Differentiating Instruction: A Resource
for Kindergarten to Senior 4 Schools . Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education and
Training, 1996. See pages 6.20–6.23, 6.94, and 6.95.
________________________________________________________________________________
Legal Drugs
Legal drugs are considered permissible for use, and are either prescribed by a physician
(prescription medications) or are available over the counter at a pharmacy or other outlet
(non-prescription medication). They are intended for medical purposes, such as to ease
pain symptoms and to treat health conditions.
OTC drugs or non-prescription medications are available to consumers without a
prescription. There are many categories of OTC drugs, such as pain relievers, cold and flu
medicines, allergy medications, acne products, and weight-control products. These drugs
are usually safe when consumers follow the directions on the label and the directions
from their health care professional. Each drug label must have information related to the
medicinal and non-medicinal ingredients, use of the drug, applicable warnings or
cautions, directions, and dosage.
As indicated by the Center for Drug Evaluation and Research (CDER),
“OTC drugs” generally have these characteristics:
their benefits outweigh their risks
the potential for misuse and abuse is low
the consumer can use them for self-diagnosed conditions
they can be adequately labelled
health practitioners are not needed for the safe and effective use of the product
(CDER, “Introduction”)
REFERENCE
U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). Center for Drug Evaluation and Research (CDER).
Office of Nonprescription Products. 7 June 2006. <www.fda.gov/CDER/Offices/OTC/>.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
How to Read an OTC Drug Label
Provide students with a label of an OTC drug. Have

students read the label and identify the information NOTE TO TEACHER
related to each of the following areas, as applicable: Before asking students to examine a
medicinal ingredients prescription label of an OTC drug,
remove the label from the container
non-medicinal ingredients or make sure the container is empty.
use
warnings
cautions
directions
dosage
other
Reinforce the importance of following the information on the label and discuss the
risks associated with not doing so.
REFERENCE
For a Canadian reference on interpreting OTC drug labels, refer to the following website:
Be MedWise. How to Read a Drug Label. 10 Jan. 2005.
<www.bemedwise.ca/English/howtoread.html>.
This website was created with the participation of the Canadian Pharmacists
Association (CPhA) and the Drug Information and Research Centre (DIRC).
________________________________________________________________________________
Prescription Drugs
There are many prescribed drugs that are frequently misused or abused by people.
Substance misuse is classified as either intentional or unintentional use of a substance
(including prescription medications, non-prescription medications, and alcohol) that
causes a problem.
Substance abuse is an intentional pattern of harmful use of any substance for mood-
altering purposes.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Either substance misuse or abuse can result in repeated adverse social consequences
related to drug use, such as failure to meet work, family, or school obligations,
interpersonal conflicts, or legal problems.
A prescription drug must be prescribed by a physician or other qualified health

professional. Prescriptions authorize a pharmacist to provide a specified amount of a
particular medication for a specific patient, with instructions for its use. These drugs are
regulated by Health Canada’s Therapeutic Products Directorate (TPD).
Often people are unaware of the serious health risks involved in abusing prescription
drugs. Because prescription drugs are “legal” and are known to be manufactured to meet
quality and safety standards, many young people mistakenly believe that they are always
safe to use. Safety can only be assumed if the drug is taken by the intended person as
directed by the prescribing doctor. Increasingly, young adolescents are obtaining
prescription drugs from classmates, friends, and family members or are stealing them
from people for whom the drugs had been legitimately prescribed. As prescription drugs
are readily available and can be obtained easily by teenagers, there is cause for concern.
Categories of Prescription Drugs
Three main categories of prescription drugs are of particular concern with regard to their
potential for abuse. All the substances in these categories will alter a person’s mood
and/or behaviour, and are thus “psychoactive” (have an effect on the functioning of the
brain). All three categories also represent substances that have serious potential to
produce dependence or addiction.
These three categories of “psychoactive” prescription drugs are as follows:

Narcotic pain medications (e.g., opioids) are prescribed to manage chronic or severe
pain. Generic and brand names include morphine- and codeine-related drugs such as
Demerol, OxyContin, Vicodin, and Dilaudid.
Central nervous system (CNS) depressants (sedatives and tranquilizers) are prescribed
to treat conditions such as anxiety and acute stress reaction, panic attacks, and sleep
disorders. Generic and brand names include barbiturates such as Nembutal and
benzodiazepines such as Valium (diazepam) and Xanax (alprazolam).
CNS stimulants are prescribed to treat conditions such as attention deficit disorder
(ADD) and attention deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD). Generic and brand names
include amphetamines such as Ritalin.
Other prescription drugs that may be misused include anabolic steroids, which are often
used in an attempt to build muscle mass, and cannabis-related prescription products (e.g.,
medical marijuana or the tablet form dronabinol/Marinol). There are several other classes
of prescription drugs that have psychoactive properties (e.g., antipsychotics, anti-mania
drugs, antidepressants), but do not tend to be abused for “recreational” purposes.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Naming of Drugs
Drug names originate from

the structural formula (chemical composition) of the drug (generic name). This is the
“common” name of a drug and does not require capitalization (e.g., acetaminophen is
a common name of a popular pain medication).
the name used by pharmaceutical companies to market the product (brand or trade name).
The name usually has advertising value. Companies will register or copyright the brand
or trade name (e.g., Tylenol is one brand name of acetaminophen). Because they are
“proper” names, these brand and trade names are capitalized.
REFERENCE
U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. National Institute on Drug Abuse (NIDA).
NIDA InfoFacts: Prescription Pain and Other Medications. Bethesda, MD: NIDA, June
2006. Available online at <www.drugabuse.gov/Infofacts/Painmed.html>.
________________________________________________________________________________
How to Read a Prescription Drug Label
To help students learn about what information is included on a prescription drug label,
have them complete RM 1–SU. Reinforce the importance of reading the information and
following the directions on the label. Also emphasize that only the person for whom a
drug is prescribed should take the drug.
Refer to RM 1–SU: How to Read a Prescription Drug Label.
REFERENCES
For information on reading a prescription drug label, refer to the following report:
Health Quality Council of Alberta (HQCA). Health Report to Albertans. Calgary, AB: HQCA,
January 2007. Available online at
<www.hqca.ca/phpBB2/files/hqca_health_report_2007_202.pdf>.
For information on prescription drugs that students may be taking, refer to the following
website, which is operated by the Ontario government and the Ontario Ministry of Health
Promotion:
HealthyOntario.com. Drugs. <www.healthyontario.com/Drugs.aspx>.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Illegal Drugs
Illegal drugs are regulated or unlawful substances (e.g., cocaine, crystal

methamphetamine [meth], anabolic steroids, heroin, cannabis), which are usually
obtained by dishonest or prohibited means (e.g., through drug dealers).
Whether or not a drug is legalized is often influenced by political, cultural, and social
concerns. For example, tobacco was considered illegal when it was first brought to
England. It was legalized, however, when it was determined to be a revenue source for the
government. Despite the fact that it is now known to be a health risk, tobacco remains a
legal substance.
The dynamic of changing the legal status of drugs continues today, as is the case with
marijuana. Debate continues about the therapeutic properties of marijuana and its legal
status, as well as its potential as a source of revenue. There is still the concern that even if
a drug is legal (e.g., alcohol is a legal drug), it isn’t necessarily safe.
Numerous health problems (both physical and psychological) and social problems are
associated with illegal drug use. For example, overdose and death can occur because users
do not know the purity, quality, or strength of the drugs they are taking. People can
become addicted to illegal drugs, as there is generally no counselling regarding their use.
As with legal drugs, illegal drugs may have side effects that could be dangerous or life-
threatening. In addition, some diseases can be contracted by activities associated with
illegal drug use, including sharing needles, which can cause people to contract the human
immunodeficiency virus (HIV), hepatitis, and other infections. Obtaining illegal drugs
requires associating with “drug dealers” and the illicit drug environment, which can
create its own problems. For example, users may become involved in the legal system if
they find themselves charged with drug possession or trafficking.
Illegal drugs are often classified based on the common effects they may have on the mind
or on the body. The Addictions Foundation of Manitoba uses the following drug
classifications and definitions:
Depressants (e.g., alcohol, opiates, heroin, morphine) slow down the heart rate and
cause body temperature and blood pressure to drop.
Stimulants (e.g., cocaine, crystal meth) speed up the heart rate and cause body
temperature and blood pressure to rise.
Hallucinogens (e.g., acid, magic mushrooms, peyote) have some depressant qualities
and some stimulant qualities. These drugs may cause people to hear or see things that
are not really there.
Cannabis (e.g., marijuana, hashish [hash], hash oil). See Basic Fact Sheet on Marijuana in
the following reference.
_____________________________________________________________________________
REFERENCE
Fact sheets on alcohol and other drugs are available on the following website:
Addictions Foundation of Manitoba (AFM). “The Basics Series on Alcohol and Other Drug
Information.” Learn More: Alcohol and Other Drugs. 2005.
<www.afm.mb.ca/Learn%20More/alcohol_drugs.htm#factsheets>.
________________________________________________________________________________
Assessment Did You Know?
Have students form small groups for a Jigsaw

discussion (see Appendix E) of fact sheets on alcohol NOTE TO TEACHER
and other drugs, provided by AFM as part of the
When discussing the different drug
“Basics Series on Alcohol and Other Drug classifications and information
Information.” Provide each small group with a about the different drugs, it is very
different fact sheet to discuss the key points. Each important to use words such as
group then becomes the expert group on a given topic. “may,” “might,” and “can,” as there
After a set time, students form new groups, with a are no absolutes when it comes to
person from each of the expert groups moving to a using substances.
new group and sharing the information just learned.
Students could also create a Did You Know? poster or advertisement to convince
others not to use or abuse drugs.
________________________________________________________________________________
Assessment You Be the Judge
To help students learn how to describe the benefits and risks of OTC or prescription
drug medications, have them complete RM 2–SU, following the instructions provided.
This learning activity promotes critical and creative thinking, as well as awareness of
concepts related to consumerism and drug marketing and education.
Refer to RM 2–SU: You Be the Judge.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 1–SU: How to Read a Prescription Drug Label
Sample of Prescription Drug Label
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 1–SU: How to Read a Prescription Drug Label (Continued)
Using the sample label provided, answer the following questions to determine what
important information must be included on a prescription drug label.
What is the name of the pharmacy?
What is the address of the pharmacy?
What is the store number of the pharmacy?
What is the phone number of the pharmacy?
What is the prescription number?
What is the physician’s name?
What is the date that the prescription was filled?
What is the name of the person for whom the

drug is prescribed?
(Prescription drugs should be used only by the
person for whom the drugs were prescribed.)
What is the brand name of this drug?

(Various manufacturers or companies may make
the same generic drug but will call it by their
own brand or trade name.)
What is the name of the medication or the main

ingredient?
What is the strength of the medication?
What do the letters APX mean?
What does the number listed below the company

code represent?
How much is in the package?
What are the directions or instructions for taking the

medication?
Are there any cautions or warnings on the label?
Do prescription drug labels often include any

additional information that is not on this one?
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 1–SU: How to Read a Prescription Drug Label (Continued)
(Answer Key)
What is the name of the pharmacy? Manitoba Pharmacy
What is the address of the pharmacy? 204 Manitoba Street, Winnipeg MB M2B 2Y2
Canada
What is the store number of the pharmacy? Store: #0001
What is the phone number of the pharmacy? Phone: 204-204-2004
What is the prescription number? Rx: #2042042
What is the physician’s name? Dr. Manitoba
What is the date that the prescription was filled? October 14, 2007
What is the name of the person for whom the Toba Man
drug is prescribed?
(Prescription drugs should be used only by the
person for whom the drugs were prescribed.)
What is the brand name of this drug? APO–Amoxi
(Various manufacturers or companies may make
the same generic drug but will call it by their
own brand or trade name.)
What is the name of the medication or the main Amoxicillin is the generic name for the drug.
ingredient?
What is the strength of the medication? 500 mg
What do the letters APX mean? The letters indicate the

manufacturer’s/company’s code.
What does the number listed below the company This number indicates the drug identification
code represent? number (DIN).
How much is in the package? 30 cap (capsules)
What are the directions or instructions for taking the Take 1 capsule three times daily until finished
medication? (antibiotic).
Are there any cautions or warnings on the label? Important: Take this medication for the
prescribed duration.
Keep out of reach of children.
Do prescription drug labels often include any Expiry date, refill information, and additional
additional information that is not on this one? information, on stickers, such as Take with
food.
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 2–SU: You Be the Judge*
Objectives
Students will
describe the benefits and risks of OTC or prescription medications
demonstrate critical thinking skills
demonstrate advocacy skills for health education
Procedure
This is a critical-thinking and problem-solving learning activity that includes

concepts related to consumerism and drug education. It also enables students to
advocate for a particular position related to OTC or prescription medications.
Have students work in small groups (e.g., four).
Assign each group member a task: facilitator, reader, recorder, and reporter.
Use one of the identified websites to gather information regarding the benefits and
risks associated with specific OTC or prescription medications. Other drugs can
also be used (e.g., crack, crystal meth)
Addictions Foundation of Manitoba. <www.afm.mb.ca/>.
Drug Infonet. <www.druginfonet.com/>.
Medline Plus. Drugs, Supplements, and Herbal Information.
<www.nlm.nih.gov/medlineplus/druginformation.html>.
RxList Inc.: The Internet Drug Index. <www.rxlist.com/script/main/hp.asp>.
Create a new name for a drug or scramble the name of the drug in question.
Example: Claritin = trial inc.
Consider using an anagram generator, such as the following, to help create new
names:
Wordsmith.org. Internet Anagram Server. <www.wordsmith.org/anagram/>.
It is important to create a new name so that students do not come to the task with
preconceived ideas about the benefits and/or risks of the substance selected.
Continued
__________
Source: Ludwig, Michael. “Thinking Critically about Over-the-counter and Prescription Drugs.” American Journal of
Health Education 36.2 (Mar./Apr.): 124–26. Adapted with permission. Permission is granted by the American
Association for Health Education/American Alliance for Health, Physical Education, Recreation and Dance which owns
and publishes the American Journal of Health Education.
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 2–SU: You Be the Judge (Continued)
Provide groups with questions such as those suggested below (or similar ones) and
instruct students to answer them collaboratively.
Do the benefits of this drug outweigh the risks?
What else would you like to know about this drug to make an informed decision
about it?
If approved, what should the warning label for this drug emphasize?
Are there other ways to achieve the benefits without using the substance?
Have the groups share their insights with the class.
Have students create a public service announcement regarding the substance under
review. Give them the information provided on the following page.
You Be the Judge Scenario
You have been selected to serve on Health Canada’s Health Products and Food Branch
(HPFB), the drug approval committee for Canada. The manufacturer seeks to market
_________________ as a new OTC/prescription medication in three different ways:
in combination with pain relief medications (analgesics)
as a learning aid marketed under the trade name ___________________
as a social stimulant under the trade name Party On!
The manufacturer claims the drug is totally safe and would be a welcome addition to the
OTC market. In a drug trial that included over 1 million doses, there were no deaths and
very few adverse reactions. The drug will be marketed only to adults and is not
recommended for use by children. You have received the following information from a
drug manufacturer.
EXAMPLE
Drug Name
SCAD CALL TEA ICILY ICY
(Acetylsalicylic acid – Aspirin)
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 2–SU: You Be the Judge (Continued)
Benefits
The drug is used to
relieve the symptoms of rheumatoid arthritis
reduce fever and relieve mild to moderate pain from headaches, menstrual cramps,
arthritis, colds, toothaches, and muscle aches
prevent heart attacks in people who have had a heart attack in the past or who have
angina (chest pain that occurs when the heart does not get enough oxygen)
reduce the risk of death in people who experience, or have recently experienced, a
heart attack
prevent ischemic strokes (strokes that occur when a blood clot blocks the flow of blood to
the brain) or mini-strokes (strokes that occur when the flow of blood to the brain is
blocked for a short time) in people who have had this type of stroke or mini-stroke in
the past
Risks
Minor side effects include
diarrhea
nausea, vomiting
reduced amount of urine passed
stomach gas, heartburn
Serious side effects include

black, tarry stools
confusion
difficulty breathing, wheezing
dizziness, drowsiness
ringing in the ears
seizures (convulsions)
skin rash
stomach pain
unusual bleeding or bruising, red or purple spots on the skin
vomiting blood, or what looks like coffee grounds
Levels ranging from 150 mg/kg to 300 mg/kg can be dangerous, depending on the
person’s weight.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Introduction
In this lesson students explore the stages of substance
use from non-involvement to dependent involvement. NOTE TO TEACHER
Students learn about the risks and consequences of
Substance use and abuse is
substance use and addictive behaviour. Helping
regarded as potentially sensitive
students to recognize the stages or levels of content. All aspects of
involvement in substance use, and addressing the facts instruction are to be treated
and feelings associated with substance use, may with a high degree of sensitivity.
promote behaviour change or healthy decision making.
________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________
Key Understandings
Drug addiction is a complex issue.
The stages or levels of involvement in substance use range from non-involvement to
dependent involvement.
The physical signs of drug abuse or addiction can vary, depending on the person and
the drug being abused.
________________________________________________________________________________
Essential Questions
What are the stages or levels of involvement in substance use?
How do you know when someone has a problem with substance use?
What are the signs of a dependency and an addiction? What are the similarities and
differences?
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Preventing Addiction
The Addictions Foundation of Manitoba (AFM) defines addiction as “an unhealthy

relationship between a person and a mood-altering substance, experience, event or
activity, which contributes to life problems and their reoccurrence” (A Biopsychosocial
Model of Addiction 2). Preventing addiction and ensuring that students have the
current information for making healthy decisions are primary goals in all drug
education programs.
Teenagers often think they are invincible and that risk-taking behaviours will not harm
them. Some young people cannot see where the long-term effects of experimentation with
substances may lead. They think they will not become harmfully involved by using
substances just for fun or just one time.
REFERENCE
Addictions Foundation of Manitoba. A Biopsychosocial Model of Addiction. Winnipeg,
MB: Addictions Foundation of Manitoba, June 2000. Available online at
<www.afm.mb.ca/pdf/BPS-FINAL.pdf>
________________________________________________________________________________
From Experimenting to Dependency in 43 Seconds
Designed to activate student thinking, this experiential learning activity provides an

opportunity for students to learn information about alcohol and to begin to explore their
feelings about its effects in a safe environment. To illustrate the potentially devastating
path that drug users can take, have students complete RM 3–SU.
Refer to RM 3–SU: From Experimenting to Dependency in 43 Seconds for the

background information and instructions on this suggested instructional strategy.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Levels of Involvement (LOI) Framework
Substance use and abuse is a complex phenomenon that includes diverse drugs, different
levels of involvement, and various causes. In 1997, AFM developed a Levels of Involvement
Framework to describe the various levels of involvement in gambling, alcohol, or other
drugs. The AFM framework emphasizes the importance of biological, psychological, and
sociological factors in determining an individual’s level of involvement with substances or
gambling. Other types of models or continua may be available to help students identify
usage patterns, but for the purpose of this curriculum, the discussion to follow focuses on
the AFM framework.
The levels of involvement identified in the AFM framework range from no involvement to
dependent involvement or addiction, as outlined in the following chart.
Levels of Involvement in Substance Use*

Level/Stage of Definition of Behaviours/
Involvement Consequences of Involvement
Non-involvement Never used alcohol or other drugs
(Non-use) Have chosen a non-using lifestyle following some involvement in the past
Irregular Random or infrequent (including experimental) use of alcohol or other drugs
Involvement Little or no evidence of any problems caused by use
Regular Using alcohol or other drugs regularly, with some pattern (e.g., daily, weekly,
Involvement monthly)
Some minor or isolated problems may be caused by use
Actively seeking involvement
Harmful Using alcohol or other drugs causes problems in one or more areas of life
Involvement
Dependent Despite use of alcohol or other drugs causing problems in life areas, use is
Involvement continued, plus
— there are failed attempts to cut down/quit
— a lot of time is spent using or thinking about using
— strong urges to use are experienced
— there are uncomfortable feelings when abstaining
— more of the substance is needed to get the same high
Transitional Choosing to quit use of alcohol and other drugs after harmful or dependent
Abstinence involvement and struggling with how this feels
Stabilized Abstaining from alcohol and other drugs after harmful or dependent involvement
Abstinence/Recovery and feeling confident and comfortable with this
__________
Source: Addictions Foundation of Manitoba. Levels of Involvement Framework. Winnipeg, MB: Addictions Foundation of Manitoba,
1998. Available online at <www.afm.mb.ca/Learn%20More/Levels%20Invol.pdf>. Adapted with permission.
_____________________________________________________________________________
REFERENCE
Addictions Foundation of Manitoba. Levels of Involvement Framework. Winnipeg, MB:
Addictions Foundation of Manitoba, 1998. Available online at
<www.afm.mb.ca/Learn%20More/Levels%20Invol.pdf>.
________________________________________________________________________________
Levels of Involvement in Substance Use
Recognizing the levels or stages of involvement in alcohol and other drugs, as outlined
in the AFM framework, and learning about the facts (consequences, behaviours, and
feelings) associated with the levels should help students gain a better understanding of
how to make healthy decisions or how to provide help for self or others.
The levels of involvement in substance use and the behaviours/characteristics associated with
each level are identified on separate cards in RM 4–SU. Cut up the cards and provide groups
of students with their own “deck“ of cards. Have students use the Think and Link strategy
(see Appendix E) to match the behaviours/characteristics to the applicable levels of
involvement. Have them compare their results to the answer key provided.
As an extension of this learning activity, students could write case scenarios representing
the various levels of involvement in substance use.
Refer to RM 4–SU: Levels of Involvement in Substance Use.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 3–SU: From Experimenting to Dependency in 43 Seconds*
Teaching High School Students about the Progression of Alcoholism

Simply giving young people the facts about substance use and abuse is not a very
effective prevention tool by itself. It has been shown that long-lasting behaviour change is
more related to internalizing concepts than just to the simple intake of facts. Education
guidelines generally reinforce the fact that when students have the opportunity to
internalize or personalize learning—to realize how it can affect their lives—they are more
likely to show changes in behaviour.
To promote behaviour change, one needs to blend both facts and feelings into the
decision-making process. Young people need opportunities to practise their decision-
making skills, beginning with exploring their feelings in a safe environment, so they can
then apply these skills in more risky situations.
Young people readily understand the fact that using and abusing alcohol and other drugs
can lead to serious health and emotional problems. Unfortunately, their belief in their own
invincibility convinces them that these problems will never happen to them.
In the following experiential learning activity, which is designed to engage students in a
discussion about alcohol, students learn information about alcohol and begin to explore
their feelings about its effects in a safe environment. Alcohol was chosen as the medium
because of the common adolescent misperception that alcohol is not a very harmful
substance. Exploring feelings is important in the decision-making process, and this
learning activity is a beginning step toward that goal. The affective impact of this learning
activity is what makes it a powerful learning experience.
Learning Activity
Give each student one packet of 12 slips of paper. A letter-size sheet of paper folded in
thirds like a business letter, then folded in half, and then folded in half again will produce
12 equal slips of paper. Assure students that they are the only ones who will see their slips
of paper. Then give the following instructions:
On three slips of paper write the names of three separate people who are very dear to
you.
On three slips of paper write three things or possessions that you regard as special.
On three slips of paper write three different activities in which you enjoy participating.
On three slips of paper write three personal attributes of which you are proud.
Continued
__________
Source: Kolaya, Linda, and Barb Grimes-Smith. “From Experimenting to Dependency in 43 Seconds: Teaching Junior
High and High School Students about the Progression of Alcoholism.” Journal of Health Education 30.3 (May/June
1999): 185, 189. Adapted with permission. Permission is granted by the American Association for Health
Education/American Alliance for Health, Physical Education, Recreation and Dance which owns and publishes the
American Journal of Health Education.
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 3–SU: From Experimenting to Dependency in 43 Seconds (Continued)
Instruct students to hold the slips of paper in their hands like playing cards. Tell them
that you want to walk them through a few different scenarios related to the papers they
just filled out. Read the scenarios below to the class, and follow the instructions provided
in parentheses.
Scenarios
You have been invited to a party. You came home late, after curfew, smelling of
alcohol. Your parents are waiting up for you. You’re in big trouble! One of your
possessions is taken away as punishment. You must choose which one. (Give
participants 15 seconds to choose one possession and tear up the slip of paper.)
After a Friday night football game you and a friend go to a mutual friend’s house. His or her
parents aren’t at home and there is beer available. You decided to drink quite a bit. The
next morning you have a hangover and don’t feel well and are not able to participate in
or enjoy one of your favourite activities. Tear up one activity and one attribute. (Give
participants 10 seconds to choose and tear up the slips of paper.)
Drinking has become one of your favourite pastimes. You are now looking forward to
drinking every weekend. You feel you can handle it—it’s not a problem. Tear up one
person’s name and one attribute. (Give participants 8 seconds to do this.)
You now find yourself drinking daily, with serious consequences: suspension from
school, stealing money, fighting with parents. Tear up one person’s name and one
attribute. (Give participants 5 seconds to choose.)
After a weekend of partying, on your way home you are picked up for driving under the
influence (DUI) of alcohol. Tear up one possession and one activity. (Give
participants 5 seconds to choose. Then have them turn over their last three slips of
paper.)
You are experiencing total loss of control over your use of alcohol. Without looking or
discussing, remove and tear up two slips of paper from someone sitting near you.
You will end up with only one slip of paper.
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 3–SU: From Experimenting to Dependency in 43 Seconds (Continued)
Processing the Learning Activity
Ask students the following questions:

How did you feel as this activity progressed?
How did you feel as the speed and tempo of the activity increased?
What were the easiest items to give up? What were the most difficult items to give up?
What was your reaction to having the last two slips of paper taken from you?
How do you feel about the one item you have left?
Explain to students that as they went through the progression activity, they experienced
the loss of control, just as though they were experiencing the stages of alcoholism. Talk
about the stages of progression: experimentation, regular use, daily preoccupation, and
dependency.
Talk about why young people progress through this addiction process faster than adults
do. Two reasons are
body physiology—organs are still maturing even after reaching full body growth
patterns of use—binge drinking, multiple drug use
Ask students what could be done to regain some of the losses. Suggestions might include
the following:
Talk to someone (e.g., counsellor, school nurse, trusted adult).
Get help (e.g., from Alcoholics Anonymous, community agency, treatment facility).
Conclusion
Approaching the subject of substance use and abuse with young people can be very tricky.
Many young people already know a lot about alcohol and its effects, but they may not
understand why they are much more vulnerable than adults are to the psychological and
physical risks associated with alcohol use. This learning activity was designed to present
facts while letting young people explore their feelings in a safe environment, and to help
them understand how alcohol can affect their lives.
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 4–SU: Levels of Involvement in Substance Use*
Levels/Stages of Involvement
Non- Irregular Regular Harmful Dependent Transitional Stabilized
Involvement Involvement Involvement Involvement Involvement Abstinence Abstinence/
(Non-Use) Recovery
Behaviours/Consequences
Never used Have chosen Random or Little or no Using alcohol Some minor Actively
alcohol or a non-using infrequent evidence of or other or isolated seeking
other drugs lifestyle (including any problems drugs problems may involvement
following experimental) caused by regularly, be caused by
some use of alcohol use with some use
involvement or other pattern (e.g.,
in the past drugs daily, weekly,
monthly)
Using alcohol Despite use There are A lot of time Strong urges There are More of the
or other of alcohol or failed is spent using to use are uncomfortable substance is
drugs causes other drugs attempts to or thinking experienced feelings when needed to get
problems in causing cut down/quit about using abstaining the same
one or more problems in high
areas of life life areas, use
is continued
Choosing to Abstaining
quit use of from alcohol Continued
alcohol and and other
other drugs drugs after
after harmful harmful or
or dependent dependent
__________
involvement involvement
and and feeling Source: Addictions Foundation of Manitoba. Levels of Involvement Framework.
Winnipeg, MB: Addictions Foundation of Manitoba, 1998. Available online at
struggling confident and <www.afm.mb.ca/Learn%20More/Levels%20Invol.pdf>. Adapted with permission.
with how this comfortable
feels with this
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 4–SU: Levels of Involvement in Substance Use (Continued)
(Answer Key)*
Levels of Involvement in Substance Use

Level/Stage of Definition of Behaviours/
Involvement Consequences of Involvement
Non-involvement Never used alcohol or other drugs
(Non-use) Have chosen a non-using lifestyle following some involvement in the past
Irregular Random or infrequent (including experimental) use of alcohol or other drugs
Involvement Little or no evidence of any problems caused by use
Regular Using alcohol or other drugs regularly, with some pattern (e.g., daily, weekly,
Involvement monthly)
Some minor or isolated problems may be caused by use
Actively seeking involvement
Harmful Using alcohol or other drugs causes problems in one or more areas of life
Involvement
Dependent Despite use of alcohol or other drugs causing problems in life areas, use is
Involvement continued, plus
— there are failed attempts to cut down/quit
— a lot of time is spent using or thinking about using
— strong urges to use are experienced
— there are uncomfortable feelings when abstaining
— more of the substance is needed to get the same high
Transitional Choosing to quit use of alcohol and other drugs after harmful or dependent
Abstinence involvement and struggling with how this feels
Stabilized Abstaining from alcohol and other drugs after harmful or dependent
Abstinence/Recovery involvement and feeling confident and comfortable with this
__________
Source: Addictions Foundation of Manitoba. Levels of Involvement Framework. Winnipeg, MB: Addictions Foundation of Manitoba,
1998. Available online at <www.afm.mb.ca/Learn%20More/Levels%20Invol.pdf>. Adapted with permission.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Introduction
This lesson focuses on the reasons for substance use and
abuse among adolescents. It addresses the signs or NOTE TO TEACHER
behaviours to look for when suspecting substance use, Substance use and abuse is
and the potential risks and consequences of substance regarded as potentially sensitive
use and abuse. Students also explore situations and content. All aspects of
behaviours that may make them more resistant to the instruction are to be treated
with a high degree of sensitivity.
risks of becoming involved in substance misuse.
AFM’s educational resources emphasize that, regardless of what drug is being used or
abused, “a drug is a drug is a drug,” and alcohol is a drug. No specific drug is “safer” for
adolescents to use than another. All drugs are potentially hazardous for youth. It is
important to examine the risks of harmful use of all substances, whether they are legal or
illegal.
According to the Canadian Centre on Substance Abuse, “alcohol is by far the most
common substance used by youth and binge drinking is common. Cannabis is the second
most common substance—and the first among illicit drugs—used by Canadian youth.
Cannabis use is now more common than cigarette smoking among students” (7). Teachers
are encouraged to address these issues as part of the lesson.
REFERENCES
Addictions Foundation of Manitoba. “Youth.” Services.
<www.afm.mb.ca/Services/youth.htm>.
The Canadian Centre on Substance Abuse (CCSA). Substance Abuse in Canada: Youth in
Focus. Ottawa, ON: CCSA, September 2007. Available online at
<www.ccsa.ca/CCSA/EN/Research/Substance_Abuse_in_Canada/SubstanceAbuseinCa
nada.htm>.
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Key Understandings
Adolescents may use substances for different reasons.

Risk and protective factors influence whether an adolescent becomes involved in or
avoids harmful use and abuse of substances.
There are consequences to using any kind of drug. No specific drug is “safer” for
adolescents to use than another.
Abstinence and harm reduction are both important messages in substance prevention
programs.
________________________________________________________________________________
Essential Questions
What are some of the reasons people use drugs?
What are the risk factors and protective factors associated with someone becoming
involved in or avoiding harmful use and abuse of substances?
How can a decision-making model be used to determine the risks and consequences
related to different case scenarios involving substance use and/or abuse?
________________________________________________________________________________
Why Young People Use Substances
Some teenagers begin to use alcohol and other drugs for a variety of reasons, and some
are more at risk than others of becoming frequent users or abusers of substances. The
message to students should always be that no specific drug is “safer” for adolescents to
use than another. Abstinence should always be the goal; however, to reduce harm to self
or others, there may be a need to provide information or programming that targets risky
patterns of drug use.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Why Do Teenagers Use Alcohol or Other Drugs?
Post each of the following discussion questions on separate flipchart-size sheets of paper.
SAMPLE DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

Why do you think some adolescents choose to use alcohol or other drugs?
Why do some students choose not to use alcohol or other drugs?
Why might some students choose to experiment with alcohol or other drugs?
Why might some students go beyond experimentation?
What are some positive aspects of drug use?
What are some negative aspects of drug use?
If people know there are negative health effects, why do they continue to use and abuse
substances?
Have students write down on sticky notes their responses to the questions and put them
on the corresponding posters. Assign groups of students to each question (noted on the
individual posters), and have them check for duplication and appropriateness of
responses and provide the class with a summary.
Students may suggest a variety of reasons why young people choose to use substances.
For example, young people may want to use alcohol or other drugs to
experiment or satisfy curiosity
celebrate
oppose authority
experience pleasurable effects
feel a sense of belonging or social acceptance and avoid rejection
boost confidence and/or loss of inhibitions
relieve pain
relieve or cope with emotional problems (e.g., anger, stress, anxiety, boredom,
depression)
rebel against or express alienation from mainstream society
follow someone’s example
emulate media portrayals (e.g., drugs may be glamorized and normalized)
take advantage of ease of availability
_____________________________________________________________________________
REFERENCES
For background information and current statistics on alcohol and other drug involvement
to support discussions, refer to the following organizations and resources:
Addictions Foundation of Manitoba. Services. <www.afm.mb.ca/Services/youth.htm>.
Canadian Centre on Substance Abuse (CCSA). <www.ccsa.ca/ccsa/>.
Manitoba Addictions Awareness Week (MAAW) Committee. “High on Life: Everybody Wins!”
Manitoba Addictions Awareness Week: Resource Kit . Winnipeg, MB: MAAW Committee,
October 2007. Published annually. The kit is available online at
<www.afm.mb.ca/maaw/Resource_Kit/resource_kit.html>.
________________________________________________________________________________
Risk and Protective Factors
When trying to understand why adolescents do or don’t become involved in substance

use, it is helpful to be knowledgeable of the factors that may present risks for or protection
from the harmful use and abuse of substances. The Alberta Alcohol and Drug Abuse
Commission, in its report entitled An Overview of Risk and Protective Factors: The Alberta
Youth Experience Survey 2002 (George, Dyer, and Leven), outlines risk and protective
factors related to substance misuse under the following five domains or categories:
individual/personality, family, peers, school, and community/environmental.
It is impossible to predict categorically the development of substance misuse. In general,

however, research suggests that individuals who experience multiple risk factors and
consequently few protective factors are at greater risk of substance misuse than are
those who experience few risk factors.
REFERENCE
George, Sheena, Art Dyer, and Phyllis Leven. An Overview of Risk and Protective Factors:
The Alberta Youth Experience Survey 2002. Edmonton, AB: Alberta Alcohol and Drug
Abuse Commission (AADAC), 2003. Available online at
<www.aadac.com/documents/TAYES_overview.pdf>. See “Chapter Two: Risk Factors”
and “Chapter Three: Protective Factors.”
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Risk and Protective Factors Related to Substance Misuse
The chart provided in RM 5–SU illustrates factors that may predict risk of and protection
from initial drug misuse and its subsequent escalation. Have students suggest risk factors
and protective (resilience) factors in the blank columns of the chart provided. Discuss the
suggestions as a class, and have students continue to fill in their own charts with the
suggestions provided by classmates. Finally, add any factors that are missing from the
student suggestions to complete the chart.
Refer to RM 5–SU: Risk and Protective Factors Related to Substance Misuse.
________________________________________________________________________________
Risk Perception
Provide students with an opportunity to assess

their own risk perception for specific behaviours CLASSROOM USE OF RISK
and to learn that their actions can have both CONTINUA*
short- and long-term consequences. After Classroom use of risk continua has
discussing the concept of risk related to health many benefits. For example, use of risk
topics, have students examine risk perception continua can
and risk behaviour by viewing specific reinforce content and knowledge of
behaviours or scenarios on a risk continuum material
ranging from not at all risky to very risky, as be used to assess student learning (i.e.,
described in RM 6–SU. when students create their own
continua)
create class discussion on variability in
Refer to RM 6–SU: Techniques for risk perceptions
Challenging Individual Risk Perception. aid students in thinking about concepts
of risk as related to their own
behaviours and the behaviours of
others
help students brainstorm issues
related to risk for health content
areas
__________
Source: Gast, Julie, and Sarah Hodson. “Teaching Techniques for Challenging Individual Risk Perception.” Journal of
Health Education 31.4 (July/Aug. 2000): 244–46. Adapted with permission. Permission is granted by the American
_____________________________________________________________________________
Health Risks and Consequences of Substance Abuse
All the decisions we make have consequences, both positive and negative. In some cases
the risks or consequences are greater than in others. The DECIDE Model, which
students have used in previous grades, promotes looking at the pros and cons of
different choices and solutions and basing decisions on current and relevant health
information and family/cultural values.
The process of using the DECIDE Model to make decisions involves six steps:
Define the topic or problem/issue.
Explore the alternatives or options. (What are your choices?)
Check alternatives. (List pros and cons for each alternative/option.)
Identify possible solutions. (Pick the best choices.)
Decide and take action. (Make the best choice.)
Evaluate and revise.
REFERENCE
For more information on consequences or harmful effects of drugs, refer to the following
website:
Health Canada. “What Are the Harmful Consequences of Drug Use?” Straight Facts about
Drugs and Drug Abuse. Ottawa, ON: Minister of Public Works and Government Services
Canada, 2000. Available online at <www.hc-sc.gc.ca/hl-vs/pubs/adp-apd/straight_facts-
faits_mefaits/index_e.html>.
________________________________________________________________________________
Assessment Consequences
Encourage students to think about different consequences related to drinking and driving
by having them participate in the role-play scenario presented in RM 7–SU. The scenario
is intended to allow students to “experience” the consequences of one person’s decision
to drink and drive, to identify the many decisions that lead to the “fatal” outcome, and to
recognize how changing one decision could lead to a different consequence.
_____________________________________________________________________________
When posing questions at the end of the role play, ask students to present their comments
using the steps of the DECIDE Model, where applicable. Using the DECIDE Model can
challenge students to think about the consequences or alternatives related to the risk
behaviour of drinking and driving (by listing pros and cons for each alternative/option in
step “C”). It can help them to “see” the alternatives or consequences of the decision and to
recognize other options and their more favourable outcomes.
Refer to RM 7–SU: Consequences.
REFERENCE
For a blackline master (BLM) of the DECIDE Model, refer to BLM G–5 DECIDE Model in
the following curriculum document:
Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth. Senior 1 and Senior 2 Physical
Education/Health Education: A Foundation for Implementation. Winnipeg, MB:
Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth, 2004. BLM G–5: DECIDE Model is available
online at <www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/cur/physhlth/foundation_s1-2/blms-rms/>.
________________________________________________________________________________
Unintended Consequences
The death of Elvis Presley in 1977 at the age of 42 illustrates the harmful consequences of
prescription drug use. Have students consider the risks and consequences of drug
combinations by problem-solving a case study based on Elvis Presley, as presented in
RM 8–SU. Through this problem-solving activity, students can develop inferential skills
and draw logical conclusions regarding drug use and abuse.
Refer to RM 8–SU: Unintended Consequences.
________________________________________________________________________________

Sam’s Story NOTE TO TEACHER
Although Sam’s Story focuses on
Have students read and analyze Sam’s Story, a teen’s crystal meth, teachers are
story of addiction and escape provided in RM 9–SU, reminded to balance this discussion
and think about the serious consequences of the with information on the drugs that
choices or decisions that were made. are causing the most problems for
youth: alcohol and marijuana.
After students have read Sam’s Story, ask them to Review all Resource Masters and/or
respond to the following questions: case scenarios before using them
with students to check for
suitability, and be prepared for the
discussions that may occur.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Why do you think Sam started using substances?
Why do you think Sam’s drug use escalated?
What were the indications that Sam was having trouble with drugs?
Why did it take so long for Sam to get help?
Why do you think Sam was relapsing?
Were there other underlying reasons for Sam’s drug use?
What did Stephanie and Mike to do help Sam?
Do you think Sam’s home life was normal? Why or why not?
What realizations did Sam come to in the end?
What do you think Sam meant by the following statement?
“Adulthood means I’ve got to be responsible now, do stuff for me my parents can’t.”
Refer to RM 9–SU: Sam’s Story.
REFERENCE
Sam’s Story is available on the following website:
Heredia, Christopher. “Sam’s Story: Walnut Creek Teen’s Road from Meth.” San Francisco
Chronicle 6 May 2003: A–1. Available on the SFGate.com website at
<www.sfgate.com/cgi-bin/article.cgi?file=/c/a/2003/05/06/MN202176.DTL>.
________________________________________________________________________________

Assessment Addictions Awareness
Every year, the Manitoba Addictions Awareness Week (MAAW) Committee puts together
a resource kit to help individuals, schools, workplaces, and communities raise awareness
of, and celebrate healthy choices about, substance use and misuse, gambling, and related
issues. In addition to providing current information, the MAAW kit includes school and
community learning activity and resource suggestions that teachers can use.
REFERENCES
For learning activity and resource suggestions, refer to the MAAW website:
Manitoba Addictions Awareness Week (MAAW). <www.afm.mb.ca/maaw/>.
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 5–SU: Risk and Protective Factors Related to Substance Misuse
Domains and Factors of Risk and Protection

Domain Risk Factors Protective Factors
Individual/
Personality
Family
Peers
School
Community/
Environmental
Continue
d
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 5–SU: Risk and Protective Factors Related to Substance Misuse
(Continued) (Answer Key)
Domains and Factors of Risk and Protection*

Domain Risk Factors Protective Factors
Individual/ physical trauma strong personal social skills/esteem
Personality temperament resilience
early aggressive behaviour
early initiation of substance use
past trauma or abuse
lack of commitment to societal values
or norms
poor self-concept
Family living arrangements parental monitoring and supervision

poor parental monitoring and supervision emotional support
poor attachments presentation of clear, pro-social
poor communication about rules and normative expectations
expectations positive bonding
family conflict
favourable attitudes toward teen alcohol,
other drug use, and gambling
parental alcoholism and drug use
Peers favourable peer attitudes toward drugs affiliation of close friends who are not
and gambling drug users
peer substance use positive bonding
peer pressure/rejection
School academic failure participation in extracurricular activities

lack of commitment to school social support networks
high social and academic expectations
positive bonding
Community/ characteristics of the community community sponsored activities

Environmental availability of substances activities based on religion
community laws/norms favourable to positive bonding
drug use and gambling
__________
Source: George, Sheena, Art Dyer, and Phyllis Leven. An Overview of Risk and Protective Factors: The Alberta Youth
Experience Survey 2002. Edmonton, AB: Alberta Alcohol and Drug Abuse Commission (AADAC), 2003. 18, 22–23.
<www.aadac.com/documents/TAYES_overview.pdf>. Used with permission of the Alberta Alcohol and Drug Abuse Commission
(www.aadac.com) 2008.
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 6–SU: Techniques for Challenging Individual Risk Perception*
The purpose of this learning strategy is to allow students to assess their own risk
perception for specific behaviours and to learn that their actions can have both short- and
long-term consequences.
Risk Continua
Risk continua can be used for a variety of content areas in the classroom. For this learning
experience, students can use the risk continuum to discuss risks associated with alcohol
use, tobacco use, prescription drug use, and illegal drug use, consumer health, violence,
and so on (see Content Areas and Risk Continuum).
Content Areas and Risk Continuum

Alcohol use Abstainer Binge drinking
Tobacco use Abstainer Frequent smoker
Prescription drug use Abstainer Abuser/addict
Illegal drug use Abstainer Addict/criminal
Violence Conflict resolution Abusive behaviour
Consumer health Listening to a health educator TV talk show
Types of Risk
Before introducing the risk continuum, discuss the concepts of relative risk and
risk taking.
Ask students to think of examples of helpful risks and harmful risks. Write all the
helpful risks on one side of the whiteboard and all the risks viewed as potentially
harmful on the other side of the whiteboard (see Types of Risk). This can help students
see that there are always risks in life, and that while some risks are health promoting,
others are health prohibiting.
At this time, discuss whether risk can vary, depending on whether the behaviour
occurs only once or whether it is habitual. For example, does binge drinking lead to
the negative health consequences associated with long-term bingeing? Is smoking
occasionally a risk factor for respiratory problems?
Continued
__________
Source: Gast, Julie, and Sarah Hodson. “Teaching Techniques for Challenging Individual Risk Perception.” Journal of
Health Education 31.4 (July/Aug. 2000): 244–46. Adapted with permission. Permission is granted by the American
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 6–SU: Techniques for Challenging Individual Risk Perception
(Continued)
Types of Risk
Helpful Risks Harmful Risks
Starting a relationship Trying drugs
Learning to ski Smoking cigarettes
Starting a new job Selling drugs
Participating in class Drinking and driving
Beginning to exercise Unhealthy relationships
Declining to participate in a harmful risk Becoming part of a questionable peer group
Next, ask students to assess the various types of consequences for risk taking. These
include physical risks, social risks, emotional risks, and legal risks (see Risks
Associated with Drinking Alcohol). Also tell students that health-related behaviours
can have both short- and long-term consequences. With drug use, for example, the
physical risks may include increased anxiety, sleepiness, abnormal vital signs, and
irritability, which would be classified as long-term physical risks. Social risks may
include social alienation and loss of friends. Emotional risks may include fighting with
parents or friends about drug use. Legal risks may include problems associated with
theft or trafficking.
Risks Associated with Drinking Alcohol

Physical risk Cirrhosis Long-term risk
Social risk Impaired judgement Short-term risk
Emotional risk Increased depression/ violence Short- or long-term risk
Legal risk Driving while intoxicated Short- or long-term risk
Risk Perception
After discussing the concept of risk related to health topics, have students examine risk
perception and risk behaviour by viewing specific behaviours or scenarios on a risk
continuum ranging from not at all risky to very risky.
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 6–SU: Techniques for Challenging Individual Risk
Perception (Continued)
Divide the class into two or three groups, depending on class size. Give each group a set
of identical index cards with specific health behaviours written on each card. The
behaviours should vary in degree of risk from not at all risky to very risky. Each card
will have a different health behaviour written on it. Provide each student in each
group with a card so that everyone can participate. It is also good to generate
discussion by adding behaviours that may be ambiguous in terms of risk. (For
example, when using a risk continuum on drug use behaviours, one card may read
“drinking while on a date.” Although the example may not be an obvious risk factor, it
typically results in a good discussion of how drinking may impair reasoning ability
related to risky sexual behaviours.) Next, instruct each group of students to form a line
from least risky to most risky behaviour, without allowing the other groups to see
what order they have developed. Finally, have the groups stand across from each
other so that they can easily compare the order of their cards. Discuss the rationale and
any differences in order among the groups.
Have students form groups and supply them with index cards. Provide groups with
health-related topics already addressed in class, and have them find sources of
information for their assigned topics. Ask each group to create its own risk continuum
by writing a source of health information on each blank index card provided. Again,
remind students that they should have sources of information that vary from not risky
at all to very risky. An example of a risky source of information may be television talk
shows or advertisements, whereas a safe source may be a health educator or a health
professional. Ask students to include some controversial or debatable sources of
information, such as family members. When this is completed, have groups present
their risk continua to the class and discuss whether the students agree with the order
of the cards, and explain why or why not.
The benefit of having students create their own cards is that the teacher is able to assess
learning by examining the accuracy of the content and whether risk perception is being
demonstrated accurately. Additionally, students may come up with risk behaviours or
scenarios that the teacher would likely miss. Risk continua also enable the teacher to
correct misperceptions in risk perception, regardless of who creates them.
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 7–SU: Consequences . . .
To Drive or Not to Drive, That Is the Decision*
“Consequences” is a role-play scenario about a “Drunk Person,” his or her friends, a

party, alcohol, and the decision to drive after drinking. The entire class participates,
including the instructor. To minimize student apprehension about participating in the
role-play scenario, the instructor plays the role of the “Drunk Person.”
Materials
six small pieces of paper for each student/participant

one small paper bag or basket
the following signs (computer generated or hand printed on letter-size paper):
one sign: “Drunk Person”
five signs: “Drunk Person’s Friend”
one sign: “Host”
three signs: “Friend’s Sober Ride”
one sign: “Driver of Other Car”
five signs: “Passenger in Other Car”
three signs: “Coma”
two signs: “Dead”
Procedure
Give each student six small pieces of paper (or one large piece and have them tear it into
six pieces). Instruct them to put their name on each piece of paper. Collect one of the six
name papers from each student and put the papers in a bag or basket. Have students
exchange their five remaining name papers with five different people in the class. This
results in each student having five different name papers.
Tell the following story by reading the italicized text to the class. Follow the instructions.
(The instructions are for a class size of 35 to 45 students. For smaller classes, substitute the
“five” with “three”).
Continued
__________
Source: Hayden, Joanna. “Consequences . . . To Drive or Not to Drive, That Is the Decision.” Journal of Health
Education 31.3 (May/June 2000): 175–76. Adapted with permission. Permission is granted by the American Association
for Health Education/American Alliance for Health, Physical Education, Recreation and Dance which owns and publishes
the American Journal of Health Education.
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 7–SU: Consequences . . .
To Drive or Not to Drive, That Is the Decision (Continued)
The Story
It’s Friday night. I’m going to a party and I’m getting wasted!
Tape the “Drunk Person” sign to your chest.
I’m taking five friends with me to the party.

Pick five names from the bag. As these students join you at the front of the
classroom, give each a “Drunk Person’s Friend” sign to hold. Ask them to give all
their name papers to students who remain seated.
When we get to the party, the host meets us at the door with a bottle of beer.
Pick one name from the bag. This student joins the group at the front of the classroom
and is given the “Host” sign to hold. This student gives all his or her name papers to
students who remain seated.
The host informs everyone that there is plenty of booze and snacks (potato chips, pretzels, cheese,
crackers), and encourages us to eat, drink, and be merry! So we eat and drink, and drink, and
drink . . . , and now it’s time to go home. Two of my friends refuse to get into the car with me.
They call other friends, who did not come to the party, for rides home.
Choose which two of the friends need rides, and then ask which of the students still
sitting have the name papers of these two students. Usually more than one student
does, so pick one “Friend’s Sober Ride” sign for each “Drunk Person’s Friend” who
needs a ride. Have these two students join you at the front of the room, and give them
the “Friend’s Sober Ride” signs.
My three friends and I are finally on our way home. It’s late, and I’m really wasted. But I’ve
been wasted like this before. Actually, I think I drive pretty okay when I’m drunk, which is often.
Besides, I go real “slow.”
At the same time that the “Drunk Person” and the “Drunk Person’s Friends” are on their
way home from the party, another group of people are on their way home from a wedding.
Pick one name from the bag and have this student join the others at the front of the
room and hold the sign “Driver of Other Car.” Pick five more names and have these
students join the rest at the front of the room, holding the “Passenger in Other Car”
signs.
I know these roads really well. The entrance ramp for the highway is right here. What’s that
in front of me with those bright lights?
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 7–SU: Consequences…
To Drive or Not to Drive, That Is the Decision (Continued)
CRASH!!!!!!!!!!!!
From among the “Passengers in Other Car” and the “Drunk Person’s Friends,” give
three people “Coma” signs and two people “Dead” signs. Ask all the students still
sitting in the classroom and holding name papers for any of the crash victims to
join the group at the front of the room.
All those who were just asked to join the group are the fathers, mothers, sisters, brothers,
cousins, friends, and neighbours of the crash victims. Look around. How many people are still
sitting?
(Short pause.)
Not many.
(Usually very few and sometimes none.)
How many people were affected by MY decision to drink and drive?

Wait a few moments. Let the students look around at all the empty chairs. There is
usually silence in the room at this point; the effect is eerie. With the students still
standing at the front of the room, ask the following questions. Have students answer the
questions and explain their responses using the steps of the DECIDE Model.
Ask the Host:

What other decisions could you have made that would have changed the consequences?
Ask the Friends:

What other decisions could you have made that would have changed the consequences?
Finally:
What other decisions could the “Drunk Person” have made that would have changed
the consequences?
Have students return to their seats. Begin discussion of risks and consequences
of substance use.
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 8–SU: Unintended Consequences:
A Case Study of Elvis Presley*
The official autopsy of Elvis Presley found eight

different prescription drugs in his body with no DEFINITIONS
trace of any illegal drugs such as heroin, cocaine, or
additive effect
hashish often found in overdose cases. Thomas
The sum or cumulative effects
Noguchi, a Los Angeles coroner, believes that
of two or more pharmaceutical
Elvis’s death was accidental—he simply did not substances mixed together.
realize the effect of drugs combined in the body.
synergistic effect
According to Noguchi, Elvis died with the Any hyper-additive effect
produced by a combination of two
following drugs in his system:
or more drugs, which may double
antihistamine (prescription) or triple the effect of another.
codeine (prescription for pain)
Demerol (prescription narcotic used as a sedative)
tranquilizers (prescription including Valium)
a sedative-hypnotic prescription for insomnia
Not one prescription drug was at a toxic level. Medications found were within the
therapeutic range and individually did not constitute an overdose.
Prescription drugs even at non-toxic levels can be fatal. Dr. Cyril Wecht, a respected
pathologist, said Elvis “was a walking drugstore” and death was caused by
“polypharmacy”—the combined reaction of several prescription drugs. The combination
of prescription drugs depressed Elvis’s central nervous system: the brain, followed by the
heart, and finally the lungs (Noguchi).
The prescribing physician, George Nichopoulos, testified before the Tennessee Board of
Examiners on charges of misconduct in his treatment of Elvis. He said Elvis gobbled drugs
“from the time he woke up in the morning until the time he went to sleep at night”
(Noguchi). He testified that Elvis was a psychological addict treated in hospitals in 1973
and 1974 for detoxification from Demerol (painkiller) and other drugs, and that Elvis
travelled with three suitcases filled with drugs for himself and his entourage.
Continued
__________
Reference: Noguchi, Thomas. Coroner at Large. New York, NY: Simon & Schuster, Inc., 1985.
Source: Janowiak, John. “Unintended Consequences: A Case Study of Elvis Presley.” Journal of Health Education 30.6
(Nov./Dec. 1999): 364–66. Adapted with permission. Permission is granted by the American Association for Health
_____________________________________________________________________________
A Case Study of Elvis Presley (Continued)
One week before a concert was scheduled, Nichopoulos prescribed a protocol program
of strong doses of amphetamines, depressants, and painkillers (consisting of 680 pills, 20
cubic centimetres of liquid central nervous system depressants, stimulants, and
painkillers). Placebos were often substituted for prescribed drugs; Elvis obtained the
drugs from other sources. The jury found Nichopoulos innocent—as he could not control
Elvis’s drug use.
The diagnosis: Elvis died of a heart attack caused by a combination of drugs causing a
fatal irregular heartbeat.
Learning Activity
The following problem-solving activity, based on the poly-drug use of Elvis Presley,
illustrates the risks and consequences of drug use. Prior to the problem-solving, ask
students to list some of the OTC drugs commonly found in homes. Have students
determine the general drug classifications of these OTC medications. Inform them that
responsible drug use occurs in a controlled manner in order to treat pain or other
symptoms as prescribed, whereas drug abuse is the deliberate use of a chemical for
other than the intended medical purposes. Students can also compile a list of five
positive reasons and five negative reasons for taking prescription drugs.
This learning activity will take approximately one class period (45 minutes to 1 hour).
Purpose
This learning activity is designed to determine the risks and consequences of drug
combinations. Through problem-solving the case of Elvis Presley, students can develop
inferential skills, make judgments, and draw logical conclusions regarding drug use and
abuse.
Important Concepts
Street drugs and prescription drugs are more potent and have more serious potential
side effects than OTC drugs. Overuse of street/prescription drugs frequently creates
new health problems as side effects.
The combined reaction to several drugs even at non-toxic levels can be fatal.
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
Method
Have students take turns reading to the class one paragraph from the following narrative.
Imagine that you have an overweight middle-aged male relative who takes the following
prescription drugs:
an antihistamine for allergies
codeine and Dilaudid for pain
Demerol as a sedative
tranquilizers, including Valium
a sedative-hypnotic for insomnia
amphetamines for weight loss
Like so many people, he obsessively worries about his body. He started using
amphetamines as appetite depressants to lose weight quickly for a role in a local play. By
the time he made his first dramatic appearance, he was not only taking amphetamines,
but was also wearing five-pound weights on his wrists and ankles during long, active
rehearsals.
He currently suffers from insomnia due to problems at the office. His solution includes
taking more sedatives, causing him to sleep longer, followed by amphetamines to stay on
his feet and be alert at work. Consequently, his conversations with co-workers have
become lengthy rambling monologues.
The amphetamines he takes each day also make him very talkative. His use of prescription
drugs causes him to miss several days of work each month and seems to be radically
affecting his job performance. A more serious problem recently showed itself in the results
of a liver biopsy recommended by his doctor.
There was severe damage to the organ, and his liver was three times the normal size. In
the past he was diagnosed with blood clots in his legs, hypoglycemia, an enlarged heart,
and glaucoma. He was also susceptible to respiratory ailments and had a history of mild
hypertension and some coronary artery disease. Over the years a wide variety of drugs
had been prescribed for these disorders.
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
Because of his interest in pharmacology he often carried around a manual, describing

all prescription drugs, their chemical makeup, recommended dosage, and side effects.
Sometimes he would share his prescription drugs with others if their problems matched
his.
He regularly checked dosages and side effects while mixing drugs the way bartenders mix
drinks or the way chefs prepare an exotic dish. But drugs are different from alcohol and
foods. One drug affected perception and that, in turn, sometimes determined through
confusion how much of a second drug was taken, and so on, while the side effects
overlapped and contradicted each other.
The combination of drugs did things that the drugs individually did not do. It was
almost as if the drugs were acting in conspiracy against the taker. Nonetheless, he
regarded his many prescriptions as medicine.
He had real problems—pain, insomnia, a tendency to obesity—and he had real medicine

to take care of those problems. He also knew that these drugs made him feel good in
ways that were hard to explain.
Knowing about your relative’s chaotic drug use, you are not surprised to hear that he
recently died of a heart attack. The medical examiner said his death was due to “cardiac
arrhythmia, an erratic heartbeat and severe cardiovascular disease.” His report stated that
“these two diseases may be responsible for cardiac arrhythmia, but the precise cause was
not determined and may never be discovered.”
The coroner’s autopsy report also stated that there were several different
prescription drugs in the body but not one prescription drug in the body was at a
toxic level. Medications found were in the therapeutic range and individually did not
constitute an overdose.
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
Display a transparency of the Discussion Example (see following page). Divide the class
into six groups. Ask each group to discuss and respond to one of the following questions:
What are the body’s reactions to a combination of several prescription drugs taken
simultaneously?
How can prescription drugs taken at non-toxic levels result in death?
In what ways could a combination of drugs have an adverse effect on the body?
What signs or symptoms would have indicated a problem drug use? Who should have
helped the relative?
What drug-free alternatives could you have suggested to the relative to deal with the
stated problems?
Would you ask the coroner to pursue the investigation into your relative’s death for
any reason(s)?
Inform the class that the problem-solving case study is based on the actual life of Elvis
Presley, who died in 1977 at the age of 42. The reason given for his death was a cardiac
arrhythmia suspected to be due to an interaction of an antihistamine, codeine, and
Demerol (a painkiller), as well as Valium and several other tranquilizers. Prescription
drug use sometimes results in fatal reactions.
Show a music video clip of one of Elvis’s performances.
Explain that most OTC and prescribed drug treatments often mask symptoms or control
health problems, or in some way alter the way organ systems work. Overuse of
prescription drugs frequently creates new health problems as side effects. People need to
understand that their headaches are not due to Aspirin deficiency. The lesson is that
seemingly safe prescription drugs can be as fatal as illegal drugs if taken in combination.
Persons taking more than one drug should monitor themselves carefully, in cooperation
with a physician.
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 8-SU: Unintended Consequences:
Discussion Example
A middle-aged relative takes the following prescription drugs:
antihistamine (prescription)
codeine (prescription for pain)
Demerol (prescription narcotic used as sedative)
tranquilizers (prescriptions including Valium)
sedative-hypnotic (prescription for insomnia)
The coroner’s autopsy report states that death was due to

cardiac arrhythmia (irregular heartbeat)
severe cardiovascular disease
The coroner’s autopsy report also states:

There were eight different prescription drugs in the body.
Not one prescription drug was at a toxic level. Medications found were in the
therapeutic range and individually did not constitute an overdose.
There was no evidence that the drugs present in the body caused or made may
significant contribution to the death.
Discussion Questions
(Use information from previous sections to help answer the following questions.)
What are the body’s reactions to a combination of several prescription drugs
taken simultaneously?
How can prescription drugs taken at non-toxic levels result in death?
In what ways could the combining of drugs have an adverse effect on the body?
What signs or symptoms would have indicated a problem drug use? Who
should have helped the relative?
What drug-free alternatives could you have suggested to the relative to deal
with the stated problems?
Would you ask the coroner to pursue the investigation into your relative’s death for
any reason(s)?
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 9–SU: Sam’s Story:
Walnut Creek Teen’s Road from Meth*
__________
This story is available at the following website:
Heredia, Christopher. “Sam’s Story: Walnut Creek Teen’s Road from Meth.” San Francisco Chronicle 6 May 2003: A–1.
Available on the SFGate.com website at <www.sfgate.com/cgi-bin/article.cgi?file=/c/a/2003/05/06/MN202176.DTL>.
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Introduction
This lesson focuses on identifying substance use and
abuse problems and what can be done to help someone NOTE TO TEACHER
who is struggling with these problems. Students also
Substance use and abuse is
have the opportunity to advocate against substance use.
regarded as potentially sensitive
content. All aspects of
This lesson draws on the following pamphlets, which are instruction are to be treated with
available from the Addictions Foundation of Manitoba a high degree of sensitivity.
(AFM):
Are Alcohol/Drugs Causing Problems for You?
Signs and Symptoms of Drug Use: A Guide for Parents and Teachers
When Someone Else’s Drinking, Drug Use or Gambling Affects You
For copies of these pamphlets, please contact

Addictions Foundation of Manitoba
Youth Community-Based Services
200 Osborne Street North
Winnipeg MB R3C 1V4
Telephone: 204-944-6235
REFERENCE
For information about AFM’s resources and services and to contact AFM counsellors
closest to a school or community, refer to the following website:
Addictions Foundation of Manitoba. <www.afm.mb.ca>.
________________________________________________________________________________
11.SU.4 Use reliable information in making healthy decisions for self and/or others
regarding substance use and abuse.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Key Understandings
There are signs and/or symptoms that indicate problem drug use.
People have to help themselves avoid substance use and abuse.
Support is available for individuals with substance use and abuse problems.
Being involved in developing drug prevention programs or strategies promotes
healthy decision making.
________________________________________________________________________________
Essential Questions
How can you help someone who is struggling with substance abuse?
What resources are available in your community to treat dependencies and/or
addiction?
How will the information you have obtained influence your decision making
regarding substance use and abuse?
________________________________________________________________________________
General Signs of Alcohol or Other Drug Use*
Teachers need to be aware of the behaviours that may be apparent in a young person who
is using and/or abusing alcohol or other drugs. It may also be valuable to encourage
students to watch for these signs among their friends and to seek ways to help and
support them.
The following are some common signs and symptoms to watch for in individuals
who may be using substances:
general loss of energy and motivation
declining grades, dropping classes
skipping or being late for class
preoccupation with “using” activities
not seeing former “non-using” friends
poor concentration and memory
__________
Source: Addictions Foundation of Manitoba. Signs and Symptoms of Drug Use: A Guide for Parents and Teachers.
Winnipeg, MB: AFM, 2006. Adapted with permission.
_____________________________________________________________________________
mood swings, increased irritability
a general change in personality or mood
involvement in harmful activity
staying out late, not coming home
arriving at home or school under the influence
physical changes—in weight and hygiene
presence of alcohol/drug paraphernalia, such as rolling papers, pipes, or bottles
self-destructive behaviour, such as slashing skin
putting self at risk, such as driving impaired
personal or family belongings missing
secretiveness about new friends and activities
spending more time alone
These may be signs that a young person is in need of assistance. When teachers observe
possible signs of substance use in someone, even if they are not sure that the signs indicate
an alcohol or drug problem, they are encouraged to share their observations and concern
with the person. Most students who are experiencing a problem related to substance use
will not ask for help, and may deny that they have a problem. However, receiving
feedback from others can encourage a student to examine his or her behaviour and to
accept an offer of help. The Stages of Change, as outlined in Lesson 2 of Module B, apply
to making behaviour change related to substance use as well. It is important to recognize
what stage of substance use a student is at (i.e., pre-contemplation, contemplation,
preparation, action, maintenance) and to use strategies that best help the person for each
stage.
AFM counsellors provide assistance in determining an appropriate course of intervention.

Even if a young person’s substance use is limited, education and discussion about alcohol
and other drugs can promote healthy decision making.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
When Someone’s Substance Use Affects Others*
Although each person’s situation is unique, those affected by someone else’s alcohol or
other drug problem may share many common experiences and feelings. Often, they feel
that they are somehow responsible for the problems and that no one else understands
their situation. Such beliefs can leave them feeling guilty, embarrassed, angry, and
alone, and may prevent them from reaching out to someone who can help.
There are two key messages to convey to students:

If you think you might be affected by someone else’s substance use, you’re not alone.
You are not responsible for some else’s choices or behaviour.
________________________________________________________________________________
Is Someone Else’s Substance Use Affecting You?*
The following questions are provided to help students

determine whether someone else’s involvement in alcohol or NOTE TO TEACHER
other drugs is causing problems for them.
Depending on the class
situation, teachers may wish to
Present a scenario in which a person’s substance dependency is
use these questions with
affecting others. Have students imagine that they are the ones individual students rather than
being affected by the substance use in the scenario. Using the in a large-group situation.
Rotating Reel strategy (see Appendix E), have students discuss The same questions could be
the following questions and report a summary of their discussion applied to discussions regarding
to the class after a given time period. other addictive behaviour such
as gambling.
Questions to Ask Yourself
Do you sometimes worry about what may happen when someone you care about is
drinking or using other drugs?
Do you avoid situations where a friend or family member may be using alcohol or
other drugs?
Do you try to control how much someone else uses substances? (For example, do you
water down or hide liquor?)
Do you sometimes feel hurt or angry because of the behaviour of a friend or family
member who is using substances?
__________
Source: Addictions Foundation of Manitoba. When Someone Else’s Drinking, Drug Use or Gambling Affects You.
Winnipeg, MB: AFM, 2006. Adapted with permission.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Have you given up activities you enjoy to look after a friend or family member who is
using substances?
Do you sometimes feel embarrassed by someone else’s drinking or drug use?
Do you worry that others might find out about a friend’s or family member’s drinking or
drug use?
Have special occasions been ruined by someone else’s drinking or drug use?
Do you hide or lie about the drinking or drug use of someone you care about?
Do you blame yourself when a friend or family member is drinking or using other
drugs?
Encourage students to talk about these issues with someone who understands and can
help them make sense of what seems like an overwhelming situation. Encourage students
to contact counsellors at school or at AFM.
REFERENCES
To contact an AFM counsellors closest to a school or community, refer to the
contact information available on the following website:
Addictions Foundation of Manitoba. <www.afm.mb.ca>.
For more suggestions on how friends can help, refer to the following resource:
O’Connor, Betsy. A Guide for Teens: Does Your Friend Have an Alcohol or Other Drug
Problem? Boston, MA: Center for Health Communication, Harvard School of Public
Health, 1994. Available online at <http://ncadi.samhsa.gov/govpubs/phd688/>.
________________________________________________________________________________
Student Use and Abuse of Alcohol and Other Drugs
Although the message to students is to abstain from using alcohol and other drugs, the
statistics show that students are using legal and illegal substances.
In Canada, “alcohol is by far the most common substance used by youth and binge
drinking is common. Cannabis is the second most common substance—and the first
among illicit drugs—used by Canadian youth. Cannabis use is now more common
than cigarette smoking among students” (CCSA 7).
According to a recent Manitoba survey, 80 percent of Grades 9 to 12 Manitoba
students use alcohol and 42 percent use cannabis (Patton, Mackay, and Broszeit
13, 37).
Since alcohol is a commonly used drug in high school, students should learn when the use
is becoming harmful to themselves or others.
_____________________________________________________________________________
REFERENCES
For additional information, refer to the following reports:
The Canadian Centre on Substance Abuse (CCSA). Substance Abuse in Canada: Youth in
Focus. Ottawa, ON: CCSA, September 2007. Available online at
<www.ccsa.ca/CCSA/EN/Research/Substance_Abuse_in_Canada/>.
Patton, David, Terri-Lynn Mackay, and Brian Broszeit. Alcohol and Other Drug Use in
Manitoba Students. Winnipeg, MB: Addictions Foundation of Manitoba, May 2005.
Available online at <www.afm.mb.ca/pdf/>.
For updated statistics, contact a local Regional Health Authority or refer to information on
Addictions Foundation of Manitoba. <www.afm.mb.ca>
________________________________________________________________________________
Are Alcohol or Other Drugs Causing Problems for You?*
To help students think about the personal effects and

consequences of using alcohol or other drugs, have them NOTE TO TEACHER
ask themselves the following questions:
Depending on the class
Have you ever had arguments with your situation, teachers may wish to
parents/guardians about drug or alcohol use? use these questions with
individual students rather than
Have you ever lied to friends or family to cover up in a large-group situation.
your use?
Has your relationship with friends or family changed because of your
drug/alcohol use?
Have you ever felt badly because of something you said or did while under the
influence?
Do you feel that people don’t trust you any more?
Have you stolen money, alcohol, or other things from family or friends?
Do you have trouble concentrating or notice that your memory isn’t as good as it was?
Are you involved in illegal activity?
__________
Source: Addictions Foundation of Manitoba. Are Alcohol/Drugs Causing Problems for You? Winnipeg, MB: AFM, 2006.
Adapted with permission.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Have your school grades dropped?
Have you dropped activities that were once important to you?
Do you use alcohol or other drugs to feel better? Or even to feel normal?
Are old friends avoiding you? Do you now prefer a using crowd?
Have you driven a car while under the influence of alcohol and/or other drugs?
Have you ever thought about cutting down or quitting?
If students answered “yes” to any of these questions and are concerned about their use of
alcohol or other drugs, encourage them to contact the school counsellor or the counsellors
at AFM.
________________________________________________________________________________
Advocacy for Substance Use and Abuse Prevention
Engaging students in discussions, projects, debates, presentations, and media campaigns

are all recommended strategies for promoting prevention of substance use and abuse.
Teachers can increase the relevance of learning for students by getting them involved in
learning strategies, having them analyze their own behaviours, and using information that
will help them make more informed decisions.
________________________________________________________________________________
Learning Advocacy Skills through Expert Testimony
The group project outlined in RM 10–SU

provides students with an opportunity to NOTE TO TEACHER
research and present persuasive arguments This group work may require more time than
(expert testimony) for their case on a selected one lesson. This is an example of a choice that
drug-related topic. could be offered as part of the Flexible Delivery
Component of this curriculum. Encourage
students to use current, accurate, and
Refer to RM 10–SU: Learning Advocacy local/Canadian information in their work.
Skills through Expert Testimony.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Assessment Drug Prevention Presentation
Have students work in collaborative groups of four to six to create visual displays on a
drug-related topic, as outlined in RM 11–SU. This creative learning activity gives students
the opportunity to explore attitudes, beliefs, and behaviours with respect to drug-related
themes and to develop prevention strategies through visual display projects that include
oral and written components.
Refer to RM 11–SU: Drug Prevention Presentation.
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 10–SU: Learning Advocacy through Expert Testimony*
Purpose
This group research project is intended to help students develop knowledge and skills in
advocacy by researching and presenting expert testimony on selected topics.
Materials and Resources
For this research project, students may use video clips, newspaper and journal articles,
statistics, and the Internet. Students may choose any individual or combination of
presentation techniques (e.g., basic lecture, slide show using any presentation software).
The teacher may choose to videotape the groups’ presentations with the intention of
simulating an actual expert testimony experience.
Procedures
At the beginning of the module, place students into groups of five and offer them a choice of
topics to research for their expert testimony. They may choose from a list of topics provided
by the teacher or pick a controversial topic they are interested in as a group (see Expert
Testimony: List of Topics and Project Guidelines at the end of RM 10-SU).
There are two parts to this project.

Part A: Early in the project, each group must submit a two- to three-page paper
describing their plans for conducting the expert testimony. The paper should include
the following components:
Comprehensive plan: Outline the group’s “angle” or approach and key arguments on
the selected research topic.
Proposed resources: List resources (e.g., newspapers, journals, Internet, other
media) and visual materials that the group will use.
Presentation format: Identify the group’s chosen presentation format (e.g., slide
show, lecture).
Group responsibilities: Provide a brief description of roles/duties of group
members.
Continued
__________
Source: Banerjee, Priya. “Learning Advocacy Skills through Expert Testimony.” American Journal of Health Education
34.2 (Mar./Apr. 2003): 113–16. Adapted with permission. Permission is granted by the American Association for Health
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 10–SU: Learning Advocacy through Expert Testimony (Continued)
Part B: Each group must prepare an expert testimony presentation. The presentation
should last approximately 20 minutes, not including audience questions, and
incorporate the following components:
Introduction: Briefly introduce group members. (1 minute)
Description of issue: Describe in some detail the problem/concern/controversial
issue the group is going to address.
Define the problem: Explore the origins and extent or proliferation of the issue
and prevalent trends. Inform the audience about where the problem started,
the extent of the problem, and how it is currently being dealt with in
communities. (3 minutes)
Provide demographics: Cite statistics at the local, provincial, national, and/or
international level, as applicable. Inform the audience about who is affected
and how many people are affected by the issue. (3 minutes).
Provide impact analysis: Describe economic, political, and social dimensions of
the issue, as well as the future of the problem if it continues without
correction. (5 minutes)
Proposed solution: Provide a detailed description of a program or a plan to address
or resolve the issue. This may be either a hypothetical or an existing program or
plan. If applicable, call for the adoption of a new policy or legislation. Finally,
describe how the solution will be (or is being) implemented and evaluated. (5
minutes)
Summation argument: Summarize the main points of the issue presented. Present
plea to action, a description of what the audience needs to do to make a
difference. (3 minutes)
Discussion: Answer audience questions. (5 minutes)
Assessment
Both the instructor and audience assess the expert testimony of each group. On the day of
the expert testimony, the presenters’ peer audience will be given roles to play. As each
group presents its expert testimony on a topic, students in the audience will be asked to
assume the roles of legislators, school officials, parents, or members of a particular
community. They will be asking questions from their assigned position (e.g., a student
acting as a parent will ask the presenting group a question from the perspective of a
parent). Each audience member will play a role and must ask a question relevant to his or
her role. This poses unique challenges for the presenting group. If their research is
thorough, they will be able to answer the questions well enough to satisfy and educate
their audience.
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
Both the teacher and the audience will assess the group presentations (see Expert
Testimony: Teacher and Peer-Audience Assessment at the end of RM 10-SU):
Teacher assessment: The instructor will assess the group based on the
comprehensiveness of the expert testimony.
The following rating scale might be used:
– Exemplary, 3 – Accomplished, 2 – Developed, 1 – Beginning, Ab - Absent (of
particular component)
The teacher assessment criteria could include the following:
Thoroughness of background research regarding the problem.
Creativity of the proposed solution (if the group has come up with a solution) or
thoroughness of the knowledge of the proposed solution.
Degree of persuasiveness.
Time management.
Peer-audience assessment: The same rating scale can be used for the peer assessment of
the group presentations:
– Exemplary, 3 – Accomplished, 2 – Developed, 1 – Beginning, Ab – Absent (of
particular component)
The groups’ peer audience will assess the presentation based on the following criteria:
Satisfactory answers. The audience must assess the extent to which the group
answered their individual questions to their satisfaction.
Level of creativity. The audience must assess the extent to which the group
captured and maintained their attention throughout the presentation.
Level of persuasiveness. The audience must assess the extent to which the group
was able to convince them that their proposed solution to the problem was
appropriate.
Extent to which new information was learned.
Extent to which the group appeared knowledgeable on the subject.
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
Expert Testimony: List of Topics and Project Guidelines

Topics for Expert Testimony
The following guidelines should be addressed in preparation for this project:
Choose a topic for your group from the following list. You
will be making a case for
a Drug Education curriculum with a focus on substance abstinence
a Drug Education curriculum with a focus on harm reduction
mandatory universal drug testing
drug abuse prevention programs
mandatory teacher training in substance abuse detection and prevention
Expert testimony should be effective/powerful and persuasive.
Your team should prepare a 20-minute presentation on your topic. You may use charts, graphs, and other
visuals to support your verbal testimony. No reading will be allowed during the presentation.
Use whatever techniques you know to “persuade” and “hook” your audience. Use pertinent personal
experience, case vignettes, and statistics. But above all, be informative: do your research well.
Part A: Expert Testimony Draft

The first part of the project involves writing a paper that describes the following:
A comprehensive plan of your presentation (your angle, your key arguments).
Proposed resources (e.g., newspapers, journals, Internet, other media) and a list of visual materials you will be
using.
Logistics (how the presentation will be done and any AV needs).
Part B: Expert Testimony Presentation Outline

The second part of the project involves giving a presentation of your research findings.
Introduction: Briefly introduce yourselves.
Identification of Issue: Describe the problem/concern/controversial issue you are going to talk about in some
detail.
Define the problem: Explore the origins and extent of the issue and prevalent trends. (What is the
problem? Where did the problem start? Who is doing what to curb/prevent the problem?)
Provide demographics: Give statistics at the local, provincial, national, and even international levels, as
applicable. Who is affected by the issue?
Describe the impact: Analyze who or what is affected by the problem. Address economic, political, and
social dimensions of the issue. Address the future impact of the problem if it continues without correction.
Proposed solution: Propose a concrete plan or solution to address the issue (which is the title of your topic, and
the main part of your presentation).
Describe the theory base of your plan or solution.
Describe the cost-effectiveness of the implementation of your proposed solution.
Summation argument: In the closing statement, summarize the main points of the issue, why you are
concerned, what could happen, what should be done (a plea to action).
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
Expert Testimony: Teacher and Peer-Audience Assessment

Rating Scale
4 – Exemplary, 3 – Accomplished, 2 – Developed, 1 – Beginning, Ab - Absent (of particular component)
Teacher Assessment
Names of group members ________________________________ ________________________________
________________________________ ________________________________
Topic _______________________________________________________________________________________
Assessment Criteria 4 3 2 1 Ab
Thoroughness of background research regarding the problem. Extent of

information on topic from current research/data (e.g., from Health
Canada, Addictions Foundation of Manitoba, Canadian Centre on
Substance Abuse, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, National
Institutes of Health, and/or other well-established, credible sources)
Creativity of the proposed solution or thoroughness of the knowledge of the
proposed solution
Description of how each component of the solution addressed the issue at
large
Description of a tool to assess success of the solution
Description of the theory base on the solution
Description of the cost and cost-effectiveness of implementation
Degree of persuasiveness
Time management
Total points ________
Peer-Audience Assessment
Topic __________________________________________________________________________________________
Your question for the group _______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
Your agenda: Indicate whether you are a parent, school board member, local politician, or community member.
_______________________________________________________________________________________________
Assessment Criteria 4 3 2 1 Ab
Did the group answer your question satisfactorily?

Did the group hold your attention throughout their testimony?
At the end of the group’s testimony were you convinced that the group’s
point of view was valid and the “right” one even though it might be in
conflict with your personal agenda/values?
Did you learn something new from the group’s testimony?
Did the group appear knowledgeable on the subject?
Total points _______
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 11–SU: Drug Prevention Presentation*
Purpose
Through this cooperative group learning activity, students will learn to

identify personal and socio-cultural beliefs, attitudes, values, and behaviours
regarding tobacco, alcohol, and other drug use, as well as strategies for prevention
through a visual display project on a specific drug-related topic or theme
identify and access community resources/websites that deal with drug education
(prevention, use, misuse, abuse, and public education) and incorporate this
information into a visual display project
build teamwork skills that encourage collaborative work on a drug-related visual
display, oral presentation, and written report
Materials and Resources
For this project, each group of four to six students creates a visual display on a drug-
related topic. Students are encouraged to create an imaginative display that may consist
of magazine pictures, news articles, illustrations, and so on.
Establish the size of the display boards to be used. Students may use poster board or
cardboard to create their three-dimensional displays. In addition to the display
boards, students may wish to use other materials to present their visual displays.
Procedure
This creative learning activity gives students the opportunity to explore their attitudes,
beliefs, and behaviours with respect to drug-related themes. Designing a drug-related
visual display is a four-part process.
Part A: Assign Drug-Related Topic for Collage, Oral Presentation, and Written
Report
Advise students that they will work in groups to design and present a visual display
using art about a drug-related theme. In addition, they will give an oral presentation
(15 to 20 minutes) to the class and submit a written paper (four to eight pages) on
their respective topics. The oral presentation to the class must be interactive and
engage the class. Students cannot lecture about their topics, and their presentation
must advocate for a positive pathway regarding their theme.
Continued
__________
Source: Bill, Debra E., and Tammy C. James. “Using Visual Displays as a Teaching Tool for Drug Prevention.” American
Journal of Health Education 34.5 (Sept./Oct. 2003): 288–90. Adapted with permission. Permission is granted by
the American Association for Health Education/American Alliance for Health, Physical Education, Recreation and
Dance which owns and publishes the American Journal of Health Education.
_____________________________________________________________________________
RM 11–SU: Drug Prevention Presentation (Continued)
Have students form small groups of four to six and ask each group to choose a drug-
related topic. Examples of drug-related topics are
consequences of drinking and driving
natural highs
positive effects of not smoking
wellness alternative to drinking
peer education and refusal skills
substance abuse prevention strategies
Students may also develop their own topics to encourage group ownership of the
visual display.
Part B: Select and Research at Least Three Sub-Themes for the Visual Display and
Compile Illustrations and Images for the Visual Display
Students are encouraged to collect images representing their topics and display them
in a creative manner as a visual display in the format of a collage or sculpture. The
displays may include materials from magazines, newspaper stories, clip art,
tables/graphs, cartoons, photographs, drawings, papers and borders of different
colours, and other art or educational supplies. They are encouraged to be as creative as
possible for this project. Students are free to choose their own shape, colours, design,
and materials for their class displays.
Students are to design displays that have a strong visual impact and that will help
other students in the class understand their topics. They must articulate three sub-
themes and collect visual images on each of these themes. For example, if the topic is
drinking and driving, the three sub-themes could be legal consequences, social
consequences, and economic consequences.
Part C: Research Three Websites or Community Agencies on a Drug-Related Topic

While they are compiling and collecting images for their displays, students need to
research and describe three reputable websites that address the specific visual display
topic and/or visit three community agencies that address the drug-related concern.
Students share with the class a list of community-based drug agencies available in the
local community. They must state why they chose the three selected websites and/or
agencies and include their addresses for the class. Students are encouraged to collect
and compile materials from these sources that can be used for the visual displays.
Data from this research is presented in the oral and written reports.
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
Part D: Design and Produce the Interactive Visual Display

The small groups of students then design and create the visual displays on their
respective drug-related topics. Students are given class time to design and
assemble the displays. The emphasis of the interactive displays and oral
presentations is to showcase the topics in a visually appealing, creative manner that
actively involves other class members in a discussion of the respective topics.
Examples
Two examples of visual displays are suggested below.

The first visual display entitled “Drinking and Driving” is divided into three sub-
themes:
The beginning of the collage represents a typical Friday night at a high school,
with the decision to drink being acted out in a role-play scenario.
Some students then decide to drive after drinking, with the middle of the collage
representing the road. Classmates are asked to try on “Fatal Vision goggles” that
they borrowed from the local health agency (representing various alcohol
impairment blood levels) and are given the task of trying to stay on the correct
side of the road wearing the goggles and using a lighted pointer (a difficult motor-
sensory task).
The final part of the collage shows consequences of drinking and driving. Pictures and
newspaper stories reveal tragic deaths and injuries of young people who chose to
drink and drive.
Classmates are encouraged to share their attitudes and opinions about this topic.
The second visual display represents a sculpture entitled “Negative Effects of Smoking.”
Students find a large box and fashion it into a large carton of cigarettes. Inside the
carton are cigarettes that show diseases associated with smoking. Classmates are
asked questions about symptoms associated with each disease and are rewarded
with correct answers. They are also encouraged to discuss reasons not to smoke and
where they can get help to quit smoking free of charge.
Visual Display, Oral Presentation, and Written Report
At the end of the module, student groups display their collage/sculpture, explaining their
topics and three sub-themes. They present a 15- to 20-minute oral presentation on the
topic that actively involves classmates.
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
Each group also submits a short paper on the drug-related theme, which includes
a brief description of the drug-related topic and three sub-themes
at least three helpful websites and/or agencies that address the drug-related topic
a description of the interactive class activity for visual display
a reflection on the impact of the cooperative learning activity on the group
Students reflect on the group process and learning experience (favourable/unfavourable,
why/why not) and discuss whether/how their attitudes have changed toward the topic
as a result of this project.
Conclusion
Students are encouraged early in this process to submit their ideas for the three sub-
themes for the visual displays so that feedback can be given. Group sharing of this process
during class time helps to build effective projects. Over the years, exemplary projects can
be saved and presented.
In reflecting on the projects, students may mention that working as a group helps develop
teamwork and fosters a sense of community in class. They may mention that they enjoy
designing a visual display about drugs/drug prevention that emphasizes imagination and
active class involvement in learning.
Assessment
To assess student work, refer to the assessment criteria identified in the sample
assessment checklist that follows. The checklist may be used in its entirety or adapted
to fit individual needs.
The sample checklist for assessing this group project is composed of three components:
Visual Display
Oral Presentation
Written Report
Use the following rating scale:

Above Expectations
Meets Expectations
– Below Expectations
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
To be graded as complete, the student work would have to meet expectations in

all identified components.
Sample Assessment Checklist for

Visual Display, Oral Presentation, and Written Report
Visual Display
Design and organization—extent to which visual display is well designed, well organized, and illustrates
topic.
Display of three sub-themes—extent to which content of three sub-themes is well displayed and supports
purpose.
Creativity—extent to which visual display is creative (original and imaginative).
Design for class involvement—extent to which display is designed to encourage active class involvement in
topic.
Oral Presentation
Organization and content—extent to which report is well organized and well developed, has a clear
introduction, incorporates presentation of three sub-themes, and has a clear conclusion, presented
within a 10-minute time frame.
Relevance to topic and class involvement—extent to which class members are actively involved in
identifying and/or examining relevant personal and societal beliefs, attitudes, and behaviours
toward the topic.
Group process and communication skills—extent to which group members display cooperative
teamwork, balanced presentation, and communication skills (poise, speaking skills, responsiveness
to class questions).
Written Report
Organization and content—extent to which report is thorough, well organized, and clear, and includes
description of topic and three sub-themes and description of three websites/agencies that address
drug-related topic.
Group process lessons—extent to which report describes group process and teamwork, and any shift in beliefs,
attitudes, or behaviours toward topic as a result of completing the project.
Comments
_____________________________________________________________________________
APPENDICES
Appendix A: Curriculum Map for Grade 11 and

Appendix B: Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles

Curriculum Matrix
Appendix C: Specific Learning Outcomes for

Appendix D: Planning Guidelines for Physical

Education/Health Education
Appendix E: Active Learning Strategies
Appendix F: Sample Assessment Tools and Checklists
Appendix G: Common Planning Tools and Forms

APPENDIX A: CURRICULUM MAP FOR GRADE 11 AND GRADE 12 ACTIVE HEALTHY LIFESTYLES
General 1. Movement 2. Fitness 3. Safety 4. Personal and 5. Healthy Lifestyle

Learning Management Social Management Practices
Outcomes
(GLOs)
Description The student will The student will The student will The student will The student will
demonstrate competency demonstrate the ability to demonstrate safe and demonstrate the ability to demonstrate the ability to
in selected movement develop and follow a responsible behaviours to develop self-understanding, make informed decisions
skills, and knowledge of personal fitness plan for manage risks and prevent to make health-enhancing for healthy living related to
movement development lifelong physical activity injuries in physical activity decisions, to work personal health practices,
and physical activities with and well-being. participation and in daily cooperatively and fairly active living, healthy
respect to different types living. with others, and to build nutritional practices,
of learning experiences, positive relationships with substance use and abuse,
environments, and others. and human sexuality.
cultures.
Knowledge A. Basic Movement A. FITNESS COMPONENTS A. PHYSICAL ACTIVITY A. PERSONAL A. Personal Health
Strands B. Movement B. FITNESS BENEFITS RISK MANAGEMENT DEVELOPMENT Practices
(Acquiring Development C. FITNESS B. Safety of Self and B. SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT B. ACTIVE LIVING
Knowledge/ C. Activity-Specific DEVELOPMENT Others C. MENTAL-EMOTIONAL C. NUTRITION (12 only)
Understanding) Movement DEVELOPMENT D. SUBSTANCE USE AND
(11 only) ABUSE PREVENTION
(11 only)
E. HUMAN SEXUALITY
(12 only)
Skill Strands A. Acquisition of A. ACQUISITION/ A. ACQUISITION/ A. ACQUISITION OF A. APPLICATION OF
(Acquiring and Movement Skills APPLICATION OF APPLICATION OF SAFE PERSONAL AND SOCIAL DECISION-MAKING/
Applying Skills) B. APPLICATION OF FITNESS MANAGEMENT PRACTICES TO MANAGEMENT SKILLS PROBLEM-SOLVING
MOVEMENT SKILLS TO SKILLS TO PHYSICAL PHYSICAL ACTIVITY TO PHYSICAL ACTIVITY SKILLS TO PHYSICAL
SPORT/GAMES ACTIVITY AND and Healthy Lifestyle AND HEALTHY ACTIVITY AND
Append ix
C. APPLICATION OF HEALTHY LIFESTYLE Practices LIFESTYLE PRACTICES HEALTHY LIFESTYLE

MOVEMENT SKILLS TO PRACTICES PRACTICES
ALTERNATIVE
PURSUITS
D. APPLICATION OF
A
MOVEMENT SKILLS TO
RHYTHMIC/GYMNASTIC
ACTIVITIES
353
Key: The strands that appear in CAPS are addressed in both grades or only in one grade (as specified).
APPENDIX B: GRADE 11 ACTIVE HEALTHY LIFESTYLES CURRICULUM
MATRIX
The following matrix of the Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles curriculum

identifies the minimum time allotments for each component of this course:
Core Component
Flexible Delivery Component
notes the suggested time allocation, in percentages, for each module
lists the specific learning outcomes (SLOs) that students are expected to achieve
makes general learning outcome (GLO) connections for each module
Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles Curriculum Matrix

Component Module Time in Specific Learning Outcomes GLO
and % Time % Connection*
Allotment
Physical Module A: 50% 11.PA.1 Demonstrate appropriate critical thinking, 1,2,3,4,5
Activity Physical planning, and decision-making skills in
Practicum Activity the development and implementation of
Practicum a personal physical activity plan that is
(Minimum safe and ethical and contributes to
health-related fitness goals.
50%)
11.PA.2 Demonstrate an understanding of the
risk-management process and
responsibilities related to physical activity
participation.
11.PA.3 Demonstrate the ability to access and
use information for making informed
decisions about safety and risk
management related to physical activity
participation.
Includes: level of instruction, level of
supervision, facilities/environment,
equipment, clothing/footwear, and
11.PA.4 Apply movement skills and concepts in
selected physical activities that meet the
goals of a personal physical activity plan.
11.PA.5 Participate in physical activities at a
moderate to vigorous intensity level.
11.PA.6 Record and report the frequency,
intensity, time, and type of the physical
activities, as indicated in the personal
physical activity plan, and reflect on
* The GLO 1—Movement; GLO 2—Fitness Management; GLO 3—Safety; GLO 4—Personal and Social Management;
GLO 5—Healthy Lifestyle Practices
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
Appendix B 355
Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles Curriculum Matrix (Continued)
and % Time % Connection
Allotment
Core Module B: 10% 11.FM.1 Evaluate the benefits of selected types of 1,2,3,4,5
Component Fitness physical activities in the development of
Management fitness and in the prevention of disease
(Minimum at various stages of life.
Examples: relationship between aerobic
25%)
activity and cardiovascular disease,
breast cancer, type 2 diabetes, mental
health; relationship between weight-
bearing activities and osteoporosis
11.FM.2 Examine factors that have an impact on
the development and implementation of
and adherence to a personal physical
activity plan.
Examples: motivation, barriers, changing
lifestyle, values and attitudes, social
benefits, finances, medical conditions,
incentives, readiness for change
11.FM.3 Examine and evaluate factors that affect
fitness and activity choices.
Examples: intrinsic and extrinsic
motivation, personal interests, personal
health, family history, environment,
finances, culture, level of risk
11.FM.4 Demonstrate an understanding of the
concepts and principles related to the
development and implementation of a
personal physical activity plan.
Examples: cardiorespiratory
endurance/aerobic fitness,
musculoskeletal fitness, training
principles, FITT (frequency, intensity,
time, type) principle
11.FM.5 Design, implement, evaluate, and revise
an exercise routine that contributes to
Examples: resistance training, walking,
running programs
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles Curriculum Matrix (Continued)
and % Time % Connection
Allotment
Core Module C: 5% 11.MH.1 Identify and apply positive health 3,4,5
Component Mental- strategies to deal with issues such as
(Continued) Emotional stress, anxiety, depression, and eating
Health disorders.
(Minimum 11.MH.2 Examine media influence(s) on self-image
and behaviour.
25%)
11.MH.3 Investigate the impact and importance of
active healthy lifestyle practices on
11.MH.4 Examine the signs and symptoms of
mental-emotional health issues related to
stress, anxiety, depression, and eating
disorders.
11.MH.5 Identify community service agencies that
support individuals concerned about
11.MH.6 Apply problem-solving and decision-
making strategies in case scenarios
related to selected mental-emotional
health issues.
Module D: 5% 11.SI.1 Identify the different stages of sport 1, 4
Social Impact participation and their role in society.
of Sport 11.SI.2 Examine the impact of sport on various
social issues.
Examples: ethnic background, gender
equity, populations with exceptional
11.SI.3 Analyze sporting behaviours that may be
positive and/or negative.
Module E: 5% 11.SU.1 Explain ways in which drugs and other 3,4,5
Substance Use substances are classified.
and Abuse 11.SU.2 Explain the stages of involvement in
Prevention substance use or abuse.
Includes: non-involvement, irregular
involvement, regular involvement, harmful
involvement, and dependent involvement
11.SU.3 Examine factors that influence decisions
11.SU.4 Use reliable information in making healthy
decisions for helping self and/or others
Flexible Extension of Core Component and/or Physical Activity Practicum topics or time that is locally
Delivery determined. Specific learning outcomes are locally developed.
Component
(Up to 25%)
_____________________________________________________________________________
Appendix B 357
APPENDIX C: SPECIFIC FOR GRADE LEARNING OUTCOMES HEALTHY
11 ACTIVE LIFESTYLES
________________________________________________________________________________
Physical Activity Practicum Component

in the development and implementation of a personal physical activity plan that
is safe and ethical and contributes to health-related fitness goals.
11.PA.2 Demonstrate an understanding of the risk-management process and
responsibilities related to physical activity participation.
participation.
11.PA.4 Apply movement skills and concepts in selected physical activities that meet the
goals of a personal physical activity plan.
________________________________________________________________________________
Core Component
_____________________________________________________________________________
Appendix C 359
11.FM.4 Demonstrate an understanding of the concepts and principles related to
the development and implementation of a personal physical activity plan.
fitness, training principles, FITT (frequency, intensity, time, type)
principle
11.FM.5 Design, implement, evaluate, and revise an exercise routine that
contributes to the health-related fitness components.
________________________________________________________________________________
11.MH.6 Apply problem-solving and decision-making strategies in case scenarios related
to selected mental-emotional health issues.
________________________________________________________________________________
Examples: ethnic background, gender equity, populations with exceptional needs,
politics, technology, business
________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
11.SU.3 Examine factors that influence decisions regarding substance use and
abuse.
11.SU.4 Use reliable information in making healthy decisions for helping self
and/or others regarding substance use and abuse.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Appendix C 361
APPENDIX D: PLANNING GUIDELINES FOR EDUCATION/HEALTH
PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Introduction
The content of this appendix is consistent with the information in Senior 1 and Senior 2
Physical Education/Health Education: A Foundation for Implementation (Manitoba Education,
Citizenship and Youth). The planning guidelines provided here are especially helpful to
those who are new at teaching physical education/health education (PE/HE) and for
teachers who are using a delivery model that has a high percentage of the IN-class
component.
Because teaching situations vary (e.g., in relation to demographics, cultures, resources,

teacher expertise, local priorities), planning is highly individual. This appendix provides
suggestions related to the following:
Part A: Planning for Instruction
Part B: Planning for Assessment
Part C: Additional Planning
Most of the resources cited are available online, as indicated in the Bibliography.
Part A: Planning for Instruction
Creating a Meaningful Learning Environment
The Guiding Principles discussed in the Framework (Overview 6) are intended to assist
teachers and administrators in designing a meaningful learning environment for PE/HE.
Effective PE/HE programming ensures that learning experiences, resources, and assessment
practices
are appropriate for the age and developmental readiness of students
take into consideration students’ multiple intelligences and varied learning approaches,
skills, needs, and strengths (for information on differentiating instruction, refer to the
departmental resource Success for All Learners)
respect and appreciate human diversity, including gender, abilities, and culture (refer to
departmental resources such as the following: A Foundation for Excellence; Integrating
Aboriginal Perspectives into Curricula; Native Studies: Senior Years; Towards Inclusion: From
Challenges to Possibilities: Planning for Behaviour; Towards Inclusion: Tapping Hidden
Strengths: Planning for Students Who Are Alcohol-Affected; Supporting Inclusive Schools: A
Handbook for Developing and Implementing Programming for Students with Autism Spectrum
Disorder)
_____________________________________________________________________________
Appendix D 363
include active and interactive learning opportunities that foster responsibility, inclusion,
community, and citizenship, and that support the development of physical and social-
emotional well-being
help students understand healthy lifestyle practices and their contribution to the
components of sustainable development: the environment, economy, and health
and well-being (refer to Education for a Sustainable Future)
support curricular connections and integration (refer to Curricular Connections)
incorporate the foundation skill areas: literacy and communication, problem solving,
human relations, and technology (refer to A Foundation for Excellence and Technology As
a Foundation Skill Area)
encourage partnerships with the home and community
Implementation Guidelines for the General Learning Outcomes
The following guidelines for each general learning outcome (GLO) provide additional
suggestions for creating a meaningful learning environment within a PE and/or an
HE setting.
Guidelines for GLO 1—Movement
The student will demonstrate competency in selected movement skills, and knowledge of
movement development and physical activities with respect to different types of
learning experiences, environments, and cultures.
Implementation Guidelines
The following guidelines represent best practices when addressing learning activities
related to GLO 1—Movement:
Establish rules, routines, and student expectations for physical education related to
safety (physical and emotional), inclusion, and time effectiveness, and communicate
with students and parents/guardians.
Establish appropriate guidelines with respect to clothing to be worn in physical
education (e.g., consider ease of movement, safety, non-marking soles on running
shoes).
Establish “start“ and “stop” signals to ensure safety and class control (e.g., hand signal,
sound signal, hand clap, or cue words such as go, freeze, stop, time out).
Refrain from using exercise as punishment.
Emphasize positive behaviours in relationships between and among students (e.g., do
not tolerate put-downs, teasing, exclusion).
_____________________________________________________________________________
Choose activities that promote maximum participation (e.g., do not use elimination-type
games unless another choice of activity is provided and there is a way for the student to
return to the original activity in a short time; reduce long lineups or large relay teams).
Choose developmentally appropriate and age-appropriate learning activities, taking into
consideration the type and size of equipment and mechanical principles of movement.
For example, soft and light objects (e.g., sponge balls, beach balls) are easy to
manipulate, as well as safer than hard, heavy objects.
Maximize student–equipment ratio.
Establish safe and efficient methods for distributing, holding, and gathering equipment.
Use equitable strategies for group organization (e.g., grouping by shirt colour,
numbering off, eye colour, birthday months).
Establish rules for “entry activities,” depending on the setting, activity, and supervision, so
that students can be active at the onset of the class, and establish rules for “exit
routines” to ensure orderly dismissal and safe conduct in change rooms, where
applicable.
Make adjustments when teaching outdoors, considering safety factors related to the sun,
wind, wet/icy surfaces, and noise. Position students so that the sun is not in their eyes
and wind or other distractions are behind them.
Guidelines for GLO 2—Fitness Management
The student will demonstrate the ability to develop and follow a personal fitness plan
for lifelong physical activity and well-being.
Consider the following guidelines when addressing learning activities related to

GLO 2—Fitness Management:
Ensure that students are highly active for as many learning outcomes as possible.
Choose activities that promote maximum participation for all students.
Make assessment an ongoing process to help students understand, improve, and
maintain personal physical fitness.
Establish personal goals and monitor individual progress rather than comparing results to
others, as in norm-referenced testing.
Encourage students to understand how the body responds to exercise and how this can aid
in disease prevention.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Appendix D 365
Encourage students to take responsibility for their own personal fitness by providing
them with opportunities to set realistic goals and by continually monitoring their
progress. Physical fitness test results should be used as a tool to monitor individual
progress (and not used for grading purposes).
Involve parents/guardians/families and communities in promoting active healthy
lifestyles for students by using authentic assessment strategies such as portfolio
take-home tasks, activity logs, and personal fitness programs.
Ensure that students receive proper instruction and supervision when using heart-rate
monitors, to avoid confusion or frustration.
Choose a variety of appropriate tests or tasks to measure health-related fitness components
(e.g., running for a specific distance, for a specific length of time, or at a certain pace for
determining cardiorespiratory endurance). When administering fitness-assessment
tasks, the following strategies are appropriate:
Focus on individual progress rather than on individual performance.
Involve students in setting challenging and realistic goals.
Give supportive feedback about progress towards reaching goals.
Create a humanistic environment, keeping testing as private and confidential as
possible (e.g., avoid announcing or posting fitness scores, provide choice and
alternatives for each of the fitness components where necessary, respecting
individual differences).
Ensure that students are well prepared and informed prior to the assessment.
Communicate fitness results or scores as information separate from the report-card
mark.
Provide students with strategies to improve and maintain fitness.
For more information, refer to Guidelines for Fitness Assessment in Manitoba Schools
(Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth).
Guidelines for GLO 3—Safety
The student will demonstrate safe and responsible behaviours to manage risks and
prevent injuries in physical activity participation and in daily living.
The following guidelines represent best practices when implementing learning activities
related to safety.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Strand A: Physical Activity Risk Management
Use the criteria established by the Supreme Court of Canada to determine the necessary
and appropriate standard of care within the context of physical education. (See
discussion of Safety and Liability in the Framework Overview section of this document.
For criteria related to school-based activities and non-school-based activities, refer to
OUT-of-Class Safety Handbook, Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth.)
For information related to school-based activities pertaining to supervision, teaching
progressions, facilities/environment, equipment, and risk management, refer to
Safety Guidelines for Physical Activity in Manitoba Schools (MPETA, et al.) and to
YouthSafe Manitoba: School Field Trip Resource (Hanna, Quest Research and Consulting
Inc., and YouthSafe Outdoors).
For information related to non-school-based activities pertaining to supervision, teaching
progressions, facilities/environment, equipment, and risk management, refer to OUT-
of-Class Safety Handbook (Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth).
Establish safety routines early in the year and reinforce them throughout the year (e.g.,
entering/exiting from the gymnasium, using change rooms, getting/holding/putting
away equipment, storing valuables such as jewellery, taking washroom and water
breaks).
Establish safe playing rules related to indoor and outdoor facilities (e.g., remove any
objects or furniture with sharp edges in the gymnasium that a student could run into,
ensure adequate spacing between groups) and equipment (e.g., do not retrieve
equipment that is not in a safe area, such as off the school grounds or in another
student’s playing space, especially in activities using racquets or other striking
implements).
Establish safety rules for distributing equipment and organizing circuits/station
activities (e.g., stagger starting points, have students move through the circuit in an
orderly fashion, provide enough stations to keep everyone active, have students put
back equipment after use).
Keep informed of current safety and student medical information (e.g., contraindicated
exercises, equipment and its use, allergies).
Analyze the inherent level of risk related to each physical activity, based on factors such as
skill level, previous experience, teacher expertise, weather conditions, available
facilities, and available equipment.
When supervising, establish a position (e.g., keep the back to the wall) that keeps
students in the line of vision as much as possible.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Appendix D 367
Strand B: Safety of Self and Others
Establish a safety code of conduct for the class and/or school to reinforce safe behaviours
(e.g., walk in the hallways, demonstrate fair play in lunch-hour/intramural activities,
get/stay away from bullying situations).
Follow current school/division guidelines regarding factors such as depth and breadth of
content, parental communication, and learning resources for implementing the student
learning outcomes related to personal safety.
Provide parents with information regarding learning activities related to safety
education, where possible.
Reinforce safety rules for protection at home (e.g., keep exterior doors locked) and for
protection away from home (e.g., make sure someone always knows where you are).
Reinforce rules for protection from sexual exploitation (e.g., what to do when
encountering a sex-related Internet site).
Guidelines for GLO 4—Personal and Social Management
The student will demonstrate the ability to develop self-understanding, to make

health-enhancing decisions, to work cooperatively and fairly with others, and to build
The following guidelines represent best practices when implementing learning,

teaching, and assessment strategies related to GLO 4—Personal and Social Management:
Choose a decision-making/problem-solving process and encourage students to use and
practise the steps in daily situations.
Make curricular connections with other subject areas (e.g., English language arts, social
studies) where applicable.
Change groups, squads, teams, and partner combinations regularly to promote inclusion
and interpersonal skill development.
Choose appropriate games and activities that promote sharing, cooperation, team
building, and competing graciously.
De-emphasize winning and losing in games and promote fair play.
Be sensitive to family configurations, accidents or deaths involving family members, and
home environments when addressing topics such as loss and grief, body image, body
weight, and self-esteem.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Guidelines for GLO 5—Healthy Lifestyle Practices
The student will demonstrate the ability to make informed decisions for healthy living
related to personal health practices, active living, healthy nutritional practices, substance
use and abuse, and human sexuality.
The following guidelines represent best practices when addressing learning activities
related to GLO 5—Healthy Lifestyle Practices:
Use Eating Well with Canada’s Food Guide (Health Canada); however, this is not intended to
suggest that it is the only guide that may be used, or to undermine nutrition guides or
approaches used in other cultures or in specialized diets.
Check with administrator on local policy for delivering potentially sensitive content related
to personal safety/sexual exploitation, substance use and abuse prevention, and human
sexuality, and provide a parental option prior to implementation where necessary.
Be sensitive to family configurations, gender identification issues, religious and moral beliefs,
illnesses or deaths of family members/friends, and family living conditions.
Provide parents with information regarding the learning activities where applicable.
Be sensitive to body size, weight, restricted or specialized diets, and availability of or
access to healthy foods when addressing healthy eating and body image.
Follow current school/division guidelines regarding factors such as depth and breadth of
content, parental communication, and learning resources for addressing the student
learning outcomes related to personal safety, substance use and abuse prevention, and
human sexuality.
Present sexual health information in positive, accurate, and developmentally
appropriate ways (e.g., make curricular connections with courses such as Grade 11
Biology, Grade 11 Current Topics in the Sciences, Family Studies).
_____________________________________________________________________________
Appendix D 369
Planning for Students with Exceptional Learning Needs
Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth is committed to fostering inclusion for all people.
Inclusion is a way of thinking and acting that allows every individual to feel accepted, valued,
and safe. An inclusive community consciously evolves to meet the changing needs of its
members. Through recognition and support, an inclusive community provides meaningful
involvement and equal access to the benefits of citizenship.
PE/HE programming can contribute to the development of responsibility, citizenship,

community, and personal fitness through physical activity participation. All students,
including those with exceptional learning needs, have opportunities to develop the
knowledge, skills, and attitudes required for physically active and healthy lifestyles.
Inclusive PE/HE recognizes the inherent value of each student, the right to take risks and to
make mistakes, the need for independence and self-determination, and the right of choice.
Inclusive PE/HE programming
includes all students
uses the provincial PE/HE curriculum as a base
respects the learning needs and interests of individual students
keeps students moving as much as possible, as sitting can result in behaviour problems
involves planning and collaboration with others
provides a range of learning and assessment experiences and supports
requires planning for the availability of equipment needed for various activities and
students
considers the continuum of instructional supports for students with an individual
education plan (IEP)
personalizes learning activities as necessary
sets realistic, yet challenging expectations
makes rules simple and consequences immediate
provides assistance only to the degree required
respects and fosters a degree of risk and availability of choices, keeping in mind that
students are often unwilling to take risks
For blank planning tools, refer to Appendix G: Common Planning Tools and Forms.
For additional information on planning for inclusion, refer to Appendix C: Programming for
Students with Special Needs in Senior 1 and Senior 2 Physical Education/Health Education:
A Foundation for Implementation (Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth).
_____________________________________________________________________________
Fostering a Safe and Supportive Learning Environment for Potentially
Sensitive Content
In teaching potentially sensitive content, it is essential to foster a safe and supportive
learning environment that is inclusive, challenging, caring, engaging, and interactive,
enabling students to feel comfortable sharing ideas and opinions and participating in
activities and discussions if they choose to do so. Establishing ground rules or classroom
guidelines helps provide a safe and supportive environment and helps prevent
uncomfortable or embarrassing situations for the teacher and/or students.
To make informed choices, students need current and accurate information and a wide
range of learning resources. Not only do students need to access the information, but they
also need to learn how to interpret and make responsible decisions about the
appropriateness of this information. By learning how to evaluate multiple perspectives,
form their own opinions, and clarify their individual values, students develop life skills that
facilitate independence and respect for self and others.
Due to the sensitive content discussed in class, it is possible that students may disclose
personal information. It is suggested that teachers acknowledge what a student says and
then speak to the student individually in a confidential setting. Common indicators of abuse
and neglect are outlined in Senior 1 and Senior 2 Physical Education/Health Education: A
Foundation for Implementation (Overview–24). Teachers should be aware of their local policy
regarding child abuse and protection.
Suggested Guidelines
Based on Human Sexuality: A Resource for Senior 1 and Senior 2 Physical Education/Health
Education (Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth 5), suggested guidelines for fostering
a safe and supportive learning environment include the following:
Provide a physical space that helps students
feel comfortable and safe, and arrange SUGGESTED GROUND RULES
seating to facilitate discussion.
Everyone has the right to “pass” on
Organize classes for girls and boys activities/questions that feel
separately or together. It is important, uncomfortable.
however, that girls and boys receive It is all right to feel embarrassed or not to
information about both genders. know answers to everything.
Everyone’s opinion is to be respected.
Ensure that resource information and help are
All questions will be addressed
made available or easily accessible to
appropriately.
students, taking into account the need for
Be discreet about class discussions
confidentiality and/or anonymity.
(i.e., no gossiping).
Help avoid difficult situations by having Using personal names or asking personal
the class develop and post ground rules questions is not permitted.
and reviewing them before each lesson Speak for yourself. Use “I messages” to
begins (see Suggested Ground Rules). state opinions or feelings.
Respect others’ differences.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Appendix D 371
Respect confidentiality, except where it is required by law to disclose information (e.g.,
child abuse, protection issues, sexual abuse, dangerous situations).
Be prepared for varied responses from adolescent students in reaction to sexual material
(e.g., interest level, sarcasm, uncontrollable giggling, embarrassment, shyness, bragging,
making fun of others).
Be aware of the attitudes and behaviours characteristic of adolescent students (e.g., interest
in erotica, sexual innuendo, flirting, sexually explicit conversations, sexual jokes,
affectionate and intimate interaction).
Consult with parents, counsellors, and/or other professionals on staff if students display
“warning behaviours” (e.g., sexual preoccupation/anxiety, interest in pornography,
sexual aggression/obscenities, sexual graffiti, embarrassment of others with sexual
gestures/references, violation of others’ body space, single occurrence of peeping or
exposing with peers).
Show an understanding for students who come from varied backgrounds (cultural,
religious, moral) and sexual experiences (e.g., dealing with sexually transmitted
infections [STIs], victims or offenders of sexual acts, teenage parents).
Teaching Tips
Consider the following teaching tips when addressing sexual health topics in the classroom.
Check with administration for school and division policy and procedures prior to
implementation.
Seek out school/division-supported teacher training and/or mentor, as required.
Arrange to team teach (male and female team, if possible) to enhance personal and
student comfort.
Invite qualified members in the community (e.g., public health nurse, doctor, community
health leader, religious leader) to support instruction (with administrative approval).
Discuss with students the importance of learning about sexual reproductive health.
Admit to feeling awkward about teaching sexual health topics, if applicable, to increase
personal and student comfort.
Be willing to look for information to address topics or questions that students raise.
Know where and when to send students for help.
When introducing a topic or lesson, determine what students know and want to know.
Establish ground rules in the first lesson and reinforce them regularly to ensure a safe
and respectful class atmosphere.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Reinforce in lessons the universal values, including honesty and respect for the rights
and feelings of others.
Do not allow students to make fun of or to put down each other’s opinions.
Present information in an unbiased, non-judgmental way, and focus on helping students
develop the knowledge, skills, and attitudes that will empower them to make health-
enhancing decisions.
Talk about topics and answer questions using factual statements rather than value
statements.
Examples of Value Statements:
Too many young people are having sex.
It’s wrong for people to be gay or lesbian.
Examples of Factual Statements:
Some young people are having sex.
Some people are gay or lesbian.
Remind students that value-based questions are personal and influenced by our
families, friends, school, the media, culture, and religion, and encourage students to
discuss these types of questions with their parents.
Encourage students to support their points of view, based on their values and beliefs.
Remind students, however, that behaviours must be consistent with the laws of the
land.
Refer to Canadian laws if debates on controversial or emotional topics occur. In debates
about human rights, remind students that it is illegal to discriminate on the basis of
gender, culture, religion, sexual orientation, and so on.
Use exact terms and definitions (not slang) when talking about sexual health topics.
Use gender-neutral language such as “partner” instead of “boyfriend” or “girlfriend.”
Use “icebreakers” and humour to help students feel more comfortable.
Be sensitive to non-verbal communication.
Play “devil’s advocate,” if necessary, to ensure the expression of a range of views.
Use age-appropriate case scenarios rather than personal or specific class examples
during class discussion of difficult topics.
Encourage students to ask questions and to use the Question Box strategy (see Human
Sexuality: A Resource for Senior 1 and Senior 2 Physical Education/Health Education 7).
________
Reference:
Planned Parenthood Federation of Canada. Beyond the Basics: A Sourcebook on Sexual and Reproductive Health Education .
Ottawa, ON: Planned Parenthood Federation of Canada, 2001. 19–26.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Appendix D 373
Yearly/Semester Planning
Before developing a yearly plan for Grades 11 and 12,

decisions regarding the type of delivery model (i.e., NOTE
percentage of IN-class and OUT-of-class time) to be used by
These suggestions for
the school must be determined. These decisions will yearly/semester planning
determine the organization, pace, and focus of curriculum were written for an IN-class
instruction. From here, preparation involves long-term delivery model. Some of the
planning (yearly/semester), which includes assessment and information may not apply
reporting procedures, and short-term planning (unit, to the OUT-of-class delivery
lesson). model.
A yearly/semester plan outlines the learning activities through which a student can achieve
the general and specific learning outcomes. Yearly/semester planning provides direction
and learning targets; however, it also needs to be flexible, allowing for adjustments in
response to student learning requirements and/or other curricular demands. The learning
activities can be organized in a variety of ways (e.g., by general learning outcomes,
modules, physical activity categories, game themes) to ensure that all student learning
outcomes are addressed within the year/semester.
In developing a yearly/semester plan, consider the following suggestions:

Determine the number of classes for each group of students for the year/semester for PE
and/or HE based on days per cycle, week, month, and/or term, considering the number
of days for holidays, in-service sessions, or other commitments.
Determine available resources (e.g., equipment, facilities in the school and community,
teacher expertise, books, software, student materials, visual aids).
Establish time blocks (number of classes) and schedule units/modules/themes for
achieving the student learning outcomes for each grade with respect to reporting
periods.
Choose an organizer to ensure that all learning outcomes are addressed within the
year/semester. (For samples of yearly planning tools, refer to Planning Tools for
Kindergarten to Grade 10 at the following website:
<www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/cur/physhlth/planning.html>).
Evaluation and reporting procedures are determined locally and are an important aspect of
overall and yearly/semester planning. Plans include information about reporting periods,
expectations, performance criteria, and a grading system or code that shows student
progress and achievement in PE/HE.
_____________________________________________________________________________
In developing an evaluation/reporting plan for PE/HE, take into account the following
considerations:
Obtain information related to when reporting to parents occurs and what grading
system or code the school uses.
Develop personal timelines for preparing report-card information.
Establish with other staff how PE/HE should be reported (e.g., procedures for sharing
information where more than one teacher delivers and assesses the curriculum).
Determine how this information will be communicated to students and parents on an
ongoing basis.
Determine components of the reporting system (e.g., knowledge, skills, and attitudes for
each of the general learning outcomes).
Unit Planning
A unit plan combines various learning/teaching strategies to address one or more general
or specific learning outcomes, strands, sub-strands, skills, themes, topics, or physical activity
categories. A well-planned unit shows evidence of an integrated approach and curricular
connections.
Consider the following suggestions for unit planning:

Develop a plan with the end in mind (i.e., “How will we know whether the student has
achieved the desired results?” “What evidence would clearly show that the student
knows and is able to do what is required?”).
Examine specific learning outcomes for each grade and choose groups of learning
outcomes that connect and can be assessed in one or two culminating activities or
performance tasks.
Determine the overarching “essential questions” that capture the essence of what
students will learn based on clusters of learning outcomes.
Identify corresponding performance criteria, learning/teaching strategies, and helpful
learning resources that support an integrated and comprehensive programming
approach.
Choose learning/teaching strategies that are developmentally appropriate and promote
active and interactive learning.
Keep programming balanced by choosing a variety of learning activities (see Physical
Activity Categories in Appendix G: Common Planning Tools and Forms) and a variety
of strategies for differentiating instruction.
Identify ways to integrate with other subject areas and make curricular connections
where possible.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Appendix D 375
Lesson Planning
In planning individual lessons, consider the following suggestions:
Identify general and specific learning outcome(s) to be addressed.

Identify student learning requirements.
Choose learning/teaching strategies that require students to activate, acquire, and apply
knowledge, skills, and attitudes.
Assess the space/facility and equipment required for the lesson and check in advance for
safety factors and adequate supplies.
Plan class organization and formation changes so that transitions do not waste time.
Establish key words or cues that contribute to the development of student
understanding.
Identify ways to make curricular connections across the general learning outcomes and
with other subject areas.
Identify assessment strategies and tools that will be used to determine the rate and
extent of learning for each student.
Include challenges, modifications, adaptations, or accommodations for students with
exceptional learning needs, talents, or skills, based on student profiles as determined by
the team.
A sample Grades 11 and 12 Lesson Planner template is available in Appendix G: Common

Planning Tools and Forms. Also refer to the online Planning Tools for Kindergarten to
Grade 10 at <www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/cur/physhlth/planning.html>.
Part B: Planning for Assessment
Assessment involves collecting information or data on student performance in relation to

the learning outcomes to assist with future planning and communicating student progress
and achievement. Teachers are encouraged to involve students in the process and ensure
that they are familiar with the performance expectations and assessment criteria.
The following planning steps for designing or planning assessment strategies are outlined in
the Framework (see Appendix A: Assessment, Evaluation, and Reporting, 196):
Identify what the student should know, be able to do, and value (i.e., choose a specific
learning outcome or a cluster of outcomes and/or attitude indicators to be assessed).
Identify the expected performance or product and its elements (i.e., What are its key
characteristics?).
_____________________________________________________________________________
Identify the criteria/performance descriptors that will help determine how well the
student has achieved the specific learning outcome(s) (i.e., How will you know the
student has achieved the outcome?).
Select an assessment method or tool for collecting information related to the specific
learning outcome(s) (e.g., performance assessment task, authentic assessment, anecdotal
records, checklists, rating scales, rubrics).
Select a learning experience best suited to observe and measure achievement (e.g., game,
learning log, portfolio, research project).
Decide who will assess the performance (e.g., teacher, peer, student, others).
Decide on implementation strategies, considering relevant factors (i.e., the time the
learning activities take, class organization, documentation method).
Decide how this information will be used (i.e., formative, summative, diagnostic) and
who the target audience will be (e.g., student, teacher, parent, administrator, general
public).
For additional information related to Grade 11 assessment and reporting, see Overview
of Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles. Also see Appendix F: Sample Assessment Tools
and Checklists.
Part C: Additional Planning
The following are further suggestions for consideration in planning the implementation of
PE and/or HE (Tenoschok 32):
Develop an Emergency Plan for situations such as a fire or an unexpected illness/accident
involving self or others. Include information such as location of fire exits, class lists,
class leaders’ names, safety rules, class organization and management routines, and
lesson plans for a substitute for unexpected absence due to illness or an emergency.
Establish a Medical Procedure Plan that includes a process for obtaining student medical
information (e.g., a student’s individual health care plan) on an ongoing basis;
procedures and alternative strategies for students who need to be excused from
participating due to illness or injury; medical procedures to be used in case of an injury
or accident.
Develop Alternative Lesson Plans in situations when the weather may prevent the class
from going outdoors or when the gymnasium is used for another event.
Develop with school staff an Individual Education Plan for students with exceptional
learning needs and make modifications, adaptations, and accommodations where
necessary. (See Planning for Students with Exceptional Learning Needs earlier in this
appendix. Also see Appendix C: Programming for Students with Special Needs in
Senior 1 and Senior 2 Physical Education/Health Education.)
_____________________________________________________________________________
Appendix D 377
Establish a Safety Check Plan for checking the facilities and equipment and determine
procedures for making maintenance requests. Refer to Safety Guidelines for Physical
Activity in Manitoba Schools (MPETA, et al.).
Establish an Inventory Checklist along with a Purchasing Plan for ordering equipment and
supplies related to budgeting, prioritizing equipment needs and wants, and filling out
purchase orders.
Establish a Storage Plan for proper storage, care, and use of equipment, including
signage where needed for outdoor users.
Establish a Code of Conduct to promote safety in active play spaces at the school,
including outdoor alternative teaching spaces.
Develop with school staff a Special Events Plan for events (e.g., intramural activities or
clubs, Olympic days, “Gym Blasts”) that could be conducted during the year.
Develop a Checklist for OUT-of-School Activities in accordance with school/division
policies. Refer to YouthSafe Manitoba (Hanna, Quest Research and Consulting Inc., and
YouthSafe Outdoors).
Outline Responsibilities of Substitutes, in accordance with school/division policies.
Determine ways to support physically active and healthy lifestyles for all students through a
School Health Promotion Plan that promotes family and community involvement and
provides health instruction, support services, and a safe environment.
_____________________________________________________________________________
APPENDIX E: ACTIVE LEARNING STRATEGIES
This appendix describes a variety of active learning strategies that may be used to
implement the instructional and assessment strategies suggested in this document:
Carousel Brainstorming
Find the Facts
Jigsaw: A Cooperative Learning Strategy
Opinion Corners and Opinion Lines
Partner Paraphrasing
People Search
Rotating Reel
Scavenger Hunt
Talk Show
Think and Link
Think-Pair-Share
What’s Behind You?
_____________________________________________________________________________
Appendix E 379
Carousel Brainstorming
Carousel Brainstorming activates students’ prior knowledge of a topic (or topics) through
movement and conversation, which provides scaffolding for learning new information and
ideas. Students move and rotate around the classroom in small groups, stopping at various
stations for a designated length of time. Students can move in different ways (e.g., walk,
run, hop, shuffle-step) and for various time allotments (set amount of time or number of
laps). At each station, students generate ideas on different topics or different aspects of a
single topic through conversation with peers. Ideas are posted at each station for all
groups to read.
Procedure
Introduce the topic.

Divide the class into small groups.
At various locations around the room, place markers and blank posters/sheets, each
identified with a category of the topic. (The number of posters/sheets should
correspond with the number of groups.)
Each group starts at one of the posters and writes down any ideas team members have
about a given topic.
On a given signal, students move around the room in a predetermined direction to the
next poster and write down their ideas.
Students continue this process until they have visited all posters.
Find the Facts
Find the Facts allows students to demonstrate their knowledge in an active way by moving
around the room or area searching for the facts that have been posted.
Procedure
The teacher or students make up questions and prepare answers or facts for each
question.
Put the list of questions on one master sheet. Put each answer or fact on a separate sheet for
posting around the room or area. Teachers may wish to use plastic protective sleeves to
prevent the signs from tearing.
Students work individually, in pairs, or in teams to find the posted answer or fact to
match each question on the master sheet.
Students correct their own work upon completion of this learning strategy.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Jigsaw: A Cooperative Learning Strategy
Jigsaw (Aronson et al.) is a cooperative learning strategy that enables students to become
experts on part of a topic (determined by the teacher), which they share within their group.
Procedure
Arrange students in small home groups, with a minimum of three in each group. Provide
students with a specific topic or task (e.g., discuss how movement skill patterns transfer
from one activity to another).
Home group: Each student within a group selects and explores a different component of
the specified topic or task. (Ensure that the same sub-topics are selected in each group.)
Expert group: After completing the assigned task, each team member joins students
from other teams who have chosen the same sub-topic, forming an expert group.
Students share their information, synthesize group discussions, and expand on ideas.
Home group: Students return to their original home groups and share their “expertise”
with each other.
A graphic representation of the Jigsaw strategy follows.
___________________________________________________________________________
Home Groups
Expert Groups
Home Groups
___________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Appendix E 381
Opinion Corners
The Opinion Corners strategy helps students to recall information and to express
opinions. It involves movement, decision making, responsible social behaviours, and use
of communication skills and styles in a safe environment. Students respond to questions
by moving to a designated area.
Procedure
Have students stand in the centre of the room or sit at their desks.
Make four signs, each indicating a response (e.g., “Strongly Agree,” “Agree,”
“Disagree,” and “Strongly Disagree”).
Post one sign in each corner of the room.
Ask questions to which the students can agree or disagree.
Students move to the appropriate corner to match their response.
Variation: Opinion Lines (see below)
Opinion Lines
The Opinion Lines strategy is a variation of the Opinion Corners strategy.
Procedure
Have students line up in the centre of the teaching space (e.g., classroom, gym,
blacktop).
Have one side of the area represent “Agree,” another side “Disagree,” and a third side
“Neutral” or “Unsure.”
Ask questions to which students can agree, disagree, or remain neutral about or unsure of.
Students move to the area that represents their opinion, at which time they may be
asked to justify their opinion/answer to the class.
Students return to centre line after every response.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Partner Paraphrasing
Partner Paraphrasing is a strategy that helps students increase accuracy in note-taking.
Procedure
Have students take notes during a lecture segment (15 to 20 minutes).

Following the segment, organize students into pairs and have the partners work
together to combine and refine notes to clarify major and minor points.
People Search
People Search involves movement, conversation, and questioning, and activates prior
knowledge of a topic. Students find other students who can answer statements on a grid
(e.g., Bingo card, questionnaire, chart). The teacher confirms the required responses.
Procedure (for a Bingo Card)
Make a list of 25 statements.

Example:
Find someone who . . .
eats a minimum of two servings of dairy products daily
belongs to a “fitness club”/team
ate a minimum of five servings of fruit/vegetables yesterday
exercised for a minimum of one hour yesterday
Place each statement on one square of a five-by-five-square grid.
Provide each student with a grid/card.
Students obtain the signatures of other students who can answer the statements on the
grid.
Play until someone fills one row, forms the letter T or X, or completes the entire grid
with signatures.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Appendix E 383
Rotating Reel
Rotating Reel helps students to recall information and discuss it in small- and large-
group settings. This strategy involves movement, communication, discussion, and
responsible social behaviours. Questions are posed and small-group members rotate in a
circular fashion, sharing their answers with the new group.
Procedure
1. Have students form groups of three, and assign each person a number (e.g., 1, 2, 3).
Have students in each small group distribute themselves
evenly on a large circle. XX XX
Ask the class a question and have each group discuss it to X X
determine a small-group answer.
Choose a number and ask the person with that number to X X X X
move in a specific direction (e.g., clockwise, counter- X X
clockwise, skip a group) to the next group.
X X X X
The moving person shares the answer with the new group,
thereby generating discussion. X X
Students present the answer to the large group.
Clarify the answer to ensure that all groups have the correct response.
Continue the sequence of asking and answering a question, selecting a number to
identify the “messenger” who should move in a specified direction to the next group,
and sharing the answer.
Scavenger Hunt
A Scavenger Hunt activates students’ prior knowledge of a topic (or topics) through
movement, critical thinking, problem solving, and conversation (if done in pairs or groups).
Students move around to find objects, cards, symbols, and colours, and sort them into
categories.
Procedure
Make cards containing the information related to a given topic (e.g., food groups, safety
symbols, rules of a specific game such as badminton).
Spread cards around a designated area indoors or outdoors (e.g., turned over, placed
under pylons, posted on a wall).
Prepare a recording sheet for students.
Have students walk/run to find the cards and record the card information on the sheet.
Upon completion, check students’ results. Alternatively, have students check their own
results.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Talk Show
This learning strategy provides an opportunity for students to ask questions and to make
comments in an enjoyable and entertaining manner. This game is more effective when the
instructional content is conversational or opinion oriented (e.g., laws about drinking and
driving, banning junk food).
Procedure
Have students work in groups of three or four, with one person taking the role of the
talk show host and the others assuming the role of guests.
Ask students to choose a topic, prepare interview questions, and prepare a list of key
points or responses that should be shared as part of the interview.
Students plan how they will present their talk show and the order in which the guests will
speak. The format for the talk show may involve a panel, or it may involve having
students being interviewed individually, similar to the format of popular talk shows
on television.
Provide an opportunity for the audience to ask questions following the show or
presentation.
Think and Link
The purpose of Think and Link is to engage students in using or applying the information
they already know by sorting or linking the information based on particular criteria (e.g., by
category, by definition).
Procedure
Provide students with information to sort. Different formats could be used (e.g., lists,
cards, sticky notes).
Working individually or in groups, students think about each item on the list or card
and make the required link.
Students discuss their reasons for their decisions.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Appendix E 385
Think-Pair-Share
The Think-Pair-Share strategy (McTighe and Lyman) engages students to think about a
topic or question individually, and then share information first with another person
(working in pairs) and then with the class. The questions can be used to check students’
prior knowledge, brainstorm ideas, summarize information, or work together to create a
better answer.
Procedure
Provide students with a topic or question. Have students, working individually, think
about what they know or want to say about the topic or question for a set period of
time (e.g., two to three minutes). Teachers may decide to have students record or not
record their thoughts before sharing information with a partner.
Organize students in pairs. Encourage students to pair up with different students by
using different strategies such as the following:
Find a partner who has a birthday in the same month as you.
Choose someone whose telephone number ends with an even (or odd) number.
Choose a person sitting beside (or behind, in front of) you.
Randomly choose pairs of students to share their comments or answers with the class.
What’s Behind You?
What’s Behind You? helps students recall or activate prior knowledge of a topic (or topics)
through conversation, clarification, and encouragement. Students work in pairs, taking
turns asking each other questions and assessing each other’s answers. Teachers can provide
the questions or students may generate their own.
Procedure
Place a poster/sign on the wall or display it on an overhead screen.

Have pairs of students stand facing each other, with one student having his or her back
turned to the poster/screen.
Have students take turns asking each other questions based on the information on the
poster/screen. The person facing the poster/screen asks the questions, while the
other person answers the questions without turning around to look.
Students switch roles after each question/answer.
_____________________________________________________________________________
APPENDIX F: SAMPLE ASSESSMENT TOOLS AND CHECKLISTS
This appendix provides information and resources for planning assessment of the Grades 11
and 12 Physical Education/Health Education curricula. The following assessment tools and
checklists are included:
Sample Teacher Checklist for Assessment of Final Complete/Incomplete Designation
Sample Student Tracking Form for Module Completion
Sample Fitness Portfolio Reflection Sheet
Sample Portfolio Rubric
Sample Physical Activity Practicum: Student-Teacher Conference Report
Assessment Tool Kit
Seven Intelligences—Seven Ways to Be Smart
_____________________________________________________________________________
Appendix F 387
Sample Teacher Checklist for Assessment of Final
Complete/Incomplete Designation
Student Name ________________________________ Date ____________ Class ________
Key: √ Meets Expectations (Complete) – Needs Improvement (Incomplete)

Module A: Module B: Module C: Module D: Module E:
Physical Activity Fitness Mental- Social Impact of Substance Use
Practicum Management Emotional Health Sport and Abuse
Prevention
GLO 1—Movement GLO 2—Fitness GLO 5—Healthy GLO 4—Personal GLO 4—Personal
GLO 2—Fitness Management Lifestyle Practices and Social and Social
Management Management Management
GLO 3—Safety
□ Physical Activity □ RM 1–13 FM □ RM 1–6 MH □ RM 1–4 SI □ RM 1–11 SU
Log and □ SMART Goals □ Rotating Reel □ KWL*
Reflections
□ 55 Hours of
Moderate to
Vigorous Physical
Activity
□ Physical Activity □ Think-Pair- □ Brainstorming □ Opinion Corners □ Jigsaw
Plan Share
□ Safety and Risk-
Management
Plan
□ Parent and □ Three-Point □ Rich Performance □ Think-Pair- □ DECIDE Model
Student Approach* Task* Share
Declaration (e.g., Role Play)
Forms
□ Student–Teacher
Conferences
□ Achieved □ Achieved Student □ Achieved Student □ Achieved Student □ Achieved Student
Student Learning Learning Learning Learning
Learning Outcomes Outcomes Outcomes Outcomes
Outcomes
Final Assessment: ______ Complete ______ Incomplete
For more information on these and other strategies, refer to the following resources:
Manitoba Education and Training. Senior Years Science Teachers’ Handbook: A Teaching Resource. Winnipeg, MB:
Manitoba Education and Training, 1997.
---. Success for All Learners: A Handbook on Differentiating Instruction: A Resource for Kindergarten to Senior 4 Schools .
Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education and Training, 1996.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Sample Student Tracking Form for Module Completion
Student Name ________________________________ Date ____________ Class ________

Key: √ Meets Expectations (Complete) – Needs Improvement (Incomplete)
Student Name Module A: Module B: Module C: Module D: Module E:
Final Grade
Physical Fitness Mental- Social Substance
Activity Management Emotional Impact of Use and
Practicum Health Sport Abuse
Prevention
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Appendix F 389
Sample Fitness Portfolio Reflection Sheet
Name ____________________________________ Reflection No. _____ Date ________________
What behaviours/influences are helping/preventing me from achieving my fitness goals?
START STOP CONTINUE
1. What do I need to start doing (or revise) to help me reach my fitness goals? Why?
What do I need to stop doing that is preventing me from reaching my fitness goals?
Why?
3. What do I need to continue doing to help me reach my fitness goals? Why?
This week I am very proud of . . .
_____________________________________________________________________________
Sample Portfolio Rubric
Student Name _______________________________ Grade ______ Section _______________

4 3 2 1
Contents ___ Portfolio contains ___ Portfolio contains ___ Portfolio contains ___ Portfolio contains
all the required most of the some of the little of the
material. required material. required material. required material.
Evidence of ___ Samples show ___ Samples show ___ Samples show ___ Samples are not
Learning— student progress student progress some student connected to
and knowledge of and some progress and student progress.
Sample active healthy knowledge of some knowledge No knowledge of
Selection lifestyle practices. active healthy of active healthy active healthy
lifestyle practices. lifestyle practices. lifestyle practices
is displayed.
Organization ___ Portfolio is ___ Portfolio is well ___ Portfolio is fairly ___ Portfolio shows
completely and organized. A well organized. A some attempt at
neatly organized. reader has little reader may have organization. A
A reader can difficulty finding a little difficulty reader has
easily find things. things. finding things. difficulty finding
things.
Mechanics ___ There are no ___ There are few ___ Errors in spelling, ___ Errors in spelling,
errors in spelling, errors in spelling, punctuation, or punctuation, or
punctuation, or punctuation, or grammar are grammar are
grammar. All grammar. Most evident. Some numerous. No
samples are neat. samples are neat. samples are neat. samples are neat.
Meaningful ___ All reflections ___ Most of the ___ Some of the ___ Few of the
Personal include personal reflections include reflections include reflections include
reactions that are personal reactions personal reactions personal reactions
Reflections descriptive and that are that are that are
insightful and descriptive and descriptive and descriptive and
relate to the insightful and insightful and insightful and
stated principle. relate to the relate to the relate to the
stated principle. stated principle. stated principle.
Portfolio ___ Student spoke ___ Student spoke ___ Student spoke ___ Student spoke
Presentation clearly, made relatively clearly, relatively clearly unclearly, seldom
appropriate eye made appropriate most of the time, made appropriate
contact* with eye contact* with made eye eye contact* with
audience, and audience, and contact* with audience, and had
confidently answered audience, and difficulty
answered questions. was able to answering
questions. answer some questions.
questions.
Overall ___ The portfolio ___ The portfolio ___ The portfolio does ___ The portfolio does
Portfolio clearly helps to little to not demonstrate
demonstrates the demonstrate the demonstrate the the student’s
Impact student’s student’s student’s knowledge and
knowledge and knowledge and knowledge and skills regarding
skills regarding skills regarding skills regarding active healthy
active healthy active healthy active healthy lifestyle practices.
lifestyle practices. lifestyle practices. lifestyle practices.
* Consider cultural appropriateness.
Score: ___/28 Final Assessment: ___Complete ___ Incomplete
_____________________________________________________________________________
Appendix F 391
Sample Physical Activity Practicum: Student-Teacher Conference Report
Student ___________________________________ Date __________________________
How many hours have you completed so far towards the physical activity practicum?
______
Using your Fitness Portfolio Reflection Sheets, answer the following questions:
Discuss your thoughts on whether your physical activity plan is helping you achieve
your fitness goals.
Do you anticipate or are you currently experiencing any difficulties completing the
required 55 hours for the physical activity practicum? Discuss.
Next Steps:
_______ a. Continue with the original physical activity plan.
_______ b. Revise the physical activity plan.
The following revisions will be made to the physical activity plan:
Teacher Comments Student Comments
An additional student-teacher conference is necessary:
_____ No
_____ Yes Date of next student-teacher conference: __________________________
____________________________________ _____________________________________
Teacher Signature Student Signature
_____________________________________________________________________________
Assessment Tool Kit*
Method Description
GatheringInformation
Questioning asking focused questions in class to elicit understanding
Observation systematic observations of students as they process ideas
Homework assignments to elicit understanding
Learning conversations or interviews investigative discussions with students about their understanding and confusions
Demonstrations, presentations opportunities for students to show their learning in oral and media performances,
exhibitions
Quizzes, tests, examinations opportunities for students to show their learning through written response
Rich assessment tasks complex tasks that encourage students to show connections that they are
making among concepts they are learning
Computer-based assessments systematic and adaptive software applications connected to curriculum outcomes
Simulations, docudramas simulated or role-playing tasks that encourage students to show connections that
they are making among concepts they are learning
Learning logs descriptions students maintain of the process they go through in their learning
Projects and investigations opportunities for students to show connections in their learning through
investigation and production of reports or artifacts
InterpretingInformation
Developmental continua profiles describing student learning to determine extent of learning, next steps,
and to report progress and achievement
Checklists descriptions of criteria to consider in understanding students’ learning
Rubrics descriptions of criteria with gradations of performance described and defined
Reflective journals reflections and conjecture students maintain about how their learning is going
and what they need to do next
Self-assessment process in which students reflect on their own performance and use defined
criteria for determining the status of their learning
Peer assessment process in which students reflect on the performance of their peers and use
defined criteria for determining the status of their peers’ learning
Record-Keeping
Anecdotal records focused, descriptive records of observations of student learning over time
Student profiles information about the quality of students’ work in relation to curriculum
outcomes or a student’s individual learning plan
Video or audio tapes, photographs visual or auditory images that provide artifacts of student learning
Portfolios systematic collection of their work that demonstrates accomplishments, growth,
and reflection about their learning
Communicating
Demonstrations, presentations formal student presentations to show their learning to parents, judging panels,
or others
Parent-student-teacher conferences opportunities for teachers, parents, and students to examine and discuss the
student’s learning and plan next steps
Records of achievement detailed records of students’ accomplishment in relation to the curriculum
outcomes
Report cards periodic symbolic representations and brief summaries of student learning for
parents
Learning and assessment newsletters routine summaries for parents, highlighting curriculum outcomes, student
activities, and examples of their learning
Source: Earl, Lorna M., Steven Katz, and Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth. Rethinking Classroom Assessment with
Purpose in Mind: Assessment for Learning, Assessment as Learning, Assessment of Learning. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba
Education, Citizenship and Youth, 2006. 17. Available online at <www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/assess/publications.html>.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Appendix F 393
Seven Intelligences – Seven Ways to Be Smart*
(Ways to Prepare Lessons Using Different Intelligences)
Intelligences Teaching Activities Teaching Materials Students Learn by

(Examples) (Examples) (Examples)
Verbal / Linguistic large- and small-group discussion, books, tape recorders, reading, writing, telling,
(using and responding to choral reading, storytelling, poetry journals, word games, listening, speech making,
written and spoken words) reading, lectures, writing, word books on tape, word following directions, journal
games, brainstorming, Readers processors, talking books, writing, taping own and others’
Theatre manuals thoughts and ideas
Logical / science experiments, mental calculators, science games, analytical thinking, categorizing,
Mathematical calculation, number games, solving science equipment, classifying, quantifying, critical
(using scientific thinking pattern problems, using formulas, mathematics games, logic thinking, conceptualizing,
and problem solving) critical thinking, logical problem- puzzles, mathematics logical-sequential presentation
solving exercises, analytical thinking manipulatives of material
Visual / Spatial visual presentations, mind mapping, films, videos, art materials, mind mapping, colouring,
(using the sense of sight using graphic organizers, pictures, slides, graphs, seeing, drawing, visualizing,
and the ability to make visualization, imagination games, maps, charts, collages, diagramming, seeking visual
mental images) making connections and patterns, posters, models, optical patterns, creating, designing,
painting word pictures, creating illusions, overhead imagining
metaphors, field trips projector, computer
graphics and design
software, CD-ROMs,
cameras, telescopes,
microscopes
Body / Kinesthetic all types of hands-on learning, mathematics manipulatives, interacting through space and
(learning and expressing science and mathematics real-life materials, virtual with objects, tactile
by doing) experiments, drama, dance, sports reality software, science labs experience—touching, building,
that teach, role playing, charades, fixing, manipulating materials,
field trips, mime, games, body learning by doing
language communication, cooking,
gardening, real-life activities
Musical / playing music, using live music, musical instruments, tapes, hearing music in the
Rhythmic group rapping, chanting, using tonal music software environment, responding to and
(using and reacting to patterns, singing, humming, sound associating sounds, creating
rhythmic and tonal appreciation activities, using music and rhythmic patterns,
patterns) rhythms, listening to and identifying singing
environmental sounds
Interpersonal peer tutoring, collaborative learning, board games, simulation interacting with and learning
(interacting with and conflict mediation, group games, interactive software about others, interviewing,
learning about others) brainstorming, community sharing, observing others,
involvement, club activities, social teaching, debating, discussing
construction of knowledge
Intrapersonal individualized instruction, journals, individualized work reflecting, making connections
(understanding self) independent study, providing materials to personal life and feelings,
options in course study having own space
References:
Armstrong, Thomas. Multiple Intelligences in the Classroom. Alexandria, VA: Association for Supervision and
Curriculum Development, 1994.
Gardner, H. Frames of Mind: The Theory of Multiple Intelligences. New York, NY: Harper and Row, 1983.
Hewitt, Jean D. Playing Fair: A Guide to the Management of Student Conduct. Vancouver, BC: EduServ, 1992.
Lazear, David. Seven Ways of Knowing: Teaching for Multiple Intelligences. 2nd ed. Palatine, IL: Skylight, 1991.
_______
Source: Manitoba Education and Training. Success for All Learners: A Handbook on Differentiating Instruction: A Resource for
Kindergarten to Senior 4 Schools. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education and Training, 1996. 4.14.
_____________________________________________________________________________
APPENDIX G: COMMON PLANNING TOOLS AND FORMS
This appendix provides information and resources for planning implementation of the
Grades 11 and 12 Physical Education/Health Education curricula. The following planning
tools and forms are included:
Sample School Questionnaire for Planning to Implement Grades 11 and 12 Physical
Education/Health Education
Treatment of Potentially Sensitive Content (includes a chart on Potential Decision Areas for
School/Division Planning)
Summary of Options for Students with Exceptional Learning Needs and/or Special
Health Care Needs
Planning for Inclusion in Physical Education/Health Education
Outcome Planner
Visual Planner for Inclusion in Physical Education/Health Education
Grades 11 and 12 Lesson Planner
Physical Activity Categories
Teachers are also encouraged to use the planning tools provided on the Manitoba
Education, Citizenship and Youth website at
_____________________________________________________________________________
Appendix G 395
Sample School Questionnaire for Planning to Implement
Grades 11 and 12 Physical Education/Health Education
Use this questionnaire to help determine the current status and use of resources in your
school and to brainstorm potential use of the resources for implementing the Grades 11
and 12 PE/HE credits.
School Profile
Name of School ______________________________________________________________

Name of Principal ______________________________________________________________
Contact Information ______________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________
PE/HE Staff (full-time equivalent) __________________________________________________
Grade 9 Grade 10 Grade 11 Grade 12

Student Population by Grade
Number of Bused Students by Grade
Current Status in PE and HE Course Offerings
School-Initiated Courses (SICs) ____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Current Scheduling Model
Continuous_____________________________ Non-Semester ___________________________
Number of Periods/Day _________________ Length of Periods ________________________
PE Class Composition (e.g., co-ed, male, female) ______________________________________
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
School Inventory
School Inventory of Existing and Potential Resources

Resource Area Current Use Potential Use
Total Number of
Sections/Semester
(Take total number of students,
divide by class size = number
of sections per year. Divide this
by 2 if school is on a semester
schedule.)
School Facilities Inventory
Gymnasium(s)
Weight Room(s)
Stage
Multi-purpose Room(s)
Classroom(s)
Computer Lab(s)
Outdoors
Other ________________
Available Instructional Space

Per Time Slot
Access to Community Facilities

Walking Distance
Transportation Required
School-Sponsored Physical
Activities/Sports—
Intramurals/Clubs
School-Sponsored Physical
Activities/Sports—Interschool
Equipment for Traditional

Sports
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
Appendix G 397
School Inventory of Existing and Potential Resources (Continued)
Resource Area Current Use Potential Use
Equipment for Recreational
Physical Activities
(e.g., cross-country skis)
Other Physical Activity/Sport

Opportunities
(e.g., field trips)
Considerations for Students

with Exceptional Learning
Needs and/or Special Health
Care Needs
Policy Regarding Course Fees
Staffing
(Qualifications/Special
Skills/Certification)
Joint Use Agreement
Transportation Resources
Other
(e.g., volunteers/fee for
service)
_____________________________________________________________________________
Treatment of Potentially Sensitive Content
In Kindergarten to Grade 10, the student learning outcomes in two strands, Substance Use
and Abuse Prevention and Human Sexuality (in GLO 5—Healthy Lifestyle Practices) as well as
in the personal safety (prevention of sexual exploitation and abuse) sub-strand (in GLO 3—
Safety) may be potentially sensitive to some students and their parents/families and/or
communities. This sensitivity may be based on family, religious, and/or cultural values.
This may also apply to the learning outcomes in the Grade 11 Core module, Substance Use
and Abuse Prevention, and in the Grade 12 Core module, Healthy Relationships.
Potentially sensitive content must be treated in ways that are appropriate for the local school
and community context. Greater cooperation and coordination among the home, school, and
public health systems will contribute to the health and well-being of students.
Schools are required to

determine local policy related to potentially sensitive content using the school/division
planning process
seek parental involvement as part of the planning process
provide a parental option prior to implementation of potentially sensitive content
make decisions related to treatment of potentially sensitive content, as outlined below
Potential Decision Areas for School/Division Planning

A. Potentially The Framework identifies the following content areas as potentially sensitive:
Sensitive Content Human Sexuality
Substance Use and Abuse Prevention
Personal Safety
These areas require school/divisions to use a planning process (that includes
parental involvement) to determine programming details.
B. Depth/Breadth Decisions related to the depth and breadth of coverage of potentially sensitive
Treatment of content include the choice of appropriate content, instructional strategies,
Content assessment/reporting strategies, and learning resources.
Decisions regarding the depth/breadth treatment of specific learning outcomes
in the strands/sub-strands identified as potentially sensitive in the Framework
can include
more—use with greater depth/breadth than what appears in the Framework
at—use with the same depth/breadth
less—use with less depth/breadth
none—no use
Continued
_____________________________________________________________________________
Appendix G 399
Potential Decision Areas for School Division Planning (Continued)
C. Parental Option There must be an inclusion of a parental option related to the potentially
sensitive content. A parental option means that parents may choose one of
the following options for delivery of potentially sensitive content:
school-based delivery
alternative delivery
Parents have the right to opt for alternative delivery (e.g., home,
professional counselling) for their child where the content is in conflict with
family, religious, and/or cultural values.
D. Scheduling of Decisions related to scheduling of potentially sensitive content may include
Instruction the following options:
within physical education/health education
integrated in various subject areas (e.g., science, language arts)
in separate units and/or blocks of time (e.g., theme weeks)
a combination of within, integrated, and/or separate
E. Parental Ways to inform parents of school-based programming and to determine the
Communication parents’ choice (i.e., school-based and/or alternative delivery) need to be
established. Means of communication may include
letters ▪ websites
meetings ▪ brochures
permission forms ▪ newsletters
Parents may use departmental resources when choosing alternative delivery.
F. Teacher Training Decisions for identifying requirements for training (e.g., number of days and
Requirements types of training) related to potentially sensitive content for school staff and
others such as parents, community volunteers, and peer educators need to
be made.
G. Staff Assignments Staff assignments could include use of staff, parents, peer educators, and
community volunteers to enhance programming related to potentially
sensitive content.
Reference:
For more background information, lesson plans, instructional and assessment strategies specific to
Grades 9 and 10, refer to the following support document:
Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth. Human Sexuality: A Resource for Senior 1 and Senior 2
Physical Education/Health Education Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education, Citizenship and
Youth, 2005. Available online at <www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/cur/physhlth/curriculum.html >.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Summary of Options for Students with Exceptional Learning Needs and/or Special
Health Care Needs*
Options Definition Application Reporting Requirements

Modifications Changes in the number For a student Refer to Towards Inclusion: A
or the content of the identified as having Handbook for Modified Course
learning outcomes a significant cognitive Designation, Senior 1–4 and
student is expected to disabilities. Individual Education Planning: A
meet in the provincial Handbook for Developing and
curriculum, made by Implementing IEPs, Early to Senior
the teacher or school Years.
team.
Adaptations Changes made in the To facilitate a Follow regular grading practices
teaching process, student’s and reporting procedures. Refer to
materials, assignments, achievement of the Individual Education Planning: A
or student products to expected learning Handbook for Developing and
help a student achieve outcomes. Implementing IEPs, Early to Senior
the expected learning Years.
outcomes.
Accommodations The adjustment of For student learning Follow regular grading practices
physical skill-based outcomes which the and reporting procedures.
specific student student cannot Information about
learning outcomes or achieve due to a accommodations is included as
the substitution of physical disability or, part of the anecdotal reporting and
other student learning in exceptional cases, the student completes a regular
outcomes in order to for students with credit.
make them achievable physical limitations
by students with and/or special health
identified physical care needs.
limitations including
sensory impairments.
Rescheduling The process of For Senior Years Follow regular grading practices
completing the students who cannot and reporting procedures.
requirements for credit achieve the required
in an alternate credit due to a
semester, trimester, or temporary physical
year. limitation.
Substitution The process of For Senior Years Documentation is required to
replacing part or all of students who, explain the medical reason for the
the physical because of substitutions when recording
education/health exceptional student marks and credits at the
education credit with circumstances, local level.
another credit. cannot achieve the Substitution of credits must be
required credit due to reported when submitting marks to
a physical limitation. the Department.
________
Source: Manitoba Education and Training. Kindergarten to Senior 4 Physical Education/Health Education: Manitoba Curriculum
Framework of Outcomes for Active Healthy Lifestyles. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education and Training, 2000. 14.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Appendix G 401
Planning for Inclusion in Physical Education/Health Education
Name __________________________________________ Grade ____________ Room _____________
Process Notes
Contribute to Individual
Education Plan (IEP)
Obtain Information
Related to Student-
Specific Needs(s)
Identify Supports
Define Safety Concerns
Assess Skills
Provide Suggestions for

Adaptations (AD)
Accommodations (AC)
Modifications (M)
Set Appropriate
Expected Learning
Outcomes/Student-
Specific Outcomes
Select Learning
Activities/Strategies
Implement and Assess
Process
_____________________________________________________________________________
Outcome Planner
Name __________________________________________ Grade ____________ Unit _______________
Special health care needs and safety considerations for a student with ___________________________:
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Adaptations (AD) Student-Specific Outcomes Equipment, Comments

Required for for Student Requiring Materials, and
Specific Learning Accommodations (AC) or Personnel
Achievement Progress
Outcomes Modifications (M)
_____________________________________________________________________________
Appendix G 403
Visual Planner for Inclusion in Physical Education/Health Education
Name ________________________________________ Grade ___________ Unit _____________
What is everybody doing?

__________________________
__________________________
Can ___________________________
participate just like everyone else?
No?
What can we
do to include
YES
____________?
Go have fun!
Can we give _____________
some help from friends? Can an adult help?

From whom? ________________________
________________________ Who?
________________________
________________________
Can __________________ use different materials (adaptation)?

What materials? __________________________________
How will they be used? ____________________________
_________________________________________________
Does the learning outcome need to be changed (modification)
What else can or adjusted (accommodation) for
____________________ _________________________________________________ ?
do that is related to
what the class is doing?
____________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Grades 11 and 12 Lesson Planner
Module ______________________________________________ Lesson ________________________

Date _________________________________ Grade _________________ Class __________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
Lesson Learning/Teaching Strategies Teacher Notes

Components (e.g., equipment, safety rules, organization, key
points, curricular connections)
Activating
Activities
Entry Activity
Warm-up Time:
_________
Acquiring Activity
Time: _________
Applying Activity
Time: _________
Closure Time:
_________
Assessment
Strategies
_____________________________________________________________________________
Appendix G 405
Physical Activity Categories
The following activities contribute to the development of skills related to the five general
learning outcomes. The categories and activities are provided as general suggestions and
others may be added where suitable. In some cases, activities/sports are listed twice since
they may relate tactically to more than one category. When planning, choose activities that
are safe and age/developmentally appropriate.
Individual/ Team Alternative Rhythmic/ Fitness

Dual Sports/ Sports/Games Pursuits Gymnastic
Games Activities Activities
Basic Movement Lead-up Aquatics Rhythmics Training Programs

Activities Games/Activities water adjustment singing and clapping group fitness
hoop tag survival techniques games (boxercise,
beanbag dodge-ball-type stroke development aerobic dance boot camp)
ball station skills application lummi sticks rope jumping
station relays snorkelling tinikling jogging
hopscotch cooperative water games Creative Activities lap swimming
kick-sack parachute synchronized interpretive cycling
juggling team building swimming modern use of exercise
rope jumping modified sports/games underwater games Multicultural Activities equipment
scooter Striking/Fielding Land-Based folk and square dances weight training
scoop round dance bench stepping
softball hiking hoop dance
interval training
balloon cricket backpacking Aboriginal Activities
Athletics (Track and scooter activities
golf wall climbing Métis reel
circuits
Field Activities) touch football camping First Nations round
running events ultimate orienteering dance
yoga
jumping events kinball snowshoeing Contemporary cross-country skiing
relaxation exercises
throwing events Territory/Invasion skiing (cross-country, Activities Movement Arts
Combatives soccer downhill) line
martial arts basketball snowboarding jive/swing tai chi
self-defence touch football skating partner yoga
wrestling hockey (field, floor, in-line skating jazz
fencing ice) walking hip hop
pulling/pushing team handball tobogganing funk
activities lacrosse cycling Ballroom/Social
Innovative rugby Water-Based Activities
waltz
creative or novel ultimate canoeing foxtrot
games bandy rowing polka
cooperative challenges Net/Wall kayaking mambo
Net/Wall volleyball sailing cha-cha
tennis pickleball sailboarding jive
badminton Sepak Takraw water skiing Rhythmic Gymnastics
table tennis Target hoop
ball
paddle tennis curling ribbon
handball basketball club
racquetball soccer scarf
squash hockey (field, floor, rope
Target ice) Acrobatic Gymnastics
archery Multicultural Games tumbling
bocce Aboriginal pyramids
bowling African stilts
golf Asian trampoline
Caribbean tightrope
other cultures Artistic Gymnastics
floor exercises
uneven bars
parallel bars
high bar
vault box
pommel horse
rings
balance beam
_____________________________________________________________________________
BIBLIOGRAPHY
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Manitoba Government Resources
Earl, Lorna M., Steven Katz, and Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth. Rethinking
Classroom Assessment with Purpose in Mind: Assessment for Learning, Assessment as
Learning, Assessment of Learning. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education, Citizenship and
Youth, 2006. Available online at
<www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/assess/publications.html>.
Healthy Kids, Healthy Futures All-Party Task Force. Healthy Kids, Healthy Futures: Task
Force Report. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Healthy Living, June 2005. Available online
at <www.gov.mb.ca/healthykids/>.
Manitoba. The Public Schools Act. C.C.S.M. c. P250. Winnipeg, MB: Queen’s Printer
— Statutory Publications, 1987.
Manitoba Education and Training. Aboriginal Peoples: Resources Pertaining to First Nations,
Inuit, and Métis. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education and Training, November 2000.
Available online at
<www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/iru/library_publications/bibliographies/>.
---. Curricular Connections: Elements of Integration in the Classroom. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba
Education and Training, 1997. Available online at
<www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/docs/support/currconn/>.
---. Education for a Sustainable Future: A Resource for Curriculum Developers, Teachers, and
Administrators. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education and Training, 2000.
Available online at <www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/docs/support/future/>.
---. A Foundation for Excellence. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education and Training, 1995.
---. Individual Education Planning: A Handbook for Developing and Implementing IEPs, Early to
Senior Years. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education and Training, 1998.
Available online at <www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/specedu/documents.html>.
---. Kindergarten to Senior 4 Physical Education/Health Education: Manitoba Curriculum

Framework of Outcomes for Active Healthy Lifestyles. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba
---. Native Studies: Senior Years (S1–S4): A Teacher’s Resource Book. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba
<www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/abedu/publications.html>.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Bibliography 409
---. Native Studies: Senior Years (S1–S4): A Teacher’s Resource Book Framework. Winnipeg, MB:
Manitoba Education and Training, 1998. Available online at
<www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/abedu/publications.html>.
---. Reporting on Student Progress and Achievement: A Policy Handbook for Teachers,
Administrators, and Parents. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education and Training, 1997.
Available online at <www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/docs/policy/reporting/>.
---. Senior Years Science Teachers’ Handbook: A Teaching Resource. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba
Education and Training, 1997.
---. Success for All Learners: A Handbook on Differentiating Instruction: A Resource for
Kindergarten to Senior 4 Schools. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education and Training,
1996.
---. Technology As a Foundation Skill Area: A Journey toward Information Technology

Literacy. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education and Training, 1998. Available online
at <www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/docs/support/tfs/>.
---. Towards Inclusion: A Handbook for Modified Course Designation, Senior 1–4. Winnipeg,
MB: Manitoba Education and Training, 1995. Available online at
<www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/specedu/documents.html>.
Manitoba Education and Youth. Grades 5 to 8 Physical Education/Health Education: A

Foundation for Implementation. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education and Youth, 2002.
Available online at <www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/cur/physhlth/curriculum.html>.
---. High-Demand Occupations in Manitoba. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education and Youth,
2002.
---. Independent Together: Supporting the Multilevel Learning Community. Winnipeg, MB:
Manitoba Education and Youth, 2003. Available online at
<www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/docs/support/multilevel/>.
---. Integrating Aboriginal Perspectives into Curricula: A Resource for Curriculum

Developers, Teachers, and Administrators. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education and
<www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/docs/policy/abpersp/>.
Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth. Aboriginal Peoples: Resources Pertaining to First
Nations, Inuit, and Métis: 2004 Supplement. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education,
Citizenship and Youth, January 2004. Available online at
---. Appropriate Educational Programming in Manitoba: Standards for Student Services.

Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth, 2006. Available online
at <www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/specedu/aep/>.
_____________________________________________________________________________
---. Communicating Student Learning: Guidelines for Schools. Winnipeg, MB:
Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth, 2008. Available online at
<www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/assess/docs/csl/>.
---. “Graduation Requirements.” Policy and Planning.

<www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/policy/grad_require.html> (21 Feb. 2008).
---. Guidelines for Fitness Assessment in Manitoba Schools: A Resource for Physical
Education/Health Education. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education, Citizenship and
---. Human Sexuality: A Resource for Senior 1 and Senior 2 Physical Education/Health
Education. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth, 2005.
---. Implementation of Grades 11 and 12 Physical Education/Health Education: A Policy

Document. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth, 2007.
---. Kindergarten to Grade 12 Aboriginal Languages and Cultures: Manitoba Curriculum

Framework of Outcomes. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education, Citizenship and
Youth, 2007. Available online at <www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/abedu/>.
---. OUT-of-Class Safety Handbook: A Resource for Grades 9 to 12 Physical Education/Health

Education. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth, 2008.
---. Physical Education/Health Education Learning Resources: Kindergarten to Senior 2:

Compilation of Annotated Bibliographies (2002–2004). Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba
<www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/learnres/bibliographies.html>.
---. “Planning Tools for Kindergarten to Grade 10.” Physical Education/Health Education.
<www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/cur/physhlth/planning.html>.
---. Responses to Frequently Asked Questions re: Implementation of Grades 11 and 12 Physical
Education/Health Education: A Policy Document. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education,
---. Scheduling Kindergarten to Grade 8 Physical Education/Health Education: A Resource for

School Administrators. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education, Citizenship and
Youth, 2008. Available online at <www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/cur/physhlth/>.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Bibliography 411
---. Senior 1 and Senior 2 Physical Education/Health Education: A Foundation for
Implementation. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth, 2004.
---. Senior 3 Current Topics in the Sciences: A Foundation for Implementation. Winnipeg,
MB: Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth, 2006. Available online at
<www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/cur/science/found/c_topics30s/>.
---. Substance Abuse and Addictive Behaviours, February 2007. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba
---. Supporting Inclusive Schools: A Handbook for Developing and Implementing Programming for
Students with Autism Spectrum Disorder. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education,
<www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/specedu/documents.html>.
---. “Websites to Support the Grades 11 and 12 Curriculum.” Physical

Education/Health Education. <www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/cur/physhlth/>.
Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth, Manitoba Health, and Addictions

Foundation of Manitoba. Safe Schools Form 2007. CD-ROM. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba
Education, Citizenship and Youth, June 2007.
Manitoba Education, Training and Youth. Towards Inclusion: From Challenges to Possibilities:
Planning for Behaviour. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education, Training and Youth,
2001. Available online at <www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/specedu/documents.html>.
---. Towards Inclusion: Tapping Hidden Strengths: Planning for Students Who Are Alcohol-
Affected. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Education, Training and Youth, 2001. Available
online at <www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/specedu/documents.html>.
Manitoba Health. Mental Health and Addictions. <www.gov.mb.ca/health/mh/>

(19 Dec. 2007).
Manitoba Healthy Schools. “Anxiety.” Mental Health.

<www.gov.mb.ca/healthyschools/issues/anxiety.html> (17 Dec. 2007).
---. Mental Health. <www.gov.mb.ca/healthyschools/issues/mental.html> (11 Dec. 2007).
---. “Mental Health: What Is Mental Wellness?” Mental Health.

<www.gov.mb.ca/healthyschools/issues/mental.html> (11 Dec. 2007).
---. “Mental Health: Where Can I Go For Help?” Mental Health.

<www.gov.mb.ca/healthyschools/issues/mental.html> (19 Dec. 2007).
_____________________________________________________________________________
Proactive Information Services Inc., and Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth.
Helping Clients Make a Difference: S3 and S4 Physical Education/Health Education
Consultation, Final Report. Winnipeg, MB: Proactive Information Services Inc., June
2006. Available online at <www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/docs/reports/s3_s4_ph/>.
Canadian Government Resources
Canadian Heritage. Sport Canada. The Canadian Sport Policy. 24 May 2002.
<www.pch.gc.ca/progs/sc/pol/pcs-csp/index_e.cfm> (3 Jan. 2008).
Health Canada. Eating Well with Canada’s Food Guide. Ottawa, ON: Health Canada, 2007.
Available online at <www.hc-sc.gc.ca/fn-an/food-guide-aliment/index_e.html>.
---. Eating Well with Canada’s Food Guide: First Nations, Inuit and Métis. Ottawa, ON:
Health Canada, 2007. Available online at <www.hc-sc.gc.ca/fn-an/food-guide-
aliment/index_e.html>.
---. “Mental Health.” Healthy Living. <www.hc-sc.gc.ca/hl-vs/mental/index_e.html> (19

Dec. 2007).
---. “Mental Health—Mental Illness.” It’s Your Health. Ottawa, ON: Health Canada, 2006.
Available online at <http://hc-sc.gc.ca/iyh-vsv/diseases-maladies/mental_e.html>.
---. “Mental Health—Mental Illness.” It’s Your Health. 2006. <http://hc-

sc.gc.ca/iyh-vsv/diseases-maladies/mental_e.html> (10 Dec. 2007).
---. A Report on Mental Illnesses in Canada. Ottawa, ON: Health Canada, 2002. Available
on the Public Health Agency of Canada website at <www.phac-
aspc.gc.ca/publicat/miic-mmac/index.html>.
---. “What Are the Harmful Consequences of Drug Use?” Straight Facts about Drugs
and Drug Abuse. Ottawa, ON: Minister of Public Works and Government Services
Canada, 2000. Available online at <www.hc-sc.gc.ca/hl-vs/pubs/adp-
apd/straight_facts-faits_mefaits/index_e.html>.
Department of Justice Canada. Controlled Drugs and Substances Act. Ottawa, ON:
Department of Justice, 1996. Available online at
<http://laws.justice.gc.ca/en/C-38.8/>.
Library and Archives Canada. Bonspiel! The History of Curling in Canada.

<www.collectionscanada.gc.ca/curling/> (20 Dec. 2007).
Public Health Agency of Canada. “Activity Guidelines.” Canada’s Physical Activity

Guide for Youth. 20 Sept. 2002. <www.phac-aspc.gc.ca/pau-
uap/paguide/child_youth/youth/guidelines.html> (30 Jan. 2008).
_____________________________________________________________________________
Bibliography 413
---. Canada’s Physical Activity Guide for Youth. Ottawa, ON: Public Health Agency
of Canada, 2002. Available online at <www.phac-aspc.gc.ca/pau-
---. Canada’s Physical Activity Guide for Youth. 12 Jan. 2005. <www.phac-
aspc.gc.ca/pau-uap/paguide/child_youth/youth/> (30 Jan. 2008).
---. Canada’s Physical Activity Guide to Healthy Active Living. Ottawa, ON: Public Health
Agency of Canada, 2004. Available online at <www.phac-aspc.gc.ca/pau-
---. “What Is It?” Canada’s Physical Activity Guide to Healthy Active Living. 15 Dec. 2003.
<www.phac-aspc.gc.ca/pau-uap/paguide/intro.html> (29 Jan. 2008).
---. “Why Should I Be Active?” Canada’s Physical Activity Guide to Healthy Active Living
for Older Adults. 8 Oct. 2003. <www.phac-aspc.gc.ca/pau-
uap/paguide/older/why.html> (27 Feb. 2008).
Print Resources
Addictions Foundation of Manitoba (AFM). Are Alcohol/Drugs Causing Problems for

You? Winnipeg, MB: AFM, 2006.
---. The Basics Series. Winnipeg, MB: AFM, 2005.
---. Signs and Symptoms of Drug Use: A Guide for Parents and Teachers. Winnipeg, MB: AFM,
2006.
---. When Someone Else’s Drinking, Drug Use or Gambling Affects You. Winnipeg, MB:
AFM, 2006.
Adolescent Medicine Committee, Canadian Paediatric Society. “Eating Disorders in

Adolescents: Principles of Diagnosis and Treatment.” Paediatrics and Child Health 3.3
(1998): 189–92. Reaffirmed January 2001.
Alter, Michael J. Sport Stretch. Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 1990.
American College of Sports Medicine. “Position Stand: The Recommended Quantity and
Quality of Exercise for Developing and Maintaining Cardiorespiratory and
Muscular Fitness, and Flexibility in Healthy Adults.” Medicine and Science in Sports
and Exercise 30.6 (1998): 975–91.
Armstrong, Thomas. Multiple Intelligences in the Classroom. Alexandria, VA: Association for
Supervision and Curriculum Development, 1994.
Aronson, E., N. Blaney, C. Stephan, J. Silkes, and M. Snapp. The Jigsaw Classroom.
Beverly Hills, CA: Sage, 1978.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Baechle, Thomas R. Essentials of Strength Training and Conditioning. Champaign, IL:
Human Kinetics, 1994.
Banerjee, Priya. “Learning Advocacy Skills through Expert Testimony.” American

Journal of Health Education 34.2 (Mar./Apr. 2003): 113–16.
Bill, Debra E., and Tammy C. James. “Using Visual Displays as a Teaching Tool for Drug
Prevention.” American Journal of Health Education 34.5 (Sept./Oct. 2003): 288–90.
Black, P., and D. Wiliam. “Inside the Black Box: Raising Standards through Classroom
Assessment.” Phi Delta Kappan 80.2 (1998): 139–48.
Bloom, Michael, Michael Grant, and Douglas Watt. Strengthening Canada: The Socio-economic
Benefits of Sport Participation in Canada—Report August 2005. Ottawa, ON: The
Conference Board of Canada, 2005. Available on the Canadian Heritage, Sport Canada,
website at <http://pch.gc.ca/progs/sc/pubs/recherches-research_e.cfm>.
Bouchard, C., and R. J. Shephard. “Physical Activity, Fitness and Health: The Model and
Key Concepts.” Physical Activity, Fitness and Health: International Proceedings and
Consensus Statement. Ed. C. Bouchard, R. J. Shephard, and T. Stephens. Champaign,
IL: Human Kinetics Publishers, 1994. 11–20.
Canadian Federation for Sexual Health. Beyond the Basics: A Sourcebook on Sexual and
Reproductive Health Education. 2nd ed. Ottawa, ON: Canadian Federation for Sexual
Health, 2006. Available online at <www.cfsh.ca/ppfc/content.asp?articleid=110>.
Carmichael, Mary. “Stronger, Faster, Smarter.” Newsweek 149.13 (26 Mar. 2007): 38–46.
Cone, Theresa Purcell, Peter Werner, Stephen L. Cone, and Amelia Mays Woods.
Interdisciplinary Teaching through Physical Education. Champaign, IL: Human
Kinetics Publishing, 1998.
Corbin, Charles B., and Ruth Lindsey. Fitness for Life. Champaign, IL: Human
Kinetics, 2005.
Field, Alison E., Lilian Cheung, Anne M. Wolf, David B. Herzog, Steven L. Gortmaker,
and Graham A. Colditz. “Exposure to the Mass Media and Weight Concerns among
Young Girls.” Pediatrics 103.3 (Mar. 1999): e36. Available on the American Academy
of Pediatrics website at
<http://pediatrics.aappublications.org/cgi/reprint/103/3/e36>.
Foss, Merele L., and Steven J. Keteyian. Physiological Basis for Exercise and Sport.
Boston, MA: WCB/McGraw-Hill, 1998.
Franks, B. Don, and Edward T. Howley. Fitness Leader’s Handbook. Champaign, IL:
_____________________________________________________________________________
Bibliography 415
Gardner, H. Frames of Mind: The Theory of Multiple Intelligences. New York, NY: Harper and
Row, 1983.
Gast, Julie, and Sarah Hodson. “Teaching Techniques for Challenging Individual Risk
Perception.” Journal of Health Education 31.4 (July/Aug. 2000): 244–46.
Hanna, Glenda, Quest Research and Consulting Inc., and YouthSafe Outdoors
(Association). YouthSafe Manitoba: School Field Trip Resource. Edmonton, AB:
Quest Research and Consulting, 2004.
Hayden, Joanna. “Consequences . . . To Drive or Not to Drive, That Is the Decision.”

Journal of Health Education 31.3 (May/June 2000): 175–76.
Hewitt, Jean D. Playing Fair: A Guide to the Management of Student Conduct. Vancouver, BC:
EduServ, 1992.
Howley, E. T., and B. D. Franks. Health Fitness Instructor’s Handbook. 4th ed. Champaign,
IL: Human Kinetics, 2003.
Janowiak, John. “Unintended Consequences: A Case Study of Elvis Presley.” Journal of

Health Education 30.6 (Nov./Dec. 1999): 364–66.
Jensen, Eric. Teaching with the Brain in Mind. 2nd ed. Alexandria, VA: Association for
Supervision and Curriculum Development, 2005.
Jones, Jennifer, M., Susan Bennett, Marion P. Olmsted, Margaret L. Lawson, and Gary
Rodin. “Disordered Eating Attitudes and Behaviours in Teenaged Girls: A
School-Based Study.” Canadian Medical Association Journal 165.5 (2001): 547–52.
King, Alan J. C., William F. Boyce, and Matthew A. King. Trends in the Health of
Canadian Youth: Health Behaviours of School-Age Children. Ottawa, ON: Health
Canada, 1999. Available on the Public Health Agency of Canada website at
<www.phac-aspc.gc.ca/dca-dea/7-18yrs-ans/index_e.html>.
Kolaya, Linda, and Barb Grimes-Smith. “From Experimenting to Dependency in 43

Seconds: Teaching Junior High and High School Students about the Progression
of Alcoholism.” Journal of Health Education 30.3 (May/June 1999): 185, 189.
Kuchment, Anna. “On Your Marks . . .” Newsweek 149.13 (26 Mar. 2007): 56–59.
Lazear, David. Seven Ways of Knowing: Teaching for Multiple Intelligences. 2nd ed. Palatine,
IL: Skylight, 1991.
Ludwig, Michael. “Thinking Critically about Over-the-Counter and Prescription

Drugs.” American Journal of Health Education 36.2 (Mar./Apr.): 124–26.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Manitoba Addictions Awareness Week (MAAW) Committee. “High on Life:
Everybody Wins!” Manitoba Addictions Awareness Week: Resource Kit. Winnipeg,
MB: MAAW Committee, October 2007. Published annually. The kit is available
online at <www.afm.mb.ca/maaw/Resource_Kit/resource_kit.html>.
---. “Wanna Bet . . . Fast Facts on Gambling.” Manitoba Addictions Awareness Week: Resource
Kit. Winnipeg, MB: MAAW Committee, October 2007. 2.4.8 Gambling. Available
online at <www.afm.mb.ca/maaw/Resource_Kit/FastFacts/gamblingwantabet.pdf>.
Manitoba Fitness Council. Active Healthy People: Fitness Theory Manual. Winnipeg, MB:
Manitoba Fitness Council, n.d.
---. Resistance Training Manual. Winnipeg, MB: Manitoba Fitness Council, n.d.
Manitoba High Schools Athletic Association (MHSAA). Champions Program.

Winnipeg, MB: MHSAA, n.d.
---. 2002/2003 Provincial Handbook. Winnipeg, MB: MHSAA, 2002. Published annually.
Manitoba Physical Education Teachers Association (MPETA), et al. Safety Guidelines for
Physical Activity in Manitoba Schools. Winnipeg, MB: MPETA, 2000. Available
online at <www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/docs/support/pehe_safety/>.
Marcus, Bess H., and LeighAnn H. Forsyth. Motivating People to Be Physically Active.
Physical Activity Intervention Series. Ed. Steven Blair. Champaign, IL:
McTighe, Jay, and Frank T. Lyman. “Mind Tools for Matters of the Mind.” If Minds
Matter: A Foreword to the Future. Vol. 2. Ed. Arthur Costa, James Bellanca, and Robin
Fogarty. Palatine, IL: Skylight, 1992. 71–90.
Miller, Lyle H., and Alma Dell Smith. “How Vulnerable Are You to Stress?”
Berkeley Wellness Letter (Aug. 1985): n.p.
---. The Stress Solution: An Action Plan to Manage Stress. New York, NY: Pocket Books, 1993.
Miller, Michael Craig. “Exercise is a State of Mind.” Newsweek 149.13 (26 Mar. 2007): 48–
50, 52, 55.
National Education Steering Committee of the Moving to Inclusion Initiative. Moving

to Inclusion: Active Living through Physical Education—Maximizing Opportunities for
Students with a Disability (Introduction). Abridged version. Gloucester, ON: Active
Living Alliance for Canadians with a Disability, 1994.
---. Moving to Inclusion: Active Living through Physical Education—Maximizing

Opportunities for Students with Cerebral Palsy. Abridged version. Gloucester, ON:
Active Living Alliance for Canadians with a Disability, 1994.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Bibliography 417
Nieman, David C. The Exercise-Health Connection. Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 1998.
---. Fitness and Your Health. Palo Alto, CA: Bull Publishing Company, 1993.
---. “The Health Continuum.” The Exercise-Health Connection. Champaign, IL:

Human Kinetics, 1998. 5.
Noguchi, Thomas. Coroner at Large. New York, NY: Simon & Schuster, Inc., 1985.
Ogle, Donna. “K-W-L: A Teaching Model That Develops Active Reading of Expository
Text.” The Reading Teacher 39 (1986a): 564–70.
---. “K-W-L Group Instruction Strategy.” Teaching Reading as Thinking. Ed. A. S.

Palincsar, D. S. Ogle, B. F. Jones, and E. G. Carr. Alexandria, VA: Association for
Supervision and Curriculum Development, 1986b.
Paffenbarger, Ralph S., and Eric Olsen. LifeFit: An Effective Exercise Program for Optimal
Health and a Longer Life. Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 1996.
Planned Parenthood Federation of Canada. Beyond the Basics: A Sourcebook on Sexual

and Reproductive Health Education. Ottawa, ON: Planned Parenthood Federation of
Canada, 2001.
Prochaska, James O., John C. Norcross, and Carlo C. DiClemente. Changing for Good:
A Revolutionary Six-Stage Program for Overcoming Bad Habits and Moving Your Life
Positively Forward. New York, NY: Avon Books Inc., 1994.
Sallis, J. F., and M. F. Hovell. “Determinants of Exercise Behavior.” Exercise and

Sport Science Reviews 18 (1990): 307–30.
Sallis, J. F., M. F. Hovell, and C. R. Hofstetter. “Predictors of Adoption and Maintenance of

Vigorous Physical Activity in Men and Women.” Preventive Medicine 21.2 (1992): 237–
51.
Sharkey, Brain J. Fitness and Health. Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 1997.
Spencer, Leslie, Troy B. Adams, Sarah Malone, Lindsey Roy, and Elizabeth Yost.
“Applying the Transtheoretical Model to Exercise: A Systematic and Comprehensive
Review of the Literature.” Health Promotion Practice 7.4 (Oct. 2006): 428–43.
Stedman’s Concise Medical Dictionary for the Health Professions. 4th ed. Philadelphia, PA:
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2001.
Temertzoglou, Ted. Healthy Active Living. Toronto, ON: Thompson Educational Publishing
Inc., 2007.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Temertzoglou, Ted, and Paul Challen. Exercise Science. Toronto, ON:
Thompson Educational Publishing Inc., 2003.
Tenoschok, Mike. “Middle School Physical Education: Physical Education Nuts and Bolts
Checklist.” Teaching Elementary Physical Education 12.2 (Mar. 2001): 32.
Vernon, Ann. Thinking, Feeling, Behaving: An Emotional Education Curriculum for

Adolescents,
Grades 7–12. Rev. ed. Champaign, IL: Research Press, 2006.
---. Thinking, Feeling, Behaving: An Emotional Education Curriculum for Children, Grades 1–6.
Rev. ed. Champaign, IL: Research Press, 2006.
Wiggins, G., and J. McTighe. Understanding by Design. Alexandria, VA: Association

for Supervision and Curriculum Development, 1998.
Williams, Charles S., Emmanouel G. Harageones, Dewayne J. Johnson, and Charles

D. Smith. Personal Fitness: Looking Good Feeling Good. Dubuque, IA:
Kendall/Hunt Publishing Company, 2005.
Woods, Ronald B. Social Issues in Sport. Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2007.
Online Resources
Aboriginal Sport Circle. <www.aboriginalsportcircle.ca/> (19 Sept. 2007).
About-Face. Home Page. <www.about-face.org/> (19 Sept. 2007).
Addictions Foundation of Manitoba (AFM). <www.afm.mb.ca/> (19 Sept. 2007).
---. “The Basics Series on Alcohol and Other Drug Information.” Learn More: Alcohol and
Other Drugs. 2005.
<www.afm.mb.ca/Learn%20More/alcohol_drugs.htm#factsheets> (11 Jan. 2008).
---. A Biopsychosocial Model of Addiction. Winnipeg, MB: Addictions Foundation of Manitoba,

June 2000. Available online at <www.afm.mb.ca/pdf/BPS-FINAL.pdf>.
---. Levels of Involvement Framework. Winnipeg, MB: Addictions Foundation of Manitoba,

1998. Available online at <www.afm.mb.ca/Learn%20More/Levels%20Invol.pdf>.
---. “Levels of Involvement Framework.” Learn More: Tools of AFM.

<www.afm.mb.ca/Learn%20More/tools.htm> (14 Sept. 2007).
---. Services. <www.afm.mb.ca/Services/youth.htm> (11 Jan. 2008).
---. “Youth.” Services. <www.afm.mb.ca/Services/youth.htm> (11 Jan. 2008).
_____________________________________________________________________________
Bibliography 419
Advocates for Youth. “Body Image.” Lesson Plans.
<www.advocatesforyouth.org/lessonplans/bodyimage.htm> (13 Sept. 2007).
Aetna InteliHealth. “Are You Depressed?” Diseases and Conditions.

<www.intelihealth.com/IH/ihtIH/WSIHW000/8596/35222/362836.html?d=dmtContent>
(19 Dec. 2007).
---. Home Page. <www.intelihealth.com/> (19 Sept. 2007).
Anxiety Disorder Association of British Columbia (AnxietyBC). Home Page.

<www.anxietybc.com/> (17 Dec. 2007).
---. “Overview of Anxiety Disorders.”

<www.anxietybc.com/resources/introduction.php> (17 Dec. 2007).
Anxiety Disorders Association of Manitoba (ADAM). “Causes of Anxiety Disorders.”

Major Anxiety Disorders. <www.adam.mb.ca/about.asp#causes> (17 Dec. 2007).
---. “Facts about Anxiety Disorders.” Major Anxiety Disorders.

<www.adam.mb.ca/about.asp> (17 Dec. 2007).
Arctic Winter Games. Home Page. <www.awg.ca/> (3 Mar. 2008).
Athens Info Guide. “Olympic Games.” Tourist Information Guide on Athens Greece.
<www.athensinfoguide.com/olympic.htm> (7 Jan. 2008).
Badenhausen, Kurt. “The World’s Top-Earning Athletes.” 26 Oct. 2007. Sports Business.
Forbes.com. <www.forbes.com/sportsbusiness/2007/10/25/sports-tiger-woods-biz-
sports-cz_kb_1026athletes.html> (4 Jan. 2008).
Baldwin, Donovan. “Health as Habit: Nutrition, Exercise, and Weight Loss.” Nutrition–
Weight Loss–Alternative Medicine. Dietneeds.com. <www.dietneeds.com/Health-As-
Habit--Nutrition-Exercise-And-Weight-Loss.php> (30 Jan. 2008).
Ballard, Michelle. “Mental Health Scenarios.” PE Central: Health Lesson Ideas. 2002.
<www.pecentral.org/lessonideas/ViewLesson.asp?ID=3221> (14 Dec. 2007).
Barke, Sheri. “Eating Issues and Body Image Continuum.” Student Nutrition (and Body
Image) Action Committee (SNAC). 2002.
<www.snac.ucla.edu/pages/Resources/Handouts/HOEatingIssues.pdf>
(6 Nov. 2007).
Be MedWise. How to Read a Drug Label. 10 Jan. 2005.

<www.bemedwise.ca/English/howtoread.html> (11 Jan. 2008).
Body Sense: Canadian Centre for Ethics in Sport. “Developing Positive Body Image.” Athletes.
2005. <www.bodysense.ca/athletes/m_body_image_e.html> (13 Dec. 2007).
_____________________________________________________________________________
---. “What Is Body Dysmorphia?” Athletes. 2005.
<www.bodysense.ca/athletes/m_body_dysporphia_e.html> (14 Dec. 2007).
Brain Injury Resource Center. Home Page. <www.headinjury.com> (4 Dec. 2007).

<www.brown.edu/Student_Services/Health_Services/Health_Education/nutrition
/bodyimage.htm> (14 Dec. 2007).
Burnett, Aaron. Get off the Couch. Audio and video clip. 2003.
<www.edu.gov.mb.ca/k12/cur/physhlth/curriculum.html> (21 Dec. 2007).
Butler Hospital. “What Is Body Dysmorphic Disorder?” The Body Image Program.
<www.butler.org/body.cfm?id=123> (14 Dec. 2007).
Canada’s Sports Hall of Fame. Home Page. <www.cshof.ca/> (3 Mar. 2008).
Canada’s Sports Hall of Fame. Kidzone. <www.cshof.ca/kidzone.php> (3 Mar. 2008).
Canadian Association for Health, Physical Education, Recreation and Dance (CAHPERD).
Home Page. <www.cahperd.ca/> (19 Sept. 2007).
Canadian Association for the Advancement of Women and Sport and Physical
Activity (CAAWS). Home Page. <www.caaws.ca/> (19 Sept. 2007).
---. “Women’s Sport from 440 BC to 1998.” Milestones.

<www.caaws.ca/e/milestones/sport_print.cfm> (15 Jan. 2008).
Canadian Broadcasting Corporation (CBC). “Winnipeg Girls Win Right to Play on Boys’
Hockey Team.” 24 Sept. 2006. CBC News.
<www.cbc.ca/canada/manitoba/story/2006/09/22/hockey-decision.html>
(28 Nov. 2007).
Canadian Centre for Activity and Aging (CCAA). Home Page.

<www.uwo.ca/actage/> (3 Mar. 2008).
Canadian Centre for Ethics in Sport (CCES). Home Page. <www.cces.ca> (19 Sept. 2007).
---. 2002 Canadian Public Opinion Survey on Youth and Sport: Final Report. Ottawa, ON:
CCES, July 2002. Available online at <www.cces.ca/pdfs/CCES-RPT-2002Survey-
E.pdf>.
Canadian Centre on Substance Abuse (CCSA). Home Page.

<www.ccsa.ca/ccsa/> (3 Mar. 2008).
_____________________________________________________________________________
Bibliography 421
---. Substance Abuse in Canada: Youth in Focus. Ottawa, ON: CCSA, September 2007.
Available online at
<www.ccsa.ca/CCSA/EN/Research/Substance_Abuse_in_Canada/> (15 Jan. 2008).
Canadian Fitness and Lifestyle Research Institute (CFLRI). “Barriers to Physical

Activity.” Progress in Prevention 4 (June 1996): 1–10. Available on line at
<www.cflri.ca/eng/progress_in_prevention/index.php>.
---. Home Page. 2005. <www.cflri.ca/eng/index.php> (18 Sept. 2007).
Canadian Mental Health Association. Home Page. <www.cmha.ca/bins/> (19 Sept. 2007).
---. Mental Health and High School. <www.cmha.ca/highschool/> (17 Dec. 2007).
---. “Resources.” Work-Life Balance: It’s a Matter of Time.

<www.manitoba.cmha.ca/bins/content_page.asp?cid=4-42&lang=1> (19 Dec. 2007).
Canadian Olympic Committee (COC). Frequently Asked Questions.

<www.olympic.ca/EN/faq.shtml> (7 Jan. 2008).
Canadian Psychiatric Association. “Anxiety, Depression and Manic Depression.” Public

Education Materials. 2006. <http://publications.cpa-apc.org/browse/documents/17>
(17 Dec. 2007).
---. Home Page. <www.cpa-apc.org/> (19 Sept. 2007).
Canadian Senior Games Association. Home Page.

<www.canada55plusgames.com/> (19 Sept. 2007).
Canadian Sport Centres. Canadian Sport for Life: Long-Term Athlete Development Resource
Paper. Vancouver, BC: Canadian Sport Centres, 2005. Available on the Long-Term
Athlete Development (LTAD) website at
<www.ltad.ca/Content/Resources%20and%20Downloads/Downloads.asp>.
Cancer Prevention Research Centre. Transtheoretical Model.

<www.uri.edu/research/cprc/transtheoretical.htm> (18 Sept. 2007).
Capital Health. Activity Intensity Classification. Your Health.

<www.capitalhealth.ca/EspeciallyFor/WeightWise/Activity_Intensity_Classificatio
ns.htm> (18 Sept. 2007).
CBC Archives. “Lacrosse: A History of Canada’s Game.” Sport.

<http://archives.cbc.ca/IDD-1-41-824/sports/lacrosse/> (20 Dec. 2007).
Cederberg, Michelle. “Barriers to Physical Activity Q.” Live Out Loud!

<http://liveoutloud.ca/pdf/BarriersQ.pdf> (9 Sept. 2007).
_____________________________________________________________________________
Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. “Barriers to Physical Activity Quiz.” Physical
Activity for Everyone: Overcoming Barriers to Physical Activity.
<www.cdc.gov/nccdphp/dnpa/physical/life/barriers_quiz.pdf> (9 Sept. 2007).
---. Guidelines for School and Community Programs to Promote Lifelong Physical Activity
Among Young People. Mar. 1997. <www.cdc.gov/nccdphp/dash/physact.htm>
(31 May 2000).
---. “Overcoming Barriers to Physical Activity.” Physical Activity for Everyone. 22 May 2007.
<www.cdc.gov/nccdphp/dnpa/physical/life/overcome.htm> (9 Sept. 2007).
Character Counts. Home Page. <http://charactercounts.org/> (19 Sept. 2007).
College of Education and Human Ecology, The Ohio State University. “Muscle
Dysmorphia.” Body Image and Health Task Force (BIHTF).
<http://hec.osu.edu/bitf/muscle_dysmorphia.htm> (14 Dec. 2007).
Columbia St. Mary’s MedicalMoment.org. “Gender Differences in Behavioral Responses

to Stress: ‘Fight or Flight’ vs. ‘Tend and Befriend.’” 2003.
<www.medicalmoment.org/_content/healthupdates/dec03/187868.asp>
(12 Dec. 2007).
Communities and Schools Promoting Health. Home Page.

<www.safehealthyschools.org/> (19 Sept. 2007).
Dairy Council of California. “Physical Activity Journal.” Meals Matter: Eating for Health—
Health Topics. 2005.
<www.mealsmatter.org/EatingForHealth/Topics/article.aspx?articleId=355>
(9 Sept. 2007).
Deci, Edward L., and Richard M. Ryan. “Exercise Self-Regulation Questionnaires.” Self-
Determination Theory: An Approach to Human Motivation and Personality—The Self-
Regulation Questionnaires. 2004. Psychology Department, University of Rochester.
<www.psych.rochester.edu/SDT/measures/selfreg_exer.html> (9 Sept. 2007).
Discovery Health. Home Page. <http://health.discovery.com/> (19 Sept. 2007).
Discovery Health. “Mental Health Assessments.” Mental Health. 2007.

<http://health.discovery.com/centers/mental/assessments.html> (19 Dec. 2007).
Dove Campaign for Real Beauty. “Dove Self-Esteem Film Gallery.” The Dove Self-
Esteem Fund. 2007. <www.campaignforrealbeauty.ca/dsef07/t5.aspx?id=7985>.
(14 Dec. 2007).
---. The Dove Self-Esteem Fund. 2007. <www.campaignforrealbeauty.ca/dsef/>

(14 Dec. 2007).
_____________________________________________________________________________
Bibliography 423
---. “Ideas to Take Action for Educators.” The Dove Self-Esteem Fund.
<http://www.campaignforrealbeauty.ca/dsef07/t4.aspx?id=8408> (14 Dec. 2007).
Doyle, J. Andrew. “Exercise Adherence.” The Exercise and Physical Fitness Page. 1999.
<http://www2.gsu.edu/~wwwfit/adherence.html> (9 Sept. 2007).
Drug Infonet. Home Page. 1996–2005. <www.druginfonet.com/> (3 Mar. 2008).
Finding Optimism: Health in Response to Mental Health. “Things to Say to Someone with
Depression.” Healthy Mind. <www.findingoptimism.com/healthy-mind/ways-to-
build-up-someone-with-depression/> (19 Dec. 2007).
Forbes.com. Home Page. <www.forbes.com/> (19 Sept. 2007).
Forbes.com. Video Network. <www.forbes.com/video/> (19 Sept. 2007).
Free Online Health. Free Exercises. <www.free-online-health.com/exercises.htm>

(20 Feb. 2008).
---. Home Page. <www.free-online-health.com/> (19 Sept. 2007).
Gannett Health Services, Cornell University. “The Eating and Body Image Continuum.”
Nutrition and Eating Problems. 2004.
<www.gannett.cornell.edu/top10Topics/nutrition-eating/continuum.html>
(14 Dec. 2007).
---. “The Eating Issues and Body Image Continuum.” Nutrition and Eating Problems. 2004.
<www.gannett.cornell.edu/downloads/CHEP/Continuum.pdf> (14 Dec. 2007).
George, Sheena, Art Dyer, and Phyllis Leven. An Overview of Risk and Protective Factors:
The Alberta Youth Experience Survey 2002. Edmonton, AB: Alberta Alcohol and Drug
Abuse Commission (AADAC), 2003. Available online at
<www.aadac.com/documents/TAYES_overview.pdf>.
Georgia State University. The Exercise and Physical Fitness Page. 29 Apr. 1999.
<http://www2.gsu.edu/~wwwfit/> (18 Sept. 2007).
Goodcharacter.com. Character and Sports. <www.goodcharacter.com/Sports.html>

(8 Jan. 2008).
---. Character Education: Free Resources, Materials, Lesson Plans.

<www.goodcharacter.com/index.html> (8 Jan. 2008).
Head Injury Hotline. “Wellness Inventory.” Brain Injury Resource Center. 1998.
<http://www.headinjury.com/wellness.html> (4 Dec. 2007).
_____________________________________________________________________________
Health Quality Council of Alberta (HQCA). Health Report to Albertans. Calgary, AB:
HQCA, January 2007. Available online at
<www.hqca.ca/phpBB2/files/hqca_health_report_2007_202.pdf>.
HealthyOntario.com. Drugs. <www.healthyontario.com/Drugs.aspx> (11 Jan. 2008).
Helpguide.org. “Mental and Emotional Health.” Mental Health.

<www.helpguide.org/mental/mental_emotional_health.htm> (12 Sept. 2007).
Heredia, Christopher. “Sam’s Story: Walnut Creek Teen’s Road from Meth.” San Francisco
Chronicle 6 May 2003: A–1. Available on the SFGate.com website at
<www.sfgate.com/cgi-bin/article.cgi?file=/c/a/2003/05/06/MN202176.DTL>
(13 Nov. 2007).
International Council on Active Aging (ICAA). Home Page.

<www.icaa.cc/> (19 Sept. 2007).
International Olympic Committee (IOC). “The Ancient Olympic Games.” Olympic Games.
<www.olympic.org/uk/games/ancient/> (20 Dec. 2007).
---. “Olympians.” Athletes. <www.olympic.org/uk/athletes/olympians/index_uk.asp>

(7 Jan. 2008).
---. Olympic Games. Home Page. <www.olympic.org/> (7 Jan. 2008).
---. “Volleyball.” Sports.

<www.olympic.org/uk/sports/programme/index_uk.asp?SportCode=VB>
(20 Dec. 2007).
International Paralympic Committee (IPC). Paralympic Games.

<www.paralympic.org/release/Main_Sections_Menu/Paralympic_Games/>
(3 Jan. 2008).
Jaffe, Jaelline, and Robert Segal. “Mental and Emotional Health.” Helpguide.org. 2007.
<www.helpguide.org/mental/mental_emotional_health.htm> (12 Sept. 2007).
Jose, Colin. “History of Soccer in Canada.” History. Canadian Soccer Association (CSA).
<www.canadasoccer.com/eng/history/> (20 Dec. 2007).
Khan, Adam. “Exercise.” YouMe Works. <www.youmeworks.com/exercise.html>

(17 Dec. 2007).
Long-Term Athlete Development (LTAD). Home Page. <www.ltad.ca/> (3 Mar. 2008).
Manitoba Addictions Awareness Week (MAAW). Home Page.

<www.afm.mb.ca/maaw/> (3 Mar. 2008).
_____________________________________________________________________________
Bibliography 425
Manitoba Farm and Rural Stress Line. “Links and Resources.” Rural Youth Corner. 2005.
<www.ruralstress.ca/youth/links.html> (29 Jan. 2008).
Manitoba High Schools Athletic Association (MHSAA). “Human Rights Appeal.” News.
Sept. 2006. <http://www.mhsaa.mb.ca/pages/news/06_07/sep22a.php>
(19 Nov. 2007).
Manitoba Physical Education Teachers Association (MPETA). Home Page.

<www.mpeta.ca/> (19 Sept. 2007).
---. MPETA Resources to Support the Grades 11 and 12 Curriculum.

<www.mpeta.ca/resources.html> (19 Feb. 2008).
Markland, David. “The Behavioural Regulation in Exercise Questionnaire—The Theory.”

Exercise Motivation Measurement. 2007.
<www.bangor.ac.uk/~pes004/exercise_motivation/breq/theory.htm>
(9 Sept. 2007).
---. Exercise Motivation Measurement. 13 Sept. 2007.

<www.bangor.ac.uk/~pes004/exercise_motivation/scales.htm > (18 Sept. 2007).
Mayo Clinic. Depression.

<www.mayoclinic.com/health/depression/DS00175/DSECTION=2> (17 Dec. 2007).
---. “Depression and Anxiety: Exercise Eases Symptoms.” Depression.

<www.mayoclinic.com/health/depression-and-exercise/MH00043> (18 Dec. 2007).
---. “Exercise: 7 Benefits of Regular Physical Activity.” Fitness. 26 July 2007.

<www.mayoclinic.com/health/exercise/HQ01676> (18 Sept. 2007).
Media Awareness Network. Home Page. <www.media-awareness.ca> (18 Sept. 2007).
Medline Plus. Drugs, Supplements, and Herbal Information.

<www.nlm.nih.gov/medlineplus/druginformation.html> (3 Mar. 2008).
Mental Health Canada. Diseases and Disorders.

<www.mentalhealthcanada.com/ConditionsandDisorders.asp?lang=e>
(19 Dec. 2007).
Mental Health Education Resource Centre (MHERC) Manitoba. Mental Health

Disorders and Issues. Canadian Mental Health Association—Manitoba Division.
2007. <www.mherc.mb.ca/mentalIllness.html> (19 Dec. 2007).
Mental Health First Aid (MHFA). About Mental Health First Aid Canada.
<www.mentalhealthfirstaid.ca/> (19 Sept. 2007).
---. Home Page. <www.mentalhealthfirstaid.ca/> (3 Mar. 2008).
_____________________________________________________________________________
mindyourmind.ca. Home Page. <www.mindyourmind.ca> (3 Mar. 2008).
MyFit.ca. Home Page. <www.myfit.ca/> (19 Sept. 2007).
---. “Weight Training/Lifting Exercises, Exercise Pictures, Workout Exercises.” Exercises.

<www.myfit.ca/exercisedatabase/exercise.asp> (20 Feb. 2008).

<www.nationaleatingdisorders.org/p.asp?WebPage_ID=294> (13 Dec. 2007).
National Institute of Mental Health. “The Numbers Count: Mental Disorders in

America.” Health and Outreach. <www.nimh.nih.gov/health/publications/the-
numbers-count-mental-disorders-in-america.shtml> (19 Dec. 2007).
National Organization for Women. Home Page. <www.now.org/> (19 Sept. 2007).
NetFit. Health and Fitness Main Menu. <www.netfit.co.uk/menu.htm> (19 Sept. 2007).
---. Training Programs. <www.netfit.co.uk/wkmen.htm> (20 Feb. 2008).
---. “Warm-up Stretches.” Fitness: Stretching.

<www.netfit.co.uk/fitness/stretching/warm-up-stretches.htm> (9 Sept. 2007).
O’Connor, Betsy. A Guide for Teens: Does Your Friend Have an Alcohol or Other Drug Problem?
Boston, MA: Center for Health Communication, Harvard School of Public Health,
1994. Available online at <http://ncadi.samhsa.gov/govpubs/phd688/>.
Patton, David, Terri-Lynn Mackay, and Brian Broszeit. Alcohol and Other Drug Use in
Manitoba Students. Winnipeg, MB: Addictions Foundation of Manitoba, May
2005. Available online at <www.afm.mb.ca/pdf/>.
Performance Workouts. Exercise Guides. 2005.

<www.performanceworkouts.com/exercise.shtml> (20 Feb. 2008).
---. Home Page. <www.performanceworkouts.com/> (19 Sept. 2007).
PreventDisease.com. Home Page. <http://preventdisease.com/> (19 Sept. 2007).
---. Strength Conditioning/Weight Training Exercise Chart.

<http://preventdisease.com/fitness/Strength_Exercises.html> (20 Feb. 2008).
Quinn, Elizabeth. “Getting Started and Sticking with Exercise.” Sports Medicine.
About.com. 14 Jul. 2004.
<http://sportsmedicine.about.com/od/tipsandtricks/a/gettingstarted.htm>
(30 Jan. 2008).
Randolfi, Ernesto A. “Exercise as a Stress Management Modality.” Optimal Health

Concepts.
<www.OptimalHealthConcepts.com/ExerciseStress.html> (12 Dec. 2007).
_____________________________________________________________________________
Bibliography 427
Repich, Deanne. “Exercise Your Anxiety Away!” Health Articles. 2007.
<www.healthandfitnessadvices.com/articles/health/exercise-your-anxiety-
away.html> (17 Dec. 2007).
Resiliency Canada. “Understanding Resiliency.”

<www.resiliencycanada.ca/index.php?option=com_content&task=view&id=17&Ite
mid=37> (12 Dec. 2007).
Running for Fitness. “FAQ: VO2 max.” FAQs. May 2006.

<www.runningforfitness.org/faq/vo2.php> (18 Sept. 2007).
RxList Inc.: The Internet Drug Index. Home Page.

<www.rxlist.com/script/main/hp.asp> (3 Mar. 2008).
Safe Healthy Schools. “Mental Health and Schools.” Communities and Schools
Promoting Health.
<www.safehealthyschools.org/mental_health/mental_health.htm>
(19 Dec. 2007).
Sharma, Renuka. “New Survey Shows High School Sports Filled with Cheating, Improper
Gamesmanship and Confusion about Sportsmanship.” Josephson Institute of Ethics,
CHARACTER COUNTS! 13 Sept. 2004
<www.charactercounts.org/sports/survey2004/> (13 Sept. 2007).
Sheena’s Place. “Body Image.” Education and Outreach.

<www.sheenasplace.org/index.php?page=body_image> (18 Dec. 2007).
SparkPeople Inc. “Fire: Habit Forming Chart.” SparkPeople Fuel for Improvement System.
<http://sparkpeople.com/system/habit_forming_chart.asp> (9 Sept. 2007).
SparkTeens. <www.sparkteens.com> (9 Sept. 2007).
Special Olympics. Home Page. <www.specialolympics.org/> (19 Sept. 2007).
Special Olympics Canada. Home Page. <www.specialolympics.ca/> (19 Sept. 2007).
---. “The Birth of Special Olympics in Canada.” About Us: History.

<www.specialolympics.ca/en/default.aspx?tabid=10000013> (8 Jan. 2008).
Sport and Technology. Home Page. <www.sportandtechnology.com> (3 Mar. 2008).
Stressfocus.com. “Discover the Basics of Stress.” 2007.

<www.stressfocus.com/stress_focus_article/stress-and-its-causes.htm>
(12 Dec. 2007).
Title IX. Home Page. <www.titleix.info/> (3 Mar. 2008).
_____________________________________________________________________________
U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. National Institute on Drug Abuse
(NIDA). “Club Drugs.” NIDA: InfoFacts. Bethesda, MD: NIDA, May 2006.
Available online at <www.drugabuse.gov/Infofacts/clubdrugs.html>.
---. NIDA InfoFacts: Prescription Pain and Other Medications. Bethesda, MD: NIDA, June
2006. Available online at <www.drugabuse.gov/Infofacts/Painmed.html>.
U.S. Department of Labor. Office of the Assistant Secretary for Administration and
Management. Title IX, Education Amendments of 1972.
<www.dol.gov/oasam/regs/statutes/titleix.htm> (3 Jan. 2008).
U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). Center for Drug Evaluation and Research
(CDER). Office of Nonprescription Products. 7 June 2006.
<www.fda.gov/CDER/Offices/OTC/>. (11 Jan. 2008).
Vaughan, Garth. “Nova Scotian and Canadian Hockey History.” Birthplace of Hockey. 2001.
<www.birthplaceofhockey.com/> (20 Dec. 2007).
Wordsmith.org. Internet Anagram Server. <www.wordsmith.org/anagram/> (3 Mar. 2008).
Zamora, Dulce. “13 Health Habits to Improve Your Life.” WebMD—Features Related to
Health and Balance. 2004. <www.webmd.com/balance/features/13-healthy-habits-
to-improve-your-life> (11 Dec. 2007).
_____________________________________________________________________________
Bibliography 429
Printed in Canada
Imprimé au Canada

Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Grade 11

Active Healthy Lifestyles

Manitoba Physical Education/Health Education

613.071 Grade 11 active healthy lifestyles : Manitoba

Includes bibliographical references.

Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth

Ce document est disponible en français.

Overview of Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles 7

Writer Nick Dyck Physical Education and Health Consultant

Assistant Professor University of Manitoba

Policy Analyst Manitoba Health and Healthy Living

Prevention and Addictions Foundation of Manitoba

Schools Physical Activity (MPETA)

Manitoba Grades Winnipeg School Division

Thomson Portage la Prairie School Division

Pembina Trails School Division

Borderland School Division

Rolling River School Division

Division scolaire franco-manitobaine

Louis Riel School Division

Steering Committee Terry Bobychuk Senior Years Representative

Wendy Cull Middle Years Representative

Nick Dyck Manitoba Physical Education Supervisors’

Ron Hildebrand Manitoba Association of School Superintendents

Dwight Kearns Early Years Representative

Peter Kotyk Manitoba Association of School Trustees (MAST)

Khalid Mahmood Manitoba Association of Parent Councils (MAPC)

Pat McCarthy-Briggs Agencies for School Health (ASH)

Ross Metcalfe Manitoba Association of School Superintendents

Laura Morrison Manitoba Healthy Schools

Irene Nordheim Council of School Leaders (COSL)

Jacki Nylen Manitoba Physical Education Teachers Association

Consultant Bureau de l’éducation française Division

Administrative Assistant Instruction, Curriculum and Assessment Branch

Publications Editor Educational Resources Branch

Desktop Publisher Educational Resources Branch

Assistant Deputy Minister Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth

Project Co-leader/ Instruction, Curriculum and Assessment Branch

Consultant Bureau de l’éducation française Division

Desktop Publisher Educational Resources Branch

Desktop Publisher Educational Resources Branch

Project Co-leader/ Instruction, Curriculum and Assessment Branch

The print version of Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles is accompanied by a CD-ROM,

Resources Used in Curriculum Document

In April 2007 Manitoba Education, Citizenship and Youth released Implementation of

Kindergarten to Senior 4 Physical Education/ Health Education: Manitoba Curriculum

Document Content and Organization

Grade 11 Active Healthy Lifestyles contains the following sections:

5888 Appendices: The following appendices provide additional information and

NOTE ABOUT COPYRIGHT

Planning for Implementation

Specific Learning Outcomes

Planning for Instruction

Assessment and Reporting

Key Characteristics from the Framework Reinforced in Grade 11

As highlighted in the Framework,

Policy for Implementing Grades 11 and 12 Physical Education/Health

Physical education/health education (PE/HE) is a compulsory subject area from Grades 9

Grades 11 and 12 students will be graded for completion of courses using